French Grammar - Forgotten Books
392
-
Upload
khangminh22 -
Category
Documents
-
view
1 -
download
0
Transcript of French Grammar - Forgotten Books
H O S E
N E W P R A C TIC A L M E T H O DI'Sfj Y
]F OR LEARNING TH E
FRENCH LANGUAGE
A. P. HU G U ENET ,
Ojficier d'Académie
, Universi té de F ranceMemb're de la Société Nationale des Professeurs de F rangais en Angletem
Ins tru ctor R oyal Naval C ollege , Gq'eenwich ;Examiner at Queen
's C ollege , London, ( to.
Occasional Examiner to H er Service; C ommissioners.l
C
LU
NEW AND REVISED EDITION.
301123011
H IR SC HFE LD BROTH ER S
BR EAMS BUILD ING S, F ET’I‘E R L ANE ,
W
1 !
Formation ofthe plural ofnouns
Indefinite article
Words which are the same or nearly the same in English
and French
The adjective
Qualifying adjectives—F ormation ofthe feminineF ormation ofthe plural
Degrees ofcomparisonPlace ofadjectivesDeterminative adje ctives—C ardinalnumeral adjectivesOrdinal numeral adje ctives
Demonstrative adjectivesPossessive adjectivesIndefinite adjectivesThe pronoun.
—Personal pronounsD emonstrative pronouns
Possessive pronouns
R elative and interrogative pronouns
Indefinite pronouns
Verbs
Adverbs—Adverbs ofmanner
Adverbs oftimeAdverbs ofplaceAdverbs oforderAdverbs ofquantityAdverbs ofcomparisonAdverbs ofaffirmation, negation and doubt
Adverbs ofinterrogationPrepositions
C onjunctionsG overnment ofconjunctionsInterjectionsR emarks on verbs
Words with aspirated it
. Q .
III
TWENTY Du noe unsA mee ting, unc rcncontre
About the way, or road, an mjet da chemm
Visit, visits
R ailway journey, voyage en chem/in defera n
Sea journey, traverse?At a town, dam unc ville
L e tting apartments, location d’appartcments
With a servant, avec an dom atique
Meals, repas
To write a letter, pour e’
cmh-e une Zettre
At amoney- changers, elm 1m changeur
Buying, achuts
At table , a table
«With a doctor,avec un doctewr
Paris Museums,Musées de Paris
The Stre e ts ofParis, les w as de Paris
H ow to progre ss in French, comment.
faire des progrés en
Syntax
C onstruction ofaffirmat h e scumm e s
Int errogative sentences
Negat ive sentences
Syntax ofthe articleSyntax ofthe noun .
—Rules how to ascertain the gender ofFrench nouns by their signifi cation
Rules to ascertain the gender
"
ofFrench nouns by their
G ender ofseveral nounsNouns which are ofdifferent gender according to their
Feminine ofsome nounsR emarks on the number ofnouns
Plural ofcompound nouns
IV
Syntax ofthe qualifying adjective .—Agreement of
adjec
tives with nouns orpronouns
Place ofadjectivesAdjectives ofdimensionsSyntax ofthe determinative adjectives. Possessive ad
jectives
Indefinite adjectivesSyntax ofthe pronoun .
—Personal pronouns
Demonstrative pronouns
Indefinite pronouns
Syntax ofthe verb—Subje ct ofthe verb
C omplements ofthe verbU se ofthe auxiliary verbs
U se ofthe tenses and moods
Syntax ofthe participles.—Present participle
0 0 0 I O O 0 0 . 9 0 . 0 0 .
Instructions, how to corres 0nd in French with the aid ofHossrnm ’
s C OM ei'cial C orrespondent 32 1—336
IN D E X .
Acute accent
Adjectives (qualifying)Adjectives (place of)Adjectives (complements ofjAffirmation, negation and doubt (adverbs ofAffirmative sentences (construction ofAgreem ent ofadje ctives with nouns or pronouns
Agre ement ofparticiplesApostrophe
Article (definite)
(indefinite )
(syntax ofthe)
Au, d la, d l’
, awc, to the
Aucun, 1ml
Auxiliary verbs (use of)
0
C e, cet, cette, ces, this, that, these , those 64, 80, 84
Ce, ceci, celwi, celwi- ci, celwé
—la, cease- ct,ceuw Id
, this
that , these , those
Cheque, every, each
VI
C hacun, every one
C edilla
C ircumflex accent
C ollective nouns
C omparison (adverbs of) - 1 .
(degre e s of)C ompound vowe ls (pronunciation of)
nouns (plural of)C omplements ofthe verbC onjunctionsC onjunctive personal pronounsC onversations
(and on the 3rd page ofeach le sson)
D emonstrative adjectives
pronouns
Dialogues (twenty on subjects ofeverydayDiaeresis
Dim ensions (adjectives of)Diphthongs (pronunciation of)Disjunctive personal pronounsD ent, ofwhom, ofwhichDu, de la, de l
’
, des, ofthe
E lle, elles, she , they 72
En, ofhim,ofher
,ofit, ofthem, in,from thence
Esme one, is it that 174
Em ,they, them 72
Exercises 2 1, 2 5, 2 9
(and on the 2nd pageofeachlesson)
F eminine ofadjectivesFeminine ofsome nouns
Q 0 .
G enders
(how to ascertain by the signification)(how to ascertain by the endings)
G e neral collective nouns
G rave accent
It,els
,he
, they
Imperfect , past definit e , past indefinite (useIndefinite adjectives
adje ctives (syntax of)pronouns
pronouns (syntax of)InterjectionsInterrogatw : (adverbs of)Int errogative pronouns
sentence s
L e,la,l’
,les, the
L e, la, ,l’les
,him ,
her, it, them
L eur, leurs, their
Lui, leur, he , to him ,to her, to them
L e mien, le lien, le sien, mine , thine , his, hers,its
L e pewde, the few,the want of
Linking ofwordsLiquid sounds (pronunciation of)L
’1m ,
l’autre, l
’wn l
’autre
,l’un e t l
’autre, l
’un on l
’aut're
,
ml Z’un, m
'
l’autre, the one , the other each o ther
,
both, either, neither96
,2 70
VI I I
Manner (adverbs of)Me
, me , to me
Méme, same , even, selfMoi, I, me
Mon,ma, mes, my
Moods (use of)
N
Nasal sounds (pronunciation of)Ne
,m pas, non, not , no
Negative sentences
Ni, neither, nor
Nous, we , us
Nouns (plural of)(syntax of)(genders ofseveral)(remarks on the number ofseveral)
Numeral adjectives (cardinal)(ordinal)
Numbers
On, one , we , they, people
Order (adverbs of)014, or
Participle (syntax ofthe)Partitive collective nouns
Past participles (agreement of)Period
Personal pronouns
(syntax of)Personne, nobody
Place (adverbs of)
IX
Possessive adj ectives
(syntax of)pronouns
Plural ofnounsofadje ctives
Plusieurs, several
Prepositions
Pronunciation (exceptions to therules of)Propositions
Punctuation
Qualifying adje ctives
(syntax of)Quantity (adverbs of) h .
Quel, which, What . 1 .
Quelconque , whatever
Quiconque, whoever
Quelque , som e,any
Quelqu’cm
, som ebody, anybodyQuestions on grammar
(and on the 3rd page ofeachlesson)Qui, que, quoi, who, whom , what
Qui est- ca qui, gut est- cc que , aka, who, whom
R eading exercises2 3, 2 7, 31
(and on the 4th pag e ofeach lo 5011 )R elative pronouns
R ien,nothing, anything
Se, mi, himself, he rself, themselves, one ’s self
Son eu, ses, leur, leurs, his, her, its, the ir
Spee ch (parts of)
Subject ofthe verbSyllables (division of) . fi , N .
Syntax
Te,the e , to thee
Tenses (use of)Tot
,thou, the e . v .
Time (adverbs of)Tout, all , every, whole , quite 68, 96,
Tu, thou w . m
Un,am , a, an, one
Ve rbs (the whole ofpart 14, se e special index)
(remarks on)
(syntax of) . z .
Vocabularies
(and on the 2 nd
.
page ofeach lesson)Vous
, you
Vowels (pronunciationof) m
Words which are the same or nearly theEnglish and French
Y, to it , them o‘
o‘ 0 1 d a o ” 0 G 0 0 . w e . 2 62
X l'
Index t o t h e P ie c e s ofP ro s e and Po e try t o befound in t h is vo lum e .
P R O S E .
Les jardins de Babylons, R ollinH istoire d
’une servants (E xtrait de La/marti/ne
Immortalité de l’ame , Jean Jacques RousseauC ombat de Télémaque, F e
‘rm'lon
E tudes de la nature (Extrait des), Bernardin deLa conscience , Chateaubriand
L e ttre ase fille,Madame de Se’vigne
’
Le ttre aMadame Dupuy, Voltaire
Adieux de F ontainebleau, Napoleon I.
D eux pensées de Pas cal
U h réveille -matin ,Xavier de Maistre
L es R omains conquérants, Montesquieu
C omment ilfaut causer, L a BruyerePrononciation de l
’U ,Moli ere
C onseils sur l’art d
’écrire , Voltaire
Pour uoi l’homme nait plus faible que les animaux,
aintine
La bosse de l’art militaire , Toepfer
L’incendie de St . Sylvain, Jules Samdeau
PO E S IE S
L’huitre et l es plaideurs, Boileau
La laitiere et le pot eu Iait, La F ontaine
Le singe qui montre la Ianterne magique , F lorian
La jeune captive , Andre C’henier
D erniers moments d’un jeune poete , Gilbert
A une fleur, Alfred de Mussel
Lafeuille , ArnaultImage de la vie , Madame Taslu
C hoeur d’Athalie , R acine pere
Preuves de l’existence de D ieu, R acinefi ls
TH E F R ENC H ALPHABET.
The French Alphabe t consists of2 6 le tte rs
J J zhoe
K k kah
L l e ll
M m amm
N n sun
0 0 oh
1
d10 reh
l a f)R g err
(
NOTE - The let ters k and w are very seldom used,and only occur
in words offoreign origin .
The simple Vowels are a, e, i, o, u and y and the remain
1ng le tters are C onsonants.
A ccent s and S ig ns .
Accents in French are signs, placed over a vow el to give it
a diffe rent sound from its ordinary pronunciation, some times
merely to indicate the difference be twe en two words ofthe same
spe lling but different in the ir m eanings.
The re are three accents
the acute which can only be applied to e : e’
.
the grave which can be applied to a,e,u : d
,e,it.
the circumflex ( A ) which can be applied to all the vowels
a,e,i,o,u : d
,e,i, an
The cedilla is a sign placed under 0 (9) before a, o, u, toindicate that this consonant must be pronounced like 3.
The diaeresis is placed over e and i e , if, to indicate thatthese vowels must be pronounced separatelyfrom a precedingvowe l, and over e (mute ) to indicat e that the it which precedes
it must be pronounced : hair, aigue‘
.
The apostr0phe is used to indicate the elision ofthevowel e
,and also that ofa in the article la before a vowel
,and of
the i ofsi before it or ils l’
,s’il.
The hyphen is used to connect words.
It is quite impossible t o indicate the corre ct pronunciation ofu by any spelling .
6
Pronunciat ion ofth e V ow els .
NOTB.—In pronouncing a French word, the emp
hasis or stress is always upon the
last syllable pronounced, but the emphasis is very slig
ht . The consonants
in the examples are pronounced as in E nglish . In French , consonant s at
t he end ofwords are not sounded , except l, r, Wt h are generally pro
nounced.
a sounds like a in at as in,la,fatal, papa, bal, mal
(unaccented) at the end ofa syllable sounds like e in her;
as in, la,me, te, cela,
‘
repas, arsenal
e (unaccented) at the end ofa word ofmore than one syllable is
always silent as in,cabale , rame, malade, lasse, salade, avare
(acute accent) sounds almost like ey in abbey as in,metal
,serenade, arme
’
e,marefe
e (unaccented) sounds like ofin the end syllables ed, ez, and in
er, ifthe final consonant is mute as in ,
pied, assez, nez , armer, parler
(grave accent) sounds like e in where as in ,metre, reméde,frére, é léve, carene, uéfle
e (unaccented) sounds like e in a syllable t erminated by one or
more consonants as in ,esclcwe,fer, pre‘fet, tablette, belle
(circumflex accent) sounds like ay in hay as in,téte,fréle,fenetre, réve, creme
i y sound like the English e in equal as in,
fl,mine, victime, fle
’
trlr,myrle
o sounds like the o in cross as in ,
corset, mol, col, botte, dormir, donner
11 having no equivalent in En lish must be heardfrom the mast er. In order to get at t i e sound pronounce the ea in been
with rounded lips as in whistling as in,bulbe, eumul,futur, butte, brutal, rupture
u is silent after q and between g e and g 12 (not before 6 or a)in
, quart, qui, gue'
rir, guide
NOTE : All vowels have a short sound, except in the following
princi al cases,when the sound becomes long1 . ifthey ave the circumflex accent as in,
pale , téte, file, titer, flute2 . iffollowed by rr, a final 8 or se
, a final r or re as in ,barre, terre, ses, dos, base, brise, rose, muse , fiuir, avare,frére,lire, pore, pure
3. iffollowed by an e mute as in, ar'nw
'
e,m
'
e, rue
Q
,
C“) viz . : Division ofsyllables on page 18.
7
Re ading ofW ords with Vow e ls .
Malade rupture pé le-méle alit é écum e
ill rupture pell-mell early laid up foamsalade ane pelure sérénade m orbide élevesalad ass peel serenade morbid pupil
ballade café verre marm elade lune t te m oral e perleballad cSll
‘
ee glass marmalade eye-
glass morals pearl
si fortune prune urbanité livre carnaval futur i]if fortune plum urbanity book carnival future he
regard fibre régal aléne universe] rude canallook fibre feast awl universal rude canal
ridicule calamité ba/ nav ire crepe m ortalitéridicule
“
calamity ball ship crape mortality
rival maritim e maturit é catarac te colone l e llerival marit ime maturity cataract colone l she
repete col amical abbé minéral ma] divinit é merepeats collar amicable abbot m ineral evil divinity me
il j e tt e pale que doc ilité n‘
efl e miracle dos t e rre
he throws pale that docility medlar miracle back earth‘
am ira/ redevenir mol vulgarit é balustrade gue rreadmiral t o become again soft vulgarity balustrade
colosse quat re ut ilit é pat e rne l nu/ relatifor
colossus fofir utility paternal null relative gold
fermer guinée idole répét é réalit é carpe fluteto shut guinea idol repeat ed reality carp flute
mercure pied forme avenir véritable frélemercury foot form future veritable slender
ver lune ifrare té arm e tabernacle dine r vérit éworm moon yew rarity arm tabernacle dinner truth
avarice vertical crépuscule fanatisme
avarice vertical twilight fanat icism
barre pyramide table morose plum e calme
bar pyramid table morose feather calm
dure t é t o lie tr6ne é
hardness thou readest throne
porosité pate rapacité
porosity paste rapacity
urne fi/ amabilité tulle canapé énormitéurn thread amiabil ity net couch enormity
As final consonants are seldom pronounced, we have print ed in Italics thosewhich must be sounded.
m L1 l‘
wall
éternité pur ame
eternity pure soul
rhume
cough
manifestema nife sto
i/ va
he goes
asse z
enough
futilitéfutility
verdure
verdure
8
C ompound Vowels .
ai are pronounced like at in
c lair, plaine , gai, laine ,
ne , remc
eau are pronounc edlike 0 in no te
aube , aurore , beau, cadeau, peau, plate au, veau
( 3 11 are pronounced somewhat like u in but
D ieu, peuple , fleur,vaeu, sceur, oeuvre
ls pronounced like 00 in wood
goutte , poule , route,boule louve , sou fou
D iphthongs .
ay is pronounced likethe F rench ai- z
’
balayer, e ssayer, ayant, pays, payer
oi is pronounced like the two E nglish int e rj e c tions oh and
ab j oined tog e the r:roi, miroir, bo is, boire
ui is pronounced by g iving to the twovow e ls the irnat ural
sound, but pronouncing them as a single syllable :
lui, puis,fuire , nuire , nuit , cultoy , uy are pronounced like the F rench oi- z
’
and ui- i
foyer, royal, écuye r,fuyard
Pronunciation ofth e nasal sounds .
A NASAL SOUNDP‘
) arises when a simple or compound
vow e l isfollow ed bym orn but no nasal sound is produc ed
ifthe m or u isfollow ed by anothe rvow e l oranothe rm orn.
aim ,ain ,
e in,im
,in
, ym soundnearly like an inpung :
faim, main, ce indre , imperia l, m'
a ,nymphe
am , an ,em
,en
"
sound nearly like aun in aunt
amputer, clans, embe llir, en,enfant
om ,on sound som e what like on in long
plomb, bonbon,fond, gargon,non
um ,11 11 sound somewhat like an in lung
humble , parfum, brun, ar, lunch?
The nasal sound en in the end syllable s z'
en, yen has
the sound ofthe nasal sound az'
n
bien,rien
,citoyen, moyen
cm is pronounced like o - az’
u
be soiu, coin,fo in,joz'
ndre
(“i Similar nasal sounds arefound in t he Eng lish words : aunt, long , pang , lwng .
in order to ge t the pronunciation ofthe French nasal so unds, an ,on
, at» , e mare pronounced nearly as in the above words but without sounding th e y.
1 0
Pronunc iat ion ofth e liqu id sounds .
11 and ill ifpre ceded by a simple or compound vowel, have a
liquid sound and are pronounced likecc-
y in the m iddle and
ee at the end ofwords the vowels preceding il or ill ke ep
the ir usual pronunciation, except e, which i pronounced
like e
bail, caillou, bataille, soleil, meilleur, bouteille,fauteuil,feuillet,
feuille,fenouil, bouillir, patrouillew and ve before il and ill have the sound ofthe F rench eu
ceil,(Billet, cercueil
ill not pre ceded by a vowel has also a liquid sound, as in billet
famille, except in words which commence w ith ill, mill,
vill,and afew others, illegale , milleh rnillimét
re,ville, village,
piller, fille, grille, habiller, mantille.
Pronunc iat ion oft h e C onsonan t s .
C ONSONANTS are generally pronounced as in E nglish, but , as
a rule , are not sounded at the end ofwords. 0,f, l, r, however,when they occur as last le tters ofa word
,are pronoun ced; But
r is not pronounced in words ofmore than one syllable ending
R EMARKS ON TH E PRONUNC IATION or C onsonanrs.
is pronounced like k; but like ss before e and i,and
before a,o, u, when the cedilla is placed underneath
due , ceci, cela, cidre, pa, de’
pu,fapade, repoisis pronoun ced like ks before e and i, and like lo before a
, o, u
or a consonant
acce’
der,accident
,vaccine
, accorder, accréditer, accumuler
is pronounced like sh
chasse,chat, Charade, cheval, biche, chateau
but is pronounced like It before r, and in the greater numberofwords derivedfrom the G re ek
chrdme, chronique, choral, chaos, e
'cho
g is pronounced like g in gallop ; but it is pronounced like 8 in
pleasure before e, i and ygorge, galop, gele
’
e,
’
genou, girafe, gym/ru se.
1 1
Reading ofwords w ith liquid sounds .
Bataille cerfeuil cari llon oeil bouillir c anailleBattle chervil chime eye to boil rabble
bout e ille deuil mant ille aillade brouillard citrouillebottle mourning mantilla garlic
- sauce fog pumpkin
fe rrailleur caillot corbe ille écureuil drille oe ille t
fighter clot ofblood baske t squirrel fellow eyelet -hole
quenouille éventail merve ille fauteuil famille fouillerdistad
‘ fan marvel arm- chair family to search
douille t taille soleil feuille fi lle grenouille travail
soft waist sun leaf daughter frog work
verm e il seuil papillon rouille gargouille ab'
e ille
rosy threshold butterfly rust gut ter-spout bee
pare il veille bétail railler maille raillerie réveilalike eve cattle to banter stitch millery awaking
andouille tre ille soupirail détaillant treuil funéraillestwist vine air-hole retailer Windlass fimeral
écue il tenailles cercue il écaille éve illérock t ongs coffin scale awakened
Re ading ofwords with consonants.
bal cabale chrome c ela duo
horse boot ball cabal chrome that duke
chair se c c élebre chale t chronique cadre celloflesh dry celebrated cottag e chronicle frame this
éche c chaleur calice acc élérer accaparer accorde r
check heat chalice to accelerate toforestall to grant
dormir badaud fable beaucoup g e lée g alopto sle ep cockney fable much frost gallop
mois habile face pe tit g enou riche darde r bordmonth clever face little knee rich t o dart edge
fac teur ceci g erm er gymnase fortunepostman this to germinate gymnasium fortune
ce rf lire papa poli laborieux passer nag er palais
stag to read papa polite industrious to pass to swim palace
cavalerie demands bananier chat chameau dromadaire
cavalry demand banana- tree cat camel dromedary
badinage canon caniffatalit é furie C hine comets
frolic cannon penknife fatality fury China comet
Nofurtherindicationswill ba givenwhen final consonantsmust be pronounced.
1 2
PRONUNC IATION or TH E C ONSONANTS ( continued) .
gn is pronounc ed som ewhat nasal and very much the same
p
as ui in the E ng lish word companion .
signe , agueau, campagne , gagner, Boulogne
is g enerally silen t but ifaspirated (usually indicatedin dic tionarie s by 11 ) its sound is but faintly heard
homme , hdlc, heureuw,’héros
,
’
harico t
is always pronounced like 3 in pleasure
jambon,jar-din,je , jubilé , jaune , jeudi
is g enerally silent before lbap téme , baptiser, sculpture .
ph is pronounc ed likefphrase , physique , philosophe
qu is pronounced like It
quatre , re guéte , liquide , quai
is harder than in E ng lish , princ ipally at the beginn ingofwords
,and when follow ed by ano ther r :
reproche , rdle , brigade , drame , serre , horrible
it is silent at the end ofwords ofmore than one syllableending in er
abuser, gouter, charg er, premier, mensong er
is pronounced hard at t he beg inning ofw ords, and be
tw e en a vow el and a consonant
sable , serpe , passage ,"e stime , re ste , narc isse , masse
It is pronounced soft like z be twe en two vow e ls, e xc ept when it is the first le t ter ofthe se cond w ord incompound words
visag e , ruse , asile , visible , phase ; but be lle—smur,paraso l, entre - sol, demi- siéc le
so is pronounced like 33 befo re e and i,and like sh before
a, o , u,or a consonant
sce au, sce’
le’
ra t, sciag e , scission ; scapulaire ,
scolastzque , sculpture , scrupuleux
1 8
Re ading ofw ords with consonants .
lire papa poli laborieux honnete mal nous nag e r
to read papa polite laborious honest evil we to swim
palais baptéme phare quatre
palace baptism light- house four
baptiser
to baptise years
laisser lav er quitte r arroser radis rire mere car
to leave to wash to leave to water radish to laugh mo ther for
visag e be lle - soeur pas brasface sister- in- law step arm
scrofuleux reproche marine cher cocher ruse frimas
scrofulous reproach dear coachman cunning rime
baratte cirque charre tte barbe choc c iseau machine
churn circus beard shock chisel machine
nicher papier drap compt e r pharmacie barrique
to nestle paper cloth t o reckon chemistry cask
jardinier nomade parade galop gateau phrase onz e
gardener wandering parade gallop cake phrase eleven.
e solave sculpture prie re former fi eur passag e table
slave sculpture prayer toform flower passag e table
sol cygne’héros quatorz e que
soil swan hero fourt een that
pur quarante signe . paresse muse humeur
pure forty sign laziness muse humour
’hideux bois poésie mur campagne souvent qualificatifhideous wood poetry wall coun try often qualificative
soigneux jaune histoire quoique salut fe r dig ne
careful yellow history though salute iron worthy
é té quel quoi peu heure habitant qualit ésummer which what little hour inh abitant quality
prier magnifique’hagard que l je plaigne
’hache
to pray magnificent haggard which I may pity
assurance habit querelle honneur’honte
assurance coat quarrel honour shame
épargne honime dose’
hauteur phrase
saving man dose he ight phrase
usag e jus dignit é’ha1 r humble Afrique .
cust om juice dignity to hat e humble Africa
14
Paonuncrarron on TH E C onsonan'rs ( concluded) .
is pronounced like a in the end syllable tie pre cededbya vowe l
diplomatic, minutie , prophé tie
also in the m iddle ofwords in the syllable tifollow edby a vowel :
partiel, ambitieux,nation, martial, béo tien,
impa tience ,factieux
But t has its natural sound in the syllable s and end
ing s stion, xtion, tie, tier, tiere , tie‘
me , and in the end
ing s tions and tiez ofthe tenses ofverbs in t e r
question, mixtion, amitié, portier, litiére , gile tiére ,
septieme, nous portions, vous portiez
th is pronounced like a sing le t
thedtre , théo log ie , thyrse
x has the sound ofgs at the beg inning and in the middle
ofwordsexercer, examiner, Xenophon, exemple
it is pronounced like It when before ac and c t
exce’
de r,excellence , exc epter, exciper, exciter
L inking oftwo words.
The linking oftwo words is the pronounc ing ofthelast consonant ofa word with the first syllable ofthe nextword when it begins w ith a vow el ormute h. L inking onlytakes place be twe en words closely conne c ted by the ir
meaning , as articles and nouns, adj ective s and nouns,
personal pronouns and verbs; Ex. : le sA
amis, deuw
beauce ozseaum, ilsfl
ont parlé .
In linking d is pronounced like t ,flike a, s and a: like
z ; E x. : te grandA
enfant, te mauvaisA
homme , neufans,
diaeA
Oiseaux.
1 6
R EAD ING or Wonns w i'rir C ONSONANrs.
je t facade aristocratic laitie r homme sept ieme theatre
throw front aristocracy milkxnan man seventh theatre
tacher distrait que démocrat ie portier cafe t iereto stain distract ed that democracy port er corree -
pot
théiére tafi'
e tas plat lit
tea-
pot taffe ta dish bed
vassal chaque z énith chez velours exercer quinz e
vassal every z enith at velvet to exercise fifte en
impartial radieux isolement salade musicien
impart ial radiant loneliness salad musician
rat ambitieux imposant miserable colle c tion supérioritérat ambitious imposing miserable collec tion superiority
expedition escalade flux
expedition scaling flow
rassemblement hypocrite
gathering hypocrit e
Re ading exercise on th e linking ofwords .
Nous avons. Troisfl
oiseaux . U h pe tit”homme .
We have Three birds A lit tle man
HSA
eurent . VousA
ave z .
They had You have Some coats worn out
Nousfi
at tendcns Alfred. IlsA
ont . Sixfi
heures. E stA
e lle
We expe ct Alfred They have Six hours Is she
che zfl
e lle ? C omm ent vous appe le z- vous ? D eux am is.
at home H ow yourself do call you Two friends
Ilfl
estA
ici. Mes“enfants. Nos ennemis . E lle s entrerent .
H e is here My children Our enemies They ente red
U h g rand. ami. l l a neufans. Ave z - vous uh mauvais
A good friend H e has nine years Have you a bad
1 0.
1 1 .
1 2 .
13.
1 4 .
1 5.
1 6.
1 7 .
1 8 .
19.
2 0.
2 1 .
2 2 .
2 3.
1 6
G en e ral E x cept ions t o t h e R ule s ofPronunc iat i on .
(‘For reference only . )is silent ih —aout, Saone , toast (st pronounced. )
B (final) is sounded in— ctub, nabab, rob.
0 (final) is silent ih—accroc, bane, blanc, elem,cric, croc, cow
escrc estomac, flanc,franc, lacs, mare , pggc, raccroc, tQ ac, tronc.
A so in t he singular prescnt dfthe verbs caincre and conoaincre ;as inje vaincs, il co nvainc, etc.
0 C H sound like g ih— second, drachm e .
1) is sounded ih — sud, Talmud.
is silent be tween g and a or 0, when it serves t o give the g the
soft sound ; as in vengeance, pigeon, etc.
E sounds like e, ifthe first letter ofa word, and followed by a
double consonant ; and in all words beg inning with dess, as in
efiacer, essarter, dessécher, etc ,also in the word et (and) .
E sounds like a at the beg inning ofthe adverbial t ermination cm
s c has also the sound ofa in the
the ir derivat ives.
F (final) i cerf, cerf- fvolant, chef- d’
ceuvre,clef,
(or nej'fs, asufs .
G (final) is sounded in,grog?
zigzag .
G is silent ih — doigt, l egs, signet, vingt ;.
GN is pronounced hardgm°
n; agnat, cognat, gnbrne , gnbmon,igné,
ignition, ignico le, impregnation, inexpugnable, stagnant, stagnation.
L is silent in— baril, chenil, coutil, !£usil, gentil, outil
, persil,sourcil.
M. is silent in—damner,condamner
,automne .
P is sounded ih— cap ,cep , croup, group, hanap , jalap , julep ,
salepalso in septembre, sep tup le .
P is silent iii— corps, temps, printernps.
R is sounded in the end syllable er (e pronounced e) ofthefollowingwords ofmore than one syllable z— amer
, belve’
der, cancer ,cuiller
,
cutter, enfer, fi er,frater, hier, hiver, magister, outremer, pater,and in proper names.
R is silent in—monsieur, messieurs .
8 (final) is sounded in — atlas,biceps, bis, cassis
, chorus, fi le
(pronounce fiss), gratis, z'
aclis, m
'tgis, mars, mwurs, oasis,
obus, omnibus, gaps, papyrus, prospectus, re’
bus,tournébis
,typhus,
sis, and in all nouns in us derivedfrom the Lat in .
T (final) is sounded in— abject, aconit,brut , C hrist, shut
,contact
,
earl-
ea, cobalt, deficit, district , direct, clot, csTTeast ), exact, fat,incorrect, indirect, infect , intellect, lest, mat
, net, ouest
, p ost
preterit, rit, strict, suspect, test, transit .T in tie sounds like t ih — épiz ootie, rctie, sotie .
T in ti sounds like t in—chrétien, entretien, maintien, souticn and
in bestial, bestiaire , vestiaire , galimatias, and their derivatives.
T m tier sounds like 3 in all the t enses'
ofverbs in tier (exceptchdtier) ; as in balbutier
,balbutiant, nous balbutions, etc.
1 8
D ivision ofSyllables .
In F rench w ords are divided into syllables according
to the follo w ing princ ipal rules1 . A consonant be twe e n two vowels commences the new
syllable ; as ,
i- nu- ti- le , a -mi, pé- re , a- ca - dé -mi e
2 . When the re are tw o consonants betw e en tw o vow els
one ofthem be longs to the first and the other to t h e
se cond syllable ; as,
ex- cep- ter, e
- xer- c er,c o l- le c - tion, in- e or-
po- rw ti on
3. C onsonants how e ve rfollow ed by l or r are no t added
to the first syllable but c omm enc e the se cond; thus,
ta - ble au,fa - ble , li- vre , ecu- ore
Punctuat ion .
The signs ofpunctuation are the same as in E nglish ,
virgule , comma ; point , pe riod ; p o int- c i
virgule , sem i- colon ; deuacpoints, c o lon ; l point d
’
em
e lama tion,no te ofexc lamation ; point d
’
interrogation,
no t e ofin terrogat ion .
Parts ofSpe ech .
The F rench lang uag e contains t en parts ofspe ech.
Six are flexible : le substantifor nom,the noun ; l
’
article ,the article ; l
’
adje c tif, the adj e c tive ; le pronom, the pro
noun ; lo verbe , the veg h ; and lo participe , the partic iple .
F our are inflexible : l’
adverbe,the adve rb ; la prep osition,
the pre position ; la conjonc tion, the conjunc tion and l’
in
terje c tion, the interj e c tion.
D e finit ion Ofth e Part s ofS p e e ch .
The ARTIC LE ( l’
article) is a word used before nouns to limitor define
'
the ir application as,
the man,l
’
homme ; the house , la maisona man, un homme ; a house
,une maison
The NOU N ( te nom) is the nam e ofanything which exists,or
which we can conce ive to ex1st,whe ther material or immaterial ;
as, man, homme ; house , m aison ; virtue , vertu
The AD JE C TIVE ( l’adjectif) is a word added to a noun to
qualify or de termine it ; there are two kinds ofadj e ctives inFrench — 1 . the qualifying adjective as in E nglish ; as,
a good boy, nu bon garcon ; the young g irl, la j eune fi llc2 . the determinative adjective, in English ordinarily called pronoun ;as
,this boy, so garccn; which girl, quelle fills; my son, monfi ts
19
A PR ONOUN (un pronom) is a word used instead ofa noun as,H e (John) is rich, il ( Jean) est riche ; this is g ood, ceci est ban
The VE RB ( te verbe) is a word by which we affirm— 1 . Whatanybody or anything doe s ; 2 . What is done to him or to it ;3. In what state he or it exists ; as,
the man works, l’
homme travaille ; the boy was punished,te garcon fut puni the child sle eps, l
'enfant dort
The PAR TIC IPLE ( le participe) is so called because it partake
ofthe nature ofthe verb from which it is derived, and as
sumes in part the nature ofan adje ctive ; as,a son protecting his mo ther, un fi ts rotégeant sa mere ; a
burnt house , une maison incendiée ; your et ter is badly written,votre lettre est ma l écrit e
An ADVERB (nu adverbe) is a. word which modifies a verb,an adverb, or an adjective ; as,
he wrote we ll, it ecrivait bien ; he will be here soon,it sera
bient6t ici ; my sister is as pre t ty, ma sceur est aussijolic
The PRE POSITION ( ta preposition) serves to show the relation
ofa noun or pronoun to som e other word in the sent ence ; as,the book is o n the table , ls livre est sur la table he sat
behind me , il etait assis derriere moi
A C ONJUNC TION (une conjonction) is a word which serves to
conne ct the different parts ofan extended sent ence ; as,
John and Jacob went out yesterday, Jean et Jacob sortirent
hier; I cannot come , because I am ill, je ne puts pas venir, par
ceque jc suis malade
The INTERJEC TION ( l’interjcction) is a word which expresses
any sudden desire or violent em otion ; as,H ush !paint chut l ah ! ah! alas ! hélas / bravo !fort bien l
Numbers .
There are two numbe rs in F rench the singular and
the plural; the singular refers to one person or thing , the
plural to more than one .
G ende rs .
There are but two g enders in French, the masculine
and the feminine ; therefore things‘
Which are neuter in
Eng lish are in F rench e ither masculine orfeminine .
R ule s to ascertain the g ender ofinanimate obje c ts
will be g iven lat e r on ; but we advise students never to le arn
a noun w ithout placing e ithe r the definite or indefinite
article before it , as this is by far the be st planfor fixrng the
proper gender in the memory .
2 0
F IRST Lassou. Premi ere L eg-on.
The ART/OLE and the IVOU/V.
The D efinit e Article the is translated :
le before a masculine singular noun beg inning with a con
sonant ; a8 .— Zefrere, the brother; te More , the book.
la before afeminine singular noun beg inning w ith a con
sonant ; as, - la saeur, the sister; la porte, the door.
1’
before masculine or feminine nouns in the singular,when they begin with a vow el or It mute ; as,
l'onc le, the uncle ; the hot el ; l
'ég ltse, church ;
l’
hatesse, the landlady.
les before masculine orfem inine nouns in the plural ; as,lesfree-es, the brothers ; les sceurs, the sisters ;les hotels (m. the hote ls ; les egltses (f. the churches.
FORMATION on TH E P LURAL or Nouns.
1 .—The plural ofnouns isformedby adding 3 to the singular;
as,—la here , the book, les ltores, the books ; le chat, the cat ,les chats, the cats ; la soeur
, the sister, les secure, thesisters ; la matson, the house , les matsons, the houses.
2 .—Nouns ending in s
,x,z do no t chang e in the plural ; as,
la bras, the arm ,les bras, the arms ; la voice, the voice, les voice,
the vorces lanee , the nose , les nez , the noses.
The Verbs being ofthe utmost importance we shall add a portionofthem to each lesson
,independently ofthe other rules.
The auxiliary ve rb avoir,t o have .
Sm cunas . Indicative Present . SING U LAR.
l st Person I have ai-je , have I2 nd tu as, thou hast as - tu
,hast thou!
3rdil a, (m. ) he has a- t - il, has he ?elle a, f. ) she a- t - elle , has she ?
PLURAL. PLURAL.1st Person nous avons, we have avons- nous, have we !2 nd v
l
ous avez , you hat e avez - vous,have you)
i 5 out , (m. ) they ont - ils,3rd { e lles have ont - elles,
have they 1
je, ne, me, que, cc, se, etc. before a vowel become j'
, n'
,m'
, qu', c
', s
’
, etc.
(i) In t he lnterrogatlve form the pronoun is placed after the verb and a hypheninserted ; ifthe and pe rson singular ends in a vowe l, for euphony
's sake . a I
placed between two hyphens is inserted - t
is to be learned
and, etarm, bras m .
book, liere m .
brother,frere m.
cat , chat m .
church , eglisef.dog , chien m .
door, porte
E xe rcise No . 1 .
Translate the Singular and Plural ofthefollowing nouns and articles.
1 . The brother,the brothe rs,— the dog , the dogs,
—the nail (clouthe nails
,— the sist er, the sist ers,— the cow (cache the cows,
the hand, the hands, —the child (enfant the children— the hot el,
the hotels,— the church,the churche s,— the story (histoire the
st ories,— the month (mois m . the months,— the mouse , the mice ,the price , the prices,
—the nut the nuts,— the nose , the noses,— the book
,the books,— the landlady, the landladie s,
— the herring ,the herrings,
—the voice , the voices,— the cat , the cats,— thefan (eventail the fans— the arm
,the arms,
— the door, the doors, —the um
c le, the uncles,— the coat (habit the coats.
H e has,— have we — have Iii— you have ,
— have they— thou
hast,— has she
'l— they have ,— we have ,
— has he — have you‘
i— I have ,have they l
— she has,—they f. ) have .
2 . L es freres e t les soeurs. Le chat et la souris. L’
hotesse a lo
chien. Ils ont ent endu1 la voix. Avez - vous lu2 le 1ivre ? Nous avons
les maisons. J'ai vu3 l’eglise . A- t - il vus l’h6tel? Qui a les harengs ?
Le bras et la. main . L’oncle a donné“ls prix. Elle a deux5 h6tcls.
La maison a deux5 portes.
The cats and the mice . H ave we the books? H e has two”uncles.
The arms and the hands . “rho has seen”the hotels ? H ave you the
dogs? The sister has given
4 the priz es. Who has seen3 the chur
che s? H as she the herring? The landlady has two
5 house s. Whohas heard1 the voices? The bro ther has the hot el. H as he the dog ?
Ye s, he has the dog . Have you seen3 the cat , sir? No
,madam .
Pronounce et—é ; monsieur—me—si- eu
Students shbuld always place the art icle before a noun they are learning , thisbe ing the best way to remember the prope r g ender: te bras, la ports, etc.
( 1) The h when aspirated i s . to be pronounc ed, is indicated by an apostrophe (’
h)and in this case le or la must be used and no t l
’
.
I entemlu,heard 2 ln,
read 3 1m,seen 4 donnf
‘
, given 5 dent , t‘wo
Th e V ocabulary
heart as the se words will no t be g iven again
hand, mainf. nose,nez m .
herring ,'
hareng price , priz e , price I
ho tel, hotel m . sir, monsieur rn
house , maison sister, swurf.
landlady, hotessef. unc le,oncle m .
madam , madamef. voice , voice ,f.mouse , sourisf. who , whom , qui
no, non yes, oui
2 2
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
H ow is the definite article the rendered in French!
When'
is to used, when la, when l’
, and when les?
H ow is the translat ed before ’
h (aspirat ed)?
What is the g ender ofa noun preceded by te, w .
‘at when preceded
b la?
0 . t at is the first and general rule for the format ion ofthe plural ofnouns ?
Which nouns do not chang e in the plural ?
When is the e ofje elided and an apostroph e placed instead?
What is the place o i the pronoun subje ct in the int errogative formofverbs in French ?
9. When is a t be tween two hyphens insert ed aft er the verb ?
C onversat ion .
G o od morning ,G ood day,
G ood evening , madam.
Thanks, (thank you).Have you the book,
madam ?
N0, sir, his ( 3a) sist erhas the book.
Has he seen (on) his (son) uncle ?Yes, sir.
H as she the cat ?
No,madam , she has the dog .
What (que) have they in (dd/Its)their ( leurs) hands?
They have four ( quatre) herrings.
Who hasbought (ache té) the hotelH is (son) brotherhas bought thehotel.
Has the dog ( translat e : the doghas he ) the mouse ?
No , it is ( c’
est) the cat which ( qui)has the mouse .
H ave you heard (entendu) thevoice ?
Yes, I have heard the voice .
H as the church (translat e : thechurch has she) two doors?
No, the church hasthreedoors,andthe house has two doors.
Has he paid page) the riceasked ( demande) for (powr thedog ?
Yes, he has paid the price .
Bonjour, monsieur.
Ils ont quatre harengs.
Qui a acheté l’h6t e1?Sonfrere a ache té l'hot el.
Le chien a- t - il la souris?
Non, c'est le chat qui a la south
Avez -vous entendu la voix ?
Oui, j’
ai ent eridu la voix .
L’
eglise a- t - elle deux portee i
Non, l’
eglise a trois port es, et lamaison a deux portes.
A- t - il payé lo prix deinandé pourls chien l
Oui,il a payé lo prix.
Bonsoir, madam e .
Merci (je vous rem ercie).Avez -vous le livre , madame ?
Non, m onsieur, se soeur a ls livre
A- t - il vu son oncle °
Oui, monsieur.
A- t - elle le chat ?
Non, madame , elle a le chien.
Qu’
ont - ils dans leurs mains?
2 3
Re ading E xerc ise No . 1 .
Tout comm encem ent Q u’
ave z - vous clansAll commencement is diffi cult What have you
votre main? J’
ai an j ournal francais. Q u’
e s t - c c ? A
your hand I have a newspaper French What is that To
qui appartient (43+)c e la‘P Sont - ils riches? E te s- vous pauvre
?
whom belongs that Are they rich Are you poor
11 fait froid. F ait - il chaud‘? Q ui e st lit ? B onjour.
It makes‘
cold Makes it Who is there G ood day
Bonsoir. Bonne unit . on é tie'
z J e taisA
a laG ood evening G ood night Where were you yesterday I was at the
campagne . Je n’
ai pas d’
arg ent . Oi‘
i e st - il ? No tre chat
country I have not ofmoney Where is he Our eat
a pris une souris Parle z - vous francais? Oui, un peu.
has caught a Speak you French Yes a little
Pouve z - vous m e c omprendre? Pas du tout . Que désire z
C an me understand Not at all What wish
vous ? Veuille z me donne r m on chapeau? Je vous
you Will me my hat I
Sort ire z - vous c e tte apres-m idi? Non ; je
Will go out you this afternoon No I
re sterai che z m oi. L e t ropfroid. Auj ourd’hui
shall remain at me The weather is t oo cold To - day
ilfait trés chaud. Que lle heure e st’
Til? Il e st diXA
heure s.
it makes very warm What hour is it It is t en hours
Pourquoi v e ne z- vous si tard J
’
ai manqué lo train. Mon
Why come you so lat e I have missed the train My
frere é taitA
aujourd’hui au theatre . Veuille z -
prendre un
brother was t o - day at the theatre Will take a
sieg e . N’
oublie z pas de venir cc soir. D emain soir
scat F org et not t o come this evening To -morrow evening
nous i rons e u c once rt Ave z - vous dejadiné Non, nous
shall g o to the concert Have you already dined No
no dimn as pas avant sixfi
heure s. A demain.
dine not before hours To t o -morrow
In order t o assist the student in practising these exercises nasal and liquid
sounds are pri nt ed in italics, and the linking is indicat ed by a curved line .
( 1) The figure in parenthesis indicates the group among st which the word isim 'lducd on pag e s 1 6 and 17 .
2 4
Snoonn Lnsson.D euxz
'
eme L egon.
TH E An'rronn AND TH E Noun ( continued) .
The article isfrequen t ly pre ceded by prepositions as
in E ng lish ; but the article s te and les, can ne ver be p'
c eded by do, (oforfrom) , or d ( to or at), and thefollow ing
contractions are used:
da inste ad Ofdo before amas culine singularnoun bean d ginning with aconsonant as
dafrere, ofthe bro ther. anfrere, to the brother.
de lit re,ofthe book. an livre, to the book.
des instead Ofde before masculine and feminineaux d nouns in the plural ; as,
desfreres, ofthe brothers. auxfreres, t o the brothers.
des saeurs, ofthe sisters . aux sazare, to the sisters.
des oncles, ofthe uncles. aux oncles, to the uncles.
ales hetesses, ofthe landladies. auxM tesses, to the landladies.
OBSE R VATION : la and l’
are neve r contrac ted ; as
de la soeur, ofthe sister. a la soeur, to the sist er.
de l’
oncle, ofthe uncle . a l’oncle
, to the uncle.
The form ofthe English Possessive : thefather’
s hat,the girl
's bon
nets, Charles'book, etc. , must be altered when translating int o French
thus : the hat ofthefather, le chapeau du pere ; the bonnets ofthe girl,les chapeaux de la fille the book ofC harles, le livre de C harles etc .
F ORMAT ION or TH E PLURAL or Nouns ( continued) .
3.-Nouns ending in an and en take a: in the plural instead
of8 as, le chapeau, the hat , les chapeaux, the hats.
to neveu, the nephew,les nevem , the nephews.
4,— Nouns ending in at chang e this te rmination into aux ;
as, le cheval, the horse , les chcvauaz, the horses.l’
em'
mal, the animal, les anirm ux, the animals .
The auxiliary verb étre, to be .
Indicative Present.
je suis, [ am suis-jc , am I?tu es, thou art l es- tu, art thou )il, elle est“ he, she is l est - il
, est - elle , is he , is she !nous sommes, we are sommes- nous, are wevous etes, you, are é tes- vous, are you ?ils, elles sont , they are sont - ils (elles), are they !
Interrogative sent ences, as : [l ots the aunt read the book? Are thesoldiers in the house ? e tc . , must be changed in form , when translating into French, thus : The aunt has she read the book, la tante a,t- elle la la livrel the soldiersare they in the house , les soldats sont - ilsdansla maison ?
2 6
Que st ions o n G rammar.
I. How are ofthe and to the translat ed before amasculine singularnoun
commencing with a consonant ?
2 . H ow are ofthe and to the translat ed before afem inine singularnouncommencing with a. consonant ?
3. H ow are ofthe and to the translated before a Singularnoun ,whe ther
masculine orfeminine , commencing with a vowel or h mute ?
H ow are ofthe and to the translat ed before a noun in theoplural?
C an the prepositions de or (t precede the articles te or les?ifnot , what
must be used inst ead?What nounsform theirplural by adding at?
What nounsform their plural by changing the ir term inat ion into
aux?
8 . H ow do you translat e int o French, the brother’
s book, the dog’
s nose,
the unc le’
s notce, C harles’
hat?
C onversat ion .
Where is the uncle ’s book?
The uncle’
s book is on the chair.
Who is in the father’
s room ?
The aunt is in the father’s room.
Have seen the niece’
s
bird?
Yes, sir, the niece's bird is on the
table .
Has the landlady’
s nephew theknife ?
Yes, madam,he has the knife .
H ave you read (tu) the paper,madam
Yes, sir, I have read the papers
which (qui) are on the chair.
Is your brother (an) officer?Yes, madam,
he is [a] g eneral .
Where have you se en (nu ) thesister
’
s bonnet ?
We have seen her (son) bonnet inthe brother
's room .
Is the soldier’
s dog in the street ?
you
No, madam, he is in the house .
Hast thou seen the mouse in theroom ?
Yes, Ihave seen the cat and themouse .
To Whom (qui) have you given
(elonne'
) the curtains?I have given the curtains t o the
woman.
Oii est le livre de l'oncle ?
Le livre de l’
oncle est surla chaise .
Qui est dans la chambre du pere ?
La tante est dans la. chambre da
pére .
Avez - vous vu 1’
oiseau de la niece ?
Oui, monsieur,I’
oiseau de lanieceest sur la table .
Le neveu de l'hétesse a- t -il le cou
t eau?
Oui, madame , il a. le cout eau.
Avez - vous ln le journal, madame ?
Oui, monsieur, j'ai ln les journaux
qui sont sur la chaise .Votre frere est- i] officier?Oui, madame , il est général.orave z -vous vu la chapeau de lasoeur?
Nous avons vu son chapeau dansla chambre dufrere .
Le chien du soldat est - il dans larue ?
Non, madame, il est dans la
maison.
As- tuvu lasouris dans la chambre?
Oui, j’
ai vu le chat et la souris.
Aqui avez -vous donné les rideaux?
J ’
ai donné les rideaux 5. lafemme .
I
2 7
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 2 .
Tout c c qui brille n’
e st pasA
or. Ouvre z la fenetre .
All that wbich glitters is no t g old Open the w indow
F erme z la porte . dem eure z - vous Nous dem eurons
Shut the door Where live you We live
dans ce tte jolie maison. Quandfi
ave z - vous ache t é cat“
in this pret ty house W hen have you bought this
habit ? Oi‘
i e st vo tre soeur? E lle e stA
allée se promener
coat Wh ere is your sister She gone herselfto walk
ave c se tant e . L e s JOU I‘
S augm ent ent (39) sensiblem ent . L e
with her aunt The days increase sensibly The
tres be au ll mefait pasfi
aussi
weather was very fine the daybefore yest erday It mak es not
froidfl
enA
Angle terre que dams lo Nord de la F rance . J aicold in E ngland as in the North ofthe France I have
oublié d’
ache t er de s g ants. C omm ent s’
appe llent (39)les septforgotten t o buy some gloves H ow themselve s call the seven
jours de la semaine ? Ils s’
appe llent : lundi,mardi
,
days of the week They th emselves call Monday Tuesdaymercredi, j eudi, v endredi, sam edi e t dimanche . Que lsWednesday Thursday Friday Saturday and Sunday What
sont le s noms des mo is de l’année ? Janvie r, février,
are the names ofthe months of the year January F ebruary
juille t , aofi t (1 ), sept embre (15),April May June July August Sept ember
novembre e t déc embre . L ise z - vous de s livre sNovember and D ecember Read you any books
francais ? Oui, que lquefois. L ise z - vousfi
a haute voix ?
French Yes some t imes Read you at loud voice
Oui,toujours ; car m on profe sseur m
’
a dit que c’
é tait la
Yes always for profe ssor me hassaid that this was the
seule man i ere d’
acquérir une prononciation corre cte .
only manner oft o acquire a pronunciat ion corre ct
Pouv e z - vons me c omprendre quand je parle francais?C an understand when I speak French
Oui, quand vous no parle z pas trop Vit e . Pourrie z - vous
Yes when y ou speak no t too quick C ould you
suivre une c onv ersation? Non,monsieur; mon ore z
'
lle n’
e st
follow a conversat ion No Sir my is
pasA
asse zA
hahituée a la prononciat ion de votre langue .
not enough accustomed t o the pronunciation of your language
2 8
THIRD L ESSON.
Troisi eme L egon
Tun ARTIC LE ( continued) AND TH E NOUN ( concluded) .
The Indefinite Article onor an is t ranslated :
un before masculine singular nouns ; as,anfrere , a brother; an animal, an animal,
une before fem inine singular nouns ; as,une h6tesse , a landlady ; une porte, a door.
Norm— dc before avow el orIt mute be comes d’
; thus,d
’un, al
’
une , ofa or ofan
F ORMATION or TH E P LURAL or NOUNS ( concluded) .
E xceptions to theformation ofthe Plural ofNouns.
EXC EPTIONS t o Rule 1 .— a). Seven nouns ending in ea add at
in the plural viz : le bijou,the jewel ; le caillou, the pebble ; le chou
,
the cabbage ; le genou,the knee ; le hibou, the owl ; lejoujou, the toy ;
le pou, the louse— Plural : les bijoux, les caz
'
lloux; (be .
h). Seven nouns ending in ailform their plural by chang ingthat t ermination into aux; viz : le bail, the lease ; le corail, the coral;l email (m . the enamel ; le soupirail, the air hole ; te travail, the
work ; te vantail, the leafofa folding door; le nitrail, the stained
glass-window .
—Plural : les baux, les coraux, e tc .
EXC EPTIONS to Rule 4.— Five nouns ending in d l add 3 in the plu
ral ; viz : le bal, the ball ; te regal, the feast ; te carna'va l, the carnival ;le chacal, the jackal ; le nopal, the cactus — Plural lesbals, lesrégals, etc.
The following four nounsform their lural irregularly ; viz
l’
aieul (m . the ancestor ; Plural : les a‘
icun
le ciel, the heaven ; les cicua:l'ce il (m . the eye ; les yeux
le betail, the cat t le ; les bestiaua:
H owever ciels is used when it m eans skies,and in afew compound
nouns ; ce ll s is used in ceils de boeuf, oval Window,and oei ls de chat,
cat’
s eyes (jewels) aieuls is used in the meaning ofgrandfathers.
The Auxiliary Ve rbs avoir,t o have
,and etre, t o be .
Imperfect.j’avais, I had I j ’
etais, I wastu avais
,thou hadst l tn étais, thou wast
il, elle avait, he , she had il, elle était , he , she was
nous avions, we had nous étions,we were
vous aviez , you had vous étie z , you wereils
,elles they had ils
, elles they were
OBSERVATION : Whenever negations, as : pas, not , rien,no thing ,
ja/mais, never, e tc . are usedwith a verb,the part icle ne is also required.
Ne can only be used with verbs, and must always precede the verb, as,
je n’ai pas, l have not . ne suis -je pas, am I not ?
n’
avais-je pas , had I not ? je n’
etais pas, I wasnot .ent ofall verbs in the 3rd person plural is mut e . (vide Exception
2 9
ball, la balls eye , l’aeil m the mother, lamere (m.
plur: les balles plur : les yeux parents, lesparentsball (festival), le father, te pére pen, la plumebal ; plur: les garden,
tejardin pencil, te crayonbale kne e , le ge nou ; son, le fi le
boy, le garco n lur . les genoum watch, la montrechild, l
'
enfant m. et t er, la lettre woman, lafemmadaughter or g irl, man, l
'homme m . for, pour
lafille or, on
E xe rc ise No . 3 .
1 . Afather, —a.m other,— a pencil,— a pen,
—0fasou,—0fadun’
gh
ter,— to a mam— to a woman,— the knee
,the knees,—at the ball, at
the balls,—ofthe eye , ofthe eyes,— the parents
’letter,—a child’
s
balk—the chairs ofa room ,—the mice or the birds,—the son
's aunt ,
to the garden,—eu animal
’
s knees,— t o the curtains,—the nosesand theeyes,
—the general’s nephews,
—a herring and the cat,— to the hand,
eu offi cer's horses, —at (to) an hot el, ; t o the voices,—the door ofachurch,—aboy
’
swatch,—the uncle
’
shats,— oi the fires,—to a girl,—from
awatch,— to a soldier, —at (t o) a table ,—from (of) the men.
You had, —hadst thou — had he ?— they f. ) had,—had we — I
had,—had they — she had, —was she — they were ,— thou wast , —were
you?—was I?—We were , —were they —he was,—he is not ,—have
I not —are we not -
you have not ,— were they not
— he has not ,—youhad not , —
you are not ,—1 had not ,— has she not — they have not,
are they f. ) not ?2 . Avez -vous une plume e t nu crayon? La fille de la femme n
'a
pasla lettre . Qui avait les journaux ? Oi‘
i étaient les fils du général?N
’
evez -vous pas donnél les livres an pare ? L es enfants n
'e'
taient pas
dans nu jardin. L'oiiicier est le neveu d
’
un general. Nous h’
avions
pas les belles. Le livre est -il sur la table on snr la chaise ? Lamontre
était pour l’
oncle . Le fils de l'homme n
’
eveit - il pasnu couteau? J ’
avais
écrit 2 une lettre ala mcre .
Forwhom was the le tt er? Had the uncle a watch? Who has
given1 the balls to the children ? Where was the father? H e was not
in the landlady’
s house . H as the boy a penc il? I have not written2 to
the man. The eyes ofa horse are larg e (grands). Has the mother
g iven1 the hats to a woman? Was the aunt in the garden or in the
house ? The parents have not the curtains. Were the newspapers not
on a table ? The nieces and (the*
) nephews were in a garden. Were
you at a. ball?
In French before every noun the art icle must be employed, even ifin Englishthe article he not repeat ed.
1 donut , given 2 écrit, writ ten.
30
Q ue st ions o n G ramm ar.
1 . Is the indefinit e article un, une the translation fora or an or for
0
both ?
When is an andwhen is une used
H ow is ofa or ofan translated ?
What is the general (first) rule in Frenchfor the formation oftheplural ofnounsWhat is the second rule
What is the third ruleWhat is thefourth rule
H ow man nouns endin inon and ail are exceptions t o rule 1 ,and how 0 theyform t eirplural ?
for theformation ofthe plural ofnouns ?
Are there any nouns ending in d l (rule 4) which do not chang e
into aux in the plural ?
Are there any other exceptions ?
Are verbs used negatively accompanied by one negation only as in
English
What participle can never be used without a verb—t hat it mustalways precede
Is ent in the 3rd person plural ofa verb ever pronounced?
C onve rsat ion.
H ave you a pen, sir?
No , madam , l have no (pasde )pen,but (mais) I have a pencil.
Has the uncle asonandtwo ( deux)daught ers
No , sir, he has two sons and one
( une) daught er.
Have you given ( donne) the lett erto the m other?
No,I have not given the le t ter to
the mother, but to the father.Has the woman a watch
Yes, she has a watch and a knife .
Have they seen ( cu) the child’
s
ball
Yes, madam, they have found( trouvé) two balls.
Has the boy larg e ( de grands)eyes
Yes sir, the boy and the girl havelarg e eyes.
What ( que) have you seen in thestreet
We have seen a horse which
( qui) had both ( les deux) kneesbroken ( cusses) .
Avez -vous une plume, monsieur?Non, madam e , je n
’
ai pas de
plume , maisj’
ai’
nu crayon.
L’
oncle a- t - il un fils et deux filles?
Non, monsieur, il a. deux fils et
une fillc .
Avez -vous donné la let tre a lamere
Non, je n’
ai pas donué la le ttre ala mere , mais eu pere .
Lafemme a - t - e lle une montre ?Oui, elle a une montre e t nu cou
t eau.
Ont - ils vu 1a balle de l’
enfant ?
Oui, madame , ils ont trouvé deuxballes.
Le garcon a- t—il de grands yeux ?
Oui, monsieur,1c garg on e t la filie
ont de grands yeux.
Qu’
avez -vous vu dans la rue ?
No’
us avons vu nu cheval qui avaitles deux g enoux cassés.
31
Reading E xe rc ise No . 3 .
Monsieur R obert est ~i1 che z lui? Non, monsieur,Mr. Robert is he at
. home No su‘
il est sorti. Pourrie z - vous me dire quand‘
il rentre ra?he is gone out C ould you me say when he will re turn
Non, monsieur; maisje ne c rois pas qu’
il reste long t emps"
No air but I be lieve not that he may remain long time
absent . A quelle heure lo t rain part’
i‘
il ? Il part"a
absent At what o’clock the train starts it It starts at
neuf‘
heures quarante- cz
’
nq. N’
y a- t - il pas an autre trainnine o
’clock forty five Th ere has it not an other train
it dix"heure s
’ “e t demie ? Je no pourrais vous donner ce
at t en h ours and. half I not could you give this
rense ignem ent . C ombien d’
arg ent ave z - vous dans votre
information H owmuch ofmoney have you in your
te'
9 J"
d t fpol? 11 10 11 11 310 al GU X 0 6 11 S rancs en Ol‘
,OUZ O
purse Ihave two hundred francs in gold twelve
francs cinquante c entimesA
enA
arg ent e hquz'
nz e c entimes en
francs fifty centimes in silver and fifteen centimes in
monnaie de cuivre . Quelle e st la valeur du shelling en
coin of copper What is the value ofthe shilling in
arg ent francais? Il vautfi
environ anfranc ving t (1 1 )- cz'
nqmoney Fren ch It is worth about one franc twenty five
c entimes. Que désire z - vous ache t e rA
aujourd’
hui? J’
ai
cent ime s What desire to buy to-day Ihave
be soin d’
im g ilet e t d’
un parde ssus . Ne vous faut - il pas
need ofa waistcoat and ofan overcoat Toyouisit necessary not
un chapeau? Non,
monsieur ; mais je voudraisA
ache ter
a hat No sir but I should wish t o buy
une paire de bot t ines e t une paire de souliers. Quea pair of boots and a pair of shoes What
faut - il se rvir a monsieur? D onne z -moi, s’
il vous plait,is it ne cessary to serve to Mr. G ive me ifit you pleases
an potag e nu tapioca, une cote le t te de mouton,des
a soup at the tapioca a chop of mut ton some
pommes de t erre frites, e t an demi-poule t roti. Avez - voue
potatoes fried and a half chicken roast ed Have you
fait"un ban voyag e ? Non, le t emps(1 6) n’a pas été
made a good journey No the weather has not been
H ier(1 7) soir j’ai perdu mon parapluie .
Yesterday evening I have lost my umbrella
32
Po e m s L e sson . Quatmeme L 690”
The Anrronn (concluded).
The Part itive Article da , de la , ole l’
, des must be used in
F rench before every noun taken in a punitive sense ; some or
any is th e translation ofthe partitive article,which is oft en
omitted in E nglish .
The partitive article is in reality the definite article with the prc~posit ion de (of) and is used in the same manner, vizda before a masculine noun singular commencing with -a
de la feminine consonant( le 1
’
any noun singular commencing with a vowel or h mute( les plural ; as ,da rin some or any wine de la m
’
andc (f. some oranymeatde l
'
arl ent money desplume s pensG ive me some bread, meat , water, and apples. D onnez -moi du
pain, de la rc‘
a / zdc, de l
’
eau, cl despommes.
D e or d’takes the place ofthe partitive article da, de la, de l
’
,
(163 before a noun in the singular or plural1 . After a negation ; as,
pas dc riando, no or not any meat pas d
’
oiseauac, no or not any birds
2 . Aft er adverbs ofquantity (like eno ugh, much, as
asscz d’
huilc,enough oil combien de soldats ? how many soldiers
3. Aft ernouns expressing a quantity , weight , measure , etc . (likea g lass, a cup , a pound, a dozen,
two yards, corresponding here
exac t ly with the the English of; as ,un verre dc min
,a glass ofwine une livre dc viande
,a pound ofmeat
une couple d’
oiseaux,a couple ofbirds
4 . This is also g enerally the case ifthe noun in French is precededby an adj e ctive as
,
do bon vz'
n, some or any) good wine
dejo lts oiseaux, some or any) pre tty birds
The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have , e
‘
tre, to be .
F uture .
j’
aurai, I sha ll have je serai, 1 shall betu auras, thou will have tu seras, thOu wilt beil,e lle aura, he , she will have il
, e lle sera,he , she will be
nous aurons, w e shall have nous serons, we shall be
vous aure z, you will haw vous se re z
, you w ill beils
,e lles auront , they w i
l l have ils,elles seront
, they w ill be
The word part itive implie s the idea ofan indefinit e part ofanyth inw FG ive me so me brea d; he re some bread means a part or a portion ofbreado '
1[
I X
you any pens? h ere any pens m eans an indefinit e number ofpens. Buy some {Lise
cofl‘
e e , surfer and apples, i .a. some cofi‘
ec, some sugar, some apples, means : Buyquant it y not distinct ly mentioned) oft ea ofcoire enumber ofapple s.
or 51133 1 3 and an indefini te
34
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
What is the partitive article in FrenchIs the partitive article similar t o the de
finite arti cle ?
What words in Eng lish are the translation.
ofda, de la, etc.Are these words always expressed in English ?
Whenmust the partitive art icle be used ?What is the meaning ofpart itive ?H ow is the part itive article rendered after a negation or an adverb
ofquant ity, or before an adjective ?When is de used instead ofthe part it ive art icle
C onve rsat io n .
What (que)have you in your (the)hand 2
Ihave a pear and some bread in
my (the) hand.
How much tea did you buy (have
you bought (ache té) ?We did not buy any t ea
,but
(mats) we have bought a bot tleofwine , two (deux) pounds ofmeat , some coffee
,some ink
and some paper.
Do you prefer (préférez - oous) a.
cup ofcoffee to a. glass ofwine ?Thank you, madam we prefer(nousprefer-ans) cofl
‘
e e .
Have you seen ( ou) the uncle’
s
knife ?Yes, madam, I have seen theuncle
’
s knife on the table .
Who has given (donné) some oil
to the little“(petit) boy
l have not given any oil to theoy.
What have you done (fail) with( aoec) the moneyWe have bought some apples,some $11 ar, and some salt .
Has the o cer’
s son som e pens
No , sir, he has no pens, but some
pencils.
Towhom have yougiven awatch
I have g iven a
woman’
s niece .
For whom have you bought a
garden( have not bought any garden,but we have bought a house .
Qu'ave z - vous dans la.main l
J’
ai une poire at (in pain dans la.main .
C ombien de theavez -vous acheté ?
Nous m'evous pas acheté de the,
mais nous avons acheté une
bout e ille de vin, deux livresde viande , du cafe, de l’encree t du papier.
Préférez - vous une tasse de café aun verre de vin
Merci, madame ;nous préférons ducafé .
Avez - vous vu le couteaude l’
oncle?
Oui, madame , j’
ai vu lo couteaude l
’
oncle sur la table .
Qui a donné de l’
huile an petit
gargon
Je n’
ai pas donné d’
hm'
le an
petit garcon.
Qu’
avez -vousfait avec l’argent ?
Nous avons ache té des pommes,da sucre et da sel.
Le fils de l'ofiieier a- t - il des
plumes ?
Non, monsieur, il n
'a pas de
plum es,mais des crayons.
A quiave z- vousdonnéune montre?
J'ai donné une montre ala. niecede lafemme ,
Pour qui avez -vous acheté nu
jardinNous n
’
avons pasacheté de jardinmais nous avons aeheté une
maison.
35
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 4 .
Translate this and thefollowing anecdotes. Words which the student hasalready learnt are omitted and indicated by a and those which are thesame ornearly the same in E ng lish as in French are indicated by a
E sope et le fi z’
e’
ton .
aEsop foot-passengerE sops, le célebre i
'
abuliste,était tres pauvre . ll faisait
ZEsop c elebrated fabulist very poor made
souventA
a pied desfl
excursions d’une ville a l
’autre . Il
often on foot town another
rencontra un jour un piéton celui- ci l’arréta e t lui dit
met day foot passeng er this him st opped t o him said
Voudrie z - vous m e dire quelle distance m e sépare de la
Would te ll what separat es
ville qui est sur la colline .
” E sope pritT
unA
air stupide e t
town which hill Alsop took stupid
répondit : Vous n’evez qu
’a marcher,e t vous
"y arrivere z .
answered but to walk there will arrive
L’e tranger sourit e t dit : “Je sais parfaitement cela ;stranger smiled said know perfeet ly that
is désirerais savoir combien dc temps il me faudra pour
should wish t o know t ime will be necessaryfor
faire le chemin. E sops parut s’offenser e t répéta les
make way E sop appeared himselfto offend repeated
memes paroles. C e tfi
homnre n’est pas tout afait lucide
same words This man quit e lucid
il ne me dira rien, pensa ls piéton ; et il continua son
will tell nothin g thought foot -
passenger continued his
chemin. Quelques minutes plus tard il entendit qu’on
Way Some later heard that one
i’appelait : il se re tourna et vitA
E sope que le suivait .
him cal led himselfturned round saw lEsop him followed“Que me voule z—vous,
” lui demanda- t - il l Jc veux vous
What from me wish to him demanded wish
dire , ditA
E sope , que vous sere ZA
a la ville dansA
une heure e t
to say said ZESOp that will be town hour
demie .”“E t pourquoi ne m
’avez - vous pas répondu imme
a half Why answered imm.
diatement .” C
’est parce qu
’il était nécessaire que je viese
diat ely. This because it ne cessary that should se e
comment vous marchiez .
how walked
36
F IFTH L E SS ON.C iuguiéme L ogan.
Words which are the same or nearly the same in E nglish
and F rench .
Words which are the same, are nearly all nouns or adjectives,ending as follows :
in a] Ex central, fi lial in ag e Ex. : dge , village
in ble table,visible in ug e deluge , refuge
in 09 distance, m‘
ce in e nt prudent, diligent
in ade serenade, parade in ion nation, station,
in ude habitude, solitude commission
REMAR K .— Le tters which are accented in French drop theiraccent in English.
W ords which underg o a slight modifi cat ion.
change that t er
g ry mination‘
into
o ry
English t ywords ous
ending o ur 01 .( 3A
m or
Many English verbs ending in ise , ize or use , end in French in
iser, w en — Examples realise , realiser; exercxse , exercer; abuse ,abuser; amuse , amuser.
chang e this
ending into e r moderate
fi er modify— modé
’
rer
modifier
Norm—There are few exceptions to the above rules ; they will greatly assistthe student in rapidly acquiri ng a larg e number ofwords .
V erbs aooir, t o have , and em,t o be .
Present C ond itional,
Jaurais, I should have
tu aurais, thou wouldst have
il, e llc aurait , he , she would havenous curious, we should have
vous auriez , you would have
ils, elles auraicnt , they would have
je semis, I should betu serais, thou wouldst beil,e lle serait , he , she would be
nous serious, we should bevous seriez , you would beils
, elles seraient , they would be
solitary —solitaireglory —g loireclemency
— clémence
charity— charité
ious —pieux
avour —faveurdoctor —docteurcomic — comique
act ive —actifhistorian —historien
87
npppent ice ,apprenti great , grand small, p etit
3 58 , cine m . he re , ici there,la
boot,bottef. large , grand t ime
,temps (1 6) m .
c ousm,cousin m . master, maitre m . t o -morrow , domain
cowsinef. morning , matin m. trade , m e‘
tier m .
day, jour m . pair, pairef. useful, u tilefoot
, pied m . shoe , soulierm. [m . very , tresfriend
, ami m . sho emaker, cordonnier work, travail m.
E x e rc ise No . 5 .
1 .—respectable— eonscience— e s
‘balade aptitude—4
accident— admiration m ilitary historydecency( beauty curious— ardour—horror— aquat ic
— adject ive fi co
— t o —t o refuse— to — to stupefym oral— anniversary honorable captivity musical obligatorysimilitude — adversary—city
—~ t o analyse— evidence
— firmament —nava1 — original~ - capable inactive — illusion— t o mo
— lion— charitable— calamity visage motion dire ction
vanity instrum ent— to indemnize— colonnade rag e— imprudence
—f
no tary civic— notable adversity.
You would have —I should be— would he have E— they would be
t hou wouldst be— I should have— she would not be—w e should no t
have— we shouldbe— shouldwe have —would you be— we shoul dhave
—~ thou wouldst have— she would be—he would have— would they (f.)have
‘l—you would be
— he would have —we should not be— wouldst thou
have l— shouldl be —We shouldnot be— she wouldhave— t hey(m. )would
have .
2 . Le s bot tes e t les souliers de votre1 ami sont ala stat ion. Nous
aurions at t endu2 mon3cousin . C e ei4 est obligatoire . C et te (this) ca.
pitulation serait honorable . Votre action n’
est pas charit able . Vous
ne seriez pas sur5 le rivage . Seraient - ils dans la cité . Je ne se rais pas
c apable de6refuser.
The in strument is very useful. The boots ofthe general are int he room . H e has a larg e foot . This7 would be a great (grande) im
prudence (f. It would have a great (grande ) importance (f. ) My8
friend would be impatient . The shoemaker would not have finished9
the boots. We should have a. good mast er. You would be capable to”
simplify the question . H is1 1 apprentice was very laborious. Your1 2
c ousin has a very good trade . You will have a pair ofboo ts and his13
cousin f. ) a pair ofshoes. Would he have the t ime ? H e would not
be there . We should be here t o -morrow m orning . H is charity is im
mense . The ass is an animal which“is ve ry useful.1 votre, yours 2 attendu,
waited for 3 inon, my 4 ceci,this ssur, on 6 dc
,to 7 this, cc
6 my,men 9finished,fini 10t o , de 1 1 h is, son 1 2 your, votre 13 h is , so. 14 which ,qui
The apostrophe s placed be twe en bracket s indicate that as many acute acce nts
are required in the French word.
38
Q ue st ions on G ramm ar.
What are the endings which are g enerally the sam e in French as in
English 12
What becomes ofthe accents which exist in the French words when
such words also exist in the English languag e ?
What are the endings which are nearly the same in French as in
English?
H ow can French words he forme dfrom English words ending inwryand cry ?
H ow do English words in ty and cy end in French?
H ow can French words be formedfrom English words ending in (me,c ar, or.
7 . H ow do English words ending in ic , i/ve and'
ian chang e those t er.
minations
8 . H ow do most ofthe English verbs ending in ise, ize and use end inFrench
9. H ow do verbs ending in ate andfg end in French?
C onve rsat ion .
Has the shoemaker an appren
t ice ?
Yes, he has two apprentices in his
(son) workshop (atelier).
Where are the boots't b
The boots are in my (man)uncle’
s
room .
V,
Are the shoes too (trap ) small?
N0 , they are rather (plutdt) toolarg e .
Has your (votre) cousin a larg e
foot ?No , his (son)foot is. very small.
Will the boots be ready (pretes)to -morrow morning ?
Yes, they will be here .
What (que l) is yourfriend's trade
(the trade ofyourfriend)?H e is (a) shoemaker.
H ave you two pairs ofboots?No
,I have only (seulement) one
pair ofboots ; but (mais) I'havealso (auss
'i) a pair ofshoes.Where is myfriend
’
s ass'I'
It is in the garden.
Is it (ce) a useful animal ?V es it (il) is very useful .
Le cordonniera- t - il un apprentil
Oui, il a deux apprentis dens son'atelier.
0h sont les bott es?
Les bot t es sont dans la chambrcde mon oncle .
Les souliers sont - ils trop pefi ts?
Non, ils sont plutfit trop grands.
Votre cousin a- t - il nu grand pied?
Non, son pied est tres petit .
Les bott es seront - elles prétes domain matin?
Oui , elles seront ici.
Quel e st lo mét ier de votre m i?
11 est cordonnier.
Avez -vous deux paires de bot tes?
Non, j
’
ai seulement (je n’
ai qu’
)un e paire de .
bott es mais j’
aiaussrune paire de souliers.
0h est l'ane de mon ami?
Il est dans lo jardin.
E st - ce nu animal utile iOui, il est trés utile .
89
R eading E x e rc ise No . 5 .
Un de nos‘
amis avait besoin d’une paire de bottes.
need
11 alla chez lo cordonnier e t lui dit : Faites-moi, s’il vous
went to to him said make me if
plait , une paire de bottes, mais je desire qu’elles soient de
please but I wish should be
premiere qualité. Il faut"aussi que je vous dise quelque
first It is necessary also may say some
chose . Je me suis cassé une jambe , de ns ma j eunesse ; c’est
th ing myself broke in my youth this
pourquoi j’
ai un pied plus gros que l’autre . Vous devez
why larger than other must
done faire une botte plus large que l’autre . Le cordonnier
th en make wider than other
promit de faire attention e t prit mesure . Trois joursfi
apres
promised to do t ook measure three afterwards
l’apprenti du cordonnier apportait les bottes a men am i ;
brought my friend
c elui- ci les“essaya immédiatement : il mit la plus grande
this them tried immediately put larger
botte au plus pe tit pied, e t cc dem ier y e'ntra tres facilethis last there entered very easi
ment . Il voulutA
ensuit e me ttre la plus pe tite botte an
ly wished afterwards t o put smaller
plus grand pied : mais il no put naturellement pas ylarg er but could naturally in it
réussir. 11 ea facha alors et ditA
a l’apprenti Votre
succeed got angry then said
maitre ne comprend pas son m étier. Je lui avais recom
understands him recom
mandé de faire une botte plus large que l’autre e t je trouvemended to make larger than other find
tout le contraire : il a fait l’une beaucoup pluSA
étroite que
all contrary made much more narrow than
l’autre . Prenez ces bo tt es e t remporte z
- les,
afin.qu
’il
o ther take these take away them in order that
se conforme a mesfi
instructions.
h imselfmay conform
40
Bu rn Lassen. Sixaeme L e gon.
Th e Adje c tive .
There are two kinds ofadj e ctives : those which.
express
some quality belonoring to the noun or pronoun to whi ch theyrefer and are therefore called qua lifying ; and those whi ch de
termine or define more clearly than the article , and are called
determina tive .
Adje ctive s are variable words and take the gender and
number ofthe noun which they qualify or de te rmm e .
Q ualify ing Ad j e c t ive s .
F ORMATION or TH E FEM ININE .
R ULE I.- Adjectives form their feminine by adding e to
the masculine ; se ,—grand ,
large , grande ; petit, small, petite ; joli,
prett y, jolie ; aisé , easy, aisée
R ULE II.—Adjectives ending in e mute remain the same
in the feminine ; as,modeste , modest , modeste ; fidéle, faithful, fidele
R ULE III.—Adje ctives ending in on, an, et, el, eil, ien,
double the final consonant and add an e ; as ,
ban, good, bonne ; paysan, peasant , paysanne mue t, dumb
muette éterne l, et ernal, éterne lle ; pareil, alike , pareille ; chrétien,christian ,
chrétienne
EXC E PTIONs.—complet, complete ; concret, concret e ; discret, dis
ere et ; inquie t, uneasy ; replet, stout ; secret, secret ,form theirfeminineby put ting a grave accent on the e before the t, and adding an e to the
masculine ; thus : complete , discrete , inquiete, Gee .
R ULE IV.—Adje ctives ending in re change a: into se ; as,
he ureux, happy, he ureuse ; jalouae, jealous, jalouseEXC E PTIONS .
—doua:
, swee t , deuce ; roux,reddish
,reasse ; fawn,
false ,fausse ; vieux, old, 'vieille .
R ULE V.— Adje ctives ending infchangefinto ve ; as,neuf, new,
neuve ; actif, active , activeR UL E VI.
—Adjectives ending in“
er change er into ere ; as,
fier, proud,flere; premier, first , premiere; singulier, singular, singuliere
The Auxiliary V erbs avoir,to have and étre, t o be .
Past Indefinite .
(C ompound tenses in French are formed with the tenses ofan auxiliaryverb and the past participle).
J ’
ai eu, I have had J ’
ai été, I have been
tu as cu, thou hast had tu as été, thou hast been
il, elle 5. en, he , she has had il, e lle a été, he , she has been
nous avons en,we have had nous avons été, we have been
vous avez cu, you have had vous ave z éte , you have been
ils, elles ont eu, they have hadils. e lles ont été, they have been
4
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
a
mw
y
w
u
in the feminine ?
H ow many kinds ofadjectives are there in French ?What isthe differencebetweenqualifying andde terminat ive adjectives?H ow do adjectives agre e with the nouns they qualify or de termine ?
How do adje ctivesform theirfeminine in F rench !H ow do adjectives ending in e mut e form theirfeminine ?
What are the endings ofadjec tives which double theirfinal consonant
7. G ive the adjectives in at whichform theirfeminine by changing thatending into ete 3
8. How do adjectives ending in 2 :form thefeminine !9. G ive the except ions to the above rule .
10. H ow do adjectives ending infform the feminine !1 1 . H ow do adjectives ending in orform the feminine !
C onve rsat ion.
Who (gm'
) has written (eu-it) this
(cette ) le tter?
My (man)friend has writ ten the
To whom hm this letterbeen (été )
It (elle ) has been written to my
Is the handwrit ing ofyour (votre)friend very bad .
No, it is very good.
Is it possible to write (d'éa -ire) a
le t terwith (am ) this bad pen !
No, it (c'
) is impossible.
Is it (il) possible that the old shoemaker should come (fi e-um ) tomorrowi
It (cc ) would be possible if he
were (était) not lame .
Have you seen (on) this news in
the last newspaper?
Yes,I have seen the news in the
newspaper which (que) the
postman (facteur) brought (aapporté ) this (cc ) morning».
Is the news positive ?
Yes, it (e lle) is quite (tout dfait)true (mute).
Qui a écrit cet te lettre !
Mon ami a écrit la let tre .
A qui ce tte le ttre a- t - elle étéécrite ?
Elle a été écrite amon pere .
L ecriture de votre ami est - elle
tres mauvaise ?
Non, elle est tries bonne .
E st -fl possible'
écrine une le ttre
avec ce tt e mauvaise plume ?
Non, c’
est impossible .
Est - il possible que le vieux cor
donnier vienne demain?
C e serait possible s’
il n’
était pasboiteux.
Avez ~vous vu cett e nouvelle dansle dernier journal ?
Oui, j’ai vu la nouvelle dans le
journal que le facteur a. apportéce matin.
La nouvelle est - elle positive!
Oui, elle est tout afait vraie.
43
R e ading E xerc ise No . 6 .
Unfi
homm e avait recu une le t tre e t voulait y repondrereceived wished to it to answer
Pour son malheur il no pouvait pas‘
écrire e t il se trouvahis misfortune could writ e . himselffound
dans l ’ embarras . Il alla voir na de se s voisz’
ns e t luiembarrassment went too see his him
demanda conse il. Alle z che z notre vieux sacristain luiasked go to sexton to him
dit lo voisz’
n ;“il écrit souvent des le t tres pour d
’
autre sM id writes often other
g ens. L’homxhe suivit son
A
avis,alla che z lo sacristai
’
n
people followed his advice went to sext on
e t lui expliqua sonfi
embarras . Je suisfache de ne pashim explained his embarrassment sorry of
pouvoir écrire votre le t tre répondit lo sacristain ;to be able to write your answered sexton
suis boiteux.
”L
’hommefutA étonné . Vous
fl
ét es boiteux ,
astonished
dit - il,
“e t cela vous
fi
empéche d c orire ma le t tre ! écrive zsaid that you prevents t o write my write
vous done ave c le pied?”
répliqua. lo sacrist az'
n
then with replied sexton
“j
’
écn s ave c la main m ais m onfi
écriture e st si mauvaisewrite with but my so
que je puis seul la lire . L e s g ensfi
é taientfi
oblig ésde m’
en
that it read people obliged me to
voyer chercher pour que je lusse le s le ttre s que j’
avais
send fetch‘ for that I shouldread which
écrites . Maintenant , comme je suis paralysé , il m’
e st
written now as paralyz ed to me
impossible d’aller trouv er ceux qui ont recu m es le t tresto go to flnd those who received my
e t comme la pe rsonne aqui vous voule zA
écrire habite une
as whom wish to write inhabits
autre ville , elle ne pourrait pas venir dans ma maison.
other could come my
11 est done impossible que je crive votre le t tre,comm e
then maywrite your as
vous m e le demande z .
it. ask
SE VE NTH L E SSON . S ep tieme Le gon.
Q ualifying Adje c t ive s (continued)FORMATION on TH E F EMININE (continued).
R ULE VII.— Adje ctives ending in ewr and derived .
from
present participles by changing ant into awrform the irfemininey changing 7 into se ; as ,
trompeur, de cept ive , trompeuse ; menteu'r, liar, mentcuse.
EXC EPTIONS.— Ve ’ngewr, aveng er ; enchanteur, enchant er; pe
’
cheur,sinner
, and som e adje ctives used only as law t erms as, denwmdeur,
plaint iff&c . , although derived from present participles, have for theirfeminines vengeresse , enchanteresse, pécheresse and demanderesse .
R ULE VIII.— Adje ctives ending in e
’
rieu'r form their feminine by the simple addition
'
ofe to the masculine ; as,mpérieur, superior, supérieure ; inférieur, inferior, inférieu/re
R EMARK .—~Majewr, major; mineur, minor and meilleur
, bett erfollow the same rule .
R ULE IX.—Adje ctives ending in tearnot derivedfrom present
participlesform theirfeminines by changing tcufr into trice as
,
admirateur, admirer, admiratrice ; créateur, creator, créd trice
R ULE X.—Adjectives in cm and ou form their feminines
by changing cm into elle,and on into olle ; as,
beau,beautiful, belle ; nouveau ,
new,nouvelle mou, soft , molle
R EMARK .— beau
,nouveau
,mou,fou (mad) and view :become bel,
ouvcl, mol,fol and vieil before a masculine noun beginning with a
awe l ormute h.
R ULE XI.— The following adj ectives double the final con
sonant and add an e to the masculinemu. void nulle gros larg e grosse épais thick épaissesot silly sotte gms fat grasse las t ired lusse
gentil nice gentille bas low basse expres express expressc
R UL E XII.—The follow ing adje ctives are irregular
aigu“
acute aigue long long tongue favorifavorite favoritefrais fresh fraiche public public publique devin gue sser devineressesec dry seche caduc decrepit caduque ma linmalicious ma ligneblanc whit e blanche turc Turkish turque bénin benign bénignefranc frank franche grec G re ek grecque coi still coite
tiers third tierce he breu Hebrew hebraique traitre treacherous traitresse
Present Indicative ofthe verb donner, to give .
_(F irst C onjugation, including all verbs end ing in er. )je donn I give donné -je , do I give? je no donne
'
as I do no t‘
vetu donn- es, thou givest donnes- tu, dost thou give tune donnesgaskhoudost 1
ggt
iIdonn- e , he gives donne - t - il, does he g ive il ne donne pas, he does not
nous donn- ons, we give donnons~nous, do we give nousne donnonspas ,wedo notvous donn- ez , you give donnez - vous, do you g ive vousas donne z pas , youdo no tils donn- ent , they give donnent—ils, do they give ? ils nadonnent pas, they/ de no t
All adject ive s ending in ya take the dize resis on the e ( i) in the feminine .
(f) The endings have been separatedfrom the root by a hyph enandmust be placedafter the roo t ofany verb ofthe same conjugat ion ; as,
—g‘
e purl- e I speak tnmarch-es. thou walkest : it chant - e . he sings . &c .
answer, réponsef. lady, damef. to - day, aujourd
'
huicle ver
, habile le sson, leconf. to like , to lo ve , aims
cow, vachef. no thing , rien to sing , chantcr
doctor, docteu
'r m. physician, médccin m . t o speak, parlerdress, robef. pre t ty, joli t o walk, marcherexercise , exercice m. quick, vile visit , visitef.g entleman, mmisienr red, rouge well
, bienhealth
,santéf. song , chanson with, avec
ill,malade
E xerc ise No . 7 .
Write thefeminine ofthefollowing adjectivee .
l . Rieur—intérieur —générat eur— jum eau—fou— réclameur ven
gour— majeur— consolateur— beau— sot— blanc— aigu
— malin nul
frais— caduc— contigu—enchant eur-
gentil— jcucur expres se c
bénin gros favori mineur— mou- las—gras— blanc— pécheurépais
—franc— public— devin -meilleur— bas— ambigu— nouveau—long .
We g ive— do I give —
you do not give— do they f. ) give i—he
gives—thou givest—they f. ) do not give— it f. ) g ives— does he give ?—I speak— we like— I give
— do we g ive(l— they (on ) do not give
— do
you g ive— I do not give
—y ou g ive
— she walks— they f. ) sing—she
does not g ive- do we speak
'l— they (m . ) give— doest thou give ?— do
they (m. ) give l— we do not give—do they (m . ) sing ?
— she gives—she
likes.
2 . La dame a eu une visit e . Le m édecin parle bien . Vous mar
chez Vit e . Mon1pere donne une blanched am a
2petite cousine .
Ma voisine est la soeurbjumellea de ce3 m onsieur. D onne z - vous une
meilleure pomme avotre“frere ? Je ne donne pas la grosse poire eu
pe tit garcon . Avez—vous une vacheb grassed'l Nous chantons au
jourd'hui. D onnent - ils leurs5 exercices au professeur? Qu
’savez - vous
dans votre main — R ien. Leur’ vache est malade . Elle chante bien.
We sing to- day with your
8 sist er. Mygcousin walks very quickly.
Mylo dress is white and red. They (m. ) give some larg e apples to the
lit tle girl. She was a great fri end ofmyl oaunt . This1 1 ismyfavorit eb(*lsonga H er
12answerwas ambiguous. D o you give this
13 long lesson
to the lit tle boy? This18 g irl is very clever. You speak well. The
lady is ill she has received14 the visit ofthe physician. My15 mother
gives these“apples and these pears to the little boy and to the pret ty
lit tle girl.
b a indicate that the word marked amust be placedbefore the wordmarked b.1 man ,
my 2 ma ,my 3 cc, this 4 vol/re , your 5 leurs, the ir 6 qu
', what 7 lewr,
the ir 8 your, votre 9 my, man 10 my , ma 1 1 this, c’
1 2 her, ea 1 3 this.ce tte 14 re ce ived, regu 1 5 my, ma 16 these . ces
46
Que st ions on G rammar.
H ow do adjectives ending in ourderived from present participlesform the feminine 1
G ive the adjectives which change our into crease in the feminine .
Which are the adjectives ending in our whichform the feminineby adding e to the masculine 3
H ow do adjectives ending in tear, not derived fi-om present
participles, form the feminine ?H ow do adjectives in an and onform thefeminine 1G ive theforms used instead ofbeau,
nouveau, mou,jou. and vieuz
before masculine nouns beginning with a vowel or a mute h.
G ive the feminine of'
gentil, gros, gras, épais, sot, nul.
G ive th efeminine offrais, sec, blanc, long , public,favori, malin.
What is the sign which must be placed on the final e ofthefeminineform ofadjectives ending in gu in the masculine ?
C onv ersat ion.
Where (on) is the lady !The lady is in the ro om with the
physician .
Is she ill?
No (non); but (M ia) she wishes(desire) to have his (son) adviceon (sur) the health ofher (so )daughter.
Is the doc tor clever
Ye s a g entleman told me (m'a.
dit) that he was very clever.
Do you like the dress ofthis (ce tte)litt le girl ?
Yes, I likeb ita (l’
) (very) much(beaucoup ).
D o you walk quicklyNo , I do not walk very quickly .
Have you seen (W ) my (man)neighbour
's cow?
Yes, it is very pretty it is brownand white .
Have you re ceived (reou) an an
swer from yourbrother 2
Yes, sir ;he is in very goodhealth .
Is he always (to ujours) with your(votre) sister in the country (ala campagne ) 3
N0, he is alone now.
Oh est la dame !La dame est dans la chambre aveclsmédecin.
Est ~elle malade
Non, mais elle désire avoir son
avrs sur la santé de se fille .
Le doc teur est - i] 'habile
Oui ; un monsieur m'a dit qu
'il
était tres habile .
Aimez -vous la robe de ce tte petitelle
Oui je l’
aime beaucoup.
Marchez -vous Vite ?Non
, je ne marche pas tres vite .
Avez -vous vu la vache de mon
voisin
Oui, elle est tres jolie ; elle estbrune et blanche.
Avez -vous reou une réponse de
votre frereOui, monsieur; il est en trés bonnesanté.
Est - il t oujours avec votre sceu'
r ala campagne ?
Non, il est seul maint enant .
47
R e ading E x e rc ise No .
'7 .
Une dame avaitfi
un soin exagéré de sa santé.
a care exaggerate d her
était dans la plus grands- inquie
’
tude,
eu suj e t de la plus
great est uneasiness on the subje ct most
legere indisposition e t envoyaitfi
immédiatem ent chercher
slight sent immediate ly t ofe tch
lo docteur. C e médecin étaitA
unA
homm e tres habile e t
this clever
avait conséquemm ent’
hine grands clientele . I] lui étaitconsequently practice to him
dam: tres désagri‘able d
’etre dérangé inutilement de ses
"
then disag reeable to be disturbed uselessly from his
autres occupations. 11 résolut de corriger cette dame de
other resolved t o correct
se manie . Un jour qu’elle avait remarqué une tache rouge
her mania that remarked spot
sur se moi/n, elle lo Il vint,regarda
on her him made at once call came looked at
la main e t dit : vousfi
ave z tree bien fait de me faire venir
said well done of tcr make come
aujourd’hui.
” La. dame futA épouvantée en l’entendant
fright ened him hearing
parlerA
ainsi et lui demanda si elle était dangereusement
speak thus him asked if dangerously
malade . le moins du m onde , répondit le docteur.
least world answ ered
Mais si vousA
avie zA
attendu jusqu’e demain
, la tache
but if waited t ill to -morrow spot
aurait certainement disparu sans mon traitem ent e t j’aurais
certainly disappeared without any treatment
perdu lo prix de ce tte visite .
” La dame comprit probable
lost this visit understood probably
ment la legon, car le médecin, apreSA
avoir raconté ce tte
for aft er related this
anecdote , ajoutait que la dame ne l’avait jamais fait"
added that never made
appeler, depuis cc jour- la, sinon lorsqu’
elle était réellem ent
call since that there but when really
malade .
48
Erenrn LESSON.Huitiéme Lego".
Qualifying Adje c t iv e s ( continued) .FORMATION on TH E PLURAL .
R ULE —Adjectives form the ir plural according to the rules
givenfor nouns. (Lessons 1 , 2E XC E PTION 1 .
—Adj ectives ending in cu take 3 in the plural
instead oftaking an a: as,—bleu, blue , bleus feu, defunct,feus
2 .—The following adje ctives ending in at take ain the plural
instead ofchanging at into aux ; they are very seldom used in the
fatal fatal glacial
final final jovialand afew others very little used.
D e g re e s ofC omparison.
There are thre e degrees ofcomparison ofadje ctives the
positive, the comparative and superlative.
The positive is the adjective itself, without any comparison
betwe en the noun which it qualifies and any othernoun as,
cet homme est pauvre , this man is poor
The comparative is the degre e which indicates the t a com
parison is made between the obj e ct qualified by the adjectiveand one or several other obj ects ofthe same kind. C omparatives
areformed in French b placing the adverbs plus, more , mains,le ss, aussi, as, before t e adj ectives.
ce t homme estp lus ge’
néreucc que moi , this man is more g enerous than Ieat homme est mains g inéreuz que moi , this man is less g enerous than Ice t homme cst aussi gc
'
nereuzc que moi, this man is as g enerous as IIt may be seenfrom these examples that than, as we ll as as,
at the beginning ofthe second term ofthe comparison is
translated que .
The superlative is the degre e which indicates that the objectualified by the ad
'
ective posse sses the quality in a very high
degre e (superlative a solute) or in the highest degre e (superlativerelative). The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres,fortor bien ,
very before the adje ctive as,
set horn/me est trespauvre , this man is verypoor
The superlative relative isformed by placing the article le, la,les before the comparative ; as,
cct homme est lsplus genereuz , this man is the most g enerouslee homnws les plus sages, the wisest men
Imperfe ct ofthe verb dormer, to give .
Je donn - ais, I gave or Iwas g iving donnais-je ,did l give orwasIgivingtu donn- ais, thou gavest donnais- tu, didst thou giveil donn - ait
,he gave donnait - il
, did he g ivenous donn - ions, we gave donnions-nous, did we givevous donn- iez , you gave donniez -vous, did we g iveils donn- aient , they gave donnaient - ils, did they g ive
50
Que st ions on G rammar.
H ow do adjectivesform the plural?
H ow do adjectives ending in euform the plural?
plural.
G ive some adjectives ending in al which take 3 when used in the
H ow many degrees ofcomparison are there in adjectives?
G ive an example ofan adjective used in the positive ?
What does the comparative ofan adjective indicat e ?
H ow are comparativesformed in French ?What does the superlative indicate ?
H ow is the superlative absolut e ofan adjective formed in FrenchH ow is the superlative relative formed in French ?
C onve rsat ion .
Where does the painter live
(demewre)?
The painterlives in the new street .
Has the painter finished fini)your (votre) portrait ?
Yes, it is (c’est) a very goodpaint
ing .
In which (gue llc) room is your
portrait ?
It is (il est) in myfather’
s room .
When (quand) will you be in (a)L ondon?
[ shall beb therca (g ) at the end
ofthe month .
Will you be in Parisb soon“
I shall be there in twelve (douze)days and your brother in a
month.
wAre his (ses) ribbons blue or red!
The
yiare blue, white (blancs) and
re
4H e will pay (paicra) a large sumofm oney to myfather.
H ow much will he pay?‘
Two thousand (deuxmille)francs.Is he richer than you?
N o , I am much (beaucoup) richerthan he ( lui).
Oh demeure le peintre ?
Le peintre demeure dans la nou
velle rue .
Le peintre a- t - il hni votre portrait?
Oui, c’
est un tres bon tableau.
Dans quelle chambre est votre
portrait ?
Il est dans la chambre de mon
pere .
Quand serez -vous aLondres?
J’
y serai ala fin du mois.
Serez -vous bientbt aParis?
J’
y serai dans douz e jours ct votrefrere dans un mois.
Sesrubanssont - ilsbleus ou roug es?
Ils sont bleus, blancs et rouges.
Il paiera unc grosse somme d’
ar
g ent am on pere .
C ombien paiera~t ~i1?
D eux millefrancs.
Est - ii plus riche que vous?
Non, je suis beaucoup plus riche
que lui.
5 1
Reading E xerc ise No . 8 .
Unfl
homme , tres riche male auss1 avare que riche,
but miserly
désirantA
avoir son portrait , s’
adressa a unA
artiste dohis himselfaddresscd
talent e t lui promit de lo payer g énéreusement si'
10him promised ofhim to pay generously if
portrait était d’
une ressemblance satisfaisante . L e pe intreresemblance satisfactory painter
se m it"al
’
ouvrage e t , en bout de quelquesmois, il avait“
himselfput some
achevé an table au qui no laissait d on"t. désirer
,ui pour
which left nothing desire neither
lo fini du travail, ni pour la re ssemblance qui était parfaite .
nor resemblance which perfect
Mais l’
orig inal essayad’obtenir une diminution sur le prix
but tried ofto obtain on
convenu, e t voyant que l’art ist e était résolu h ne pas c éder,
agreed seeing art ist resolute to y ield
il lui déclara. qu’il pouvait g arder son tableau : car il se
him declared could keep his for . to himself
disait que , ne pouvant le v endre a personne , lo pe intresaid not be ing able it to sell nobody
serait hien oblig é de lo lui donner me illeur marché . Quewell obliged to it him what
fit le pe intre ? 11 fi t encadrer ls portrait , y mitA
une
did painter made frame on it put
inscription :“je su1s 1 01 parc e que je ne paie pas mes
here b ecause pay my
de ttes, e t 19 place. eu de ssus de la. porte de sa m aison.
it placed above his
Or, l’original était connu de tout ls monde e t hientot
’
fl
now known all world soon
était devenu la risée de la ville ent 1ere . Alors lo C roesusbecome derision entire Then
us put résister eu ridicule e t se hata de payer la somme
not could resist himselfhastened to pay
qu’
il avait refusée auparavant .
which . refused before
NINTH L e sson.Neuvzeme L egon.
Qualify ing Adje c t ive s ( concluded) .DEG R E E S or C OMPARISON or ADJE C TIVE S ( concluded) .
There are thre e adje ctives in F rench.
Which form the ir
comparatives and superlatives irregularly, vi z :
bon good meilleurbetter ls meilleur the best
mauvaisb ad ,
J p ire worse,
l_e_p irem w t
petit little, small moindre less, small er le moindre the smallest
The corresponding adverbs are also irregular in the formation ofthe ir comparatives and superlat ive s
bien well mieuac bett er ls mieux the best
mal badly pis worse le p is t hempeu
'
lit tle mains less le mains the least
R EMARK 1 .— The regular comparatives and superlatives ofmau
vais, petit and mal are also used.
Ex. : ce pain- oi est p lus mauvais que l
’
autre , this bread is worse than
the other
cc livre est le pluspetit, this book is the smallest
il écrit plus mal que moi, he writes worse than I2 . It must be noticed that meilleur and mieux are both translated
better; pire andpis, petit and pen,moindre andmoins also translat e the
same English words worse, little and less. In order to know when he
has to use either ofthese words, the student must refer to the definitionsofthe parts ofspe ech. Meilleur, pire , petit andmoindre are adject ivesand consequently must be be used when better, worse, little and less
qualify nouns.
Ex. aspain est meilleur que le votre, this bread is better than yours
ce livre - oi est pire que celui- la, this book is worse than that
set endroit estplus petit que celui- la, this place is smaller than that
mon chapeau est petit, my hat is small
Mieux, p is, peu and mains are adverbs andwill be used when better,worse, little and less det ermine verbs, adjectives or adverbs.
Ex. : il lit mieux que moi, he reads bet t er than I
il_
chantg p lus _
mal que sonfrére, he sings worse than his brotherilparle p eu, be
”
speaks little
nous voyageonsmo ins souvent que vous, we travel less oft en than youPLAC E or ADJE C TIVE S .
The lace ofadje ctives in French is
generally after the
nouns. owever some adjectives, principal y those which are
ofone or two syllables, like bon, grand, beau, joli, pe tit, mauvuis are placed before the noun. As a rule, the longer word
is placed last .
Future ofthe Verb donner, t o give ( continued).je donn- erai, I shall give donnerai-je , shall I givetu donn- eras, thou will give donneras- tu
,wilt thou give
il donn - era, he will g ive donnera~t ~il,will he give
nous donn - erons, we shall give donnerons -nous, shall we givevous donn - erez
, you will give donnere z - vous, will you g iveils donn- eront , they will give donneront - ils
, will they give
53
bed, lit m .
business, afairef.care
, souci m .
clerk, commis m .
climat e , climat m .
c ont ented, content
country, pays m.
dish, plat m.
E xe rc ise No . 9.
l . A bett er dish— the best milk— a worse climat e the worst
weather— a smallerbook— the least care— he speaks better—you sing
the best - she dances badly— she sings worse
— he sings the best— Iwalk
lit tle— we speak less— they (m. ) walk the least— the best workmen— a
bet ter gun— the best dish— a smaller bed— l eat very lit tle .
We shall g ive— will you give l— he will not give— I shall walk
shall we singl— he will love— thou wilt give
— shall I give — we shall
not give— will he speak
l— will he give‘l—youwill not give
— Ishall give—will you sing
l— he will walk— I shall not g ive— will you we lkl— you
will g ive— will they f. ) give — wilt thou give
l— they (m . ) will not
give— she will not sing
— he will give— they (m . ) will give— shall we
g ive— thou wilt not give
— we shall not speak.
2 . Nous donnerons la m eilleurs plume avotrel fils. ll donnera.
la plus mauvaise pomme ason2 frere . Il sera cont ent de3 la moindre
chose . ll avait un4 des meilleurs chevaux. 11 est de la pire espece .
Il mang e peu. Vous donnerez moins a votre1 voisin . Il chante le
m ieux de tous5 ses6 amis. C e t’ oiseau mang e moins que le n6tre9. La
paresse est le pire de tous5 les vices. C ette9maison est pluspetite que la
votre”. Je donnerai le meilleur de mes1 1 fusils 5.mon1 2 cousin. Nous
marcherons moins demain qu’aujourd
'hui. C et7 enfant cst tres pe tit .
She will sing better to -morrow. H e was better than his13brother
She spoke lit tle ofthat“business. She will dance less in that 14 town .
Will you speak a little with me15 She will not speak to your1 6cousin.
1 shall give less to my"new clerk. The apples are bet ter in your
16
country. H e will g ive his18 best grapes to our
19uncle . H is18 reasons
are worse than ever”
. H is13 bed is better than minem. This2 2 work.
man had the least salary . We shall eat little : the least thing will be
sufficient”. Thisfi parcel is very small. H e gives less than 12 5
. G ive
me2 6some be tterwine .
1 votre, your 2 son, his 3 de, with 4 an, one 6 tom , all 6 ses, his 7 set, this8 te notre , ours 9 cette , this 10 le, la votre, yours 1 1 mes, my 1 2 man
,my
1 3 his. son 14 t hat , cette 1 5 me , moi 16 your, votre 17 my, mon 18 his,
see 19 our. no tre 2 0 ever,jamais 2 1 mine , P1 mien 2 2 this, set 2 8 will besuffi ci ent . suflirc. 2 4 this re 2 5 I , mot 2 6 g ive me . donm z -moi .
grape , raisin m.
gun,fusil m .
joy. J'
oicfjoyful, joyeuwkind, especef.laz iness
, paresse
milk , lait m.
o’
clock, heuref.
parce l, paquet mreason
,raison
salary, salaire m .
thing , chosef.to eat , mangert o find, trouver
vice m .
man,ouvrier m.
54
Que st ions on G rammar.
1 . What are the three French adjectives whichform theircomparativesand superlatives irregularly?
G ive the comparatives ofthose three adjectives?What are the three adverbs which are irregular in theformationoftheir comparatives and superlat ives?
G ive the superlative ofthose thre e adverbs?What are the adjectives and adverbs ofwhich the regularfomis ofcomparatives and superlat ives can also be used?
6 . What are the En lish words which are both adjectives andadverbsand are translat e by two different words in French?When must meilleur, pi/re, petit and mo indre be used!When must miente, pie, peu and mains be used?
What is generally the place ofadjectives in Fren0h?What are the adjectives which are placed before the nouns!
C onversat ion.
Where did you find this parcel?
found this parcel in the stree t .Where was it ?
It was before (devant) the door ofmy (man)father
's house .
Was themoney upon (our)thebed?
No ; it was upon the table.
Is your (votre)father’
s clerk con
t entedwith (de) his (son) salary?
Yes ; he is very cont ented.
What (qu’
) have you eat en at
dinner (diner)?
l have eaten some meat, somebread, apples and grapes .
Why (pourquoi) is the workmanso (si) joyful ?
Because he has earned (gagné) agood salary.
At what (guelle) o'clock will you
eat this evening ?
At six (six) o'clock, if
fatherhas (set) arrivedWill yourbrotherbe here (we) :
Ihope (aspen ) so ( que oui l
avezw ous trouvé ce paquet !J
’
ai trouvé ao paquet dans la me.Oh était -il ?
Il était devant la ports de lamaison de mon pere .
L’
argent était- il sur le lit !Non ; il était sur la table.Le commie de votre pétacontent de son salaire ?
Oui fl est tree content.
Qu’
avez -vous mangeadiner!
J ’
ai mange de la.viande, dudes pommes et des raisins.
Pourquoil’
ouvrierest -ilsijoyeuxl
Parcequ’il a gagné nubon salaire.
A quelle heure mangerez-vous cc
soir?
A six heures, si mon p'
ere est ar
rivé.Votrefrere serao t- ilJ'espére que
55
R e ading E xerc ise No . 9.
UnA
ouvrier avait deux fils : l’un d
’
euxA
é tait nn enfanttwo the one them
bon e t dilig ent qui se levait tous les matins a sixA
heure swho himselfraised all at six
l’
autre , qui était pare sseux , re stait dans son lit jusqu’
z‘
t
other who lazy remained unt il
dixA
heure s. Un matin l’
enfant laborieux trouva devantten found before
Ia porte de la maison un paque t contenant dix e cus ;
containing t en crowns
naturellement ii an fut tres joyeux e t apporta l’arg ent:a
naturally ofit brought
son pe re , qui partag ea. se joie . C elui- ci alla dire ctement
his who shared his this one went directly
ala chambre de sesA
enfants e t y trouva ls pare sseux qui
his there found lazy who
étaitA
encore couché . II l e ve ille , lui mantra l’
arg entA
e t
st ill laid down him awoke him showed money
lui dit : “R egards cc que t onfrere a trouvé dans la rue .
him said look that which thy found
Mais pourquoi e st- il si heureux c
’
est parc e qu’
il se levebut why so happy this is because himselfraises
cheque matin‘
a sixA
heures. Tu ne trouveras jamais ricn
every wilt find never nothing
de semblable , puisque , a dixA
heure s, tu e s enc ore dans
of similar since ten still
t on lit .” L e jeune garcon qui n etait pas
A
encore parfaitethy who yet perfectly
m ent révez‘
llé,se frot ta les yeue t répondit
“Vousawaken t o himselfrubbed answered
ave z tout afait raison, mon pére , et je ne vous contredirai
altogether right my you shall contradict
pas. Mais,ne croye z
- vous pas que celui qui a perdu isbut believe he who lost
paquet qui c ont enait sonA
arg ent aurait bien mieux fait dewhich contained his much done to
re st er comme moi dans son lit . 11 se rait plus riche de
remain like meA ,
56
Tums Le sson.D ixiéme L epon.
D e t erm inat ive Adje c t ive s .
NUMERAL AD JEC TIVE S .
Numeral adjectives are oftwo kinds the C ardinalNumeral
adjectives and the Ordinal.C ARD INAL NUME RAL Anancrrvss.
C ardinalNumeral adj ectives merely indicate the quantity; as
vinyl hommes, twenty men ; trente- siz livres, thirty
- six books .
They are called C ardinal be cause they are the principal, those
from which others are derived.
1 Un, one
2 D emo, two8 Trois, three
4 Quo in , four5 C inq, five
6 Sir, six
7 Sept, seven
8 H ail, eight
9 Neuf, nine10 D ias, ten
1 1 Onze, eleven
1 2 D ouze, twelve
13 Treize, thirteen
1 4 Quaterze, fourt een1 5 Quinze, fift e en1 6 Seize , sixteen
1 7 D ix-sept, seventeen
18 D iz -hnil, eight een
1 9 D im-neuf, ninet een2 0 Vinyl, twenty
2 1 Ving i ct un, twenty- one
2 2 Vinyl deux, twenty- two
2 3 Vinyl trois, twenty- three, &c.
30 Trente , thirty31 Trente et un, d:c. , thirty - one, &c.
40 Quarante ,forty50 C inquanie, fifty60 Soixante, sixty70 Soixante -dix
, seventy71 Soixante el onze , seventy
- one
72 Soixante -donze, seventy- two 8m.
80 Quaire -m’
ngt, eighty81 Quntre - vingt
-un,eighty
9 Qualre - ving l ix, n1nety91 Quatre - cingi
- onze , ninety- one
92 Qualre -vingl-douze,ninety- two&o
1 00 C ent, one hundred
1 01 C ent-mi , onehundredandone , &c
1 000 Mille, one thousand[In million, one million
R EMARKS— l . C ardinal numbers are invariable except quatre -vinyl,
e i hty, and cent, hundred, multiplied by anothernumber, when not
followedby anothernumber.—E x . quatre
- tangle hemmes, eightymen
!rois cents soldats, three hundred soldiers.
ExOEPTIONs.- C ent et vinyl are invariable at the end ofdates.
Ex. l’
an mil knit cent , the year 1 800.
2 . Mille, only takes an s in the plural when it means miles.Ex, il y a. trois milles d
’
ici , it is three milesfrom here3. Million and milliard are considered as nouns, and always take
an 3 in the plural.— E x. :de uxmillions d
’
hommee , twomillions
ofmen ; cing m illiards aleframes, five milliards offrancs.4. Mil is used inst ead ofmille in dat es .
Ex. l’
an mil-knit ceni~qualre- vingt-deuat, the year 1882 .
C onjugation ofdonner,to give
3e donn Ishould g ive, ccc . Je ne donneraispas, I should not giveSee for the other persons the C oa litional ofavoir and em as the endings forthat tense are ident ica l in all ve rt s.
Que st ions on G rammar.
Howmany kinds ofnum eral adjectives are there in French ?
What do cardinal numeral adjectives indicate ?
Why are cardinal numeral adje ctives so called?
G ive the first t en numbers in French ?
G ive the numbersfrom eleven to twen ty ?
Translat e thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy ,eighty, ninety one
hundred,one thousand.
Translat e twenty- one , seventy- one, eighty
- one, ninety- one .
Translate twenty- two, seventy‘three , eighty
-four, ninety -five.
Wh ich are the two cardinal numbers which take s in the plural,and when does that alt eration take place
D o vingt and rent ever take .9 in dates ?
Wh en doe s mille take an s in the plural ?
H ow are million and milliard spelt in the plural ?
When is mil used instead ofmille ?
C onversat ion .
How many (combien de)beasts has
your (votre)farmer on hisfarm .
H e has more than (ale) four hundred she ep, about (environ)twenty
- three oxen and fortycows.
Is the bull dead?
Yes, it died (est mart) this (cc)m orning at six o
’
clock.
H ow much (combien) had your
father paid (payé)for this (cet)animal?
H e had paid five hundred andsixty
- three francs.
Is it not (n’est-
_ccpets) 3. great loss
for yourfather?Yes ; but it was g et t ing old.
What (gue l) was its (so n) ag e ?
It was (il avait) nine years and
eight m onths (old).
Wh ere is your (votre) faithfulfriend?
H e is inmy (man)father’
s orchard
under (sans) the large tree .
G ood bye .
C ombien de bét es votrefermier'
a
t - il ase ferme
IIa plus de quatre centsmoutons,environ ving t
- trois bmufs et
quarante vaches.
Le taureau est- i] mort ?
Oui, il est mort cc matin, a sixheures
C ombien votre pere avait - ii payépour cet animal ?
11 avait payé cinq cent - soixantetroisfrancs.
N’
est - ce pas une grande perte pour
votre pere ?
Si ; mais il devenait vieux.
Quel était son ag e ?
11 avait neufans et huit mois.
e st votre ami fidele ?
Il est dans le verger de mon pere,sous le grand arbre .
Adieu.
Re ading E xercise No . 10 .
Us malheur n ’arrive jamais seul. Un jeune homme
misfortune happens never
do province demeurait"aParis pour étudier a l
’université
lived in to study
quand‘
il reoutfi
un jour la visit e d’
un serviteur de son
when re ceived servant his
C omm ent se portent - ils ala maison? demandathemselves carry
l’étudiant . Que lle nouvelle m’apporte z
- vons“Auou‘
ne ,
what to me bring none
répondit le serviteur, si ce n’
e st celle de lamort du chat .
replied servant ifthis that
—“C omm ent,lo chat e st mort ; e t de quoi e st mort e Is
What
pauvre béte ?”
D’
indig estion ; pour avoir mange troll
poor eaten to o much
de viande .—“E t qui done lui avait donné c e tte vian
“e
who then to it given this
Personne , si oe n’est vos pauvres chevaux . No
nobody ifthis your
chevaux aussi sont - ils done m orts E xplique z - vou
also are then
“C ertainem ent ; le s pauvre s an imaux sont morts defa ignocertainly
pour avoir trop port é d’eau. E t aquoi cet t e e au é tait
t oo much carried t o what this
elle destinée — “A ét e indra l incendi'
e de votre maison.
destined to extinguish fire your
“L ’inc endie de notre maison l
”Oui, vraim ent parsuit e
fire our indeed by consequence
de la. negligence de la servant e , qui avaitfi
oublié d’
éteinnire
maidservant who forgotten to put out
les torches.—“D e quelle s t orche s voule z
- vous parler
what wish'
D e cellos qui avaient servi auxfunéraille s de votre mere .
those which served funeral your
Que dite s- vous? ma mere e st mort e I e t vous no me lowhat say my dead
disie z paSA
imm édiatement l
immediate ly
60
E L EVENTH L E SSON. Onzi eme L egon.
Num e ral Adje c t iv e s ( concluded)
ORD INAL NUMER AL Aa crrvns.
Ordinal numeral adjectives are so called because they in
d icate the order or the rank ofpersons or thi They.formed in French by adding iéme to the sardine numbers ; as,
troisieme, thirdformedfrom trois, three diwieme, t enth fromdine, ten.
Exbept :premier, first and second, second.
Unieme can only be used after vingt, trente, quarante, cinqm te,soixa/nte, guatre
—vingt, cent and mille . Thefofneuf, nine, is
chang ed into 9) in newvieme , ninth. The final e ofcardinal numbersis suppressed in ordinal adj e ctives ; se,
—guatrieme, fourth from
quatre, four; trentieme, thirt ieth from trente, thirty ; a u is added
aft er the q ofcinq, five : cinquieme , fifth.
THE F OLLOW ING 1s A L IST or OR DINAL NU MER AL AD JE C TIVE S.
J’remier, - ére (f. first S eiz ieme, sixteenth
D em ienw orsecond, - e (j) D iz —septieme dea ,sevente enth
Troisieme, third [second Vingtieme , twentieth
Qua trieme, fourth Ving t- et -uniem dea , twenty-first
magnum . fifth Trentieme , thirt ieth
S ixieme sixth Quarantiéme , fort iethS eptieme, seventh Cinquantié/me, fift iethH uitiéme . eighth C entieme , hundredth
Neuvieme, ninth C ent -uniérrw, hundred and first.D ixiéme f tenth D enna- cent trente troisieme, two hundred
Onzieme, eleventh and thirty- third
D ouzieme , twelfth Millieme, thousandthTreizieme , thirt eenth Mille deux cent-quatrieme, one thousandQuatorzieme, fourt e enth two hundred andfourth
‘Qnmz/iefme , fift eenth Millionieme, millionth
R EMARKS 1 .— The ordinal numbers which are used in En
indicat e the day ofthe month, or the orderofsuccession amongthe same name in a country, are replaced in French by then umbers, except first which is translat edpremier.
Ex. Charles trois, C harles the third ; Louis quatorze , Louis thefourteenth ; L e trois Mars, the third ofMarch ; le trente at w e
Mai, the thirty- first ofMay ; ZepremierAm , the first ofAugust ;
Charlespremier, C harles the first .
2 . C harle s the fifth (Emperor ofG ermany) is translated CharlesQ uint and Sixtus the fifth (the pope) Sixte Qui nt.
C ompound t enses ofdormer, to give .
They areformed with the auxiliary avoir and the past participle damn- é.
Tai donné &c . , I have given at givenJ
’
avais donné &c . , I had given
I’
aureidonné c . Ishallhavegiven8m. &c . &c.
61
birthday, jour de nais mode st, modeste
by, par [sance m . pain, douleurf.carriag e . voituref. part , partief..thept er, chapitre m . peasant , paysan m.
C harle s, C harles m. profound, profond
happy, heureux sincere , sincereH enry, H enri m. volume , volume m .
illness, maladief. when, quand, lorsque
king , roi m. world, monde m .
line , Zignef. year, anntef.
misfort une , January, Janvier m.
E xe rc ise No . 1 1 .
1 . The second volum e— the sixth house— the ninth chapt er— the
twelfth tree— the fift eenth lett er— the ninet eenth line— the twentieth
year— the thirty - sec ond carriag e
— the forty- fifth book —the fifty - first
birthday— the sixt eenth ofMay the seventy
- first regiment— the
eightieth battalion— the ninety
- third day— the hundredth anniversary
—the thousandth part—the se cond ofJannary— the third ofMarch
the first ofApril- C harles the second— H enry the first .
H e has given— we have spoken
— they (f. had walked— have you
spoken— they (m . ) will not have sung— I shall have g iven
— we should
have spoken— had she walked?— they (m. ) would have given— we shall
have Spoken— has he given
— he would not have given— shall we have
spoken'l— you had sung
— would she have found— we had not found.
we had given— have you walked
— I had not given.
2 . Ma1 deuxieme soeur était avec mon
2 frere aParis. J ’
ai donné
is premier volume avo tre3 cousin . I1 était dans sa4 quarant e- septieme
année . J ’
avais trouvé vo tre3 oncle dans la ving t- septieme avenue . Le
seizieme chapitre de c e5 livre est tres bien écrit“. Vous trouverez celaT
ala vingt-huitieme ligne . La cinquieme maison de ce tt e8 rue est tres
belle . H enri quatre a ét é un tres grand roi de France . Je verrai9
votre3 mere 1010 trois Avril.
We had walked the first day. I shall see1 1 his1 2 aunt (on) the second ofJanuary. I like the t enth chapt er ofthe book ; but I do not
like eleventh . I was then1 3 in myl4 fortie th year. I haveserved” in the ninety
- ninth regiment . It is10 her17 thirty - first birth
day. H ave you read cm the death ofC harles th e first . Ishall come19
(on ) the third ofMarch . F our is the fifth part oftwenty. H e came
yest erday2 1 for the third t ime
”.
1 ma ,my 2 man, my
'3 votre , your 4 sa, his 5 cc, this 6 écrit,writt en 7 cela,
that 8 cette , this 9 vcrrai, shall se e 1 0 le, on t he 1 1 shall se e , vcrrai 1 2 his ,
so. 13 then, alors 1 4 my , ma 1 5 served , serm} 1 6 it is,c'est 1 7 her
, son
1 8 read of, In 19I shall come , Je vicudrai 2 0 he came, ilm venu 2 1 yesterday,.
hier 2 2 t ime ,fo is (f. )The e 0 1 Ze is not e lided before onzc and onu eme.
F ebruary , F e’
vrier m.
March , Mars m .
A ril, Avril m.
ay, Mai m .
June,Juin m .
July, Juillei m.
August , Aonl m .
Sept ember, Septembre'
Oct ober, Octobrcm . Pm .
November, Novembre
D ecember,D écemb7-
em .
62
Que st ions on G rammar.
Why are ordinal numeral adjectives so called?
H ow are ordinal numbersformedfrom cardinal numbers in French!
Translate first and second , twenty-first and thirty-second.
Translatefow th, fifth and ninth.
Translate third, sixth, seventh, eighth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thir
6. Translate twentieth, thirtie th, siz tieth, seventieth, seventyfiret,
7. How are ordinal numbers used in Englishfordates translated into
8. What are the num eral adjectives which must be used in Frenchafternames ofkings t o indicate their order ofsuccession!
9. Translate Charles the first ; the first ofMarch .
10. Translate Charles the fifth (Emperor ofG ermany).
C onversat ion .
Have younot seen (vu)your (votre)brother C harles in his (3a) carriage
No, I have not seen my (man)brotherC harles but I have seenmy brother H enry.
How old are (qnel age ant) your
(vos) two brothers?
They are twins (jumeaux) andwill be (awront) sixt eenans) (on) the third ofMarch .
And you ; how old are you (queldge aw e -vous)?
I shallbe (7 aurai) sixty -fouryears(on) the twenty- eighth ofAprilnext .
The peasant’
s griefse ems (semble)very profound. What is thematterwith him (qu
'
a - t- il)?
He lost (perdn) his daughter (on)the second ofJanuary.
Was he not very happy(auparavant)
Yes, he was (c'elait) the happiest
man in the (flu) world.
INavez -vviuspasvuvotrefrére Charles dans sa voiture ?
Non , je 11 a1 pas vu mon frereC harles, mais j
'ai vu mon fi'ere
H em'i.
Quel ag e ont vos deuxfreres?
Ils sont jumeaux et auront seizeans ls trois Mars.
E t vous ; quel ag e avez -vons l
J’
aurai soixante -
qnatre ans, lovingt
-huit Avril prochain.
La douleur du paysan semble trés
profonde . Qu’
a- t - il?
Il a perdu as fills le deux Janvier.
N e tait - il pas tres heureux auparavant ?
Si, c e tait l’
homme le plus heureuxdu monde .
(53
Reading E xerc ise No . 1 1 .
Uh paysan se croyait cert ainementA
e l’abride s capric es
himselfbelieved certainly shelter
de lafortune , lorsqu’an jour se vache fut enlevée soudm
’
n
his carried away suddenly
par une maladie épidémique . L e pauvre homme se déso
himselfdeso
lait de cc malheur, quand
fi
ilfutfl
afiligé d’un malheur bien
lated this afflicted much
plus terrible encore : se femm e mourut . 11 so disait qu’
ilstill died himselfsaid
no se consolerait jamais d’
une pert e semblable . Il recut"
himselfwould console never rece ived
alors la visite de tous les principaux’
habitants du villag ethen all
qui venaient lui ofl'
rir leurs c ondoléance s mais pre squewho came him to ch
‘
er t heir condolence s nearly
tous, apresa
avoir épuisé leurs me illeursfi
arguments,finis
all after exhausted their finished
saientA
en lui rappe lant qu’
on no saurait re ster seul dansby him remembering one not would know to remain
c c monde , lorsqu’on est
“encore j eune e t vigoureux . L
’un
still vig orous one
avait plusieursfilles parm i lesquelles il pourrait choisir,several among whom could select
l’
autre avaitA
une soeur qui serait‘
heureuse de devenir laother who to become
mere de ses enfants celui- la, une parente qui dirig erait"
his that one relative who would dire ct
am erve z'
lle le ménag e de notre v euf. Il le s laissa par
marvel household our widower them allowed
ler ; mais ilfaisait remarquer plus tard a l’
un de se sfi
am is
made observe later on his
qu’il valait mieux dans ce pays
- lape rdre se femm e qu’une
was worth that there to lose his wife
vache : car chacun lui avaitfi
ofi‘
ert de remplacer laprem i e re :
for every one him offered to replace former
tandis que personne n’avait parlé de la derm e re .
while nobody latter
64
Twrrrrn Le sson.D ouzieme L epon.
D em onstrat iv e Adje c t ive s .
D emonstrative adje ctives are so called because they point to
a person or thing .
D emonstrative ad'
e ctives, which always pre cede nouns,must no t be confounded with demonstrative pronouns whichlike any o the r pronouns stand inside ofnouns. In Frenchdiffe rent words are used when adj e ctives or pronouns, to translatethis, that, these , those.
The D emonstrative adj e ct ives are as followsMace . Sing . F em. Sing. Pl. ofboth Gend.
ce, cet, this or that cette, this or that ces,these or those
R EMARK I.— C'e is used before masculine nouns beginning
with consonants and set before masculine nouns beginningwith vowels or h mute ; as,
ce chien, this or that dog ; ce héros, this or that herocet animal, this or that animal ; cet homme, this or that man
Il .—When it is ne cessary to make in French the same
dist inction which is made in English by using this or tha t,the adverbs ci or ld are placed after the nouns which are per
ceded by 06, act, cette or ces; as,
06 cheval- oi, this horse ce cheval- la, that horse
cet homme - ct, this man ; ce t homme - la, that man
ce ttefemme - ci,this woman ; ce ttefemme - la
,that woman
ces maisons - oi, these houses ; ces maisons- la, those houses
C i refers to the person or thing nearer to the speaker, to
to the farther.
The hyphen must always be placed be twe en the nouns
and the adverbs ci and la.
C onjugat ion ofthe verb finir, t o finish.
Verbs ending in ir be long to “b
e se cond conjugation ofregularw ver 8 .
Present Indicative .
je fin- is, Ifinish finis-je , do Ifinishtu fin- is, thoufinishest finis- tu
,doest thoufinish
il fin - it , he finishes finit - il,does he finish
nous fin - issons, we finish finissons- nous, do we finishvous fin - isse z , youfinish finissez - vous, do youfinishils fin - issent , they finish finissent - ils, do they finish
66
Que st ions on G rammar.
W hy are demonstrative adjective s so called?
What is the difference between a demonstrative adjective and a. demonstrative pronoun?
3. Is there any difference in English be tween demonstrative adjectivesand demonstrative pronouns?
What are the demonstrative adjectives in French ?When is cet used before a masculine noun instead ofce ?
LWhat are the adverbs which are placed after French nounsprecededby cc , cet, ce tte , ces , in order to make a distinction between this andthat or the se and those ?
Wh at does ci refer t o ?What does la refer to ?What is the sign which must always be placed between ci ox laand the noun?
C onve rsat ion.
What ( quels) animals did you see
( avez - vous vus) in the meadow ?
I saw (have seen) two horses andt en cows in this meadow.
Was the peasant with his ( son)horse in that meadow?
Yes ; he wasb therca (y) with his
horse and his ( ses) cows.
Have you sent ( envoyé) a messen
ger to the mast er ofthis mea.
ow ?
Yes, I have sent the peasant’
s
neighbour.
\What did the master say ( dit) tothis man?
The master was very angry and
sai'
d( dit) that the peasant wouldbe punished (puni) for puttinghis cows in this meadow .
‘What did the peasant answer ( répondit) to this m enace ?
The peasant"l answer was very in
so lent .
But what was his answer?
H e said that he would cut off( coupcrait) the mas ter
’
s ears.
Qucls animaux avez - vous vusdans“la prai ri e ?
J ’
ai vu deux chevaux e t dix vachesdans cette prairie .
Le paysan était - il avec son chevaldans cette prairie ?
Oui il y était avec son chevale t ses vaches.
Avez - vous envoyé nu messager aumaitre de ce tte prairie ?
Oui, j’
ai envbyé le voisin du paysan.
Qu’
a dit ls maitre acot homme ?
Le maitre était dans une grands
colere e t a dit que ls paysan
serait puni pour avoir inis ses
vaches dans cett e prairie .
Que répondit le paysan h cette
menace ?
La réponse du paysan fut treeinsolente .
Mais quelle fut sa réponse ?Il dit qu 11 couperait les oxe illesdu maitre .
6 7
Re ading E xerc ise No . 1 2 .
Uh g entilhomm e , qui possédaitfl
une grande propriét é ,nobleman who possessed a estate
remarquait depuis long t emps que de s animaux c trang e rs
remarked since long time strang e
étaient con .luits dans se s paturag e s e t y faisaien tfi
un
conduc ted his pastures there made
dégat c onsidérable . Il é tablitA
une surve illance e t bientot
damag e established wat ch soon
on vm t lui dire le nom d’
un paysan qu’
onfi
avait surpris
they came him to say whom they surprised
an mom entfi
ou il sortaitA
ave c son cheval de la prairiewhere came out his
L e g entilhomm e charg e a l’
un de se s serviteurs d’
alle r che znobleman charged his servants to go t o
lui e t de le prévenir que la premie re fois que son chevalhishouse him to inform t ime his
se rait trouv é paissant dans le pré il lui fe rait couper la
graz ing meadow t o him wouldmake cut
queue . Mais ls paysan réponditA
au m e ssag er Je me
tail answered myself
tiens pour av erti mais tu diras a ton maitre que s’
il faithold warned wilt say makes
c ouper la que ue am an cheval , je lui coupe rai lesfi
ore ille s.
cut off tail my him shall cut
L e m e ssag er rapporta la réponse au g e nt ilhomm e quireported nobleman who
entra dans une violente colere ; il envoya che rcher lo paysanentered sent tofe tch
e t lui dit C omm ent ose s- tu m e faire transme ttre une
him said H ow darest to me make transmit
réponse aussi insolente e t m e m enacer?”
so me t o threaten
menac e r, Monsieur ; répliqua le paysan.
to threaten replied
perm e t tre z de vousfaire observe rque vous vousA
é te s trampé .
will permit t o make observe yourself deceived
11 e st vrai que j’
ai dit que si Monsieur c oupait la queue desaid ifthe g entleman cut off tail
mon cheval, je lui coupe rais lesfi
oreilles ; mais j ’
ai voulu
my h im would cut ofi‘ wished
parle r desfi
oreille s de c e de rnierlatt er
68
THIRT E ENTH L E SSON. Tre iz zeme L egon.
P o sse ssiv e Adje c tive s .
Possessive adj ectives are so called be cause they indicate pos
session. The follow ing is a list ofthem .
S in. Masc. F em. Plu. ofall G en. Sin. Masc. F em.
man ma mes, my notre
to n ta les, thy votre
son sa ses, his, her, its leur
R EMARK 1 .- Mon, ton, son are used instead ofma, ta, sa be
fore feminine nouns beginning with a vowel or an h mute .
Ex . men (ime , my scul ; ton histoire , thy history ; son image, his image .
II.—In French possessive adj ectives ofthe third person take
the gender ofthe noun which they de termine , and not as in Eu
glish, the gender ofthe possessor.
Ex. : sonfrere , her brother; sa soeur, his sist er.
III.— Possessive adjectives as well as any otherde terminative
adje ctives must be repe ated before every noun.
Inde finit e Adje c t ive s .
Indefinite adjectives are so calledbe cause they de terminenounsin an indefinite manner.
They are asfollowscertain
, certain, some chague , every, eachnul, no meme, same
tout, every, all, whole quelque, some , anyaucwn, not any, not one plusieurs, several
uh tel, such a uh . . .quelconque ,
que l, which , what difierents, differentmaint, many a divers, diverse , various
R EMARK I.— Nul
,aucun and chaque are never used in the
plural : therefore , the noun thatfollows them must be also in the
singular. Ex. Je n’
ai aucun am i,I have nofriends.
Ifit were ne cessary t o translat e the noun in the plural, no would
be translat edpas de . Ex. : Je n’
ai pas de maisons, I have no houses.
II.—Plusieu'rs
,dife’
rents,and divers are never used in .the sin
gular plusi eurs does not chang e in the feminine .
III. U h quelconque any whatever, be comes in the plifral
quelconques.
IV.—The plural oftout is tousfor the masculine
,and toutes
for thefeminine . Toutm eans everywhen no article ordet erminative
adj e ctive is placed before the noun . It m eans the whole when the
noun,being pre ceded by an article or de t erminative adje ctive , is
in the singular. Ex . : Tout homme, every man ; toute la ville, thewhole town ; tous mes amis, all myfriends.
69
aft er, aprés fault
,faulef.arm
, bras m . floor,étag e m .
army, a'rm ée fork,fou'
rche ltef.
bat t le , bataillef. head, tétef.cannon - ball, boulet m . intere sting , intéres subject, sujel m.
carpent er, cha’rpent'ler leg , jambef. [sand que en , reinef,
city, citef. [m . member,membre m . wood
,bats m .
difficulty, dzfi culte’f. mouth, bouchef. wound, blessure
E xe rc ise No . 13.
1 . My book—my sister— my soul— my arms— thy brother— thy
aunt— thyfriend f. — thyfeet— his pencil— her dog— its head— his
pen— her house— its mouth— her ne edle— his eye s—herhands— its legs
— ourfather— our army— ourmembers— our boots— your coat— your
dress— your bed—your rooms
— their uncle— their aunt— theirchildren— theirfaults— certain men— certain rules— certain friends certain
wom en— no boy— no girl
— no towns— no village s— every tre e every
city— the whole nation— all the words— all my sist ers— such book
such let ter such knives— suchforks— which dish— whichplat e—which
kings—~which que ens
— many a. man— many a daught er— many soldiers
—many flowers— each volume— each pag e— the same floor— the same
house— the same gloves— the sam e stre e ts— som e friend— some cousin
(f. - some men— some ladies— several hamle ts— several cities— any
book whatever— any plant what ever— any hats whate
v e r— any persons
what ever— different subjects different reasons di » a te climat es
diverse rivers.
finished— did I finish —you did not finish— we built— did
we finish — he finished— I did not finish— did he build — we did not
finish— I buil t— I finished— did they finish — they (m . ) built— didyou
finish —thou didst not finish— you finished— we did not build— did he
build'
,l— didst thou finish — she did not finish thou finishedst —they
(m . finished— you built— they (f. did not finish— did he finish?
2 . Nous aimons votre famille . Leur histoire est intéressante . I]
a maint ami dans notre ville . Il finissait sa legon. J ’
ai été dans différents villag es. Il habite 1 dans la meme rue que
2 moi3. Ses yeux
sont bleus. Sa bouche e st petit e . Ses mains sont blanches. Nous
n’
avons pas de chambres dans notre hotel. Nos gants sont plus beaux
que ceux“de notre cousin .
The houses ofour villag e are large . The whole book is int eresting .
What lesson have you learnt 5 ? All the dishes were very good. Show
me your hat .I have some friends in this town. I find certain rules
very difficult .
Exercise on the imperfect offinir, t o end (see Supplement , page
1 habile, lives 2 que , as 3 not , I 4 cewc, those 5 learnt , apprise
70
Q ue st ions o n G ramm ar.
Why are possessive adjectives so called?
G ive the masculine singular ofpossessive adject ives?G ive the feminine sing ular ofpossessive adje ctives?G ive the plural ofpossessive adjectives ?H ow are my, thy, his. her,
fits translated before a feminine noun
beginning with a vowel or k mute ?
Do possessive adje ctives ofthe third person agree in gender withthe possessed object orwith the possessor?What are the words which must be repeat ed before every noun ?t y are indefinite adj e ctives so called?
Which are the indefinit e adjectives that are never used in the
plural
What indefinite adjective is never used in the singular?What is the plural masculine oftout?When does tout mean whole when every ]
C onv e rsat ion .
Who ( qui) are the soldiers who
( qui) are on the second floor?They are ( cc sont) my cousins.
What is the co'
Jr oftheir coats ?
They are blue .
Do they belong ( appartiennent- tls)to the Englishb armya
N0 ; they are French ( F raneats) .Who (qui) has made (fail) thistable ?
The carpent er.
Is the wood good?
Yes ; it is very good.
D o you find anydiffi cultywhat everin this grammar ( gramma ire)
No , I find this grammarvery easy(facile) ; the rule s are explained( eryaliqué es) with clearness
( clarté) and simplicity.
H ow many ( C ombien de) mistakeshad you in your lesson ?
Twelve .
H ave you learnt (appris) any fore ign languag e ?
Yes ; I have learned all Europeanlanguag es.
Qui sont les soldats qui sont au
second étag e?
C e sont mes cousins.
Quelle est la couleur de leurshabits?
Ils s'
ont bleus.
Appart iennent - ils a l’
armée an
g laise ?
Non ; ils sont Francais.
Qui afait cet te table ?
Le charpentier.
Le bois est - il bon?
Oui ; il est tres bon.
Trouvez - vous une difiiculté quelconque dans cet te grammaire ?
Non ; je trouve ce t te grammairetresfacile ; les regles sont ex
pliguées avec clarté e t simpliC i te .
C ombien defaute s aviez -vous damvotre devoir?
D ouz e .
Avez - vous appris quelque langueetrangere ?
Oui ; j’
aiappris tout es les laugucsein
'opeennes.
7 1
Reading E xerc ise No . 1 3 .
Uh capitaine avait pe rdu une jambe dansA
une bataz’
llecaptain lost
C’
é taitA
un tres bonA
ofiic ier, e t il é tait tre s aune de s so ldatsH e
e t tre s e st im é de son g énéral . C ependant c c g en e’
ral le
esteemed However
considérant comme incapable de se rviral’av enir, lui écriv it
considering to serve future him wrote
pour le prévenir qu’il allait luifaire obtenir une pension.
him t o inform was going him to make obtain
Mais le capitaine en fut tresfi atfl ig é at an m ols apre s,captain ofit was afflic ted
lorsque sa blessure fut g uérie , il se fi tfaire une jambe decured t o himselfmade tomake
bois e t alla che z le g énéral pour lui demander de modifi e r
went to him to ask
sa decision “Je peux auss1 bien marche r,
”luidit - il
,ave c
can we ll to him said he
ce tt e jambe art ifi c ie lle que je lo faisai s av e c m a j ambeartificial as it did
naturelle . D’
az’
lleurs, sije vai s au c ombat , c’
e st pour menatural Moreover if g o t o the it
bat tre e t non pourm e sauve r.
” L e g énéral c onsentit apre s
fight not myselfto save consent ed
be aucoup d’
hésitat ion e t le capitaine rej o ignit son reg im ent .
captain rejoined
Peu de t emps apre s, ce reg im ent fut eng age dans une
Lit tle engaged
batatlle e t notre ofii cier se c onduisaitA
ave c 'wn courag e
himselfconduct ed
hér0 1que , lorsqu’
un boule t lui coupa sa jambe de bois ; il‘
heroical ball t o him out
fut renve rsé e t les soldat s qui se t rouvaient pres de lui,was thrown down who themselves near him
appe lérentA
un chirurg ien.
“Taise z - vous done , leur dit’“
called surg eon Be silent then t o themsaid
alors le capitaine ,“ce n
’
e st pas an chirurg ien qu’
il me
then captain it surgeon that . to me
faudrait ; envoye z-m oi an charpent ie r.
would b e necessary send me
72
F ounrnnurn L e sson. Quatorzteme Legon.
The Pronoun .
There are in French six classes ofP'ronouns, viz : Personal,D emonstrative, Possessive, R elative, Interrogatvve and Indefinite.
Pe rsonal Pronouns .
They are so called because they are used to designate persons.There are three persons : the 1st person who speaks, the 2 nd toWhom one speaks, and the 3rd ofwhom one speaks.
Personal ronouns are conjunctive, that is to say used in con
nection with the verb, or disjut Je used separatelyfrom'
the verb.
Corq’unctive pronouns are always placed before the
junctt’
me, which may be used without a verb, are , when used witha verb, placed after it.
Personal pronouns are asfollowsC onjunc tive Pronouns.
1 st Person. 2na Person. Mas. 3rd Person. FemNom. je, I tu, thou jtl, he elle
, shefling. Ace . me , me te , thee te
,him la, her
Dat . me , to me te, t o thee lui, to him lat, to her
Nom. nous, we vous, you ils, they elles, they
PI111 . Acc. nous, us vous, you les
, them les, them
Dat . nous, ofus vous, t oyou leanto them law , to them
D isjunc t ive Pronouns .
lst Person. 2 nd Person. Mas. 3rd Person. Fem.
Sing . moi, 1, me tot , thou, thee lat , be , him elle , she , her
Plur. now , we , us vow , you ease , they, them elles, they, them
There are besidesfour more personal pronouns ofthe thirdperson, viz : se, sot, en, y.
Se, himself, herself, themselves, one ’s self, is conjunctive and
always precedes the verb .
Ex. : il seflatte , he fiatt ers himself; ils se trompent, they deceivethemselves ( they make a mistake).
Sci, one’s self, is disjun ctive and
‘
used after the verb .
Ex. : ne penser qu'a 3012
, to think only ofone ’
s self.enerally translates ofhim, ofher, ofit, ofthem and is
princip y used in speaking ofthings.
Ex. : nous en parlons, we speak ofit .Y generally translate s to it, to them and can only be used in
speaking offten refers to it.acts ofverbs, always precede
‘
sh em in French.
Ex. : it me connaft, he knows me ; nous les verrons, we shall see them.
EXC EPTION.—Personal pronounsfollow the verb in the Imperative
and disjunctive pronouns are used, except for pronouns ofthe 3rdperson
—D onnez -moi, g ive me ; depeche- tot, has ten ; parlez - lui, speak
to her; elites- leur, say to them .
Q uestions on G rammar.
How many classes ofpronouns are there in French !
Why are personal pronouns so called?
What are the three persons?
How many kinds ofpersonal pronouns are there ; what are they?What is the place ofconjunctive and disjunctive personal pronouns?
G ive the personal pronouns ofthe 1 st person?G ive those ofthe 2 nd person?G ive those ofthe 3t d person?What is the meaning ofthe pronouns so and sat and what are theirrespective places?
What is the meaning ofan and y?
What is the place ofpersonal pronouns when objects ofthe verb?When are they placed after the verb?
C onve rsat ion.
When will the baker come (viendm )?
The baker will come this aft ernoon.
Is the bread which he sells good?
Yes, it is good and cheap.
Is the new grocer's Shep open
(ouvert)?
No the carpent ers and joinershave not ye t (pas encore) finished their work.
5 When do you thinkthing will be ready?
It will be diffi cult t o g et everything rcady (to prepare everything ) before t o -morrow .
Have you been in the park thisafternoon?
No, the wind blew (sonfilaz‘
t) verystrongly.
Have you heard (entemiu dire)anything about the (an wjet dela) st orm ?
Yes ; they say (on dit) that manyes ofglass have be en broken{that
Quaml viendra Ie boulanger?
Le boulanger viendra cett e sprigs
midi.
Le pain qu’
il vend est- il hon?
Oui, il est bon e t bon marché.Le nouveaumagasin d
’
épicier est.
il ouvert ?
Non, les charpentiers e t lesmenui
siers n’
out pas encore fini leur
travail.
Quand ensez -vous no t out soit
p
‘Ire
II sera difficile de tout prepareravant demain .
Avez - vous été dans ls pare cette
apres-midi ?
Non, lo vent soufliait trésfort .
Avez -vous entendu dire quelque
chose an sujet de la tempete ?
Oui ; on dit que beaucoup de'
carreaux ont e té cassés.
75
R e ading E x e rcise No . 14 .
On rac ont e l’
ane cdote suivant e e u suj e t de Thomas
One relat es following subje ctMore , L ord C hanc e lier d
’
Ang le terre . Au comm encem ent
More C hancellor E ng land
de sa carrie rs,il habitait
A
une maison sur la t errasse decareer inhabited
laque lle il se promenait souvent an j our qu’il se livrait
“
which walked that gave up
a ce tt e récréation,onfou que I
’
on g ardait dans la maison
lunatic whom, , one kept
voisine échappa a la surveillance de se s gardiens e t saute
next escaped keepers
de lafenetre sur la te rrasse . Apercevant le chanc e lier
from Perceiving chancellor
il courut v ers lui e t ls prenant par ls bras Vousran towards taking
saut ere z dans la rue , lui dit - il d’
une voix furieuse ,said
vous y précipit e rai. L e chance lie r ls regarda e t v it queint o it shall precipitat e chancellor regarded saw
c e taitA
unA
homm e d’
une force bien supérieure a la sie nnethis very his
at, qu’
il y aurait folie a che rche rA
a se défendre . MalsA
ilt here would be madness try one
’
s selfto defend
ne pe rdit pas sa presence d’
esprit . Je suis pret , dit - illost said
“afaire c e que vous m e demande z , mais perm e tt e z -m oi dedo that which ask allow
v ousfaire obse rve r que c e la ne présent e aucune difiiculté .
make observe that presents
11 serait beaucoup plus diffic ile de saut er de la rue sur
difficult
c e t te te rrasse , e t c’
est c e que je vous propose de faire .
it that which propose t o do
L e fou réfi échitA
un instant d’
un air soupconneux, puislunatic refle ct ed suspicious then
éclata de rire e t consentitA
a1a proposition. L e chanc e lier
burst ofto laugh consented chancellor
s’
empressa d’
en profi ter e t échappa de ce t te mam e re a co
hastened to profit manner
pre ssant dang e r
pressing
-1
C}
F IF TE ENTH Lnsson. Quinziéme L egon.
Pe rsonal Pronouns ( concluded) .
R EMARKS . 1 .—Persona1 pronouns when preceded by prepositionsfollow
the verb. Disjunctive pronouns are used then.
Je parle de vous. I speak ofyou . It m’
nt avecmoi. H e came withme.2 . When the verb has two personal pronouns ofdifferent persons as
complements, one in the ac cusative case (direct object ) and theother in the dative (indire ct object ), they are both placed before theVerb, in the order ofpriority ofpersons, that is to say, the pronouns ofthe 1 st and 2 nd persons before those ofthe 3rd.
Il in e le dit . H e says it to me . Je t e lo donne . I give it to thee.
3. Ifthe two pronouns were ofthe 3rd person, the direct object wouldbe placed before the indire ct object .
Je le luienvoe‘
e . Isendtt tohim. Nouslesleurdonnons.Wegive themtothem.
4. Ifthe verb be in the imperative the direct object always precedesthe indirect object .D onne z—le moi. G ive it to me . Frétez - lo leur. Lend it to them.
5. When the verb being in the imperative is accompaniedby anegationthe pronouns precede the verb and are placed respectively, as ex
plained before (R . 2 and
Ne me le donncz pas. D o not'
ve it to me .
Ne le leurprétez pas. D o not end it to them.
6 . Se , which generally translates himself, herself, itself, themselves,one
’
s self, also translat es each othe r, one another, when placed inEnglish aft erreciprocal in the 3rd person plural.
ILs s’
aimcnt tendrement . They love each other t enderly.
Ils s’
écrz'
ront. They will write to each other.
7 . E n which generally translat es ofhim, ofher, ofit, ofthem, alsotranslates the same personal pro nouns, preceded by other prept ions when these preposit ions ought to be translated in French bythe preposition dc.
J'en s uis content. I am satisfied with it .
Son succes en depe nd. His success depends upon it.
8 . E n also t ranslates some or any when placed aftera verb.
J"en at
“
. I have some. Je n’
en at pas. I have not any.
9. E u is sometimes an adverb ofplace and translatesfrom thence.
J’
cn arri ve. I arrivefrom thence.
1 0. En is a preposition when preceding a noun ora present participle .
En France . In France . En lisant . By reading .
1 1 . Y which generally translates to it, to them, also translates the same
pronouns preceded by other prepositions, when these prepositions
ought to be translated by the preposition a.
J'
ypense . 1 think ofit . Il y demeure.
l’
is often an adverb ofplace and translates there.[Iy est. H e is there.
1 3. En and 3] occur some times together, y, adverb always receding en,
pronoun ,which is always placed immediately before i; e verb.
Il Y en a. H e has smne the re.
Verbs which imply an idea ofreciprocity as, se saluer, to salute one another,se hafnto hate each other. 830.
77
among , parmi eve , oeillef. lip , levref.to advise
,conseiller t o fall , tomber place , endroit m .
bank , bard m . fish , poisson m . re lat ion , parent m .
betrothed,fia
'
ncéef. fing e r, doig t m. research , recherchef.to burn , braler fle sh , chairf. ring ,
baguef.
to call , appeler girl , fi llef. t o send ,envoyer.
to commence , oommen guest , con/vic e m. sign ,
signe m .
cer incredible , tncroyable strange , étrange
despair, desemotr m. to lend , preter token , gage m .
dinner, dinerm.
E xe rc ise No . 15 .
l . WVe speak ofyou.—I will come
1 with them (m .— You will be
there without me .—H e gives it t o m e .
— H e lends it to us. I shall g iveit t o thee —We shall lend them to you.
— I give it to him .—We shall
give it to her.— I shall lend it to them (m.
— I should lend them to
them (f. —G ive them t o us.— Lend them to him .
— D o not give them
to us.— D o not send them to him .
— H e burns himself. — She will burnherself.— They (m . ) would burn themselves.
— They (f. burned them
selves.— They (m . writ e 2 to each other.
—They (f. hated3 one another.
—H e speaks ofhim .— We shall speak ofhen— H e would speak ofit .
—We spoke ofthem .—H e struck“his dog with it .
'
— You will have
some — H e had not any .—H e has arrived5from thence — They are in
town — You will learn6 it by speaking— H e alluded7 to it .— My hat
hangs8from it . —We were there — We have some there .
Je le lui dirai9demain. Nous vous le donnerions avec plaisir.
D onnez - lo lui avec son nouveau livre . Ne le leur prétez pas si vous
ne voulez10 pas le perdreu
. 118 so prétent de l’
argent . J ’
en recois
souvent (les let tres. J ’
euferai1 2 un paquet pour votre fr‘
cre . Oil est
vo tre ami? Il est en France ave c sa mere . 11 apprend13 beaucoup en
lisant 14 ces livres . 11 y va15aujourd’
hui avec ses cousins. Y en avez - vous?
We shall send1 6 him some . G ive it to him and he will g ive it to
me to -morrow aft ernoon. We shall lend them t o you. I have some
flowers ; have you any ? Where doe s he go"? D o you receive any
let t ersfrom them ? Have you anyfriends there ? N018, I have not
any there . D o not say19 it t o them . I have not any relations in
France , but I have some here . D o they writ e2 0
often t o each other?
They writ e to one another every month . Will you give it to them ?
1 will corne , viendrai 2 writ e , écrivent 3 hat ed ,hatssaient 4 struck
, frappcu5 has arrived, est arrive 6 will learn , apprendrez 7 alluded ,faisait allusiow8 hangs, est penda 9 dirai
,shall say 10 ooulez , wish l l perdre, t o lose
1 2 ferai, shall make 13 apprend ,learns 14 lisant, reading 1 5 11a, goe s
1 6 shal l send , enve rrons 1 7 does he g o,'va- t- il 1 8 no , non 19 say, dites
2 0 do they write , écrivent—ils
As the exercise s ofthis lesson necessitate the use ofseveral verbs , we havethough t preferable not to g ive here any special exerC ise on a new t ense oftheverb recevoir.
78
Que st ions on G ram m ar.
1 . What is the place ofpersonal pronouns when preceded by prepo.sitions?
What are the respective laces ofthe two personal ronouns, one
being direct obje c t and t e other indirect object oft e verb, whenthey are ofdifferent persons ?What are their places when they are both ofthe 3rd person?What are their places when the verb is in the Imperative ?
How are they placed when the verb being in the Imperative isaccompanied by a negation ?
What is the meaning ofse before re ciprocal verbs?Does an always translat e pers onal pronouns ofthe third personpreceded by the preposition of?What are the otherm eanings ofen?D oes 31 aways translate personal pronouns ofthe 3rd person preceded by the preposition to ?
What is the othermeaning ofy?What are the respective places ofy and en when occurring togetherbefore the verb?
C onve rsation.
You'
have a fine dog ; who gave itto you?
My cousin C harles gave it to me ;but I shall re turn it to him.
Have you also some binds?
Yes, I have some.‘
How many have you (ofthem)?I have six (ofthem).Have you been in the garden ?
they are there .
No, I have not been there .
You have two canaries will you
(mules-vous) give me one (ofthem)?
pleasure ; but you will not
give it to anybody.
No ; ifmy best friend should ask
( demande d) me (for)it, Iwouldnot give it to him.
You told ( ave: dit) me that youhad somefriends in Paris :haveyou still any ofthem there ?
Yes, I have still two ofthem there .
Vous avez un beau chien quivous l
'a. donné?
Mon cousin C harles me l’
adonné ;mais ie le lui rendrai.
Avez - vous aussi des oiseaux?
Oui, j’
en ai.
C ombien en avez -vous?
J’
en ai six.
Avez - vous été dans le jardin? ilsy sont .
Non, je n’
y ai pas été.
Vous avez deux canaris; voulezvous m
’en dormeran?
Avec plaisir; mais vousne lo don
nerez apersonne.
Non ; si mon meilleur ami me le
demandait,je ne laluidonnerais
Vous m’
avaz dit que vous aviez
des amis aParis :y enavez-vous
encore .
Oui, Jy en ai encore deux.
79
R eading E xe rc ise No . 1 5 .
C’é tait
fi
h lafin du diner, eu m om ent'
bu la c onve r
when
sat ion s’anime e t cules
A
ane cdo te s le s plusA
étrang e s, e t le senlivens when
plusfi
z’
ncroyable s éc losent sur le s levre s e t souvent dansbloom
l’imaginat ion des convive s. Mon
A
oncle , fi t signe qu’il
made
voulait parler. 11 y a que lque SA
année s,
comm ence- t i l
,
wished ago
un de me s am ls étaitA
e la vei lle de se marier; parm i leeve to marry
présent s qu’
il avait faits 51. se fiancée se trouvaitA
une
which . made
bague d’
un ce rtain prix , e t ce tt ejeune personne la portait"
value wore
an doig t en g ag e de leur engag ement : lorsque , se prome nant“
when walking
nnjour sur le s bords de la riv 1ere , e lle se p encha pourbent
cue z‘
llir un nénuphar e t la bague , qui étaitA
un peu tropto pick water- lily which
g rande , g lissa de son do ig t e t tomba dans l’
e au. L ajeuneslipped
fille é tait A au dése spoir:onfi t,mal e en vain, de s re cherches
"
in theymade
31 l’
endroitA
ofi le bijou avait d isparu. Ses parents e t ses
jewel disappeared
am is lui conse c’
llaient de rompre son engag em ent , effrayésto break frightened
de ce qu’
ilsA
appe laientfi
un mauvais présag e . E lle pe rsistawhich persist-ed
néanmoins , L e mariag e eut lieu. Mal e «an repas de noce s,nevert heless merriwa t ook place repast wedding
un enorm e po isson ayantfl
é té serv i, que llefut 1a sat isfac t ionenormous served what was
I I 7 7 A
g enerale lorsqu en le de coupant , on y trouvacarving they in it found
s e crlerent tous le sfi
auditeurs a I’unisson!
exclaimed unison
chair la plus délicat e e t de tres pe tit es aret e s.
”
bones
S IXTE ENTH LEssom Seizieme Legom
D em onstrat ive Pronouns .
D emonstrative pronouns are used t o point to persons or thingswhich have just be en named before or w ill be named immediate ly.
after the verb.
D emonstrative pronouns are asfollowsC e, ceci, celui- ci
,celui this
C e, cela, celui- ld
,celui that
O’eux- ci, ceux'
these
O’euac- ld, ceux those
R EMAR KS . 1 . pronoun is the same word as ce,demon
strative adje ctive (Se e L esson But, as a pronoun
, ce is
invariable , instead ofassuming different forms in the feminineand plural. It translates inditferently this, that, these, or those.
C’
est ma swur, this- is my sister.
C e sont mesfréres, the se are my brothers.
O'e can only be used before the verb ét're, or the relative pronouns qui, que , dont.
C e sera la premierefois, this will'
be the first time .
Bites -moi ce que vous pensez , t ell me (that which) what youthink .
C é, translate s the personal pronouns, he , she, it, theybefore theauxiliary to be, when this verb isfollowed by a noun,verb in the infinitive , or adverb.
C’
est bien, it is right . C e sont mesfre'res , they are my brothers
C'est man ami, he is myfriend. C
'est moi, it is I .
C e is also used to translate it and they when the verb étre isfollowed by an adje ctive , when this adjective refers to an idea
mentioned precedingly, but not t o a noun.
Apprene z a nager, c’
est tres utile , learn how to swim,it is very useful.
II.— O’eci, this, and cela that , are formed from the same
demonstrative pronoun ce,to which the adverbs at
,here , and id,
there,have be en added, in the sam e way as they are to nouns,
pre ceded by demonstrative adjectives (Se e pageC eci me p lait plus que cela, this pleases me more than that.
Je vous donnerai ceci mais vous me donnerez cela,‘I will give
you this, but you will give me that.
C eci and cela can only be used in speaking ofthings or referring to whole sentences. This and tha t used 111 a general sense ascomplements ofverbs are always translated ceci and cela.
Jeferai plutdt ceci que cela, I will rather do this than that.
H owever personal pronouns are used when the noun which follows the verb
are is pre ceded by the indefinite art icle , which is not translated ; as,H e is a de c tor. 1 1 est médecin.
82
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
What are demonstrative pronouns?
G ive the four pronouns which translate this?G ive thefour pronouns which translate that?H ow do you translate these?
H ow do you translat e those?
What is the difference between ce adjective and acpronoun?
Before what words can cc be used?
When does ce translate he, she , it, they?
Wh en doe s ce translate it and they, the verb étre beingfollowedan adjective ?
What is the derivation ofceci ?When can ceci be used to translate this, after a verb?
C onversat ion.
H ow do you find this ?
.I find this bet ter than that .
How much does this cost ?
This costs three pounds.
What is the price ofthat ?That isworth (t aut)thirtypounds.
G ive me this.
No, I shall give you that .Is it cheap
?
No, it is dearer than the other.
Who (qui) re ceived (has received)this?
It is the g entleman who occupies
the rooms on the first floorWho is the most industrious, your
brother or you?
(It is) my brother.
Tell m e (d[les-moi) ifthe governessfinds her rooms convenient
I do not know (je na sais pas)(that ).
H ere is (voici) the postman .
For whom are the lett ers?
This isfor my father; those are
formy cousin.
C omment trouvez -vous ceci?
Je trouve ceci m eilleurque cela.
C ombien cofite ceci?
C eci .cofite trois livres sterling.
Quel est le prix de cela?
C ela vaut trente livres sterling .
D onnez -moi ceci.Non, je vous donnerai cela.
E st - cc bon marché ?
Non, c’
est plus cher que l’
au-tre.
Qui a recu ceci?
C’
est le monsieur qui occupe les
chambres du premier étage .
Qui est le plus laborieux : votre
frere ou vous ?
C’
est monfrere .
Dites-moi si l'institutrice trouve
ses chambres commodes.
Je ne sais pas cela.
Voici lefacteur.
Pour qui sont les lettres?C elle - ci est pourmon pere ; celleslasont pourm on cousin.
83
R e ading E xerc ise No . 16 .
L ord Macartney avait occupé une position honorifi’
que
honorary
dans l’armée e t il se vantait non seulem ent de n’
avoir
boasted
jamais rien demande , mais encore d’
avoir refusé lesfaveursanything
qui lui avaien tA
été ofi'
e rte s. 11 ne connaissait pas, disaitwhich offered knew said
ii, de plus grand bonheur que ce lui d e tre indép endant e tany independent
de faire c c qui lui plaisait . L e roi, ayant e té instruit do
t o do which pleased informed
ce la, voulut voir si c e t te opinion était sincere . Uh jourwished to se e
donc il le pritA
a part e t lui demanda mystérie usem ent s’il
then t ook aside mysteriously
savait l’
espagnol . Non, Sire , répondit Macartney, mais
knew Spanish answered
je l’
apprendrai imm e’
diatem ent,si ce la fait plaisir a votre
shall learn immediately does
majesté .
”Oui, vraim ent , répliqua lo roi,
“je vous lo
replied
c onse ille , e t vous aure zfi
avous en félicite r. Macartneyadvise yourselfforit to congratulate
conclut de ce tte simple conve rsation que le roi avait l’
in
concluded simple
t ention de lui confi e r que lque importante m ission diploentrust important
matique . 11 so m it afi
travaillerjour e t nuit , e t tro is mois
himse lfput
apre s il annoncaitA
au roi qu’il savait parfaitem ent la langue
perfectly
espagnole . Tant mieux ,répondit le roi,
“ce la vous
So much th e better
perm e ttra de lire D on Quicho t te dans l’
origm al.
will allow Quixote
SE VENTE ENTH L E SSON. D ix- sep tieme L egon.
Th e D em onstrat ive Pronoun ( concluded) .
III.—O’elui—ci, this, is derived from ce, this, lui, he and oi
,
here . It is used in speaking ofpersons or things every time
it is necessary to indicat e that the person or thing pointed tois ofthe masculine gender and singular number, and is nearer
to the speaker than another person or thing ; celui- la (that- hethere ) being used to point to the farther.
Vous voyez ces deux chevaux : ce lui- oi est plus cher que celui
ld. You se e these two horses : this one is dearer than that.
C elni- ci and celui- la are often translated the latter andthe former.
Mon pére et monfrere sont partis ; celui- la va aParis at celuici va aR ome . Myfather and brotherhave departed ; theformerg oes to Paris and the latter goes to R ome .
Genie- oi,these
,and Genre - la, those , derived from ce- eux- ci or la
refer to a masculine plural noun.
Ave z -vous vu les ofii ciers e t les soldats ceux- la out de plus
beaux uniforme s que cease - oi? H ave you seen the officers and
soldiers ; those have finer uniforms than these.
C elles—ci, these , or celles- ld,those , ce
,elles, ci or let point to
a feminine plural noun.
D e ces fleurs, celles- ci sont plus belles que celles- la. Oftheseflowers these are more beautiful than those .
IV.
— C’elui, celle,ceun, celles
,derived respe ctively from cc
lui, ce - elle
, ce—eux, ce—elles are used in the sam e manner as celui
ci,ce lle—oi
, et a , but before re lative pronouns andprepositions only, theadverbs ei and labe ing no long ernecessary to point more accurate ly.
J ’aime cette maison, mais je prefere celle de mon pere . I like
this house, but I prefer that ofmyfather (myfather
’
s).
'C es livres sont intéressants ; mais je préfé re cenx que vous
m avez donnes hi er. These books are interest ing , but I preferthose which you gave m e yesterday.
O’elui, celle, cenx,celles translate indifferently this or tha t,
and these or those.
They often translat e the one or the ones and the personalpronouns he, she
, him,i t,they, them before re lative pronouns.
C c n'est pas celui que je pensais. It is no t the one I thought .
1 0 connais celui qui a dit cela. I know him who said that .
86
Que st ions on G rammar.
From what words is celmZ- ci derived?
When is celui- oi used to translat e this?
G ive the etymology ofcelui- la?What is thefeminine ofcelui - oi and ce lui- la!
What is the plural masculine ofcelui-d ; from what is it derived
G ive the pluralfeminine ofce lui- la and its e tymology ?
When are ce lui, ce lle, emm, celles, used instead ofce lui-oi, ce lle - oi,ceux- ci
,celles-ci l
How are the one who (orhe who ) translated?
H ow do you translate he who I
C onve rsation .
Which stuffwill you take (prendraz -omrs ) this one or that ?
I shall take (jeprendm i) this one ;but I think that one is better,only it is too dearforme .
Take (prenez) that one : it will
last (durem ) longer (plus long
Is it not the one which (que ) youhave sold (c endue) to myfriend
{No it is that which (que ) I showed(ai nwntre
’
e) you in the other
room.
What (gue l) is the price ofthat ?That costs two francs and fiftycentimes a (le) metre (metre).
Are these gloves thosemy sistersaw (hasyesterday
No , Miss (Mademoiselle ), they arenot the same .
Is this parcel mine (lamien)?No, it is Mrs. (that ofMrs . )Will you send (am arrez ) that t omy hot el
Yes, Madam, with the great est
pleasure .
Quelle étofi‘
e rendrez -vons celleci on cell e
’
a ?
Je prendrai celle- ci, maisje penseque celle- laest meilleure ; seule»
ment elle est trop chEre pourmoi.
Prenez celle - la: elle durera pluslongtemps.
N'est - cc pas celle que vous avez
vendu‘
e 5mon amic,
Non c’
est celle que je vous aimontrée dans l
’
autre chambre.
Quel est le prix de celle - la?
C elia- la coute deux francs cin
quante c entimes le metre ?
C es gants sont - ils ceux que inssmur a vus hier?
Non,Madem oiselle ; cc ne sent
pas les memes.
C e paquet - ci est - ii le mien!
Non, c
'est celui de Madame
Enverrez - vous celui- la a monhot el?
Oui, Madame, avec lo plus grandplaisir.
87
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 17 .
Uh po éte avaitA
un jour composé une pie ce de vcrs
poe t versus
sur le s gate aux que faisait empatissier renomm e'
de la villewhich made pastry- cook renowned
qu’il habitait . L e patissier
, quoiqu’
il ne cultivat paswhich inh abited though cultivated
beaucoup le sMuses,fut cependant flat té dams son orgue i
’
l,
however
it la reception d’
un exemplaire de ce tte poésie : il voulutcopy poetry wished
en t émoigner sa satisfac tion a l ’e nteur e t crut qu’
il netorit t o show believed
pouvait m ieux faire que de lui envoyer 1m des obje ts quicould bet ter do than to send which
avaientA
éve z'
llé son insp irat ion. L e p oete re cut d’abord
awaken received at first
c e tfi
envoi ave c plaisir e t se mitA
adéguster le chef- d ’
oeuvre
messag e himse lfput tast e master-
pie ce
appét issant ; mais que l le me fut pas sonA
humiliat ion en
re lishing what
découvrant que ls patissier s e tait servi de la p ie ce de versdiscovering had made use
e lle -meme pour le faire cuire au four. 11 lui écrivit doncitse lf for t o make cook in the wrote then
une le ttre indignée , il l’
accusait du crime de l‘
e se - poésieindignant where . oflenceagainst poetry
D e quoi vous plaigne z - vous?”lui répondit le pat issier;
what yourselfcomplain answered
Je n’aifait qu
’im it er vos procédés . Vous av ie z fait A une
done but t o imitat e proceedings made
po ésie sur m e s gat e aux e t,m oi, j
’
aifait ’
h m gateau sur
vo tre poésie .
88
E IGH TE ENTH L E SSON. D ix- huitz'
éme L egon.
Po sse ssiv e Pronouns .
Possessive Pronouns are those which express possession.
T hey are as follows
Smem PLU RAL .
Muse . F em. Masc. F em.
la mien la mienne les miens les miennes mine
le tien la, tienne les liens les tiennes thine
le sien la sienne les siens les siennes his, hers, its
le notre la. notre les notres les notres ours
le vdt're la notre les votres les vdtres yoursle leur la leur les leurs les lewre theirs
R EMAR KS. I . —It must be noticed that the o ofnotre and
votre, when pronouns, has the circumflex accent , which doesnot exist in notre and votre, posse ssive adjectives.
I I .—The words notre, votre and leur do not change in thefeminine .
III.—The rule given in L esson 1 3for possessive adjectives
ofthe the third person must also be applied to possessivepronouns thus,
cc livre et le sun, translates as well this book and his, as thisbook and here .
To avoid the lack ofprecision which may result from it,
when it is ne cessary to i ndicate to whom an obje ct belongs,possession is expressed by the verb etre, to be
,followed by
t he preposition d and the disjun ctive personal pronouns.
E tre is in such cases the translation ofthe English verbto belong .
C e livre est a lui, this book is his or belongs to him.
C e livre est d elle, this book is hers or belongs to her.
C et te maison est 0. mol, this house is mine or belon toC es chevaux sont a nous, these horses are ours or bgong to us.
IV.—L e mien
,le ticn, le sien
, we , are generally used instead ofd moi, a toi
,d lui or d elle
, when it is necessary tomake a distinction between different objects ofthe same kind.
C e chapeau- ci est lo mien,celui-laest le votre. This hat is
mine , that one is yours.
C et te maison - laest la leur, celle - oi est la notre. That house
90
Que st ions on G rammar.
What are possessive pronouns?What are the possessive pronouns which translate mine !What are those which translate thine }Translate his, hers, ils .
Translate ours.
Translate thispen is his and this pen is hers.
What is the way t o translate his and hers by difl‘
erent expressions!
When must lo mien, le lien, doc. be used inst ead ofdmoi, a£012, Jec.
C onv e rsat ion .
Whose (aqui) are these umbrellas ?
The White one is mine , the brown
is theirs, and I think that the
green is yours.
G ive me mine ifyou please .
H ere it is.
Ofthese horses which (lequel) doyou prefer, his or mine ?
I prefer yours.
To whom (ct qui) does this bookbelong ?
It belongs to me .
\Which (quelle) is the pen that belongs to you, this or that ?
This ismine , that isyourcousin’
s.
D o these dogs belong to them ?No , they belong to us ; they w eretheirs, but they gave them to
us afew weeks ago (il 3] a. que lques semaines).
When will you go (irez - vous) t otheir country
ohouse (maisoncampagne)?
We shall not g o to theirs but toours.
Is this overcoat yours, or is itmine ?
It is mine ; yours is in the ante
room.
A qui sont ces parapluies ?L e blanc est lamien ; ls brun est
le leur et je pensaque le vertest is t re .
D onnez -moi le mien, s
’
ilvousplait .L e voici.
‘
D e ces chevaux, lo quel préférezvous le sien ou le mien?
Je préfere le v6tre.A qui est ce livre.
Il est amoi.
Quelle est la plume qui est avous:celle - oi ou celle - la?
C elle ~ci est la mienne : celle - 1h.estavotre cousin.
C es chiens sont - ils aaux?
Non, ils sont anous : ils étaient
a eux, mais ils nous les ont
donnes, il y aquelques semaines.
Quand irez -vous aleur maison decampagne 2
Nous n irons pas ala leur, mais ala n6tre .
C e pardessus est ‘ il le votre, ou
est - e e ls mien ?
C’
est le mien ; le votre est dansl
’
antichambre .
91
R eading E xe rc ise No . 18 .
Unjeune garcon d’
environ douz e ans ac c osta nu jourabout accosted
une demoiselle qui passait dans une de s rues le s pluswho was passing
fréquentée s de Paris av e c se g ouvernante , e t lui demanda,
frequented
de lui donnerA
unfranc comm e auméne .
“C omment,lui
alms
dit lajeune fille , “ose z - vous
A
adre sser une t e lle demandesaid
aux passants ?”Je vous en prie , Mademoise lle ,
passers by ofit beg
pondit le jeune g al-
con,“ne m e refusez pas ce que je vous
answered which
demands ; votre refus m ’
oblig erait a prendre une te rribleto take
resolut ion. E t comme il n’
obt enait pas ce qu’il désirait
,
obtained which
il s e loigna ave c un profond soupir. L ajeunefille efl'
rayée
went away
de la c onsternation qui était peinte sur son v isag e , craignit
which paint ed feared
qu’il ne pensat
fi
aacc omplir que lque funeste proje t , e t na
migh t think . accomplish fatal
voulant pas avo i r a se reprocher d’avoir é té la cause
Wishing t o reproach
indire ct e d’
un malhe ur, e lle fit rappe ler le m endiant e t luimade recall beggar
donna le s ving t sous qu’
il soll ic itait . P 0 1 8 e l le vouluthalfpence solicited Then wished
savoir que lle était l’
extrém e resolutionalaque lle ilfaisaitto know what which made
allusion que lque s m inut e s auparavant . Oh ! Mademo i
before
se l le , répondit - il,
“je m e v oyais dejaoblig é de travaille r.
answered myself was already
92
NINETEENTH Lnssou. Dix- neuviéme Lepon.
R e lat ive and Int erro g at iv e Pronouns.
R e lative pronouns are those which relate to otherwordswhichprecede and are called the ir antecedents. They are asfollows
Oui who, which, that , whom
I bl Que whom,which, that , what
nvarm eQuoi what
D ont whose , ofwhom, ofwhichee l, ue lle , ls, lies whoever, whatever
Variable {fique lglamwlge
‘fiesneiljjesque lleswhicmwhatInterrogative pronouns are those which are used at the be
ginning oi an interrogative sentence . They have no antecedents.They are asfollows
1, who , whom, which
Invariable Que what
Quoih hv Que l, que lle , que ls, quelles w ich, w at
ariable ll aquel, laquclle , lesqucls, lesque lleswhich, whatR EMARKS . l . Whom is translated by qui at the beginning of
int erro at ive sent ences and aft er preposit ions Qui connaissez vous?whom 0 you know
Le monsieur ave c zui vous et es venu. The gentleman with
whom you came .
In ordinary sentences qui translates indifl'
erently who orwhich.
L’
homme qui est la. The man who is there .
Le livre qui e s t int éressant . The book which is interest'
ng .
II .—Que translat es whom or which in the middle “
ofsentences,and what at the beginning ofint errogative sent ences.
L’
homme que je connais. The man whom I know.
i Le livre que je lis The book which I read.
Que dites vous Wha t do you say ?
lIl .—Quoi can only be used by itselfor afterprepositions.Quai l what ? D e zeoi fugus ? ofwhat do you speak ?
IV.—D ont translate s whose , ofwho m, ofwhich in the middle of
sentences, but can never be used at the beginnin
L’
enfant dent vous etes le pere . The childwhoscfather you are.V.
—Qu.e l, q uelle , & c . , translat e which or what in referring to nounswhich are placed after the verb to be .
lle$2 1; cett eflour ? what is this flower?Place before que it is used in the sense ofwhoever, whatever.
9nd gu
’
il soitje le verrai. Whoeverhe may be I shall see him.
VL eque laque c. , translate which orwhat in referring to
pouns alreadymentioned or before nounsfrom which they are separatedy dc.
Voici deuxfleurs, laquclle préférez - vous? H ere are two flowers,which do you prefer? L equcl de ces deuce livres ? Which ofthese two books
VIL—D uquel, auque l, desquels. auxque ls, et c , translat e ofwhich,t o which
,dc , and must
‘
hs used aqui, (be , mhigh cannever be used in speaking ofanima s or t
'
ings.
L e chien duguelje parle , the dog ofwhich I speak .
94
Q ue stions on G rammar.
What are relative pronouns !What are interrogative pronouns ?
Which are the invariable relative pronouns?Which are the variable interrogative pronouns!When does qui translate whom?
When does que translate what?When does quoi translate what?
When can dont be used t o translat e whose, ofwhom, ofwhich!When does que l translat e which orwhat?
When is legue l used to translate which orwhat?
When must tequel, Zaqucllc , duqucl, dcc. , be used instead ofque, dont?
C onv e rsat ion.
Which ofthese gentlemen is yourbrother?
It is he who is before the table .
What is he doing (fait- il) ?H e is reading ( lit) the book which
you lent him the other day.
What is this gentleman’s nam e ?
I do not know ( no sais pas) ; ask
(to ) the gentleman who is standing (debout) near (pres dc) thewindow.
Ofwhat are they Speaking (panlent- ils)?
They speak ofthe news which is
contained (contenuc) in t o - day’
s
papers (lesjournauzc d’
aujou'rd’
hut)?
What is this news?
The larg e bell which has be en cast
(fondue)forSt . Paul ’s cathedralarrived (is arrived) yest erdaymorn ing .
What do they say (dit- on)(apropos de) politics?
It is said (on dit) that we shallhave war with Egypt and thatTurkey will be our ally.
L equel de cesMessieurs est votre
frere ?C
’
est celui qui est devant 1a table !
Quefait -il?Il lit ls livre que vous lui avez
prete l'
autre Jour.
Quel est le nom de ce monsieur?
Je no sais pas ; demandez anmonsieurqui est debout pres de lafenetre .
D e quoi parlent - ilsi
Ils parlent de la nouvelle qui estcontenue dans les journauxd
’
aujourd'hui.
Quelle est ce tte nouvelle ?
La grosse cloche qui a été fonduepourla cathédral e de Saint -Paulest arrivée biermatin.
Que dit - on apropos de politique ?
On dit na nous aurons la guenu
avec l Egypte et que la Turquiesera notre alliée .
95
R eading E xe rc ise No . 19.
Unjoue urde co rn emuse trav e rsant unjourle sm ontag ues
bag pipe crossing
de l’
U lster en Irlands rencont raun lou afl'
am é . L’
endroitPIreland hungry
é taitA
entie rement dése rt ; il n’
y avait aucune habitat ion it
ent ire ly there was dwell ing
proximité , le pauvre m éné t rier pfi tfi
e ssaye r de che rche rminstrel could try
refug e , ni mem e aucun arbre sur le s branches duque l ilnor even ofwhich
put grimper. Que faire pour se t ire r d’
un dang e r aussi
climb What to do himselft o g e t out of
pre ssant ? L e malheureux se rappe la qu’
il avait dans sa
pressing remembered
valise une miche de pain pre sque toutfl
ent re re e t an pe t itwallet quite ent ire
morce au de viande . Peut - etre pourrait - il assouvir lafaimpiece could to satiate
de l’
animal en lui abandonnant ce s provisions : il les luiabandoning
je ta morce au parmorce au maisfi
hélas ! sans en obtenir lethrew pie ce alas from it to obtain
résultat qu’
il avaitA
e spéré . Ilfallait done avoir re cours
hoped wasne cessary then recourse
aunfl
autre m oyen, et il n’
im agina rien de m ieux que d’
avoir
another expedient imag ined be tt er
re cours asa cornemuse . Que l ne fut pas son c ontentem ent,
sat isfaction
quand, aux premiers sons qu’
il en tira,le loup se m it a
from it drew put
s’
enfuir dans la dire c tion des m ontagne s ave c plus do ra
fly
pidité qu’
il n’
en était venufrom them come before
C oquz’
n,
s e cria le pauvre ménétrier,“po ur-quoi n
’
ai-jeR ascal exclaimed minstrel
pas connu te s gofi ts plus tot ; tu peue tre ce rtain que jeknown canst
t’aurais donné le de ssert avant le souper.
”
b efore supper.
96
TWENTIETH LE SSON. Vingtieme L econ.
Inde finit e Pronouns .
Indefinite pronouns are those which refer to persons or thingsin an indefinite manner.
The following is a list ofthemquelqu
’un
, quelqu’une (f), some one
,som ebody
,anybody
quelques- uns
, quelques- unes
,some ones
,some , any, afew
chacun, chacnne, each one
,every one
aucwn, aucune, no one , none
nul, no one
,none
l’nn
,l’une, the one
l’autre , the other
l’un l
’autre , l
’une autre, each other, one another
l’un et l
’autre
,l’une et l
’autre, both
l’nn ou l
’autre, l
’une on l
’autre
,e ither
ni l’un ml l
’antre, m
“l’une mi l
’autfre, ne ither
aMafi a, l’nne d l
’autre , to one another
,to each ether
an autre, une autre, another
autrml, d’autres
,others
tout le moon’e , everybodypersonne, nobodytout, everythingtous, all
men ,nothing
quelque chose, some thing
quiconque, whoever
le meme, la meme,the same
on, one , they , people
R EMARKS . 1 .— L
’
un, l’
autre , l’wn l
'autre , l
'une l
'aut're, (t o. become
in the plural les nns, les autres, les uns les autres, les unes les autres, 8m.
II .— Chacun, anoem , tout le monde, antruc
'
, personne , quico'nque,
men, are never used in the plural.
III .
—.4ucun
,ni l
’
un ni l’
autre , personne, m’
en, require the verb to
be preceded by the particle no .
Personne ne me connait . Nobody knows me .
Jc n’ai rien. I have nothing .
IV .— L
’
un l’
aut're, l'un a l
’
autre , expressing reciprocity alwaysrequire the verb t o be in the plural and preceded by so.
Ils se harssent Z’
un l’autre . They hat e one ano ther.
lls s’écrivirent l
’
un a l’
autre . They wrot e to each other.
C’) It can be seen that the preposit ion is placed in French between Fun and l
'autro
instead ofbeing placed before each other or one anothe r as in E nglish .
r
l'un avec l
’
autre,with one another; l
'un pour l
'autre, for each other.
Que st ions on G rammar.
What are indefinite pronouns?
Translat e some body, everybody, nobody.
Translate something, nothing , everything .
Translate either, ne ither, both, each other.
Translat e the other, thesom e,others.
What is the plural ofI’
m et l’autre?
What indefinite pronouns are never used in the plural?
What indefinit e pronouns require the verb to be preceded by ne ?
What personal pronoun must be placed before the verb precededfollowed by I
’
m l’
autre and I’m a l
’autre?
C onve rsat ion .
Is somebody there ?
Nobody is in the room .
Have you seen the one or the
other?
I have seen bot h.
Did they give you anyt hing ?
N0, they gave me nothing .
Is that the same book ?
No, it is not the sam e .
D id you speak (vous etes-vous
parlé) to one another?
No, I spoke to nobody.
D o you know either?
No, I know neither.
D o youknow anybody in the town?
No, I know nobody.
Will they come (viendront) witheach other?
Yes, I expect them both .
My complim ents to everybody.
I thank you.
Will you see (verrez -vous) yourcousins there ?
Yes, I shall see them all.
Take (prance) this parcel and Iwill take (prendrai) the other.
I have it .
Quelqu’
un est - il 1a?
Personne n’
est dans la chambre .
Avez - vous vu l’
un ou l’
autre ?
J ’
ai vu l’
un et l’
autre.
Vous out - ils donné quelque chose
Non,ils ne m
’ont rien donné.
Est - ce le méme livre ?
Non, cc n
’
est pas le meme .
Vous étes-vous parlé l’unal
’autre?
Oui, je les att ends l’
un e t l’
autre .
Mes complimentsatout lsmonde.
Je vous remercie .
Y verrez -vous vos cousins?
Oui, je les vermi tous.
Prenez cc paquet e t je prendrail
’
autre .
Je l’ai.
Non, je n’ai parlé apersonne .
C onnaissez - vous PM on l’autre ?
Non, je ne connais ui l
’
un ni
l’
autre .
C onnaissez -vous quelqu’un dans
la ville ?
Non, je ne connais personne .
Viendront - ils l’
un avec l’
autre ?
99
R eading E xercise No . 2 0 .
L e fr‘
e re quéteur d’
un convent des environs de Pariscollector neighbourhood
revenaitA apri‘
es avoirfait se tourn'
ée dans plusieurs villagescame back made . round
VOISi‘rLSf'e t rapportait lesA
aumones qu’il avait re cueillies
neighbouring brought back gathered
pendant lajournée . En traversantA
une foret , il fut ren
day crossing
contré par un voleur qui lui demanda la bourse ou la vie .
L e m oine vit bien que la resistance seraitA
inutile e t rem itA
saw deliveredup
an vo leur une trentaine de livres maisA
il lui demanda
commefavourde décharg er an pisto let qu’il avait
A
alamain,as unload
dans l’un des pans de se robe,afin de prouver eu prieur
flaps in order to prove
qu’il
A
avait été at taqué e t qu’
il avait fait que lque résistance .
attacked made
L e bandit fi t oe qu’on lui dem andait , mais le m oine no
did
voyant pas lo trou de laballe , s atounade ce tte circ onstance .
seeing not bullet astonished circumstance
L e bandit se mitA
arire e t avoua tout franchem ent qu’il no
put laugh avowed quite franklym e ttait jamais de bel les dans se s pistolets e t qu
’
il ne lesput
employait que comme moyens d intimidation. C e tte con
employed but ways
fession lui couta cher; car le moine , qui était d’
une forcecost
remarquable , se je ta sur lui, lo prik
tA
h 1agorg e e t le t e rrassa;threw . flung down
puisA
ayant oherohé dans ses poches, 11 en re tira non seulethen sought from 1t pulledout .
ment les trente livres qu’il lui avait remises
A
auparavantdelivered before
mais l’arg ent qu’il avait dérobé
o
e d’autres voyag eurs. L e
robbed
moine no se fitA
aucun sc rupule de 5’en
A
emparer e t rentra
made scruple .ofit totake possession . returned
triomphant dans son couvent .
100
TWENTY - FIR ST L E SSON. Ving t - et -uniéme L egon.
Indefinit e Pronouns ( concluded) .
The pronoun on is ofa very frequent use in the Frenchlanguage ; it is used in speaking ofpersons and translates theEnglish expressions, one, we, they, people .
On attend. They wait .
On travaille dans la m e . People work in the street.
On is always ofthe singular number. Accordinverb that follows must be in the singular, as
from the pre ceding example .
On is ofthe masculin e gender, and accordingly all adjectivas which refer to it must be ofthe same gender. H ow
ever, these adje ctives ought to be in the feminine ifthe sense
clearly indicated that the pronoun on refered to afemale.On est toujours fiere de sa beaut é. One is always proud ofone ’
s
beauty.
On est heureuse quand on e st aimée de son mari. One ishappywhenone is loved by one
’
s husband.
On is often used, with an active verb, to translate a passive verb.
On croit qu’il viendra. It is believed that he will come .
On dit que se mere est morte . It is said that his mother is dead.
On me dit . I am t old.
On leur disait . They were told.
When on is imm ediate ly preceded by the unctions at,and, if
,
git, that; on
"“
65; and th e adverb where, theeuphomc le er l
’must—be placed be twe en the conjunction and
the pronoun on.
On conne tt et l’
on aime cet hom e . Peop le know and likethis man.
Si For. In interroge , je répondrai. IfI am interrogated, Ishall answer.
Je crois que l’
on vient . I think that somebody is coming .
On no vas pas oul’
on veut . One does not go where one wishes.
H owever this l’ ought to be omitted ifon were followeda word beginning with an l.
On le connett et on 1’
aime . Peop le know and like him.
Si on 1e savait . Ifp eop le knew it .Jc ne crois pas qu
’
on ls trouve . I do not believe it will befound.
11 est Oil on l'amis. It is where it has been put .
102
Que st ions on G rammar.
What is the meaning oft he pronoun on ?
What is the number ofthe pronoun on?
What is its gender
Is on sometimes ofthe feminine g enderH ow are passive verbs often translated in French ?What are the conjunctionswhich require the euphonic letter Z
’
be placed between them and the pronoun on ?
When must that euphonic let t er be dispensed withI
C onve rsat ion .
Where do they sell these hats
They are sold in the H igh Street
(grand'rue) number thirty- tw o .
D o they sell them dear ?
No they are sold (at) twelve
francs fifty centimes.
What do they say
They say that the Queen will ar
rive in (a) London to -morrow
afternoon .
Is it known at what time (heure)she will arrive ?
People say that she'
will be hereat two o
’
clock’
in (of) the aft ernoon.
Is it believed that people will beadmit t ed in the station
I am t old that people will not be
admitted on the platform .
Is it known ifthe prince wil l bethere ?
It is said that he will be therewith the princess.
D o you believe what they say ?
I never believe too easily what is
reported in some newspapers.
Is it believed that this difficultquestion will soon be resolved
by the government
They think so (that yes).
vend- ou ces chapeaux ?
On les vend dans la grand’
rue
num ero trent e - deux.
Les vend- ou cher7
Non ; on les vend douze francscmquante cent imes.
Que dit ’ ou
On dit que la reine arrivera a
Londre s demain apres-nndi .
Sait - on a quelle heure elle arri
vera ?
On dit qu’
elle sera ici a deux
heures de l’
apres-midi.
C roit - ou que 1’
on sera admis dans
la station ?
0 11 me dit que l'
on ne sera pas
admis sur le quai.
Salt - on si la prince sera la
On dit qu’
il y sera avec la prin
cesse .
C roye z- vous ce que l
’
on dit ?
Je ne croisjamais trop facilement
ce qui est rapporté dans certains
journaux.
C roit - on que ce t t e question difficile sera bient résolue pal .e
g ouvernement
On croit que oui.
108
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 2 1 .
Pendant les guerres de Napoleon premier en E spagne , le
fanatism e e t le patrio tism e des habitants les porté-rent 1 souventaux actes les plus dése spére
’
vs.
2 On raconte qu’un general de
l’
arm ée du roi Jerom e,
3 étant4 arrive un jour sous les niurs du
monastere de Figui ere s,5envoya un oflicier au prieur pour lui
demancler dc fournir a ses soldats les vivres6 qui leur étaientnécessaires. L e prieur répondit 7 que les soldat s seraient bien
regus dans la ville,e t qu
’il donnerait lui—mem e
8 l’hospitalité au
general e t ason état - n1ajor.
9 Bientot apres,en efi
'
e t ,10 un repas
magnifique était servi1 1 toutefois1 2 le ge
’
néral,sachant 13 combien
il était néce ssaire de se m eticr14 des E spagnols,15 crut 16 prudentd
’
engage r le prieur e t deux de ses moines a s’asseoir17 ala table
(111 fest in .
13 L’invitation fut acceptée sans hesitat ion
,e t les
re lifrieu\19 burent 2 ° e t nianfrv 1 ent copieusementflp
-
our donne r
l’e\en1ple aux ofliciersfrancil s, qui le s imiteront sans la moindre
app1 ehen51on . Mais au de ssert , le pi ieur se leva2 2 e t,cd’ 2 3une
voix qui fi t2 4 sur les invites2 5 l
’
efl'
e t de la trompe t te dujugementdernier
,ii leur ammonea qu
’un poison ‘
niortelzfi avait été l11ele au
vin e t aux aliments e t qu’ils n
’avaient pas uue heure a vivre .
2 7
En e iie t,malg
-ré2 8 les soins qui leur furent prodigués2 9 par le sméde cins de l
’
armée,appe lés en toute hate ,30au bout3lde que lques
instants,ils expiraient
,
32aussi bien que
33 ls prieur e t les deux
m oine s,dans (le s souffrance s épouvantables.34
1 porterent , carried . 2 désespérés, desperate . 3 roi Jerome , IcingJerome of(Westphalia). 4 étant , having . 5 Fignieres, F igueiras.
6 vivres, provisions. 7 répondit , answered. 8 lui-meme,himself.
9état -major, stafi . 10 en efi’
et,indeed 1 1 servi, served. 1 2 t out efois,
however. 13 sachant,knowing . 1 4 so méfier
,distrust. 15 Espagnols,
Spaniards. 1 6 crut , believed. 1 7 s’
asseoir, to sit down. 1 8 la table clu
fest in ,the convivia l table . 19 re ligi eux, monies. 2 0 burent
,drank.
2 1 copieusement,cop iously. 2 2 so leva, rose . 2 3 d
’
,in . 2 4 fit , did.
2 5 invites, guests. 2 6 poison mort el,deadlypoison. 2 7 avivre , to live .
2 8 malgré, in sp ite of. 2 9 leur furen t prodigués, lavished up on them.
30 appe lés en t out e hat e , called with a ll haste . 31 an bout de , at the
end of. 32 expiraient , expired. 33 aussi bien que , as well as. 34 dans
des souffrances épouvantables, in a dreadful agony.
l04
TWENTY- SE C OND LESSON. t gt-deuxiéme Lepon.
V e rbs .
As we have devoted the whole ofthe Supplement to verbs,
we shall onl give here afew gene ral hints, w ich will be easilyunderstood y the student , ifhe refer to the table given on the
last page ofthe above mentioned part .1 . All verbs, whate vermay be the conjugation to which they
be long, whether they be regular orirregular, end in the same manner in the Imperfe ct ofthe Indicative (ais, c is,ait , t ons, us, aient),in the Future (m i, m s
,m ,
rons, rez , rant), and C onditional (rais,rais, m it, rions, riez , raient).2 . The first person singular, ifnot endin
glWi th a vowe l (e or
at) always ends with an 3 (veryfew verbs wit an x).3. The second person singular always ends with s (few verbs
with a).4 . The third person singular when not ending with a vowel (e
ora) always ends with t (few verbs with d,one with c).
5 . The first pe rson plural ends in es or ans.
6 . The second person plural ends in es or ez (always ez when thefirst person plural ends in ons except vous dites, vansfaites.)7. The third ersen plural ends always in ml.8 . The 1 st end
p2 nd person plural ofthe present ofthe Subjunc
tive are generally the sam e as the l st and 2 ndperson plural oftheImperfe ct ofthe Indicative (few irregular verbs excepted).9. The endings ofthe Past de finite are always 8 ( l st conjugation
excepted) s, t, mes, tes, rent.10. The endings ofthe Present ofthe Subjunctive are always
0, es, e, ions, iez , ent (few irregular verbs excepted).1 1 . The endings ofthe Imperfe ct ofthe Subjunctive are always
see, sees, t, ssions, ssiez, ssent.
1 2 . There is always a circumflex accent on the vowel in theending ofthe 1st and 2 md persons plural ofthe Past definite andard person sin ular ofthe Imperfect ofthe Subjunctive .
1 3 . The Ver!s ofthe l st conjugation (er) are by far the mostnumerous, and are all regular but alter
,to go ; envoyer, to send,
and their compounds.
14. There are only seven regular verbs be longing to the 3rdconjugation (air), viz : percevoir, to perceive , apercevoir, to perceive , concevoir, to conceive , décevoir, to deceive , devoir, to owe,redevoir, to owe still, recevoir, to re ceive .
1 5. The Imperative has no 1 st person in the singular. Manygrammarians give a 3rd person singular and plural ofthe samet ense , but these persons be long really to the present ofthe Subjlunctive , and are notformedfrom the present ofthe Indicative .
his is the reason why we only give the 2 md person singular, 1stand 2 nd person plural, which are form ed according to the rulesofformation. See pages 4, 5 ofSupplement .
1 06
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
1 . Which are the three tenses which always end in the same mannerwhatevermay be the conjugation, whe therregular or irregular?What is generally the last let t er ofthe l st person singular?What is always the last letter ofthe 2 nd person singular?What is the last le t ter ofthe 3rd person, when not a vowel?What are the two endings which may be found in the l et personplural
What are the two endings ofthe 2 nd person plural?H ow does the 3rd person plural always end?Which are the two tenses in which the l st and 2 ndplural are alwaysthe same (with veryfew exceptions)?What are the endings ofthe Past D efinite ?What are the endings ofthe Present ofthe Subjunct ive ?What are the endings ofthe Imperfect ofthe Subjunctive ?In what tenses and persons is the circumflex accent to be always
011 the vowel ofthe ending ?Which is the conjugation which includes the greatest number ofverbs in French?
What are the only regular verbs ofthe 3rd conjugation?H ow many persons are there in the Imperative ?
C onv e rsat ion.
What is the most important partofspeech in all languages?
( It is) the verb.
Ua'i French verbs terminate in theInfinitive in any manner what
ever?
No ; they can only end in fourways, viz : er, ir, air, re .
What is indicated by the endingofthe infinit ive ofa verb ?ne conjugat iontowhich itbelongsWhat is to be done after asoer
taining to what conjugation a
verb belongs?
I“ must be ascertained whe ther
be regular or irregular.
I1 ow can you ascertain that ?
Bv looking at the tables ofirregular verbs, Part 1 4.
Verbs which are not given, nor
com osed with any ofthosewhio are given therein, are
regular.
Quelle est la partie du discours la
plus - importante dans toutes lesangues
C'est le verbe .
L es verbesfrancais pouvant - ils se
t e rminer s l’
infinit ifd'une maniere quelconque ?
Non ; ils na peuvent se terminerna de quatre menieres, c
'est b.
ire en er, ir, air or re .
Qu’
indique la t ermination de l’
infinitifd’
un verbe ?A quelle conjugaison il appartient .Que faut - ilfaire aprés s
'e tre assuré
de la conjugaison b. laquelleappartient nu verbe ?
I]faut s'assurer s'il est régulierouirrégulier.
C omment pouvez-vous trouver
cela?
En regardant les tableaux desverbes irréguliers, dans la 1 4emelivraison.
Les verbe s qui n'
y sont pasdonnésou qui ne sont composes avecaucun de ceuxquiy sont donnes,sont réguliers.
107
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 2 2 .
Um prédicat eur célebre,ayant un jour fait l un ma
gnifique se rmon dans leque l il avait flétri de la manie re la
plus éloque nte le vice dét estable de l’
usure , se préparait 2 a
quit ter l’
ég lise , lorsqu’
ilfut accost é par un usurier, qu
’il
c onnaissait3 parfaitem ent de4 reputat ion. L e pretre,
voyant5qu
’il cherchait6 alui parler, sefélicitait intérieure
ment7 de l’
efi'
e t de se s parole s, e t s’at tendait a ce 8 qu
’il
allait9 lui annoncer se conversion . Il commencait mem e
alefélic iterde se démarche 10 et de se s me il leure s int ent ions
pourl’
avenir lorsquel l l
’
usurierl’
arrétae ourt .
“Je crains1 2 ,”
lui dit - ill3, que vous no fassie z 14 erreur: j
’
ai trouvé en
v érité15 que vous av ie z admirablem ent parlé, e t je recon
nais16 toute 1a force de v os arguments ; je vous pried
’
agréer17 mes sinceresfélic itations
, j’
ajouterai m em e,m es
reme rciments : carje no doute pas que t ous ceux de m e s
confrere s18 qui'
se trouvaient a l ’eg lise n’
aient été19 pro
fondém e nt 2 0 émns2 1 par votre sermon,e t efirayés des chat i
m ents2 2 dont vous nous m enace z,e t gu
’ils n ’
abandonnent 23
aussité t une si infame 2 4 p rofe ssion . D e ce t t e facon2 5je re s
t e rai soul afaire 1’usure 2 6 ; je fe rai2 7 de s profi ts considerable s
, je deviendrai2 3 exce ssivem ent 2 9riche e t c ’
est avous,
ou plut6t30 avotre sermon, que je de vrai tout ce bonheur
la.
”L e pauvre prédicateur était bien31 désappointé e t il
se demanda si p ent - etre chacun de s usurie rs n’
avait pas
fait32 le meme raisonnement .
Ifail, made , 2 seprépam z‘
t, waspreparing himself, 8 connaissait,
knew, 4 dc, by, 5 c og/amt, seeing , 6 cherchait, was endeavouring ,7 intém
'
ew em nt,int ernally, 8 3
’
attendaz'
t a cc , expected, 9allait, was
going , 10 de sa démarcke,forhis st ep, 1 1 lorsque , when, 1 2 je crains,I fear, 13 dit - cl, said he , 1 4fassiez , make , 1 5 en indeed,1 6 recon/ne t
'
s, acknowledg e , 1 7 d
’
agre’
er, to accept , 1 8 confreres, colle ag ues, 19n
’
ae’
ent été, have be en, 2 0profondément, deeply, 2 1 émus,moved, 2 2 ales chdt
'i'ments, by the chastisements, 2 3 qu’
c'
ls n’
abcm
dwment, that they will abandon, 2 4 um sz
‘
imfd/ me , such an ih
famous. 2 5 026 cettefacon, in this manner,
2 6faire l’usare, t o be ani nsurer
,2 7fam e; shall make , 2 8 dem
'
endm z’
,shall become , 2 9 ea:
cmsivement, exce edingly, 30 plutot, rather, 31 bien, very much,32fae
'
t, made .
108
TWENTY- TH IRD LE SSON. Ving t- troisieme Legon.
Adv erbs .
The adverb is a word used to modify the sense ofa. verb, andalso ofan adjective , participle or another adverb.
In French they follow the verb in simple tenses, and in
compound tenses are placed betwe en the auxiliary and the
participle .
l lparle souvent . H e often speaks. J’
ai bien dormi. I have slept well.
Adve rbs may be divided into ten classes, viz . adverbs ofmanner, time , place, order, quantity, comparison, afi /rmation, negation
, doubt and interrogation.
Adv erbs ofManne r.
Adverbs ofmanner express how things are done .
They are formedfrom qualifying adjectives by the additionofment. Thre e cases arise in thisformation.
RULE . 1 .—Ifthe adjec tive end with a vowel, ment is added to the
masculine —Joli, pre tty,jolimont, pret tily ; aise'
,easy, aise
’
ment, easilyhonnete , honest , honnétement, honest ly.
ExcE PTIONs.—Folleme nt, foolishly ; mollement, softly ; nouvelle
ment , newly be llement, g ently gaiemmt, gaily, are formedfrom the
feminine adjectives,folle, molle, nouvelle, belle , gate .
2 .— Ifthe adje ctive end with a consonant , ment is added to the
feminine —H eurcuzc ,hap y, heureuscmcnt, happily long , long , langue
ment, long or long y deux, sweet , doucement, swee tly.
3.—Adjectives ending in ant and ent form their adverbs by
changing a t int o mment
Prudent, prudent , prudemment, prudently; constant, constant , constamment, constantly ; innocent, innocent , innocemment, innocently.
E XC EPTIONs.—L ent , slow,andpresent, present , vehement, vehement ,
form theiradverbs regularly, Zentement , slowly présentement, presently,oéhémentement, vehem ently. The adverb formed from gentil, nice , is
gentiment .
R EMAR KS . 1 .—The following adverbs take an acut e accent on the
e which precedes ment, when no such accent exists in the adject ivesthemselves.
— Aoeug lément, blindly (from aveug le) commodément,conveniently (from commode) communément, commonly (fromcommun) conforme’me nt, conformingly (from conforme)énorme
’
ment, enormously (from énorme ) expressement, expressly(from expres) importunement, importunely (from importun)obscure
‘
ment, obscurely (from obscur) o inidtzément, obstinat elymom' ojrfi
'nidtre) précisément, precise y (from precis) pro
fondement, profoundly (from profond) profusé'ment, profusely- (from profi t s) impunément, with impunity (from impuni) .
.
2 .— Bien, well, mo l, badly, pic, worse , mieux, better, must also be
conmdered as adverbs ofmanner.
1 10
Que st ions on G rammar.
What is an adverb ?
What is the place ofadverbs in FrenchH ow many classes ofadverbs are there ? what are they ?
H ow do adverbs ofmanner end in French Q
H ow are adverbs derivedfrom adjectives ending with a vowel ?
H ow are adverbs derivedfrom adjectives ending with a consonant ?
H ow are adverbs ofmanner derived from adje ct ives ending in ant
or ent .7
8. G ive some adjectives ending with vowels which do no t follow this
9. G ive some adverbs which take an acut e accent on the e before ment ?1 0. G ive some adverbs ofmanner which do not end in ment ?
C onve rsat ion .
Who fqzt i est
- cc qui) spoke so ele
g ent ly
It (is) was the deputy who has
been e lect ed (élu) lat ely .
H e speaks very slowly and dis
t inct ly. Do you hear him frequent ly ?
No,I go to the house [ofparlia
ment ] ( chambre) very rarely.
D id you arrive (éles vous arrire’
)safe ly at the end ofyour
journey ?
Yes, thank you (merci) nu
happily I found my sister dan
g erously ill, and I had only
(the ) t ime to run immediate lyto the doctor
’
s.
Does he come (vient) exactly at
the t ime you expect him?
U sually he comes very punctually.
D o you pay him regularly everywe ek ?
Yes, I generally pay him everySaturday evening .
D o you think really that he is in
want ofmoney ?I think so .
Qui est - cc qui a parlé si‘
élégamment ?
C’
est la député qui a été élu dernierement .
ll parle trés lentement et tresdistinct em ent . L
’
ent endez - vous
fréquemmentNon, je vais tres rarement a lachambre .
Et es- vous arrivé sain et saufau
t erme de votre voyage
Oui, merci ; malheureusement j’
ai
trouvé ma soeur dang ereusement malade , e t je n
’
ai eu que le
t emps de courir immédiatement
che z le docteur.
Vient - il exact ement a l’
heure alaquelle vous l
’
att endez
Ordinairement il vient tres ponctuellement .
Le payez vous
chaque semaine
Oui, je le paie généralement chequesamedi soir.
C roye z- vous rée llement qu
'il ait
besoin d'
arg ent
Je le crois.
régulierement
1 1 1
R e adin g E x e rc ise No . 2 3.
On raconte qu’un paysan
,dont le fils servaitI dans nu
regiment en garnison2 en Algérie ,
3 regut4 un jour de lui une
le t tre dans laquelle il lui disait ,5 entre6 autres choses, que se s
souliers avaient été brulés par le sable pendant les longuesmarches qu
’il avait faites7 dans le desert il finissait se le t tre en
priant8 son pere de lui en envoyer une autre paire le plus totpossible .
9 Nicolas,1° c’était le nom du paysan, plein de 00111
passion pour lesfatigues e t les souffrances de son fils,commanda1 1
imm e’
diatem ent une paire de souliers eu cordonnier de son
village . Mais quand ils furent faits, 1 2 il ne savait” de 14 quellemaniere les lui envoyer
,e t il demandait conseil a tous ses amis.
L ’un d
’
eux,voulant15 se moquer de
1 6 sa simplicité, lui conse il’la
de le s lui expédier par le t élégraphe , lui disant 17 qu’il n ’
aurait
qu’lsa le s pendre au fil de fer qu’il voyait19 soutenu2° par de s
po teaux tout le long de 2 1 la route , e t que la premiere depeche , quipasserait a destination de l’Algérie , les transporterait
2 2 jusqu’
a93
C onstantine,on se trouvait 2 4 alors son fils. La simplicité e t le
bon marché de cc nioyen séduisirent2 5 la paysan. Il mit 2 6 une
adresse bien lisible, qu
’avait écrit e 2 7 lo maitre d
’école
,2 8 sur les
souliers y cacha deux pieces de cinq francs, pour que 2 9 son fils
put30 se rafraichir a sa santé e t
,étant sorti31 du village , sus
penclit32 les souliers au fil t e
’
légraphique , puis33 re tourna ason
travail.
To be continued.
1 sera-
aft,served, 2 garnison, garrison, 3 A lg e
’
rie,Alg eria,
4 recut, received, 5 disait, said, 6 entre , among , 7faites, made ,8 priant, begging , 9 le p lus l6t possible , as soon as possible , 1 0Nicolas,Nicholas
,1 1 commanda
,ordered, 1 2 furent faits, were made
,
13 sava it, knew,1 4 de
,in, 15 e oulant, wishing , 1 6 cc moquer de,
laugh at , 1 7 disant, saying , 1 8 only, 19 voyait, saw,
2 0 soutenu, support ed, 2 1 tout le long ole,all along , 2 2 transporterait,
would transport them,2 3 jusgu
’
r‘
l,as far as, 2 4 se trouvait, was,
2 5 se'
eluisirent, seduced,2 6 mit, put , 2 7 écrile
,writ ten,
2 8 maitre
d’
école, school-mast er, 2 9pour que , in order that , 30 pat, could,
31 étant sorti, having g one out, 32 suspendit, hung , 33puis, then.
1 1 2
TWENTY- F OUR TH LE SSON. Vingt-
quatriéme L epon.
Adve rbs ofTim e .
These adverbs arefor the present — aujourd
’
hui, to-day;maintenant, now ; dprésent, now
for thefuture z— demain, to -morrow ; apres-demain,
the day after tomorrow ; bienlbt, soon avant pen, shortly désarmais, henceforthfor the past — hier, yest erday ; avant
-bier, the day before yest erday ;autrefois , formerly jadis, formerly ; dep uispen, lat ely .
Other adverbs oftime do not refer to any spe cial t im e as,
ole bonne heure, early tot, soon lard, lat e déjd, already ; encore , still,
yet souvent,oft en longtemps, for a long time toujours, always
jamais, never ; tanlol, sometimes quelquefois, sometimes, &c.
Adve rbs ofPlac e .
The principal adverbs ofplace are012 , where ; d
’
oii ,from whence ; ici, here ; la, y, there ; devanl , beforedem ere, behind ; dessus, upon ; dessous, underneath ; en haul, above ,upstairs; en bas, below, downstairs; dcdans, an dedans, inside , within;dehors, an dehors, outside , without ; loin, far ; pres, near ; parlout,everywhere unpres, near ; ensemble, tog ether ; an dessus, over ; an
dessmzs , beneath, &c.
Adve rbs ofOrder.
They are generallyformedfrom ordinal adje ctives by addingment to the femininepremierement, firstly ; secondement, secondly ;
There are also — d’
e bord, at first ; aupam vant, before ; puis,ensuite, then ; enjin,
at last alors, then ; apres, aft er, 850.Adve rbs ofQ uant it y .
The principal are— beaucoup , much, many pen, lit tle un pen,
a little , rather ; assez , enough trap ,t oo , too -much bien,fort, tres,
very ; tout atfail, quit e an mains, at least ; an plus, at the most
en autre , besides ; cher, dear ; bon marché, cheap ; environ, about ,set tlement, only ne . . que , but , only, &c .
Adve rbs ofC om parison .
The principal are —p lus, more ; mains, less ; aiwsi, as ; comme ,
as ; si , so ; autant, as much ; tant, so much ; de meme, likewise ;davantage , more ; le p lus, the most ; le moine
,the least ; presque ,
almost ; apen pres, nearly ; que , than, as, &c .
Adve rbs ofAffirm at ion, Ne g at ion and D oubt .
Adverbs ofaffirmat ion are z—oui, yes ; si, yes (in answer to a
negative question) ; certes, certainly ; vraiment, indeed ;'volontiers,
willingly ; assurément, assuredly ; sans doule, without doubt ;d
’
acco'rd, grant ed, &c .
Adverbs ofnegation are —non, no pas, not ; point, pas da
tout, not at all nullement, by no means ; cependant, toutefois, however.Adverbs ofdoubt are z—peul- élre, perhaps ; probablement, likely.
Adv e rbs ofInt e rro g at ion .
The principal are— comment
, how combien,how much combim
de temps, how long ; quand, when ; pourquoi, why ; on, where ,w &c .
1 14
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
G ive the principal adverbs oft ime ?What are the principal adverbs ofplace ?H ow are adverbs oforderg eneral lyformed?Translate much, as much, so much, how much.
G ive the adverbs ofcomparison mostly used.
What is the difference between si and ouil
G ive some adverbs ofnegationTranslat e how, enough, too, about .
C onversat ion .
When will you be here ?
I shall be here to -morrow early.
When willy ou start ?
In) the evening as late as I can
(pourrai).
Howfarwill you go (irez )?I shall g o (irai) asfar as the railway goes
H ow long will you be absent ?
About two or three weeks,only.
H ow will you come back (reviendraz )?
I do not know (sais) yet ; but Ithink I shall come back by thest eamboat .
When will you write (écrirez ) tome ?
I shall write to you as soon as
(que ) I know (saurai) exactlythe day ofmy re turn t o London.
D o you want me to do (avez - vous
besoin quejefasse) anything foryou here ?
I thank you (very) much indeed ;I think I will accept your kindoffer.
I shall do very willingly everything I can (cc queje pourm i).
G ood bye .
Quand serez - vous ici?
Je serai ici demain de bonn e heure .
Quand partirez - vous ?
Le soir, aussi tard que je pourrai.
Jusqu'ouirez -vous?
J'irai aussi loin que le chemin do
fer va.
C ombien de t emps serez - vous ab
sent ?
Environ deux ou trois semaines,seulement .
C omment reviendrez - vous?
Je ne sais pas encore ; mais je
pense (
gue je rev1 endra1 par le
bat eau vapeur.
Quand m ecrirez - vous ?
Je vous écrirai aussitdt que jesaurai exact ement le jour demon retour aLondres.
Avez - vous besoin que je fasse iciquelque chose pour vous
Je vous remercie beauc oup,ment ; je pense que j
’
accepteraivotre ofi
'
re oblig eant e .
Je ferai tree volo'
ntiers tout cc que
je pourrai.
Adieu !
1 1 5
R e ading E xe rc ise No . 2 4 .
( continuedfrom No .
Mais il était a pe ine part i, 1 qu’z nu mendiant qui avait
vus de loin4 cc qui se passait ,5 acc ourut,6 s
’
empara7 des
souliers neufs e t les remplaca par8 les siens qui étaient
dans la plus pit euse9 condition . U ne heure apres, Nico las,
no pouvant10 résister au désir de savo irl l si la dépéche
était déjapassée 12 , revint13 e t voyant14 les vieux souliers
a la place 15 des neufs Que lle m e rve illeuse rapidité ,”
s’
eoria- t - illfi ; e t , décrochant 17 le s vieux souliers, il al la lesmontrer a ses am is, disan tl 8 que c
’
étaient ceux que son fils
lui avait renvoyés19par la m em e voie 2 0.
U n débiteur ayant été enfe rm é en prison pour det tesfit2 1 nu jour appe ler son c réancier. Monsieur,
”lui dit
i12 2 ,“sans vouloir23 parler de la vie triste e t ennuyeuse
que je mene ici, je ne puis2 4 pense r sans nu profond chagrinla dépense journaliers que vous faites2 6 ici inutilement
acause de moi2 7, e t j’
ai voulu2 8 vous communiquerune idée
qui m’
était v enue 2 9. Vous avez a payer deux francs parjour30, pour ma détention dans ce tt e prison . Faites31 m
’en
sortir : donnez - moi ensuite nu franc parjour et vous inscrirez 32 l’autre franc journe llem en t33 amon avoir34. D 635
cette mam'
ere , vous me délivrere z 36 de ma captivité,vous
contribuere z amen entre tien e t vous arriverez 37 apres un
certain temps a éteipdre3sl g capital que je vous dois.
”L e
créancier comprit39 que son débiteur avait raison40, e t 10
fit mettre41 aussitot en liberté : on no sait pas42 toutefois
s’
il lui accorda la pension qu’
il lui demandait, ni combien
de temps43 il la lui paya.
1 était parti, had gone, 2 qu’
, when, 3 vu, seen, 4 de loin, inthe distance , 5 se passait , was passing , 6 accourut , ran, 7 s
’
empere ,tookpossession, 8 les remplaea par, put in their place , 9 piteuse,pitiful, 10no pouvant , not being able , 1 1 savoir, knowing , 1 2 passée ,passed, 13 rev mt , came back, 1 4 voyant , seeing , 1 5 a la place , inthe place, 1 6 s
’
écria- t - il,he exc laimed, 1 7 décrochant , unhanging,
18 disant , saying , 19renvoyés, sent back, 2 0 voie , conveyance .
2 1 fit appe ler, sentfor, 2 2 dit - il,he said, 2 3 vouloir, wishing,
2 4je no puis, I cannot, 2 5 a, of, 2 6faites, make , 2 7 acause de moi,on my account, 2 8 voulu, wished, 2 9était venue , had come, 30 par
jour, a day, 31 faite s, cause , 32 inscrirez , w ill put down, 33journellement , daily, 34 avoir, credit, 35 de in, 36 délivrerez , willfree,37 vous arriverez a, you will s ucceed in , 38 éteindre, to pay of,39comprit , understood, 40 avait raison,
was right, 41 fit met tre ,caused to be put, 42 on ne sait pas, it is not known, 43 combien dotemps, how long .
1 16
TWENTf- rmrn Lnssou. Ving t- cingui eme L egon.
PR E POSITIONS .
Prepositions are words placed before nouns, ronouns orverbs
(in the Infinitive to indicate the relations oft ese words withother words whic precede . They can be divided into nine classes,viz :place, order, wnion, separation, opposition, purpose cause
,means
and specification. (This division we give herefor re erence only).Prepositions ofplace are : dans, into , in ; en, in ; hers, out ; decant,
before ; derriére , behind ; sur, on, upon ; sous, under; parmi,among ; entre, between ; vars, towards.
Prepositions oforderare : a/vant, before ; apres, after; depuis, since ;
jusqu’
a, asfaras, till.
Prepositions ofunion are : avec,with ; dwra/nt , during ;pendant, during ,
for; autre, besides ; selon, ac cording to ; sainemt , according to .
Preposit ionsofseparationare same, without ; excep té , except ;hormis, save .
Prepositions ofopposition are : ce ntre, against ; malgré, in spit e ofnonobstant, notwithstanding .
Prepositions ofpurpose are : erwers, towards ; touchant , about ; powr,for.Prepositions ofcause andmeans are : par, by ; moyennant, by means of
attendu, considering .
Prepositions ofspecification are : c, to ; de , of; en, in.
R EMARKS L—Besides these prepositions, whichmay be calledsimple , there are many composed mostly with the prepos1tion a, a noun or an adverb an the preposition de.
This is a list ofsome ofthese expressions :a cause de, on account of an dessous dc, undera cote etc, by an dessus de
, over
aflourde , level with an devant de , beforeaforce de , by dint of an derriere de, behindd l
’égardde , with regard to , towards an lieu dc. instead of
a l'insu dc , unknown to an milieu dc amidst , in the
a raisan de,at the rate of middle of
L ay bgg/rs dc, contrary t o an moyen de , by means ofa tracers ole, through an niveau de, even withan deld. de, on that side, beyond aupres ole , nearau dedans de, within autou/r de , aroundan dehors dc, without an tracers de
,through, ckc.
2 .—There are some other prepositions composed in a sim ilar
manner but Wi thout the preposition e , as,
en deed de , on thisside vis a'vis de, o posit e to , (t o.
en dépit de, in spite of tout pres dc, glose tofaute de, forwant of proche de , near
3.—There arefour prepositions whi ch have ainstead ofde; vizjusgu
’
a, asfar as ; conformenmot a, according to ; guanl a,
as to ; par rapport a, with regard to .
4.—Prepositions in French
'
are always fo llowed by the Infinitive —Je suis curieuwde le coir. I am curious ofseeing it .
EXCE PTION —The pre osition enwhich before verbs generally translates by, is the only one w
'
eh governs the resent part iciple .
Vous l’
apprendrez en parlant . You w’
1 learn it by speaking .
2 0
TWENTY- SIXTH LESSON. Vingt- sixi eme Lepon.
C onjunc t ions .
C onjunctions are so called be cause they join together sent enoe s or the different parts ofsentences.
There are two kinds ofconjunctions simple conjunctions,which consist ofone word only, and compound conjunctions.
G ov ernm ent ofC onjunc t ions .
C onjunctions govern either the infinitive , indicative or sub
junctive . Those gove rning the infinitive are formed with the
preposition de, as, afin de, in order to ; a mains de, unl e ss avant
dc,before da lieu de, instead of de crainte de , for fear that , d-
c.
Il vint me voir avant de partir. H e cam e to see me before leaving .
In order to use an infinitive afte r a conjunction, it is necessary that this infinitive should refer to the subje ct ofthe principalsentence
,as in the above exam
ple
,which would not be correct if
partir should refer to me instea ofil.As a rule , simple conjunctions all govern the indicative .
Je parlerai si vous voulcz . I shall speak ifyou like .
Je pense , doncje suis. I think, then I exist .
Je viendrai quand il sera ici. I shall come when he is here .
The followin conjunctions, all formed with the conjunctionque, govern the eu junctiveafin que, in order that loin que , farfromamains que , unless malgré que, although
avant que , before nonpas que , not that
an cas que , in case that pour que, in order that
bien que , though, although pourvu que, provided that
de crainte que, lest quoique, although
depeur que, forfear that sans que, without
encore gue , though soit que , wh ether
jusgu’
a ce que, t ill, until suppose que , suppose that
The conjunction que, that, gpverns the subjunctive afterverbs
used negat ively, and also ve r s which imply an idea offear,doubt , emotion , uncertainty, wish or command
,and impersonal
verbs.
Je désire qu’
il vienne . I wish tha t he may come.Je ne focus:pas qu
’
il arte . I do not wish him to go .
Ilfaut que vous par isz . You must speak .
A mainsquehunless, de crainte que, de peur que, le st, forfearthat , always require the verb thatfollows them to be preceded bythe particle ne .
A mains qu’
il ne_
pienne . U nless he should come .
D e pear qu’
ilpe parte . Forfear that he would leave .
AfterAvant que the—verb may?be preceded by ne.
R eviendra - t - il avant queje no sorte ? Will he return before I go out ?6
R ules about the use ofthe Subjunctive are given infull in L esson 74, pag e 2 94.
1 2 1
t o answer, répondre interval, intervalle m. reign, régne m.
t o assig n, assigner to inundat e , inorwler to remain, demeurer
bet, pari m. market , marché m. to roll, roulert o continue , continuer mud, bouef. t o sell, c endredefinit e, défini pace , pas m . soil, solm.
to gain, gagner praise , éloge m . sonorous, sonore
g esture, geste m. to pret end, prétendre speech, discours m.
e itre prey, proief. unbecoming , malséant
to indicate , ind iguer
E x e rc ise No . 2 6 .
1 . In order to speak— Before answering .
— Ifyou like .—When
you sing .—In order that you may — U nless you pret end.
Before you continue —In case that he may sell his horse . Although
you indicate to me his house .— Lest youfall. —Forfearthat yourecom
mence .- Though you are very prudent .
— Till he answers. Although
he has no fortime .—Although he speaks perfectly.
— Not that I am
satisfied.—In order that he may sell it . Provided that we give him
that —Al though it is lat e —Without yourbuying anything .—Whether
they are ilk— Suppose that he is absent .
you may love— that I might love—that he may not love
—that we might not love—that I may sing—that we might love— that
we may sing—that thou might est love—that he may walk—that thou
mayest love—that they (m. might love— that you may not love—that
we might continue—that he may love
— that youmight love— that they
(f. might not love—that he may sing— that we may love— that I may
love— that he might love—that we may give— that he may not remain .
2 . Jo continuerai pourvu que vous me donniez votre opinion. Soit
que vous soyez indiscret , ou que vous agissiez imprudemment il na
vous aime pas. J9 viendrai1 en ces que vous soyez alamaison”. Bien
que vous ne l’
aimiez pas, il parle toujours bien de vous. Je vous donnere i une lettre afin que vous la lui donniez . Il nous apporte toujoursdesfruits, quoique je ne les aime pas beaucoup. Je lui donne peu de
travail, afin qu’
il ait ls temps d’
aller vous voir". Jc pars4 de peurqu'il
ne m’
attende.
Speak to him in order that he may give it (m. to my brother.
I like him although he speaks badly ofme . I will remain unt il youruncle arrives. I refuse whether he is satisfied or nets. Send it im~
mediat ely lest he will receive (pres. subj. ) it too late . I lend it (f.to you until I commence my lessons. I say6 it t o you in order that
you may buy some in the7 market . This coat is good although it is
very cheap.
1 viendrai, will come 2 (1 la.maison. at home 3 d‘
aller vous voir, to go and see
you 4 pars, leave 5 not , no n 6 I say, je dis 7 m the , an
See Supplt .for the Subjunct ive ofverbs Page s 6 to 13,
1 2 2
Que st ions on G rammar.
Why are conjunct ions so called?
How many kinds ofconjun ctions are there ?What moods do conjunctions govern in French ?
Which are the conjunct ions which govern the Infinitive !
What is the condition required to use the Infinitive after con
junctions
What'
are the conjunct ions which govern the Indicative ?
H ow are the conjunctionsform ed which govern the Subjunctive ?
G ive some ofthe conjun ctions which govern the Subjunctive?When does the conjunction que govern the Subjunctive ?
What are the conjunctions which require the particle m to be
placed before the verb that follows que?
C onve rsat ion.
What will you do this morningbefore you go t o your offi ce ?
I shall write a let ter in order to
know ifI must go and see myuncl e this evening .
Will you take me with you ifyougo ?
With great pleasure , unle ssMr X.
should accompany me .
you come back before I g oto bed?
I do not know, although I shall
do my best in order t o be here
as soon as possible .
In case that I should go with you,could you t ell me what train
you int end to take in order that
I might meet you at the station.
It will be six o’
clock before I am
able to leave the oflice although
I should like very much t o
leave earlier.
Then I shall be at the station at
halfpast six.
Do you take much luggage wi thyou?
No , I only take a very small portmanteau.
Que ferez -vous cc matin, avant
d'alleLavotre bureau?
J'é crirai une let tre afin de savoir
srje dois all er voir mon oncledans la soirée .
Voulez - vousm’
emmeneravec vous$1 vous y allez ?
Avec grand plaisir, amoins queMonswur X. ne m
'accompag nc .
R eviendrez - vous avant que j’
ailleme coucher?
Je ne sais pas , quoique je veuillemon mieux pour étre
ici le plus t6t possible .
Ag e s que ‘jlg ille avec vous, pourriez - vous me dire quel trainvous ave z l
'int ent ion de prendre
afin que je puisse vous rencon
trerala. stat ion.
I] sera six heures avant que jepuisse quit t er le bru
'eau ; quoi
queje désire beaucoup le quit terplus tot .
Je serai donc . a la station a sixheures e t demie .
Emportez- vous beaucoup de baa
gag es ?
Non, je ne prcnds qu
'nn tres petit
porte-mantcau.
1 2 4
TWENTY - SEVENTH L E SSON. Ving t - sep tieme L egon.
C onjunc t ions ( continued) .
( This lesson isfor reference only. )
Besides theirdivision into simple and compound, conjunctionsare also divided into copulative, augmenta tive, alternative, hypo
thetic, adversative, extensive, periodical, causative, conclusive, explica
tive,transitive and conductive.
I.—C opulative conjunctions merely connect without adding any
thing to the idea ; there are two ofthem : et, and, ui, neither, nor.
I I .-Augmentative imply an idea ofaugm entat ion ; they are the
following : ole p lus, bien plus, an surplus, moreover; d’
ailleurs, outre
que , besides ; encore , st ill.
I II .— Alternative imply an idea ofalternative or dist inct ion they
are asfollow : cu, or; ou bien, either; sinon, ifno t ; tantdt, sometimes.
IV .— H ypothetic or conditional conjunctions imply the idea ofa
condition without which what is meant by the principal sent ence
ceases t o take place . The principal are the following : si, if, whe thersoit que , whether ; pourvu que, provided that ; a mains que , unless
,
quand, when ; a condition que , under the condition that ; en cas que ,in case that ; suppose que, suppose that .
V .—Adversative conjunctions are those which indicat e some dif
ference , opposit ion or restriction between what pre cedes and what follows them
,as
,mais
,but ; quoique, although ; bien que , though ; cc
pendant, however ; nianmoins,neverthele ss ; toutefois, however; do
peur que, de crainte que, lest ,forfear that , (t o.
VI.— Extensive conjunctions connect while enlarg ing the idea.
They are :jusqu’e ce que , t ill ; encore, still ; en/in, at last ; aussi , also ;
mime, even ; tant , so much.
VIL— Periodical conjunctions refer to a certain period ortim e, as
quand, lorsque, when ; dans le temps que, at the t im e when ; p endant
que , durant que , while ; tandis que , whilst ; tant que , as long as ; aussildt que, as soon as ; des que , since ; avant que, before ; depuis que, since ;apres que , aft er ; apeine, hardly, dec.
VI II .—C ausative conjunctions imply an idea ofcause or motive ,
.as,afin que , in order that ; parce que, be cause ; comme
,as ; car
,for;
puisg-ao
,since ; d
’
antani que , whereas ; aussi, also ; attendu que, con
sidering that .
IX .— C onclusive conjunctions deduce a conclusionfrom apreceding
sent ence , as, or, now ; done, then ; par consequent, consequently ; c’
est
pom-
quoi, th erefore .
.
X.— E xp licative conjunctions connect two sent ences while con
veylng further explanat ions, as, comme , as ; on tant que , as ; savoir,c'est -a-dire, that is t o say ; s artout, above all ; de sorta que , defacon que ,
so that ; si bien que, so that .
XL—Transitive conjunctions imply the idea oftransition,as
or, now ; au reste , besides ; du reste, more over; apres tout, after all ;quant a, asfor, as to .
1 2 5
allat once , tout de suite lie,m ensonge m .
Am erican, ame‘
ricain mat t er, matiéref.to declare , dé clarer ocean, ocean m . bateau-a
detail, detail m. once , unefois vapour m .
England, Augleterref. passeng er, passager m. story , histoiref.extraordinary, extra pigeon, pigeon m . to talk, causcr
ordinaire port , port m . triumph , triomphe m .
fact ,fail m . pre cise , précis m .
feat , prouessef. to relate , raconter U nit ed Stat es,E tats.
journey, voyage m. t o remark, remarq-uer Unis m.
E x e rcise No . 2 7 .
1 . The cat and the dog .— Iremark and I repeat — NeitheryounorI.
Neithermy brother nor my sist er.— Moreover he has much skill.
— Besides I have visit ed1 all the ports ofthe Ocean — Either you or I.—Ifnot I shall gog to the U nit ed Stat es — Ifyou like .
—Whe ther youare sat isfied or not .
— U nless you repeat it .— When you would be here .
— But he is an honest man — Although you are my brother.— H owever
you are discontent ed.— Lest he shouldbe ill . — Ti11 you are old
—When Iwas at Paris — While he was young .
—As soon as you come3. —After hehad finished.
—Because it is extraordinary.—As you know“.
we may punish— that I might punish— that youmay receive
— that he might not receive— that thoumight est not punish— that they
(m . might punish— that I may receive— that she may re ceive that I
might not re ceive— that he may punish
— that we might punish— that
you might re ceive— that we may receive— that they (m . might not re
ceive— that you may punish— that you m ight punish
— that they f.may re ceive— that she may not re ceive
— that thoumayest punish— that
he might punish— that th ey (f. ) may punish.
2 . Jc parlerai avotre ami et je lui dirai5 de venir6 demain matin.
Je n’
aime mi sonfrere ni sa soeur. Ou bien vous m e donnerez celui
1a, oubienjen achet eraiun autre . Vous finirez votre travail,sinon vous
serez puni . Tant6t il arrivait par le bat eau avapeur, tantot il venait
par le chemin de fer”. Je répéterai cette regle si vous lo trouvez necas
saire . Quoique vous lui ayez racont é cc voyag e extraordinaire il ne vousa pas cru
e. Aussit6t que vous aurez fini de causer, je parlerai. Je dis9
cela afin que vous soyez prudent .
We shall commence ourjourney all at onceforfearthat the weathermight be
“t oo bad ifwe should wait 1 1 till Saturday. Ifyou repeat thisextraordinary story, people will think that you are an impostor. H e
is very learned, however he is very modest . I shall punish him becausehe has talked during the lesson . I shall remain until he comes back1 2from his journey. Sometimes I find it easy, sometimes I find it diffi cult .I visited, visité 2 I shall go, ji rai 3 come , viendrez 4 know, savez 5 di rai
,
shall tell 6 de venir, to come 7 chemin defer, railway 8 cm, believed 9dis
,
say 1 0 would be , no soi t 1 1 should wait , attendions 1 2 comes back , 1 evienne
fie Spppl
t for the subjunctive ofverbs ofthe 2 nuandstd C onjugations (Pagesan
1 2 6
Que st ions on G rammar.
H ow also can conjunctions be divided ?
Is there any idea implied in copulative conjunctions what are they?
What is the idea implied in augmentative conjunctions g ive some .
What idea do alternative conjunctions imply what are they
What do fig/pathe tic or conditional conjunctions imply ? give some .What are adversative conjunctions g ive some .
What is the effect ofextensive conjunctions g ive some .
To what do periodical conjunctions refer give som e .
What is the idea implied in causative conjunctions give some .
What is deduced by conclusive conjun ctions ? g ive som e .
H ow do explicative conjunctions conne ct two sent ences ? give some .
What is the idea implied in transitive conjunct ions g ive some .
C o nve rsat ion .
Did you bring your brother and
sist er with you ?
I brought neither the one nor theother, but they will come this
afternoon.
When will you go to Paris ?I shall go there either in Augustor in September.
Though ou are very busy, Ishould ike you to pay us avisit
in the country. C ould you come
next SaturdayI cannot t ell youunt il 1 have seenmy partner, but I shall let youknow before Friday .
Will you come and se e myfatherwhile I am away
l shall come and se e him everySunday, ifnot twice a week.
I should like you also to writ e to
m e often .
I shall do so under the condition
that you will answer me im
mediately.
Have you bought a house since Isaw you last we ek
Yes, I bought one the day beforeyesterday .
Ave z - vous amené votre frere etvotre soeur avec vous
Je n’
ai amené ui l'un ui l
’
autre ,mais ils viendront cet t e apresmidi .
Quand ire z—vous aParisJ ’
irai soit en aout , soit en septambre .
Quoique vous soyez tres occupe,
je voudrais que vous nous fissiezune visite ala campagne . Pourriez - vousvenir samedi prochain
Je ne puis vous le dire , jusqu a ce
que j'aie vumon associé
,maisje
vous le ferai savoir avant ven
dredi.
Viendrez - vous voir mon pere , taudis que je serai absent
J8 viendrai le voir chaque dimanche , sinon deux fois parsemaine .
J ’
aimerais aussi que vous m e erivissiez souvent .
Je le ferai, ala condition que vousme répondiez immédiat ement .
Ave z - vous ache té une maison de
puis queje vous ai vu la semainederniere ?
Oui, j
’
en ai acheté une avant -hien
1 2 8
TWENTY - E IGH TH Lnssox. Ving t - huiti eme Logan.
C onjunc t ions ( concluded) .
X]I.~ The conductive conjunction, which is so called because it
conducts the sent ence to its perfection, is the conjunction que, that .
(See Lesson
Que conjunction must not be confounded with que adverb and querelative or int errogative pronoun.
Que is an adverb at the beg inning ofthe second t erm ofa com
parison, and translat es as, than.
Il est plus riche que moi. H e is richer than I . Il est aussi
savant que sonfrere . H e is as learned as his brother.
Que is also adverb, whenjoined to no, in the meaning ofonly, but,or at the beginning ofexelamative sent ences in the m eaning ofhow.
Il n'a que quinze ans. H e is but fifteen years old.
Que vous étes ban ! H ow kind you are !
Que is a relat ive pronoun when it is preceded by a noun or pronoun
, called its ant e cedent , and translat es whom orwhich.
L’
homme que vous connaissez . The man whom you know.
L e livre que vous lisez . The book which you read.
C’
est le mien que vous avez . It is mine which you have .
Que is an interrogative pronoun, when at the beginning ofan interrogative sent ence and translat es what.
Que voulcz -vous? What do you wish?
Interje ct ions,Interjections are words used to express the sudden affections
ofthe m ind.
They are divided intoInterjections ofjoy, as, ah ! ah ! bon / well !grief: ah / ah ! hé las / alas ! aie / ouf/ dearme !fear : ah / ah ! oh / oh !aversion ji .
’fi do ne ! fie !consent : wil l let it be so !
derision : bah !pshaw !
surprise : eh / eh bien/ hé .’ ah !halloo 1
to encourag e : allons / courage ! ca l come on !cheerup!
t o warn : gare / beware ! hola/ hoa ! hoy'
10. to call : hola/ hoa ! hey ! hc’
! ch !
1 1 . to impose silence : chut / hush !
1 2 . to applaud : bravo ! bravo ! luurah !
Norm— 0h is spelled 6 before nouns and pronouns6 17q Oh G od! 6 monpére / Oh myfather! 6 vous ! Oh you!
woo
sr
co
sn
moa
wu
apartment , apparto
ment m .
ape , singe m.
blow, coup m.
caue , cannef.coach , voituref.comedy, comedicf.
to consist , consister
to dress, habillcr
effort , eflort m .
E xe rc ise No . 2 8 .
1 . I think that hisface is very beautiful —4 do not think that thecoach stops
1at the inn — H e is more learned than his brother.
— H e has
but one brother.-H ow patient you aro l—The profe ssor whom you
know2 .— The news which he re ce ived (past def.
—It is she whom he
liked ( imp . best .—Well I am very satisfied—Alas !hisfatheris dead.
Fie ! what have you done3? - Le t it be so ! I accept it .
—Halloo ! where
are you— C ome on, myfriends — Beware , the passage is very dang erous.
H oa! come this way4
.—Hush l your mother sleeps
5.
we may return—that he might re turn— that they (f. may
return— that he might not return— that I may return— that We might
re turn— that she may not re turn— that I might return that he may
not return— that you may re turn— that youmight not return—that she
may not return— that you might re turn
— that we might not return
that they (m . may return— that thou mayest return.
2 . Jo désire que vous alliez6voir7 cet t e comédie . Jo no trouve pas
que ce tt e dame habille ses enfants avec beaucoup de gout . L es floursque vous avez dans votre jardin sont tres belles. Les amis que vous
avez sont trés fideles . Que vous étes heureux ! Jo n’
ai que deux heures
ademeurer avec vous. Que désirez - vous? Jo desire que vous soyez
heureux. H élas il aperdue tout e safortune . H ola!votre pore est dans
la chambre et il désire que vous veniez9. C ourag e ! vous aurez bientfit
fini votre travail. Bravo ! vos efforts seront récompensés. Silence !
votrefrere dort“. Fi done ! vous avez fait 11 une mauvaise action.
I believe“! that he will be exasperated he will protest against such“
proceedings. Prussia is but one part ofthe G erman empire . PL
apartment consists of“four rooms rather15 larg e than small. H ot
beautiful those flowers are . Beware , the ape bit es”
. L et it be so, I
shall give you t enfrancsfor this cane . H ush ! you will inc rease his
griefifyou speak to him ofhis misfortune .
1 stops, s’
arréte 2 know , connaissez 3 done ,fait 4 come this way, venez par ici
5 sle eps, dart 6 alliez , may go 7 voir, to see 8 perdu, lost 9 veniez, should
come 10 dort, sleeps 1 1 fait, done 1 2 believe , cro w 1 8 such, do tels, 14 of,en 1 5 rather, 17114t 1 6 bit es,
'mord
Se e Supplt.for the subjunctive ofverbs ofthe 4ih conjugation Page 15.French Grammar. 6
empire , empire m.
to employ, employer
to exasperate , exasp c’
rer
extrem e , extremeface , fi guref.G e rman, allemand
to increase , augmenterinn
,aubergef.
means, moyen m.
t o open, ourrir
to oppose , opposer
philosopher,phi losophem .
to prepare , pr’
parer
proce eding , proo de m.
to prot est , protester
Prussia, Prussef.to try , essayer
130
Que stions on G rammar.
What is the conductive conjunction ?Why is it so called?What are the words with which que conjunction must not be con»
founded?When is que an adverb?
When is que a relative pronoun?When is que an interrogative pronoun !
What are int erjections?
G ive the interjections ofjoy, grief,fear, and aversion.
G ive the in t erje ctions ofconsent , derision, surprise , encouragement.
What are the interjections used to warn, to call, to silence , to ap
plaud i
C onv ersat ion.
What do you require?I wish you t o go to the bank tobring that money.
My brother has more time than I ;would you allowhim to go thereinst ead ofme ?
Le t it be so ! but tell him to go
at once .
C ome on ! be quick and do not
remain too long awa Whendo you think you w
'
be back?
I do not think that I shall beaway m ore than thre e quart ers
ofan hour.
Take care ! there isa cab : did younot see it ?
Yes, but I did not think thatthere was the slightest danger.
Halloo ! where are you going ?
I am oing t o the printing oflico.
Ah ! have you anything to do
there ?
C ertainly : I must go and correct
some proofs.
Will you remain there for a longtime ?
Oh no ! I shall only be there a
few minut es.
Hush ! somebody is speaking tome and I cannot hear what hesays.
Que voulez -vous!
Je désirequevous alliez alabanquo
pourporter cot ”
(gent
M0 11 frere a plus e t emps que
moi ; voulez -vous lui permettred
’
y allerama place ?
Soit ! mais dit es- lui d’
y aller tout
do suite .
Allons ! dépéchez- vous e t no ros
te z pas trop longt emps absent.
Quand pensez- vous que vous
serez do rotour?Je no pense pas que je sois absent
plus do trois quarts d’
honro.
G are ] voilaun fiacre : no l’aviezvous pas v ul
Si, maisjo no ensais pas qu’
il yout lo moin e dang er.
H ola! ouallez -rons ?
Jo vais al'imprimerie .
Ah l avez -vous quelque chose ayfaire ?
C ertainement : il faut que j’
aillecorriger quel ues épreuves.
Y resterez -vous ongt emps?
Oh non !je n’
y resterai que quel
ques minutes.
C hut ! que lqu’
un me parle e t jeno pe ux pas entendre co qu
'il
me dit.
1 32
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.Vingt
- neuvieme L egon.
R em arks o n
There are certain verbs which , without be ing irregular,
present certain peculiarities in the ir conjugat ion .
V e rbs oft h e l st C onjug at io n .
I.— Verbs ending in cer, take the cedilla under the 0 before
a and o.— Nouspersons (from percer), we pierce je percais, I pie rced.
II.— Verbs ending in ger take an e after the 9before a and o .
Nous mangeons (from manger), we eat je mangeaz’
s, I at e .
III— Verbs ending in elerand eter double the t or the t beforean o
'muto.
J’
appelle (from appeler), I call j’
appellerae'
, I shall call.Itje tte (from jeter), he throws nousje tterions, we should throw.
EXC EPTIONS .— Acheter, to buy ; harceler, t o harass peter, t o peel
de’
color,t o disclose ; bourreler, to t orment ; gcler, to fre ez e e
’
peler, to
spell ; becqueter, to peck , take the grave accent on the e inst ead ofdoublin the consonant .
I - Vorbs having in the infinitive an e in the last syllablebut one , change that 4 into é before an e mute .
J eepere (from esp érer), I hope c'
l ewerera, he will hope .
Ve rbs having in the infinitive an e unaccent ed in the last
yllable but one , change that e into é before an e m ute .
Je pese (from poser), Iweigh nousménerons (from mener), we shall load.
V.— Verbs ending in yant in the present participle change y
into 11before an e mute .
Je pate (from payer), I pay ; ils essutent (from cssuyer), theywipe vous emp loierez (from employer), they will employ.
Some writers,however
,ke ep the y in verbs in ayer, as payer,
and spe llje paye.
V e rbs oft h e 2 nd C onjug at ion .
H azr,to hate
,drops the diaeresis in the thre e persons singular
ofthe Pre sent Indicative je hats, tu hats, it ba it, and in the 2 ndperson singular ofthe Imperative hats.
H air is the only verb in French which takes no circumflexaccent in the 3rd person singular ofthe Imperfe ct oftheSubjunctive .
F leurt'
r, to bloom ,
to flourish,has two pre sent Participle s,
fleurtssant,blooming , andflorissant, flourishing , and also twoforms
he Imperfe ct Indicative .
Bénir as two past participles; benit,conse crated ; bent , blessed.
D e l’
cau be’
m’
te,holy wat er itfut ben t par son pare , he was
blessed by hisfather.
V e rbs ofth e 3rd C o njug at io n .
Verbs in cevoz’r, like recevoz
’
r, take the cedilla under 0 before
i t je de’
pus, queje congJusse.The past participle ofdevoir is d’fi to distinguish it from da,
ofthe . The feminine is spe lt due.Se e for verbs, the Supplement .
133
to accompany, aecom~ to degenerate dégénérer heroine , heroinef.pagner devoted, devoue love
,amour m .
annal, annalef. discre et , discret nightly, noctwrneastonishment , étomw order, ordre m .
ment m . exp loit m. report , rapport m .
chief, chefm. to expose , exposer republic , républiquef.combat , combat m. t o form,former touching , touchant
consent , consentement t o fulfil, remplir troop, troupef.m . function,fonctionf. uniform , uniforme m .
danger, dangerm. guard, gardej. volunteer, volmitairem.
E xe rc ise No . 2 9.
1 . I announce—we announce—Iannounced ( imp .- wo announced
(p . d.)— he eat s— I ate ( imp.— wo eat— he at e (p . d.
— that we might
e at— thou callest— wo call— they call—we shall call—we should callthat I may call
— that we might call—Ihave called—u he buys—we buy
—I bought ( imp .—I shall buy
— we should buy— that I may buy
that we might buy— we had bought—he degenerat es— you deg enerate
— I deg enerat ed ( imp .— he would deg enerat e
— we should degenerat e— that he may deg enerate
— that youmay deg enerat e—I lead— we lead
—I led ( imp .— ho led (p . d.
—I shall load— we should lead— that he
may lead that you may lead— that he might lead
— they had led Ipay
—we pay— they pay—I paid ( imp — they paid (p . d.
— I shall
pay— we should pay
— that I may pay—that youmay pay
— that Imight
pay— I hat e—they hate—I hat ed ( imp.
—thoy ( m . hat ed (p . d.
hate (thou)—do not hat e— I shall hat e—we should hate— that I may
hat e— that we might hate—The trees were blooming (bloomed).—Fine
arts1 were flourishing—H isfather has blessed him — The church was
consecrated—Jdeceive—we deceive—he received (p . d. )—youreceived
( imp .— This is due to me .
2 . Nous no mangeons pas de viande . Ilsmangeaient tropdefruits.
Oh monez - vous ce t enfant . Jo lo mono dans lo jardin . C ombien pose
cela? Nous no haissons personne , Il hait cot homme . C’
est uno
nation dégénérée . Ils dégéneront chaque jour davantage . Il paierait
ses dett es, s’
il avait do l’
arg ent . Vous l’emploierez si vous vouloz
2 mo
faire3un plaisir. Les arbres fieurissaient dans tous lesjardins. L esbeaux
arts florissaient acette époquo“. Ils ont recu uno let tre do leurs amis.
They at e much moat . We begin to speak French. H e calls you.
We shall buy new dresses this afternoon . D o they hope that we shall
accompany them ? We announce his death t o his parents. They ex
asperato all theirfriends by their bad conduct . H e leads the armies
ofthe R epublic to the combat . They call you : go (and) se e what theydesire . They announced that they would be here this morning .
i fine arts, les beaua arts 2 voulez, wish 8faire, to do 4 époque, epoch 6 go andse e . allez voir
134
Que st ions on G rammar.
When do verbs ending in oer take the cedilla under the c?
When do verbs ending in ger take e between the root and the ending !
When do verbs ending in eler and eter double the l or the t ?
What are the principal exceptions to the preceding rule ?
What becomes ofthe e ofthe penultimate syllable before an emute?What becomes ofthe e ofthe penul timat e syllable before an emut e ?What becomes ofthe y in verbs ending in yant in the present participle s, before an e mut e ?
What irregularity does the verb hair present ?What are the two present partic iple s offleurir?What are the two past participles ofbénir?Wh en do verbs ending in ce'voir take the cedilla?What is the spelling ofthe past participle ofdevoir?
C onve rsat ion.
D o you hope to be successful inthis enterprise ?
Ihope so .
When do you commence ?
We commence in afew days.
What willyouhaveforyourbreakfast ?
A little bread and butt er and a
cup oftea will be sufficient .
H ow much does this fish weigh?
It weighs two pounds and a half.Where do you take your brother?
I take him to his grandfather’
s.
H ow much do you pay for hisrailwayfare ?
I only pay t on pence .
Were the trees blooming whenyouwere in the country ?
Yes, they were covered with
flowers.
Is your cousin in a flourishingposition ?
I do not know ; but I think he isvery successful in his business.
Espérez—vous réussir dans cette
entreprise ?
Jo l’
espere .
Quand commencez - vous ?
Nous commencons dans quelquesjours.
Que voulez - vous pour votre dé
jeuner?
Un pen do pain et do beurre otune tasso do thé sufliront .
C ombien peso co poisson?
Il peso deux livres e t demio.
Oh menez - vous votre fréro ?Jo lo mono chez son grand pore .
C ombien payez - vous pour lui on
chemin dofor?Jo no paie que dix pence .
Les arbres flourissaient - ils quandvous étiez ala campag ne ?
Oui, ils étaient converts de flours.
Votre cousin est - il dans une pos1tion florissante ?
Jo no sais
pas ; maisje pense qu
’
ilréussxt tr s bien dans ses affail‘
cs.
Tnmrrn'rn L e sson.
136
Trentzeme L egon.
W ords with asp irat e d H .
The rules which have been given for articles, demonstrativeand possessive adjectives, show the necessity ofknowing whe thert he hfound at the beginning ofwords be aspirated (se e lessons 1 ,2, 4, 1 2 and
This knowledg e is also necessary to ascertain ifthe final e ofm onosyllabic words must be e lided and ifthe linking ofwordshas to take place .
Thefo llowing is a list ofthe words in which the h isaspiratedto brag
hache axe
hagard, haggard
rhachis hash
haio (f. hedge
haillon raghaine hatred
hair, to hate
lzaire (f. hair- shirt
l ale,drying wind
l alé, sunburn t
lzaler, to tow
hale t er, to pant
hallo market -ha ll
hallebarde (f. ha lberd
hallier thicket
halo halo
halt e (f. ha lt
hamac hammockhameau hamlet
hampo (f. stafili euche (f. hipuiangar shed
lianne ton cock
hanter, to haunt [nagambling
haquet drag- happer, to snapharangue (f. harangue\haras breeding
stud
harasser, to harass
harceler, to torment
hardcs (f. clothe s
hardi, boldharem harem
hareng herringhargneux , quarrelsome
haricot French
bean
haridelle hack
harnacher,to harness
harnais harness
arpe (f. harparpie (f. harpyarpon harpoon
hart withe
hasard hazard
hase doe - hare
hat e haste
haubans(m .p. shrouds
haubert coat- ofmails
hausser, to raisehaut
,high
1hautain, haughtyhautbois oboe
have, emac ia ted
_hfivre ha rbourhavresac (m . knapsack
heaume he lmet
hennir,to ne i
'
gh
héraut herald.hérisser, to bristle
hernie he rnia
he'
ron he ron
.hérosCl‘
) hero
horse (f. harrou'
, p ort
cullis
hetre (m . beech- tree
_heurt er, to clash
hibou owl
hideux,hideous
hisser,to hoist
hoche r, to tosskhomard lobster
onto shame
hoquot (m . hiccougi’o
horde horde
ho t te (f. dorsel
houblon hophoue ho e
houille coal
houle (f. billow
houle t te (f. crookhouppe (f. tufthouppe lande (f. a sort
ofgrea t coathouspiller, topulIabouthousse s (f. housings
houx hollyhuche kneadingtrough
huée hootinguit , eightuguenot huguenot
humor, to inhale
hune top (marine)hilppe p ewe thui ‘
e (f. wi ldboarhead
Words v ery seldom used and words derivedfrom those given in this list havebe en omitted.
( t) The h is mute in héroine , hérmsme and héroiqua
1 0 !
Q ficomplice , complicem .
a'
air, afi'
aircf.arrival, arrivéef.t o assist , ai Jar
to avoid, eviter
to claim for,réclamcr
t o contrac t , contracter
disorder, désardre m .
enemy,ennemi m .
t o exe cute , exécuter
t o facilitate ,faciliterheavy , lourd
rehabilitate ,habiliter
reprimand, réprimande
ripe , mitrscandal, scandale m.
smce , puisque
spendthrift , dissipa
teur m .
to strike ,frapperstudy, etudef.
E xe rc ise No . 30 .
The words beginning with an h ag iirated must be lookedfor in the liston the opposite page .
1 . J'ordonnerai (a) cot homme do réclamer se hache . La haio est
c ouverte do1 flours. La houille est tres chore cet te année . L’
habit do
mon pore est t res bienfaith Mon ami craig nait3 la haino de son on
nomi. Il doit safortune eu hasard. Le hautbois est un instrument
t res difiicilo . Il n’
y a plus“do houille '
sous lo hangar. C e.harnoau est
t rosjoli. Les houblons no sont pas encore mfirs. L o hérault so tenait5
devant la porto . Lo soldat lofrappa ave c se hallebarde . Le mendiant
é tait convert do haillons. Lo havresac du soldat franeais est trés
lourd. Loschions ont pénétré dans lo hallior.
e'
loquent e . C o hamac est tres commode .
e st dens lo jardin. L e houx e st unjoli arbusto.
Sa harangue a ét é tres
Jo no lo hais pas. Ma hot t e
Jo n'on ai que huit .
’
L e halo que l’
on voit6 aut eur de la lune est généralement un signe do
pluie . Avez - vous vu7 la harpo que mon pore m'a ache tée .
2 . The herald announced the arrival ofthe hero . This man’
s dog
is there . The shed isfull ofrags.
river is bordered with8 bee ch - tre es.
I do not hat e my enemies . The
They have no housings. D o not
strike this poor cat . The dishes are on the kneading- t rough . My
brother plays the9oboe . D o not harness the horses now. H e held a
branch ofholly in his10 hand. The hoe is in the garden. H e was re
ce ived with hootings by the multitude .
he lmets and coats- oi-mail° in his colle ction .
the morning . H e lives in the hamlet .
H e has some“very curious°
I inhale the cool air“ofThis child is very much
1 2 in
commoclcd13 by the hiccough . D o you play the harp? She was (the)m other ofe ight children . This great coat belong ed t o“my grand
father. The merchant who has sold you this coal has deceived you.
The owl sle eps15 during the day.
l couverte do, covered with 2 ja il , made 3 craignait , fem-
cd 4 it n’
y a plus, there is
no more 5 se tenait , stood 6 vo it , se es
de 9 to play an instrument , joucr d'un instrument
8 bo rde red w ith , hortlt‘e
1 0 in h is , a la 1 1 cool
air, airfrais 1 2 very much , trés 1 3 incommoded, incommode'
14 belong ed
to , était d 15 sleeps , do:
French Grammar.
514
rth,dore
'navant
of, an lieu tie
t o live , demeurermiserly , avare
moon , lunefoccasion, occasionj.
to order, ordonner
orgy, orgief.
to present , presenter
pret ext , prétexte m .
prodigal, prodigue
rain, p luief.
1 58
Q ue st ions on G ramm ar.
1 . H ow are the articles the and some translated before a noun beginningwith a mute h?
2 . H ow are the articles the and so me translated before a noun begmning
with an aspirated h?
3. H ow is the demonstrative adje ctive this translated before a singular
masculine noun beginning with a mut e h?
H ow is the demonstrat ive adjective this translat ed before a singular
masculine noun beginning with an aspirated h?
5. H ow are the possessive adjectives my, thy, his, hers, its translatedbefore a singularfeminine noun beginning with a mut e h?
6 . H ow are the possessive adjectives my, thy, his, hers, its translatedbefore a singularfeminine noun beginning with an aspirat ed h?
7. H ow will you writ e je, me , to, se, ne , que , d c . before a mute h?
C onv e rsat ion .
Where does this man live ?
H e lives in the hamlet which you
see on the t op ofthe hill.
Where did you mee t him‘
.Z
I me t him at the market -hall .
Where did he put his clothes?H e put them under the shed.
Tell him to bring the harness.
H e is gone to fe t ch the barrow.
D o you hear your neighbour’
s
hack ? it has be en neighing forsome minut e s.
The flies torment it very probably .
Where is the owl which we heard
last night ?
I think it is on tho be e ch - tre e
which is on the other side ofthe river.
What bird is that ?
It is a heron .
Where did you shoot it ?
On the banks ofthe pond whichis between the hedg e and the
thicke t .
Why has the dog been howling allthe morning ?
I do not know ; it is very quarrelsome .
ondemeure cot hom e ?
I] demeure dans lo hameau que
vous voyez sur lo haut de la
colline .
Oil l'avez - vous rencontré ?
Jo l’
ai rencontré ala hallo .
Oil a- t - il mis ses
Il les a mises sous lo hangar
D it es- lui d’
apportor les harnais.
Il est allé chercher la horse .
Ent endez -vous laharidelle dovotre
voisin ? elle hennit depuis quel
ques m inutes .
Les mouches la harassent tres
probablement
Oh est lo hibou que nous avons
ent endu la nuit derniero?
Jo pense qu'il est sur lo hétre qui
est do l'
autre coté de la riviero .
Quel oiseau est - co ?
C’
est un héron .
0h l’
avez - vous tué ?
Sur les bords de l’
étang qui est
entre la haie e t lo hallier.
Pourquoi lo chien a- t - il hurlétoute la matinee ?
Jo no sais pas ; il est trés har
gueux .
The student will remember that no linking take s place before an aphated h.
140
TW E NTY D IAL O G U E S
on subjects ofeveryday life .
Vingt dialogues sur des sujet: de la viejounwliére.)
Ameeting
About the way, or road
Visit
Railway Joatney
do.
See Journoy
At a Town
Letting Apartments
With a servant
Meals
To writ e a letter
At a money changer’s
Buying
With a doctor
ParisMuseums
The Stre ets ofParis
H ow to progress in French
IN D E X .
Table des matiéres.
1 46
1 47
1 48
1 49
155
156
157
1 58
159
1 60
U ne rencontro.
Au sujet du chemin.
Visit e.
Voyage en chemin do
do .
v erséo.
Dans une ville .
Location d’
appart ementa
Avec nu domestique .
A table .
Une promenade .
Avoc un docteur.
Musées do Paris.
Les m es do Paris.
C omment faire dos progliaa on
Francois.
Ropes .
Pour ecrire une lettre .
Chez un changeur.
Achats.
Voitures.
141
A M e e t ing .
G ood morning , Mr. how doon do ?
Quit e well, thank you ; how are
you?
Not very well , I had a bad coldlast week and have not ye t quit erecoveredfrom it .
I am very sorry to hear that , buthope it wil l have no serious
consequences. Is yourfamilyin good health ?
I have not seen any ofthem sincethe beginning ofthe week, as
they have gone to the seaside .
Shall you not go and spend afewdays with them
I should like it very much but Iam very busy.
Did you see ourfriend, Mr. Whitethe day before yest erday
Yes ; I had an a pointment with
him,and sawgiim in the aft er
noon.
Is it true that he is not very suc
cessful in business ?I cannot t ell you pre cisely : but Ithink he has be en rather nu
fortunat e lately in his trans
acti ons.
Did you buy anything at the auction yesterday
Yes, I bought several pieces offurniture , two oil -
paint ings andafew bot tles ofold port -wine .
Were many buyers there ?
Not very many : the weatherwasrather bad, and I suppose that
prevent ed many people fromcoming .
Are you going to the Italian Operato - night ?
No I do not understand a word
ofItalian,and besides the pric e s
are rather too high forme .
Where are you g oing ?
I must be at my office by two
o’
clock, and have just time t o
catch the train.
G ood bye 1
U ne R enc ontre .
Bonjour, MonsieurX commentvous port ez
- vous?
Tres bien, merci ; comment allez ~
vous?
Pas tres bien ; Jai eu nu mauvaisrhume la semaine derniere , e t
je m'en suis pas encore tout -a
fait remis.J0 suis tresfached'apprendre cela;maisj
’
espére qu'il n
'aura as de
sérieuses consequences. ot ! 3
famille e st - elle en bonne saute ?
Je n’
ai vu aucun d’
en tre eux de
puis le commencem ent de la
semaine , vu qu’
ila sont allés
aux bains de mer.
Irez ~vous passer quelques joursavec eux?
Je le voudrais bien ; mais je suis
tres occupé .
Avez - vous vu notre ami, Mr.
White avant - bier?
Oui ; j'avais un rendez - vous avec
lui,et je l
'ai vu dans l
’
apresmidi.st - il vrai qu
’
il ne réussisse pas
dans les afi'
aires?
Je napeux pas vous le dire exactem ent ; mais je crois qu
’
il a été
nu peu malheureux dernierement dans se s transactions.
iAvez - vous achet é quelque chose
hier aux encheres?
Oui ;j'aiachet é quelquesmeubles,
deux tableaux al’
huile et quel
ques bouteilles de vieux vin de
Port o .
Y avait - il beaucoup d’
acheteurs ?
Pas beaucoup : le temps était un
peu mauvais e t je suppose que
cela a empéche beaucoup de
monde de venir.
Allez - vous cc soir aux Italiens?
Non je ne comprends pasunmot
d’
Italien et de plus les prix sont
nu peu trop élevés pour moi.allez - vous?
Je dois etre amom bureau vers
deux heures e tj’
aijuste le tempsde prendre le train.
Adieu.
142
About the way , or ro ad .
Will you kindly t ell me which isthe shortest way to the Ex
changeWith much pleasure . G o straight
on untilyouarrive at the church
which you see down there ; then
take the first street on the right
and the second on the left .
'3sank you. How long will ittake me to go there ?
About twenty minutes, ifyou donot stop on the way .
C an you t ell me ifI shall find a
g ood restaurant before arrivingat the Exchange ?
You will find some in this street
and many others near the Ex
change ; but the lat ter are
rather expensive and I should
advise you to go to one in this
st ree t , where you will be sure
t o find anything you require .
Isthere anyforeignmoney chang erin the neighbourhood ?
There is“
one opposit e the churchbut I should advise you to go
to the goldsmith whose shop is
just at the corner ofthe street
which leads to the Exchang e .
Is there any tramcar going in
that direct ion?
There is one just coming ; but itwill not take you further than
the church.
oes it stop there ?
No ; but , you would arrive at theriver ifyou remained in it asfaras it goes.
C an you direct me to the nearest
post- othee ?
You will find it on the right , about
two hundred pacesfrom here .
Is the t elegraph office at the sameplace ?
No ; you will find it on the other
side , just opposite thefountain.
I thank you very much for yourkindness, Sir.
Do not mention it .
Au suje t du ch em in.
Voule z -vous avoir la bonté de me
dire quel est le plus court cheminpour allerala Bourse ?
Ave c beaucoup de laisir. Alleztout droit jusqu
’
ce que vous
arriviez a. l’
éghse que vous voyezla- bas renez alors la premiererue a cite et la se conde a
gauche .
Je vous remercie . C ombien det empsmefaudra- t - il poury aller?
Environ vingt minutes, si vous novous arretez pas en rout e .
Pouvez - vousme dire sije trouveraiun bon restaurant avant d
’
ar
river ala Bourse ?
Vous en trouverezquelquesunsdansce t te rue et beaucoup d
’
autres
pres de la Bourse ;mais ces derniers sont un peu chers, e t jevous conseill eraisd
'allerdamaun
de ceux de cette rue, ou vous
serie z sur de trouver tout os
dont vous avez besoin
Y a- t - il nu change'ir dans le
voisinage ?11 y en a nu on face de I’é lise ;maisje vous conseillerais d allerche z l
’
orfevre dont le magasinest juste eu coin de la rue quiconduit ala Bourse .
Y a- t - il un tramway quiaille dansce t t e direc tion?
En voilajustement nu qui vient
anaintenant
l;mills i] nav
pnscon
uira. as us oin ue lise .
S'arréte -ilil Fa? q eg
Non ; mais vous arriveriez alariviére, si vous y restiez aussilong temps qu
’
il marche .
Pouvez - vous m’
indiquer le bureaude posts le plus prochain?
Vous le trouverez sur la droit e,a
environ deux cents as d’
ici.Le bureau du télégrap e est - il euméme endroit ?
Non ; vous lo trouverez de l’
autrecoté, juste vis-a-vis de la fontaine .
Monsieur, je vous remercie beaucoup de votre obligeance .
Ne parlez pas de cela.
144:
R ailw ay Journe y .
Two tickets t o Paris, please .
What c lass?Se cond class.
Would you not like t o have firstclass ticke tsfor the seajourney.
What would be the difference inthe price
?
Two shillings.
When do es the train leave ?At 10 o
’
clock .
H ow long will it take us to go to
D over?
About two hours.
Where shall I have my luggageregist ered
?
Next door.
Is there any smoking carriag e in
the train ?
Yes, sir; there is also a Pulman
car which any passeng er can
enter by paying a small addit
ional sum .
Is there any spe cial carriag e forladies?
No ; it is no t the custom in this
countryIs there any great difference between single andreturn tickets?
There is g enerally a difference ofa quarter on the total amount .
Please we igh my luggag e ; handle
the trunks carefully .
Take your seats, g entlemen.
Please allow myfriends to remain
on the platform until the train'
starts.
Your tickets, g entlemen.
H ere they are .
You are in the wrong train , sir.
Where is my train, then ? I wast old to enter this carriag e .
You very probablymisunderstoodthe guard ; you will have t o go
to the carriages which are o
pposit e the clock : this train on ygoes to
Have I time to g o and have somerefreshments?
You have just five minutes.
V oy ag e en ch em in de fe r.
D eux bille ts pour Paris, s’
il v. pl.
Que lle classe ?
D euxieme classe .
Ne voudriez - vous pas avoir des
bille ts de premiere classe pour
la traversée ?
Quelle serait la difference de prix?
D eux shellings.
Quand part le train?A dix heures.
C ombien de t emps nous taut - i]
pour aller aD ouvres?
Environ deux heures.
Oh dois je faire enregistrer mesbagages?
A la. port e d'acfité .
Y a t il dans le train une voiture
pour lesfumeurs?Oui, m onsieur; il y a aussi une
voiture Pulman oupeut entrer
chaque voyag eur, en payant un
petit supplement .Y a- tt - il des wag ons spéciaux pourles Dames?
Non ; ce 11'est pas l
’habitude dans
cc pays ci.
Y a t - ilune grande difference entrele prix des bille ts simples et
celui des bille ts d'
alleret retour?
11 y a généralement une difi'
érenced
’
un quart de la somme totale .
Veuillez pe sermesbagag es :maniez
soigneusement les malles.
En voiture , messieurs .
Vouille z perme ttre ames amis derest er sur le quaijusqu
’
e cc quele train parte .
Vos billets, messieurs.Les voici.
Monsieur, vous etes dans le mauvais train.
Oil donc est m on train on m'a
dit d’
entrer dans ce tte voiture .
Vous avez probablement mal com
pris le chefde train ; vousaurezaller jusqu
’
aux voitures qui
sont en face de l'horloge ce
train ci ne va qua
Ai-je le tempsd’
allerprendre quel
que rafraichissements?Vous avez just e cinq minutes.
R ailway Journe y
( concluded) .
Do you not think the train does
not run veryfast ?The are just re iring this part
0 the road an they must move
over it very cautiously.
What is the name ofthe village
we just saw on our right ?
I do not know ; it is the first time
I have travelled this way.
Will you kindly shut the window ;I have a bad coldandfe e lratherafraid ofthe draught.
Would you prefer to sit with yourback t owards the engine ?
I will not trespass on your kindness.
It makes no difference to me .
When does the train arrive at our
destination
At five minut es past four.
Your tickets, gentleman.
Have we arrived?
You will be at Paris '
in two min
utes, but the tickets are alwayscollected before reaching thestation.
Where have I to go to g et mylug g age ?
Pass this way and youwill se e the
custom offi cers standing at the
entrance ofthe room where yourlugga e will be searched and
then elivered to you.
Shall we have to wait a long time?
I do not think so : about aquarter
ofan hour or twenty minute s.Do youwant me to openthis trunk
?
I have nothing in it but clothes.
We are bound to examine everytrunk.
I have only apound oftobaccoforpersonal use.
You can close yourportmanteau.
1 45
V o yag e en ch em in de fer(fin)
Ne croyez- vous pas que le train no
marche pas tres rapidement .
Ils sont en train de réparer cet te
part ie de la voie , e t on doit en
c et endroit - ci marcher avec
beaucoup de precautions.
Que] est lo nom du village quenous venous de voir sur notre
droit e
Je ne sais pas ; c’
est la premierefoisqueje voyag e parcet te route .
Voudrie z - vous avoir la bonté deferme r la port iere ; j
’
ai unmauvais rhume et je crainsbeaucouples courants d
’
air.
Préféreriez -vous vous asseoirladostourné a. la machine ?
Je n’
abuserai pas do votre bonté.
1s.
Anrons -nous long tempsaat tendre?‘
Jc ne pense pas : environunquartd
’haura ou ving t minutes.
Voule z ~vous que j’
ouvre cette
malle je n’
y ai que des efi'
ets.
Nous somm e s force's de visiterchaque malle .
Je n ’ai qu
'ane livre de tabac pour
mon usag e personnel.
Vous pouvez fermer votre portemant eau.
C elam’
est indifferent .Quand la train arrive - t -il a. notrede stination
A quatre heures cinq minutes.
Vos billets, messieurs.
Sommes-nous arrives?
Vous serez a Paris dans deuxminut es
,mais onprend toujours
les billets avant d'arriver a la
gare .
dois-je aller pour avoir mesbagag es?
Passez par ici et vous verrez lesdouaniers debout a l
'entrée de
la salle on vos bagages serontvisités et ensuite vous seront
remis.
S e a. Journe y .
Which is the st eamerfor D ieppe ?
The one you see there alongside
the quay.
When will she start ?
At high wat er— at two thirty five
The steamer appears to m e to be
very small.
Oh , no ; she is a very good siz e
she has be en plying betwe en
Newhaven and D ieppe the last
two years, and although the sea
is oft en rough, has never re
quired any important repairs.
Will you show me the way to the
second class cabins ?
C ome this way, sir.
St eward, I am looking for a berthand cannot find any disengag ed.
H ere is an unoccupied berth, sir;do you wish to take anything
"?
Yes, please ; bring me some t ea.
The sea is now very calm : would
you not like to go 011 deck ?
there are few passengers there ,and the air is cool and bracing .
What is the light - house we see
there , on the horiz on?
It is the light-house at the eu
trance ofthe harbour.
What is that boat , which is comingto mee t us?
I believe it is a pilot .[t hink we are stopping .
Yes, we must wait until the tidewill allow us to enter the port .
Is it not possible to hire a boat t o
take us ashore
The sea is ratherrough thismorn
ing : which I suppose is thereason I do not se e any boats.
What is the signal they are justhoisting at the end ofthe pier?
The signal that there is enoughwat er now t o ent erthe harbour.
146
Traversée .
Quel est la bateau a vapeur doD ieppe ?
C’
est celui que vous voyez la lalon du quai.
Quan partira- t - il ?
A la marée haute , adeux heurestrent e - cinq.
Le bateau avapeurme parait trés
petit .
oh, non il est de bonne grandeur
il y a deux ans qu’
11fait le ser
vice entre Newhaven e t Dieppee t quoique la4 n_ er soit souvent
ag gaise , il n'a jamais eu be
soin d’
important es reparations.
Voudriez - vous me montrer le chemin pour aller aux cabines dedeuxieme classe ?
Venez par ici, Monsieur.
Maitre d’
h6t el, je cherche une
place et je n’
en puis trouver devacant e .
J
Voici une place vacant e , Monsieur;désirez - vous prendre que lquechose ?
Oui, s’il vous plait apport ez
-moi
du thé.
Lam erestms calme maintenantn
’
aimeriez - vous pas a aller sur
le pont , il y a 15.pan de passagerse t l
’
air est frais et vif.Qu
'est - cc que c
’
est que le phare
que nousvoyonsla- bas31 l
’
horiz on?
C’
est le phare de l’
entrée du port .
Qu’
est - ce que c'est que le bateau
qui vient an devant de nous ?J9 crois que c
’
est un pilote .
Je crois que nous nous arrétons.
Oui, nous devons at t endre que lamarée nous permet te d
'entrer
dans le port .
N'
est il pas possible de louer un
bateau pour aller at erre ?
La mgrest um peu houleuse,cc
mat in ; c’
est cc qq a-i't , je suppose , queje nevoisaucun bat eau.
Quel est le signal qu'on hisse a
l'extrémité de laje tée ?
C’
est le signal qu’
il y a assez d’
eau
pour entrer dans le port .
148
L e t ting Apartment s.
I should like to have a suit e . ofrooms composed ofa drawingroom
,a dining room , three bed
rooms, a kitchen, and two rooms
for servants.
What floor would suit you best?
The first or se cond floor.
We have no apartments vacant
on either ofthese floors,but we
have just what you want onthethird story.
I am afraid it would be too high .
I do not think it would incon
venience you at all,as there is
a lift in the house .
Are there any stables belongingt o the mansion ?
No , sir ; but the mews are situat ed
within two minut es walk, and
you can see them very wellfromthe back windows ofyourapartyment .
Is there any post and t elegraph
office in the street ?Yes, sir ; there is a post office at
the end ofthe street , andalet terbox at the next house .
What is the rent which was paidby the preceding occupier?
One hundred and twenty pounds.Is that sum inclusive ofwat erand gas?
No , sir ; that you have to payseparat ely.
Are the apartments t o be le t bythe month or year
?
They have always be en le t by the
month. but the t erms ofa new
arrangement can be submit tedt o the landlord.
When could I se e him ?
In the course ofnext week leave
me your address, I will le t youknow.
I am quit e willing t o take the
rooms, on condition I can havethem by the year I do not likeremoving every month.
nent ala maison ?
sont situées ade“pouvez les voire rriere
‘
de votre
Y a- t - il un bui1 as poste e t de
t élégraphe du ns la rue ?
ii y a uh bureaude post e eu 'bout de la m e e t
une boite aux let tres alamaisonvoisinef
'
Quel'
est le loyer que payait le 10cataire précédent ?
C ent - vingt livres st erling .
C et te somme comprend e lle l'eau
et le gaz ?
Non, monsieur ; vous ave z a les
payer séparément .
C es appartem ents peuvent - ils etrelonés an mois on al
’
année ?
Ils out toujours e'
té loue’
s eu mois,mais les condit ions d
’
un nouvelarrangement peuvent étre sou
mises eu propriétaire .
nand pourrais-je la voir?
Dans le courant de la semaine
prochaine ; laissez -moi votreadresse , je vous le ferai savoir.
Je suis t out dispose aprendre leschambres
,ala condition que je
pursse les avoir a l’
année ; jen
’
aime pas adém énag er chaque‘ i ‘ n 1
L o cat ion d'e ppe rt e
m ent s .
Je voudrais avoir un appart ement
composé d’
un salon,d'une salle
amang er, de trois chambres a
coucher, d’
une cuisine et de deux
chambres de dom estiques.
Quel est l’
e'
tag e qui vous convicn
drait ls mieux ?
Le premier ou le second étag e .
Nous n’
avons d’
appart ements va
cants a aucun de ces étages,mais nous avons juste cc que
vous désirez eu troisieme étag e .
Je crains que celane soit trophaut .
Jc ne pense pas que cela vous gene
1 49
W ith a S e rvant .
What time do you g et up everymorning ?
I enerally rise between seven and
alfpast .Will you then pail me everymorning as soon
‘
as you are
dressedYes, sir; you may rely upon me ,and should anything happen toprevent me , I shall not forgett o t ell another servant t o knockat your door at the propertime .
Take my boots, please , and bringthem back into my room as soon
as they are cleaned.
The left boot is unsewed shall Itake it to the shoemaker to
have it repaired?
Yes ; but te ll him that I want itthis evening .
There are two lettersfor you, sir.
When did thepostmanbring them?H e brought them just now.
I found no wat er on my toilettable , last night ; will youfet chme some , that I may dress myself; it is get ting lat e .
Do you want anything else ?
Yes ; I should like to have twoclean t owels : do not forget tochange them twice a we ek.
Somebody brought this not e foryou and waitsfor an answer.
Say that I am engag ed and shall
call this aft ernoon.
Mr. X asks ifyou can receive
Show him in.
Shall you want your supper thisevening
Ye s ; put it on my table , but donot wait forme ; it is quite pos
sible that I may be rather lat e ,and I do not wish to disturb
anybody in the house .
H ere is a key which the landlordaskedme to give you, in order
that you may come in at anytime you like .
Ave c un D om e st ique .
.Aquelle heure vous levez - vous les
matins?
Jcme ljaveg énéralement entre septheures
'et se t heures e t demie .
Voulez - vous a ors m’
appeler t ousles matins, aussi- t6t que vous
serez habillé?Oui, mons. ; vous pouvez comptersurmoi ; et s
’il arrivait uelque
chose qui m’
en empeo at , jen'oublierais pas de di
'
re a un
autre domestique de trapper avotre ports 3.l
’
heure convenable .
Prenez mesbottines, s’
il vous plait ,et rapport ez lesdansma chambreaussitot qu
’
elle sseront nettoyées.
La bot tine gauche est décousue ;dois-je la port er eu
’
cordonnier
pour qu’
il la répare ?Oui mais dit es- lui que J en aibesoin cc soir.
Voici deux lettrespourvous, mon
sieur.
Quandlefact eurlesa-t -ilapportées?
Il vient de les apport er.
Je n’
ai pas trouvé d'eau sur ma
table de toile tte , hier soir ; voule z - vous all er m
’
en chercher,
que je m'habille ; il sefait tard.
Avez - vous besoin de quelque autrechose ?
Oui je voudrais avoirdeux essuiemains propres ; n
’
oubliez pas deles chang erdeuxfoisparsemaine .
Quelqu’
un a apporté cet t e let tre
pour vous et at tendun e réponse .
D ites que je suis occupé e t que
je passerai cet t e apres~midi.X demande si vous pou
vez le recevoir.Faites le entrer.
Aurez - vous besoin de votre souperce soir?
Oui me tte z - le surma table, mais
ne m’at tendez pas ; il est pos
sible queje rentre un peu tard etje ne veux dérang er personnedans la maison.
Voici un e clefque le proprietairem'a charg é de vous dormer, afin
que vous puissiez rentrer al'heure qui vous conviendra.
Me als .
What do you wish to have foryourbreakfast ?
'h vo boiled eggs, ratherunderdone ,and a rasher ofbacon.
Would you like t ea, coffe e , or
cocoa?
G ive me som e t ea, with two pieces
oftoast ed bread.
What will you haveforyourlunch?
Some cold roast be efand salad,some che ese , and a bot tle ofbe er.
We have some very nice cold roastchicken,
and a leg ofmut ton ;would you not like some ih
stead ofroast beef? I am afraidit is rather overdone for you.
We ll, let me have some chicken.
Will you dine with us this even
ing? we expect Mrs. X and
her two daughters, and Mr.
S’
s cousins.
I am not sure I shall be able to
come , but will do my best to be
here . At what t ime do you
dine ?
At seven o’
clock .
What shall we have for dinner.Ox tail soup, salmon,
a roast ed
turkey with ham , and a haunch
ofvenison, asparagus and no
tatoos.
Do not forget to have some supperreadyfor me .
Will you have cold meat ?Yes ; a small pie ce ofcold veal
will do very well, with some
R oquefort cheese and a g lass ofclare t .
Will you kindly ask the landladyifshe would mind my buyingeverything I require ; ofcourseshe would charg e meforcookingand att endance .
I will ask madam ; but I knowshe does not much like that Wayofmanag ing .
150
R epas .
Que désirez -vous avoirpour votre
déjeuner?D eux oeufs ala coque , peu cuits
,
et une tranche de‘l ard.
Voul ez - vous du thé, du café ouducacao ?
D onnez -moi du thé, avec deux
m orceaux de pain grillé.
Que voulez - vous pour vo tre dé
jenneralafourche t t e ?Du boeufrotifroid et de la salade ,dufromage e t une bout eille debiere .
Nous avons de tres bon poulet
rotifroid, e t nu g ig ot de mon
t on ; en voudriez - vous e u lien
de boeufro‘
ti ? Je crains qu'
il
ne soit trop cuit pour vous.
Eh bien ! faites-moi donner du
poulet .
D inerez -vous avec nous cc soir?
nous at tendons madame X .
et ses deux filles, e t les cousins
do Mr. S
Je ne suis pas sur que je puissevenir
,maisjeferaidemonmieux
pour etre ici. A quelle heure
dinez - vous ?
A sept heures.
Qn’
aurons nous pour diner?
D e la soupe alaqueue de boeuf, dasaumon, nu dindon r6tiavec du
jambon e t nu g igo t de venaison,des asperg es et des pommes
-det erre .
N’oublie z pas de me preparer asouper.
Voulez -vous de la viande froide ?Oui ; nu pet it morceau de veau
froidfera tres bien mon affaire ,avec du fromag e de R oquefortet un verre de Bordeaux.
Voulez ~vous avoir la bonté de demanderala proprie
’
taire si celalui fer-ait quelque chose que
j'achetasse tout ce qu
’
ilmefaut ;nature llement elle me fera itpayer la cuisine et 10 service .
Je demanderai amadame ; maisjesais qu
’
elle n'aime pas beaucoup
ce t t e maniere de faire .
1 52
At a Money C hang e r’
s .
Will you kindly change this hun
dredfranc note and these twentyfranc piecesforme ?Would you like to have g old or
not es?
I will take a five -
pound not e ,fourpounds in gold and the rest in
silverand copper.
What is the exchang e for twentyfranc pieces?
F ifteen shillings and eight pence .
I expected to lose only three penceon every piece?
I think, on the contrary, I am
very reasonable in charging you
fourpence only.
C an you discount this draft ?am sorry I cannot do that foryou ; we only discount draftswhen the drawer and the bearer
are personally known to as.
H
C an you direct me to any bankwhich would discount it ?
I am afraid you will find the samedifficulty everywhere , unless
you are introduced by afriend.
Where could I sell these stocks?I will take them ofyou at marketprices.
C an you t ell me how to investa small capital?would advise you to buy G overn
ment bonds or some shares in
our great R ailway C ompanies.
The interest is not very high,but you have not the slightestrisk to run .
I am leaving town for a month
could I deposit these stockswith you ?
We will certainly take them to
oblig e you ; but should preferyour depositing them with your
banker.Will you advance me some moneyon these deeds ?
No , sir; we are money chang ers,but never lend any money.
h—n
C he z un C hang eur.
Voulez - vous avoir la bont é de me
chang er ce billet de cent francset ces pieces de ving t francs?
Voulez - vous avoir do For ou des
billets de banque ?
Je prendrai un bille t de banque docinq livres, quatre livres en or
,
e t le rest e en arg ent e t en billon.
Quel est le chang e pour les piecesde ving t francs?
Quinz e shellings et huit pence .
Je ne pensais perdre que trois
pence sur chaque piece ?Je crois au contraire que je suis
tres raisonnable en ne vous
prenant que quatre pence .
Pouvez - vousescomptercet t e traits?
Je suisfache de no pouvoir fairecela pour vous : nous n
’
escom
ptons de traites que quand e
t ireur et leX
‘iorteur nous sont
connus personnellement .
Pourriez - vousm’
indiquerune ban
que qui l'escompterait ?
J'ai peur que vousne trouviez part out lameme difiiculté ; am oins
que vous ne soyez présenté parun am .
Oh pourrais-je vendre ces valeurs?Je vous les prendrai aux prix ducours.
Pourriez - vous me dire comment
placerun pe tit capital
Je vous conseillerais d'ache t erdesfonds sur l'etat ou quelques aotions de nos grandes compagniesde cheminsdefer. L
’
intérét n’
est
pas tres élevé, mais vous n’
evez
pas lo moindre risque acourir.
J0 quit te la ville pour un m01s
pourrais-je dépl. h r ces valeurs
chez vous?
Nous les prendrons certainement
pour vous obliger; mais nous
préférerions que vous les dé
posassiez chez votre banquier.
Voudriez -vous m’
avancer de l'
ar
g ent sur ces titres?Non, monsieur nous sommeschang eurs, mais nous ne prétons
jamais d'arg cnt.
Buying .
H ow do you sell this ?
At the price you se e marked ; allourgoodshave the pricesmarkedin plain figures.
Is that the lowest price ?Yes, we fix our prices as low as
possible , and cannot reducethem.
G ive me five yards ofthis?D o you think it will be enough ?I am afraid you will have some
trouble in procuring the samematerial in afew weeks time .
I am not satisfied with the clothyou sold me the other day. I
had a good mind to return it to
you.
’
We are very sorry you did not doso, as we always do our best tosatisfy all our customers.
H ave you still any ofthe blackvelvet which you sold to myfriend two days ago?
1 think so ; yes, here it is ; howmuch will you tak e : you can
have it a lit tle chea er thanMrs. . . ifyou take t e
as it is a remnant .
I will take it then :whatevermaybe the fashion,
velvet is alwaysrich and elegant .
S hall I show you anything else ?
I am just considering ifI am inwant ofanything more .
We have very nice sunshade swhich we could sell you at ex
ceptionally low prices.
The season is rather advanced Ishould prefer to have a cheapsilk umbrella.
This is a very good article : I donot think you could buy it
cheaper anywhere else.
I will have this one . Please sendit to my address, 65, Bessborough Stree t .
o o o o o o
Achats.
C ombien vendez -vous ceci?
Au prix que vous voyez marque ;t outes nos marchandisesport entleur prix marque en chifl
‘
res
connus.
E st - os le plus has prix?
Oui, nous faisons nos prix aussihas que possible , et nous no
pouvons les réduire .
D onnez -moi cinq yards de ceci.
Pensez -vous que ce soit asse z ; jecrainsque vousn
’
eyaz de lapeineavous procurer la méme e tofi
‘
e
dens que lques semaines .
Je ne suis pas cont ents du drapque vous m
'avez vendu l
’
autre
iour. J ’
avaisbien envie de vouse renvoyer.
Nous sommes tresfachesque VOU Sno l
'aye z pasfait, vu que nous
faisons toujours de notre mieuxpour satisfaire tous nos clients.
Avez - vous encore du velours noir
qus vous avez venduamon amieil y a deuxjours?
Je pense que oui ; le voici ; combien en prendrez - vous ? vous
pouvez l'avoirauh peumeilleur
marché que madame sivous prenez le tout, vuque c
’
est
un coupon.
Je lo rendrai done : quelle quesoitlamode , le velours est tou
jours riche e t élégant .
Vous montrerai-je quelque chosed
’
autre ?
Je me demandais justement si
J avais besoin d’
entre chose .
Nous avons de tresjolies ombrellesque nous pourrions vous vendrea des prix exceptionnellement
has.
La saison est un peu avancée : jepréférerais avoir nu parapluie
de soie ahen marché.Voici nu tres bon article : je no
ense pas que vous puissiez'acheter autre part meilleur
marché.
Jc prendrai celui- ci. Veuillez me
l envoyer amon adresse , rue deBessborough , numéro 65.
154
C arriag e s .
C abman, howmuchwill you char e
me to go to the Northern Raiway station ?
Two francs and fifty centimes, sir.
It is too much : I will g ive you
two francs.
Very we ll, sir ; what train do youwant to catch ?
1 want to leave by the express.
Then we shall have no time tolose .
Where does this omnibus go ?
It follows the whole line oftheBoulevards.
What is the fare ?Three pence inside and three halfpence outside .
Is there any difference accordingto the distance ?
No , it is the same fare any dist ance
Will that omnibus take me t o theSouthern Railway Station?
No . you will have to take a transfer ticket .
Is there anything to payfor it ?
No , the conductor is oblig ed to
give i t t o anybody who asksforit
,without any extra charg e .
Where can I find a decent carriageat a reasonable charg e ?
At the next livery stables.
Are there any regularfares?Yes, you can have carriag es by the
drive or by the hour at verymoderat e charg es.
Are thefares the same at all times?
No ; they are higher from halfpast twelve at night t ill six
o’
clock in the morning duringthe summer, and seven duringthe winter.
Is there anything t o pay for theluggag e .
Yes ; you have to pay an extra
charge oftwent v - fivc cent imes
for every parce l.
voiture s .
C ocher, combienme prendre z- vous
pour allerala gare du Nord?
Y a- t - il quelque chose a payer
pour les bagages?
Oui ; vous ave z apayerun supplém ent de ving t
- cinq centimes
par colis.
D euxfrancs cinquant e centimes,monsieur.
C’
e st trop : je vous donnerai deuxfrancs.
Tres bien,monsieur ; que l train
voule z - vous prendre ?
Je veux part ir par l"‘express
Alors nous m’
e vous pas de t empsaperdre .
Oil va cet omnibus?
Il suit toute la ligne des Boulevards .
Que l est le tarif?Trent e centimes a l interieur et
quinz e cent imes surl'Im
'
périaIe .
Y a- t - il que lquedifference , d'apres
la. distance ?
Non , c'est ls méme tarifpour
t out es les distances .
C et omnibus me conduira- t - il ala Gare du Midi?
Non ; vous aurez a prendre une
correspondance .
Y a- t - il quelque chose a payerpour ce bille t ?
Non, le conduct eur est obligé dele donneratous ceux qui le demandent . sans aucune augmentation .
puis-je trouver une voiture
convenableaunprix raisonnable .
A la premiere remiss.
Existe - t - il nu tarifréglementaire ?Oui;vouspouve z avoirdesvoitures
a la course on a l'heure ades
'
prix tres modérés.
Les prix sont - ils les memesatouteheure ?
Non ; ils sont plus élevés depuis
minuit et demijusqu’
asixheures
du matin , pendant l’
ete e t sept
heures pendant l'hiver.
1 56
A W alk .
Will ou come and take a. walkwit me ? I have nothing t o dothis afternoon.
Where do you int end going ?I int end going to the
“Tuileries,the garden is beaut iful ; flowersare now infull bloom thefountains temper the heat oftheday ; orang e trees are covered
with blossom , and the chestnut
trees invite visitors to sit in
their cool and agreeable shade .
H ow lat e will it be when we come
back?
I do not know :from the “Tuileries
" I intend crossing the
C oncord Square , the most magnificent square in the world,with its perspective ofpalaces,public buildings, and gardens ;thenwalking along the
‘C hamps
Elysees”asfar as the “Trium
phal arch ofthe Star.
D o you not think we should dobet ter to take an open carriag e
and ext end our excursion asfaras the Boulocrne Wood and Acclimatationaardeul
No ; Ifee l I require some exerciseand I think I shal l enjoy mywalk very much .
Very we ll ; I will accompany youshall we take umbrellas?
I believe it quite unnecessary ; thebarome ter has risen since the
beginning ofthe week, and thereis no probability ofrain this
afternoon."
The clock has just struck nine ;le t us go , ifwe do not want tolose the most agreeable part ofthe day.
D o you notfeel tired, and would
you not like to sit down a fewminutes?
iI should like it verymuch : there isan empty bench, let us sit down.
U ne prom enade .
Voulez - vous venir faire une prom enade avec moi ’ je n
’ai rienk
faire ce tte apres-midi.
or. avez -vous l’
intention d'aller?J'ai l'intention d'aller aux Tui
leries : lojardin en est beau ; lesfieurs sont maintenant enpleinefleur; lesje ts d
’
eau t emperentla chaleur dujour ; les orangsrssont converts de fleurs et les
chataignisrsinvitent lesvisiteursas
’
asseoiraleur ombre fraichee t agréable .
Quelle heure sera- t- il'
quand nous
reviendrons?
e ne saispas : en quittant les'l‘ui
lerias, J’
ai l’
int ention de tra
verser la place de la C oncorde,la place laplusmagnifique qu
'il
y ait eu monde , avec se perspe ctive de palais, d
'édificespu
blies e t de jardins ; et alors demarcher ls long de C hampsE lysées,jusqu
’
a1’
arcde triomphede l
’
E toile .
Ne pensez -vous pas que nous ferionsmieux de prendre .une voiture découvsrt e et de poussernotre excursionjnaqu
’enboisde
Boulogne st eu jardin d'accli
matation?Non ; j
’
ai besoin d’
exercice st jspense queje prendrai beaucoupde plaisirama promenade .
Tres bien je vous accompagneraiemporterons
-nousdesparapluies?
Js crois que c’
est tout -a-fait inut ile ; le barometre a monté de
puis le commencement de lasemaine . et il n
’
y a aucuus probabilité qu
’
il pleuve cette apresmidi.
L’
horlog e vient de sonner neufheures ; partons si nous ne voulons pas perdre la part ie laplusagréable de lajournes.
Ne vous sentez - vous pas fatigue;n
’
aimeriezwous pas a vous as
se oir quelques minutes ?
J’
aimera is beaucoup ce la voilanu
bane vide, asseyons-nous.
1 57
W ith a. D o c t or.I was very unwell the day beforeyest erday ; still worse yesterday ,
and Ifelt so bad this morningthat I unders tood I was in wantofa doctor's att endance .
What ails you?I have a violent head-ache ; Ife ela pain in my limbs, andam not
inclined to eat .
Allow me t ofeel yourpulse : it israther quick. Please show me
your tongue . Did you sleepwell last night ?
Not well at all ; I could not go tosleep before one o
’
clock in the
morning .
D o youfeel thirsty ?Very : Ihad some lemonade yes
tsrday, but it did not quench
my thirst .Have you coughed at all lat ely?
Yes , I had two violent at tacks ofcough during the night .
You caught a cold very probablythe weather has been rather
chang eable , and many persons
sufferfrom bronchit is. I shallwrit e a prescri tionfor you.
What do you ad'
se me to eat thisafternoon?
I think it will be best to abstain
from having anything tod ay :I he s you will have a. goodnight srest andto
-morrowmom
ing , I shall call again hopingfind you a great deal better.
D o you expect I shall be confined
to my roomfor a long time ?
Oh no ! you only require a lit tle
rest , and take great care not
to catch cold. Ifyou followexactly all my prescriptions,have no doubt you will soon re
cover from this slight indis
position.
Do you think smoking would dome any harm ?
I do no t think it would do youany good.
Ave c un D o c t eur.
J ’
ai été tree indisposé avant - bierencore plus hier ; et je me suissenti si mal cs inatm que j
’
ai
compris que j’
avais besoin del'
assistance d’
un docteur.
Qu’
avez - vous
J’
ai un violent mal de téte ; jeressens une douleur dans lesmembres et je n
'ai pas envie de
manger.Perm e tt ez -moi de vous tat er ls
pouls ; il est un peu accéléré .
Veuille z ms montrer votre lan
gue . Avez -vous bien dormi lanuit derniere
Pas bien du tout ; je n’
ai pum’
en
dormir avant une heure du
Vous sente z -vous altéré?Tres alt éré : hier
"ai bu de la lio
monade , mais e e n’
apas apaiséma soif.
Avez - vous toussé dernierement ?Oui, j
’
ai eu deuxviolentes quintesde toux pendant la nuit .
Vous vous ét es probablement re
froidi : la temps a été tres va
riable et beaucoup de personnessoufl
‘
rent de bronchit es. Je vaisvous écrire une ordonnance .
Que me conse illez -vous de mang erce tte aprés
~midi?Je pense qu
'il vaudramieux vous
abst enir de rien prendre aue
jourd'hui : j
’espére que vous
aurez un bon repos pendant lanuit
, et demainmat inje reviendrai avec l
’
es oirde vous trouveren bien mei eure santé.ensez - vous que je sois longtempsconsigné dens ma chambre?h non ! vous n
'evez besoin que
d'un peu de repos, et prenez
grand soin de ne pasattraperunautre refroidissement . Si voussuivez exactement mesprescriptions, je no doute pas que vous
vous remettiez bientfit de cett e
legere indisposition.
Pense z -vous que fumer me fassedu mal?
Jc na pense pas que celavousfassedc bien.
1 58
Paris Museum s .
Which are the principal museums
I ought to visit in this city.
There are the Louvre and the
Luxembourg Museums, whereare the m ost celebrated paint
ings ofthe ancient masters, and
many ofliving artists.
D oes the Louvre Museum contain
anything else but paint ings?
It include s a splendid collection
ofstatue s ofthe G re cian school ,and ant iques also statues ofmore modern t imes, and ofcont emporary sculptors.
Are”
there any other museums
worthy ofa. visit ?I should advise you to go to the
C luny museum , which c ontains
very interesting collections offurniture and other objects or
works ofart ofthe mediaevalepoch.
Is it free to the public ?Yes, like all the Museums I mentioned t o you : there are
,how
ever, days when the public are
only admitt ed with t icke ts.
Are these thre e the only museums
in Paris?
There are several others less im
portant : I shall only m ention
the Artillery Museum ofSt .
Thomasd’
Aquin,Where youwill
see modern arms ofall kinds
in large numbers, arrangedwith
much taste and a beaut iful andcomplet e coll ect ion ofancientarms and armour.
Is it open every day?
It is only opened t o the g eneral
public on Sundays, Thursdaysand holidays.
Where are the paintingsrepresenting the principal episodes ofFrench history ?
In the Versailles museum .
When was the palace ofVersaillestransformed into picture gal
leries ?
In the reign ofLouis Philippe .
Musé es de Paris.
Quels sont les principaux musées
que je devrais visiter dans cettevill e ?
11 y a les musées du Louvre et du
Luxembourg , ou sont les plus
célébres tableaux des anciens
maitres et beaucoupde tableaux
d'artistes vivant s.
L e musée du Louvre contient - iiautre chose que des peintures?
Il renferm e une splendide collec
t ionde statues de l’
école G recque
et d’
antiques et aussi des stab
tues de t emps plus m odernes et
de sculpt eurs cont emporains.
Y a- t - il d’
autres musées qui merit ent une visit e ?
Je vous conseillerais d’
aller an
musée de C luny , qui contient des
collect ions tres - intéressant es demeubles et d
’
autres obje ts on
d’
oeuvres d’
art duMoyen age .
Est - il ouvert au public?
Oui, comme t ous les musées que
je vous ai m entionnés ; il y a
cependant desjours oil le publicn
’
est admis qu’
avec des billets.
C es trois musées sont - ils les seuls
musées de Paris?11 y on a plusieurs autres moins
importants : je m entionnerai
seulement le musée d'art illerie
de St Thomas d’
Aquin , vous
verrez des armes modernes de
t out e sort e , en grand nombre ,arrangées avec beaucoupde gout ;et une belle e t complete collec
t ion d’
armes anciennes et d’
ar
mures.
E st - il ouvert tous lesjours?Il n
’
est ouvert a tout le monde
que les D imanches, les Jeudis
e t lesjours de féte .
Oil sont les tableaux qui repre
sent ent les principaux episodes
(19 l’
histoire de France ?
Au musée de Versailles.
Quand le palais de Versailles futil transformé en galeries de
peinture?
Sous le regne de Louis Philippe .
1 60
H ow t o Pro g re ss in
F rench .
I have learnt French at school ; Itook many lessons, in classes
and privately ; I know my
grammar pre t ty well , and nu
derstand nearly everything Iread, but cannot say two words
inan intelligible manner. Whatshould I do ?
H ear French s oken have amas
t erthat spca s to you in French,very slowly at first , and then
m ore quickly, on the subjectswhich are familiar t o you
Is it , then, more useful t o list enand to try to understand what
is said in a languag e than tryingt o speak it one
's self?
Both are useful and ne cessary ;but you will never pronounce
well yourself, ifyou do not
train your ear by hearing that
languag e spoken as frequentlyas you can.
When may I hope t o be able to
speak myself?When your ears can recognise a
spoken word as quickly and as
accurately as your eyes can read
it when it is writ ten orprinted.
Try to pronounce perfect ly somewords which contain the great
est ditfi cult ies ofthe French
pronunciation,then refer to
them for any otherword ofsimilar spelling . R ead aloud as
much as you can, as soon as you
have acquired more facility inyour pronunciat ion. Then tryto speak and you will be aston
ished at your progress.
C an you t ell m e what is the cause
ofmy no t understanding Frenchwhen spoken ?
[t is because you are not articular
enough about the word)
linking ,when you speak yourself.
C omm e nt faire de s pro
g res e n F rancal s .
J at appris le Francais a l'ecole ;
j’
ai pris beaucoupde legons clans
des classes at de legons particu
lieres ; je sais assez bien ma
grammaire etje comprendspres
que tout ce que je lis ; mais jena sais pas dire deuxmots d
’
une
maniere int elligible . Que devrais-je faire ?
Ent endre parler francais ; avoir
un maitre qui vous parle Franeais, tres lent ement d
’
abord, et.
ensuit e plus vit e,sur les sujets
qui vous sont familiers.
Est - il done plus ut ile d'écout er et
d’
essayer de comprendre ce quel
’
on dit dans une langue, que
d'essayer de la parler soi
meme ?
Les deux choses sont utiles et néccssaires ; mais vous no pronou
cerez jamais bien vous-meme, si
vous no dressez pas votre oreilleen entendant parler cett e langueaussi fréquemment que vous
le pouvez .
Quand puis-je espérerpouvoirparlermoi-meme ?
Quand votre oreille pourra recon
naitre nu mot parlé aussi vite
et aussi exact ement que vos
yeux peuvent le lire quand il
est écrit ou imprimé . E ssayez
de prononcerparfaitement quel
ques mots qui contiennent les
plus grandes difiicultés de la
prononciationfrangaise , et rapport e z
-
y, tout autre mot d’
une
orthographe analogue . Lisez ahaut e voix autant que vous le
pouvez , aussit6t que vous avez
acquis plus defacilité dans votrepronunciat ion. Essayez alors
dc parler e t vous serez s'
tonnede vos progres.
Pouvez - vous me dire quelle est la
cause de ce que je ne comprendspas le Francais quand on le parle?
C’
est parceque vous n’
éte spas assezminut ieux au suje t de la liaison,quand vous parlez vous
-meme .
1 6 2
TH IR TY- FIR ST LEsson, Trente et uniéme L egon.
SYNTAX .
Syntax hasfor itsobject the properuse ofwords and the construction ofsentences according to established rules.
G rammarians g enerally include also under that denominationthe peculiarities proper to the different parts ofspeech whichhave not be en given in the e lem ents.
A proposition or sentence is the enouncement ofa statem ent .
A period is the union ofseveral sentences.There are as many propositions in aperiod as there are verbs
in a personal mood.
In 11 est a imeparcequ’
il est bo netfait beaucoup de bien, there are
thre e propositions, because there are thre e verbs, il est aimé,*
il est ban,and ilfait, in a personal mood.
French graminarians divide propositions into three principalparts, le s ujet, the subject le verbe
, the verb and l’attribut
,the
word used after the verb to oint to som e attribute belon to
the subje ct . The verb awl)
subje ct toge ther are what Eng'
sh
grammarians call by the name ofpredicate.The subject, describes that which or the one who acts, or is
qualified by the attribute .
The attribute qualifies the subje ct .The rerb expresses the action, or affirms a state ofbeing of
the subje ct .
When I say man ami est servant, the verb est indicates that theat tribut e servant, belongs to the subje ct, anon ami.
The subject called by some grammarians,nominative case, is
always a noun, pronoun, or verb in the infinitive .
The attribute is e ither an adjective , a present orpast participle,or a noun .
Mon ami est malade . Myfriend is ill.L a boute ille est casse
’
e. The bot tle is broken .
Munpare voyage enAngZeterre . Myfather is travelling inEngland.
In the last sentence the verb is est and the at tribut e c oyageant enAnglcterre .
Besides these three essential parts ofa sentence , there is a
fourth part , which, though not alway s existing, is found in themajority ofsentences, to comple te the idea expressed by the sub
jc e t , the verb, or the attribute .
When I say lefrére dc 9mm ami trava ille beaucoup , my fu'
end’
s
bro ther works much de mon ami is the complement oflefrére, beaucoup is the complement oftravaillant.
1 64
Que stions o n G ramm ar.
What is the object ofSyntax?What do G rammarians also include under the denomination ofSyntax
What is a proposition?What is a period ?H ow many propositions are there in a period 2
H ow do French grammarians divide proposit ions
What is the subject ?What is the at tribut e '
E
What is the verb
What is the fourth part , which, although not existing in everyposition, isfound in most ?
C onversat ion.
‘What is the supreme power 2\G od.
To whom do all creatures and the
whole universe owe theirorig in ?
“They owe it t o G od.
W hat is man?
.Man is a creature created by G od
in his image , and consequentlym ore perfect than all the others.
W hat are the principal parts ofwhich man is composed?
'
The body, the mind, and the soul.
What is the body‘
.Z
'It is the mat erial part ofourbeing ,thatwhich isdissolved at death .
W hat is the mind
.It is the part that thinks , thatwhich as an equivalent in ani
mals, called instinct .
'
What is the soulThe soul is the immortal part ofman , that which belong s onlyt o him andmakes him superior
t o animals.
What is death ?The separation ofthe soul fromthe other elements.
Quelle est la supreme puissance ?D ieu.
A qui t out es les creatures et l’
Uni
vers entier doivent - ils leurorigine t
Ils la doivant aDieu.
Qu'est l
’
homm e
L'homme est une creature creee
par D ieu a son imag e, at par
consequent plus parfaite que
t out es les autres.
Quelles sont les principales part ies dont se compose l
’
homme ?
L e corps, l'e sprit e t l
’
ame .
Qu’
e st - ce que le corps?
C’
est la partie mat érielle de notre
etre , celle qui se dissout alamort .
Qu'est - cc que l
’
esprit ?C
’
est la partie qui pense , celle qui
a dans les animaux un equiva
lent qu’
on appelle l’
instinct .
Qu’
est - cc ue l'ame ?
L’
ame est a partie immort elle de
l’
homme , celle qui n'appartient
qu’
alui e t qui le rendsupérieuraux animaux.
Qu’
est - ce que la mort?
La separation de l’
ame des autres
éléments.
1 65
R e ading Ex ercise No . 31 .
U n co lonel venait de montrer1 a plusieurs ofiiciers de son
regiment une tabatiere d’or qu
’il avait récemment achetée , mais
que lques instants apres, ayant voulu2y3 prendre4 une prise , cc fut
en vain qu’il cherchedans les deux poches de son habit . Tous les
ofi ciers se leverent6 et , spontanément et d’un commun accord
,is
retournerent"leurs poches pour prouverque 1’obje t perdu ne s’
y'
trouvaite pas. Seul, un lieutenant refusa del aire de mem e,9em
disant1°qu’il g gnsi—derait comme suffisant d’
assurersurson honneur
qu’il n
’avait pas la tabatiere . C hacun en s
'
e
'
retirant 1 1 empoxt a la
conviction que cet officier é tait le voleur. Le lendemain matin12 lo
colone l le fit venir13 J’ai retrouvél ‘l ma tabatiere ,
” lui dit - il15
e lle était tombéemdans la doublure de mon habit dites-moi"maintenant pourquoi vous avez refusé hier de retourner vos
poches. Mon colonel,”répondit le lieutenant ,
“je vais18 vous
répondre mais promette z -moi que vous no révélere z apersonne
ce que je vais vous avouer. Mes parents sont tres pauvres je leur
envoie 1amoitié de ma solde e t pour etre ameme 19defaire 2 0ce la,je ne fais qu
’zlun repas chaud parjour”, et j’avais dans ma poche
mon diner, c’est adire"3 un pe tit m orceau de pain noir“e t un peu
de saucisson.
” Le colone l emu“de cette confession, h i dit quesa propre 2 6 table serait désormais la sienne , et ls condui ant dans
‘“la salle amanger, lui fi t don de
”3 la tabatiere , en presence de ton
les ofliciers du regiment .
1 venait de montrer, had just shown, 2 ayant voulu, havingwished, 3 y ,from it , 4prendre, to take , 5 se leoére nt, rose , 6 d
’un
commun accord, unanimously, 7 retournerent, turned up, 8 we s’
g,trmwwit pas, was not there, 9 defaire de meme , to do the same ,10 disant, saying , 1 1 en se rem-
ant, on retiring , 1 2 le lend emain
matin, on the next morning , 1 3 le fi t renir, made him come, 1 4 re
trouvé, found a sin, 1 5 dit - il, he said, 1 6 était tombee , had fallen,1 7 dites-moz
'
, te 1 me , 1 8je cats, I am going , 19pour em a meme,in order to be able
,2 0 defaire, t o do , 2 1 je nefaz’s gu’
, I only take ,2 2 parjowr, a day, 2 3 c
’
est a dire , that is t o say, 2 4 pain noir,brown bread, 2 5 moved, 2 6 propre, own, 2 7 le conduisant,dons, taking him to, 2 8 luifi t don de, presented him with.
1 66
Tnmrv- snoonn L e sson. Trento- deuwiéme L ogan.
C onstruction ofaffirmat ive sent enc e s .
The French language , comple t e in its grammatical e lements,admits but little ofe ither inversion or e llipsis, its essential prmciple being to avoid ambiguity and superfiuity.
.
The more precise
and regular a sentence is, the more correct it is ; and the best
French authors have always considered clearness as the first
quality they had to exhibit in their writings.
In affirmative sentences the different parts are laced in theirmost logical order, viz : the subject , the verb, and e attribute .
L e cic l est blew. Th e sky is blue .
The subject must always be expressed.
Nous sommes contents qu‘
il soit arrivé. We are pleased he has arrived.
Qualifying adje ctives, withfew exceptionswhichwill be'
ven
in afurther lesson, are placed aft er the nouns. H owever, eup anyand the relative shortness ofthe adject ives sometimes require themt o be placed first .
Personal ronouns used as complements to the verb are placedbefore the ver s (see lessons 1 4 a
Je 'vous l’
ai dit . I have said it to you.
Adverbs must be placed imm ediat ely after the verbs.IZ parle bienfrancais. H e speaks French well.
Prepositions and conjun ctions occupy generally the sameplace as m English.
When the verb has two complem ents, one and theo ther indirect , the direct complement is placed before the indirect.J
’
écrz‘
s mic le ttre avotre W . I am wri ting a letter to yoursister.
H oweverwhen the indire ct complement is shorter than thedirect
,it ought to be placed before it.J
’écn
’
s d votre soeur ame lettre de comiclémwe. I am writingyour sister a lett er ofcondolence .
French ammarians call direct complement ( complement direct)the wor which answers the question whom or what, and com
pletes more directly the idea ; and indirect complements ( compléments indirecte) words which , without being indispensable , addsome useful explanations to the sense ofthe sent ence .
When I say : Jo donne un livre d votre soeur, I ive abookto your sist er ; wn. livre is necessary to the sense, an is conse
quently the direct complement tojc donne ; d votre soeur is notso indispensable and is the indire ct complement .Indirect complements answer the questions to whom or what,
in whom orwhat, with whom orwha t, rec.
1 68
Que st ions on G rammar.
What is the essential principle ofthe French languageWhat is the quality ofstyle which is considered by French authorsas first ofall ?What is the order ofconstruct ion in FrenchC an the subject everbe understood ?What is g enerally the place ofqualifying adje ctives ?What is the place ofpersonal pronounsWhat is the place ofadverbsWhat is the place ofprepositions and conjunctionsWhat do French grammarians call direct complement
What do they call indire ct complementWhat are the respe ctive places ofthe direct and indirectcomplementsWhen must the indirect complement be placed before the directcomplement
C onve rsat ion.
What are thefour seasons ?Spring , summer,wint er.
To what couldyou compare themTo the fourag
‘
es ofhuman life .
What is spring ?The childhood ofthe year theage when everything germinat esand begins to grow.
What is summer?
Adolescence all plants grow and
develop themselves by the vivifying heat ofthe sun.
autumn and
What is autumn ?Mature age in which everythincr
bearsfruit fields, orchards andvineyards reward man for hislabour.
What is winter 'I
Oldag e ; the epoch ofdecrepitudetrees lose their leave s. It is
death t o many plants to whichhas been given but one year ofexistence .
Quelles sont les quatre saisons ?
L e printemps, l'ete, l
’
automne etl'hiver.
Aquoi pourriez -vous les comparer?
Aux quatre agesde lavie humaine.
Qu'est - cc que ls printemps ?
C’
est l'enfance de l'année Page
on tout germs et commence acroitre .
Qu’
est - cc que l'ete?
C'est l
’
adolescence
plante s grandissentlopp
'
éTitT‘
1a chaleur vivifiantedu soleil.
Qu'est ce que l
’automne ?
C'e st Pag e mdr c elui auquel toutporte sonfruit les champs. lesverg ers et les vignes recompen
sent l’homm e de son labeur.
Qu’
est - cc que l’
hiver?
C'
est la vieillesse ; c’
est l epoque
de la decrepitude : les arbres
perdent leursfeuilles. C'est la
mort pourbeaucoup de plant esauxquelles il n
’
a ét é donné
qu'ane existence d
’
une année.
toutes les
1 69
R eading E xercise No . 3 2 .
Ou malfaiteur, s e tant introduit1 dans une maison,
pénétra dans l’
antichambre du premier é tag e , e t no trou
vant rien de mieux2 aemporter, s’
empara de3 deux livrées,
afin do ne pas s’
en re tourner4 les mains v ides .5 Mais au
moment 011 5 ii de scendait7 l ’escalier avec le produit de sa
rapine,8 il rencontra lo maitre de la maison qui venait de
rentrer chez lui9 — “A qui10 sont ces vé tements, e t le s
emportez - vous?”lnill demanda ce lui- oi sans paraitre
1 2 lo
moins du monde13 étonné de 14 sa rencontre . Ne me re
connaisse z - vous pas15? Monsieur, répondit lo voleur, sans
se déconcerterw,
“je suis ls dég raisseur, e t c
’
est moi qui
net toie 1 7 toujours les habits de vos dom estiques.
”Quand
vous out - ils demande de les leur rapporter18 ? “Ils
m’
ont dit de les rapporter sans faute demain matin .
Dans cc cas, je profi terai de c e t te occasion, e t je vous
donnerai mon habit sur leque l on a été asse z maladroit
pour renverser de l’huile ; je n
’
en ai pas précisém ent be
soin demain mat in ,mais n
’
oublie z pas de m e lo rapport er'
dans la soirée . E t,en disant 19 ces m ots, il eta son habit
e t le donna au malfait eur qui salua resp e ctueusement,
e t w hen ”do descendre 2 1 l ’e scalier aussi tranquillem ent que
s’
il avait vraiment é té cc qu’mil prétendait etre .
1 s’
étant introduz’
t, having introduced himself, 2 rim dc mum ,
nothing bett er, 3 s’
empam de,t ook possession of, 4 s
’
en retourner,
t o g o away, 5 les mains vides, with empty hands, 6 01‘
s, when, 7 £3
descendait, he was g oing down ,8 rap ing , rapine, 9 venait do ren
trer chez lui, hadjust come home , 1 0 a qui , whose , 1 1 lui, fromhim ,
1 2 paraitre, seeming , 1 8 lamains da monde, the least in the
world, 14 de, at , 1 5 as me reconnaissez -vouspas, do you not recog
nise m e, 1 6 sans se déconcerter, without being disconcertei, 17 ne t
toz'
e, clean, 1 8 de les lewr rapporter, t o bring them back again t o them,
19endisan t, in saying , 2 0 e choed , finished, 2 1 de descendre. t o go down,2 2 cc qu
’
, what .
French Grammar
1 70
TH IR TY - TH IR D LE SSON. Trente - troisz’
éme L ogan.
Interrogat ive sent enc e s .
R ULE I.—In French there is no such auxiliary verb to do as
in English, to be used before the infinitive ofthe verb in inter
rogative sentences.
Such a sentence as D o you like it ?must then be translat edas ifit were . Like you it ? L
'aimea-vous?
II.—When the subject ofthe verb is a pronoun, it is, as in
English, placed after the verb.
Is he satisfied? E st-d content?
D o you know him ? L e connaissez -vous?
R EMARK .—When the verb is in a compound t ense , the pronoun
subject is placed between the verb and the auxiliary.
H ave you seen his brother? Aoez- vous ou sonfrére?
III.—A hyphen must always be placed be twe en the pronoun
e ct and the verb, as it may be seenfrom.the above examples.
IV.—Wh en the subject ofthe verb is anoun, thisnoun must
be placed at the beginning ofthe sentence , and a pronoun ofthethird person and ofthe same gender and number as the noun,must be placed after the verb.
Is yourbrother there ? Votreffrén est-d la?
Are your sisters absent ? Vos soeurs sont- elles absente e?
EXCEPTION —When the sentence begins with an int errogative
pronoun or an adverb ofinterrogat ion, the sentence can be constructedas in English.
Where is yourfriend? as est votre ami
To whom will yourfather speak? A quiparlem votre para?
This construction would not be correct with an active verbfollowedby a direct complement .
Where does yourbrother buy his pens? 012 votre trammeat - z
’
l sesplumes?
It we (1 be incorrect to say : achéta ootrefrérc sesplumes.V.
—When a verb ofthe first conjugation is used int errogatively in the first creon ofthe Present Indicative the e mute is
replaced by an 4, or the sake ofeuphony.
D o I make amistake ? Me tromp é-je ?To whgmjlg I
VL—When the verb used interrogative ly in the third'
personsingular ends with a vowe l, a t pre ceded andfollowed by a hyphen must be placedfor the sake ofeuphony betwe en the verband the pronoun.
Will your sister sing ? Votre soeur chantom—t- elle ?D oes he speak French well? Parle - t- il bien F rancois?
The same sent ences could also be translat ed.
012 votre ami est- 131? A qui votre pé're parlem - t- il?
1 72
Que st ions on G rammar.
Is there any auxiliary verb in French to translat e to do in interrogative sent ences before the Infinitive ofthe verbWhat is the place ofthe subject when it is a pronoun in int errogat ive sent ences ?
What is the place ofthe pronoun subject when the verb is in a com
pound t ense
What is the sign which must be placed between the verb and the
pronoun subject when placed aft er it ?What is the place ofthe subje ct when it is a nounWhen can the noun subject be placed aft er the verb as in English
What is the peculiarity relat ive to verbs ofthe 1 st C onjugation,used int errogat ively in the first person singular ofthe PresentIndicat iveWhat le tter has to be placed betwe en the verb and the pronoun
when the verb is in the third person singularand endswith a vowel
C onversat ion .
I should like you to re commend
me a French book . What are
you reading there?
Iam reading the works ofVictorHugo .
What do you think ofthem ?
I think that our great poet is admirable
,and that his lines are
full ofstreng th and energy .
When did he die
H e died in eight een hundred and
e ighty- five .
H as he also writ t en many booksin prose
H is works in prose are as impor
tant as his poe try. H ave you
not read Our Lady ofParis,the Miserables, the Toilers ofthe Sea, Ninety- three , and
many other remarkable works
I have not read them in French
I have only read translations,and it is very seldom that the
style survives after translationI am entirely ofyour opinion.
Je désirerais que vous me recommandassiez nu livre francais.
Que lisez -vous la’2
Je lis les ouvrag es de Victor
Qu’
eu pensez- vous?
Jc pense que notre grand poetee st admirable
, et que ses vers
sont pleins deforce et d’
énergie .
Quand est - il mort ?
Il est m ort en dix-huit cent
quatre- ving t
- cinq.
A- t - il écrit aussi beaucoup d’ou
vrag es en prose
Ses ouvrag es en prose sont aussiimportants que ses poésies.
N ’
ave z vous pas lnNotre Damede Paris
,les Miserables, les
Travailleurs de la m er, Quatre
vingt- treiz e, et tant d
’
autres
oeuvres reniarquables?
Je ne les ai pas lues enfrancaisje n
’
en ai ln quelle/ s traductions,e t ii em m rare que lo stylesui
'
viveala traduction.
Je suis tout afait den
votrc avis.
1 73
R e ading E x e rcise No . 33.
Pendant les guerres de la Ligue ,1 le général espagnol Porto
C.
arrero concut le projet de surprendre"Amiens, ville clans
laquelle , lui avait - on dit,3 le service se faisait4 avec une grande
negligence . A5 ce t effe t,il placa sur la route des sentine lles qui
avaient l’ordre d
’arréter toutes les personnes qui se dirigeaient da
cote de6 la ville,e t s
’en7 approcha
,as lafaveur des ténebres,9avec
cinq cents homm es d’élit ew, qu
’il fi t cacher1 1 dans les masures1 2
e t dans les haies. Puis il envoya en avant trente E spagnols,habillés en13 paysans e t en paysannes les uns portant des sacs
,
les autres des paniers d’autre s poussant des charre t te s remplies
de 14fruits. Ils se presenterent ala porte qui était gardée parde s
bourge ois“, e t , en
1 6 arrivant au dessousde 17 laherse”, ils laisserent19
t omber adessein2 °un sac de noix dont le cont enu2 1 se répandit 2 2
sur le sol. L es bourgeois accoururent23 pour ramasser les noix,
e t les E spagnols, tirant des arm es qu’ils avaient cachées sous
leurs vétements, profiterent de leur désordre pour les massacrer.
Porto C arrero accourut ave c sa troupe , e t , comm e les charre ttes
placées sous la herse empéchaient de 2 4 la baisser, il pénétra sans
difiiculté dans la ville e t s’en empara26 sans coupférir2 6. Pendant
longtemps”,si l
’on voulait 2 8 mettre 29 nu habitant d’Amiens en
colére30, on n’avait qu
’31a lui32 demander quel était le prix des
noix.
1 la. I/igue (conspiracy, under the leadership ofthe G uises, with
the support ofthe Spaniards), the League , 2 de surprendre, oftakingby surprise , 3 lui avait- on dit, he had been told, 4 sefaisait, wasmade , 5 a, for, 6 da cdté de, towards, 7 en, it , 8 ct , by, 9ales
tenebres, ofthe darkness. 10 d’
élite, sele ct ed, 1 1 fit canker, hid,1 2 masures, ruined cot tages, 13 en, as, 1 4 (le , with , 15 bowrgeois,
burg esses, 1 6 an, on, 1 7 au dessous de , beneath, 1 8 herse, portcullis,
1 9 laissérent, let , 2 0 d dessm‘
a, purposely, 2 1 contenu, contents,
2 2 36 répandit, were scatt ered, 2 3 accoururent, ran, 2 4 empéchaient
ole, preventedfrom , 2 5 s’
en empara, captured it , 2 6 sans coupféfri'r,without striking a blow,
2 7 pend ant longtemps, for a long t ime ,
2 8 c oulai'
t, wished, 2 9 m ttre , to put , 30 en colére, in a t emper,
31 on n’avait qu
’
, one had only, 32 lui, from him .
1 74
TH IR TY- FOUR TH LE SSON. Trente -
quatmeme L egon.
Int e rrog at iv e sent enc e s ( ooneluded.)
R ULE VII— There is in French an idiomatic expression,sst- ce que, which, being put at the beginning ofthe sentence
allows any interrogative sentence to be constructed as ifit werenot interrogative .
E st- cc que m eans literally is this that ; but must never be
translated in English, as it is mere ly used to indicate all at once
that a question is intended by the speaker.
E st- cc que vous partcz . D o you leave , or are you leaving?
E st cc gu’
t ls sont contents . Are they satisfied ?
E st cc que votre cousin est ici Is your cousin here
E st- cc qu’
autrefots vous ne demeuriez pas a la 0 pagne ? Did
you not formerly live in the countryVIII.— The same expression is also frequently used after
interrogative pronouns .
Qut est- cc gm:will be translated whoQut est- cc que whom
Qu’
est- cc gut what — subjectQu
’
est - cc que— complement direct
EXAMPLE St est cc qui est la . Wh o 1s thereQua:cst ceg ue vous connaissez aParis . Wh om do you know at
Paris
Qu’
est- ce qui vousplatt What pleases you?l Qu
’
est- ce que vous voulez . What do you wish .
‘1
IX.— Such expressions are ofveryfrequent use in familiar
conversation ; but as they do not add anyt hin to the idea,and
only make the sentence more heavy and comp cat ed, the studentwill do bet ter by generally conforming himse lfto the rules givenin the preceding lesson.
E st ce que must however be used when the verb, being in thefirst person singular ofthe Present Indicative is monosyllabic .
One could never saycowrs-je, do I run ? pars-je , do I leave sers-je, do I serve ? ris
je , do I laugh ? dors-je, do I sleep ? &c .
These expressions, to be correct, ought to be changed intoest- cc que je cow
's ? est- cc queje pars est- ce
'
queje sers est- cc que
je m'
s est cc queje dors .2
X .— U sage and euphony allow certain monosyllabic verbs to
be followed by ye, when used interrogative ly, in the first personsingular ofthe Present Indicative , such as :
Suts-je , am I ? ai-je, have I ? sais-je, do I know ? dis-je , do Isay
? oats-je , do I go ?p uts-je , can I ? dois-je , do I owe ?
1 76
Q ue st ions o n G rammar.
"
1 . What is the idiomatic expression in French which allows the ordi
nary construction to be used in an int errogative sentence ?
Is est - cc que to be translated into English
What is the meaning ofgut est - cc quiWhat is the meaning ofgut est- cc que ?What is the m eaning ofqu
’
est - cc qui or qu’
est- cc que ?
Are such expressions oft en used in the lofty style
When is it necessary t o use est- cc que
G ive some verbs which , although be ing monosyllabic , can be used in
t errogatively with the usual construction in the 1 st person Singular.
C onv ersat ion .
W ho is in the other room?
Myfatherwith some friends.
"Whom has he received this afternoon
S everal ofhis old school fellowsand also his cousinsfrom Lyons
who arrived the day before ye st erday .
What are they doing just now
They are talking oftheir youthful years, and those recollectionsrejuvenize them .
C an I ente r the drawing -room to
inform them that dinner is on
the table
i do not see why you should not
do it .
H ave I time to go up to my room
and dress myselfY ouhave hardly t en minut es : you
will have to hurry yourself.D o I leave to -morrow with yourbrother- in - law
I do not know ; he did not t ell
m e .
Am I asleep, or awake ? look at
the lett er I have just received.
What does it containThe int elligence ofthe death of
an uncle whom I never knew ,
who bequeaths me an income
often thousandfrancs.
Qui est - cc qui est dans l’autrechambre ?
C’
est men pere avec quelques amis.
Qui est - cc qu’
il a recu cett e apres
m idi
Plusieurs dc ses anciens camarades
d’
ecole et aussi ses cousins de
Lyon qui sont arrivés avant
hier.
Qu’
est - cc qu’
ils font dans cc mo
ment - ci
Ils causent de leursjeunes années,ct ces souvenirs les rajeunissent .
Puis-je entrer au salon pour les
prévenir que le diner est servi?
Jc ne vois pas pourquoi vous ne leferie z pas.
Ai—je lo t emps de mont er dans machamberpourm
’
habiller
Vous avez dix minutes apeine il
faudra que vous vousdépéchiez .
E st - ce que je pars demain avec
votre beau-frere ?Je n
’
en sais rien il ne me l'a
pas dit .
E st - cc que je dors, ou bien est - co
que je suis éveillé ? regarde z lale ttre que je viens de re cevoir.
Qu’
e st - ce qu’
elle contientLa nouvelle de la mort d
’un oncle
que je n'ai jamais connu
, quim e légue dix mille francs derent e .
1 77
R e ading E x e rc ise No . 34 .
U n de m es amis qui ne croyait pas aux1 m éde cins,probable
ment parcequ’il h
’avait jamais été sérieusement malade , me
disait 2 un jour nu conte qu’il avait lu,
3 ajoutait - il,4 dans un
auteur arabe ,5 e t qui lui paraissait"tres amusant . U n habitant
de Bagdad, voyant7 sa femm e en danger de mort , était dans la
plus grande inquiétudc e t ne savait8 a que l méde cin s’adresser
,
t ellement9 11 so m éfiait d’meux. Il rencontra sur son chemin uh
derviehe ,nqui lui offrit 1 2 de lui vendre un talisman,13moyennant
leque l14 il pourrait 15 voir16 ce que personne d’au
'
tre ne voyait .17
Il paya ce 18 talisman une bonn e partie de safortune , e t se dirigeavers la dem eure d’
un'
médecin dont on lui avait vanté19 la
science e t l’habile t é. Mais il se garda bien
2° d’entrer che z lui,
2 1
car, grace son talisman ,il vit 23 de vant sa. porte un grand
nombre d’am es e t 11 apprit 2 4 imm e
’
diatement par leurs clameurs
que c’étaient celles des personnes qu
’il avait tuées en les
traitant . 25 Il courut 26 aussitot che z nu autre docteur renommez"dans la cité ; il y trouva un nombre d
’ames plus considerable
encore . Apres plusieurs t entatives aussi infructueuse s les une sque les autre s
,il finit par arriver28 devant la maison d
’un
méde cin dont on venait de 29 lui donner l’adresse
,e t
,n
’
y rencon
trant que deux am e s, 11 so décida3° a m ont er chez lui. Le
médecin, qui habitait E n quartier31 tres écart e
'
,lui demanda
comm ent 11 avait fait32 pour le trouver e t pour que lle raison il
venait” lo consulter de34 préférence ‘
a tant35 d’illustres confr'eres.
36
“Votre talent e t votre habile té vous ont fait connaitre ,37”
répondit - il. “Vous m ’étonne z
,
”s’écria38 le méde cin
,
“je n
’ai
encore en que deux malades.
”39
1 us croyait pas aux, did not believe in the , 2 disait , told, 3 lu,
read, 4 ajoutait - fil, he added, 5 arabe , Arabian, 6 paraissait, appeared,7 voyant, se eing , 8 ne savait, did not know, 9te llement, so much
,
1 0 eaméfiaz’
t d’
,distrust ed, 1 1 derm
'
che , dervish (mohammedan minist er), 1 2 ofi'rit
,offered, 1 3 talisman, talisman, 1 4 moyennant lequel,
by m eans ofwhich, 1 5 pourrait, would be able , 1 6 voir, to see ,
1 7 voyan'
t , saw, 1 8 cc, for this, 19oante’
, praised, 2 0 ils e garda bien d’
,
h e t ook great care not to , 2 1 chez lui, int o his house , 2 2 grace a,thanks to , 2 3 mt
,saw
,2 4 apprit, heard, 2 5 en les traitant, by at
t ending them ,2 6 cou'rut, ran, 2 7 renomme
’
,renowned, 2 8finit par
arriver,arrived at last
,2 9on venait dc, one had just , 30 so déctda a,
made up his mind to, n uarticr, district , 32fait, done , 33 venait,came , 34 etc, by, 35 tant d
’
,so many, 36 confreres, brother
physicians, 37 outfait connattre, have made known, 38 s’
e’
cria,
exclaim ed,39malades, patients.
1 78
TH IR TY - FIFTH Lassen. Trento - cz'
nquiéme L eg-oh .
Negat ive sent enc es .
R ULE I.—'I
‘here is no such auxiliary verb in French as to do
in English, to be used before the Infinitive ofverbs used nega
tively. Such sentences as : I do not like it, I did not see him, he
does not speak French, must be translated as ifthe y were : I like itnot, I saw him not, he speaks not F rench.
I I .—The negation no t is translat ed in French by two words,no andpas, no being placed before the verb and pas after.
I am not pleased. Je ne suis pas content.
H e do es not sing . Il ne chante pas.
It would be wrong to consider no as a negation by itself. It
is merely a particle whi ch must be placed before the verb everytime there is a negation in the sentence (Se e for Exceptions , RuleIX.) but can be used in sent ences without any ne g ation (RulesX. ,XL ,
III.—Theplarticle no is not only used when pas follows the
verb, but also w en the sentence contains,before orafter the verb,
any ofthefollowing expressions which imply an idea ofnegationaucun, nul, no, not any guére but little
nul, none ni ni, neither
personne, nobody que , but
rien, nothing nullement, point
jamais, never pas da tout,not at all
I have nofriends. Je n’
ai aucun ami.
Nobody knows m e here . Personne no me cannait ici.I have not hingfor you. Je n
’
ai rien pour nous .
H e has but lit tle m oney. Il n’
a guere d'argent.
I have but two brothers. Je n’
ai que deuxfréres.I do not like it at all. Je no l
’
aime point .
IV.— In compound t enses the negation is placed betwe en the
auxiliary and the past participle .
I have not seen his brother. Je n’
ai pas nu sonfrere.H e has lost nothing . IZ n
’
a rienperdu.
V.—When there are possessive pronouns
, objects ofthe verb,placed before the verb, the particle no must be placed betweenthe subject and the obje cts.
I do not know him . Je no ls conna is pas .
I shall not give it t o them . Je ne le leur donnerai pas.
VI.- VVhen the verb is in the infinitive the two parts ofthe
negationfollow each other and are placed before the verb.
I think I shall not come to -morrow. Je pense napas venir demain.
H e wishes not to be forgot t en. Il desire ne pas etre oublié.
1 80
Que st ions on G ramm ar.
1 . Is there any auxiliary verb in French which translat es to do before averb in the Infinitive in negative sent ences
H ow is not translat ed in French ?
Is ne really a negation ?
What are the words which require na t o be placed before the verbWhere is the negat ion placed in compound t enses
When there are personal pronouns, objects ofthe verb, placedbeforethe verb, which is the place ofthe particle no
in the Infinitive ?What is the place ofthe two parts ofthe negation when the verb is
C onv e rsat ion .
D id you not go this morning to
the marketNo
,I did not go there .
H ad you not t old me that you
would g o very early?
Ye s, but I did not wake .
You will regret not having g one
there .
My servant , who has just re
turned, told me that she had
seen some magnificent flowersand at a very low price .
D id she not buy any?
No , she only bought som e vege
tables .
Nobody called me , and I slept so
profoundly that I only woke ate ight o
’
clock .
It does not matt er you would
still have had t ime to g o t o the
market and t o make some pur
chases there .
That may be true but I scarcelycare to buy flowers that no one
'found to his tast e or that everybody hasfound too dear.
Will you come with me next
week ?Neither my brother nor I have
ever gone there ; and we shall
g o with you ifit may be agre eable to you.
N’
avoz -vous pas été eu marché ce
mat in ?
Non, je n’
y suis pas allé.
Nc m’
aviez - vous pas dit que vous
iriez de tres bonne heure
Oui, maisje ne m e suis pas réveilleVous regret t erez de ne pas y etre
allé.
Pourquoi ?
Ma servant e , qui vient de revenir,m
’
a dit qu’
e lle y avait vu des
fleurs magnifique s e t a tres has
prix.
N'eu a- t - elle pas acheté
?
Non, elle n’
a acheté que des lé
gumes.
Personne ne m’
a a pelé, et je dormais si profondem ent que je na
m e suis réveillé qu’
ahuit heures
C ela ne fait rien ; vous auriez en
core eu le t emps d’
aller eu
marché et d’
y faire quelques
emplet t es.
C ela peut etre vrai : maisje ne mesoucie guere d
’
achet er les fieurs
que personne n'a trouvées a son
gout ou que t ou le monde a
trouvées trop cheres.
Voule z - vous venir avec moi la se
maime prochaine
Ni mon frere ui moi nous n’
ysommes jamais allés ; e t nous
irons ave c vous si cela peut vous
etre agréable .
181
R eading E xercise No . 35 .
D eux amis avaient joué aux carte sl une partie de la
nuit . L ’un d’
eux avait perdu des sommes considérable s,
e t n’avait plus que que lques centaines2 do francs
,seuls
débris3 d’une grande fortune L
’heureux4 gagnant5
avait en vain refusé adifiérent e s reprises6 de continuer la
partie7 mais son adversaire l ’avait acousé chaque fois de
lui refuser une revanche qui lui était due , at il s’était vus
oblig e, bien9malg ré h i
m,de faire 1 1 cc qu
’on lui demandait
d ’12 une maniere si provocatrie e13
.
Toutefois, comme son ami persistait afaire 14 une
derni e re partie e t aluijouer les que lques centsfrancsqui luirestaient , il consentit
15,
c ondition que son enjeu serait
la somm e totale qu’il avait gagnée e t que l
’on joue rait a
pair on impair”: puis, t irant une poignée d’arg ent de la
poche de son habit , il la lui présenta.
“Pair! s’
éeria18
l’autre
, apr‘
es un moment d’hésitat ion . Vous avez gagné ,
répondit lofavori de lafortune . E t, en disant19c es m o ts,
il remit2 0 le s pie ces dans sa poche sans les compter, e t
poussa du coté de 2 1 son ami les monceaux2 2 d’
or e t les
bill e ts2 3 qu’il avait accumulés devant lui. L e g énéreux
ami me racontait2 4 plus tard2 5 qu’
il avait été si pénible
ment affe cté des2 6 circonstance s de cette partie , qu’il n’
eve it
plusjamaisjenez7 depuis e e jour- la.
1 am ! caries, at cards, 2 cenlm'
nes, hundreds, 3 (1657 133, remains,
4 heureux, lucky, 5 gagnant, winner, 6 d, dzférentes reprises, at different tim es, 7partie , game
,8 s’étaz
‘
t ou, had seen
'
himself, 9bien,
quit e , 1 0malgré in spit e ofhimself, 1 1 dojam , to do , 1 2 d’
,
in,1 8 maniere si provocatrice , so provoking a.manner, 1 4 afaire,
in having , 15 consentit, consent ed, 1 6 d, with, 17 dpwir ou impair,
at even orodd, 1 8 exclaimed, 19 en disamt, in saying , 2 0
”mit Put again,2 1 du cdlé ale, towards, 2 2 mom eaux, heaps, 2 3
billets notes, 2 4 me racontm'
l, was te lling me,2 5plus lard, lat er on,
2 6 ales, by the, 2 7 n’
a'vait plusjamaisj ,o ué hadneverplayedany more
1 82
Tnmrr- srxrn Lassen. Trente - sz’
m’
éme L egon.
Negative sent enc e s ( concluded) .
R ULE VII.—No in answer to a question is translated mm.
Have you seen him —No,sir. L
’
wuez - e ous w ?—Non, monsieur.
VI I I . -When not comes before anotheradverb, no verbbeingexpressed, the particle ne is omitted.
Not always, pas toujours; not yet , pas emore not to -day, pasaujourd
’
hui.
Have you ever seen the queen—Not once . Aim -vousjamis 1m
la reins — Pasunefois.
When will you see him — Not before to -morrow. Quand laverrez -vousi—Pas avant dema in.
IX.—Ne can exceptionally be used as a negation without
pasorany ofthe negative expressions above mentioned (Rule III),withfour verbs only, viz savoir, pouvoir, 083361
‘
and oser.
Jo na sais, I do not know; is ne puis, I cannot ; nous n'osons,
we dare not ; i ls na cessent , they do not c ease .
H owever, pas ought to be used after semoir ifthat verb were
followed by a complem ent .
I do not know the French languag e . Je no sais pas la langue
frangaise .
X.—Namust always be used before the verb
,in dependent
sentences, when the verb ofthe principal sentence expresses an
idea offear, even when there is no negation in the sentence.Sucfverbs are ; amide ,
tofear apM ender, to apprehend ;avoirpear, to be afraid. The same rule must be followed afterempacker, to hinder, and also the verb napas douter, not to doubt.
The verb ofthe dependent sentence must be then in thesubjunctive .
Ifear that he tvill come . Je crains gu’
il navienne .
I am afraid he will leave us. J’ai pour gu
’
il nc nous quilts.
I shall hinder him from doing so . J’
empécherai q u’
il ne Iefasse.I do not doubt he is honest . Je ne doutepas gu
’
ilno soit hon/nets.
X I .—Namust be used in thehsame manner after atmoine que,
unless de pear gas,forfear that ; do craint e que, less.I shall come , unless I should be ill. Je 'miemlm i, d mainsquejene sols malade .
Leave it here , lest you should lose it . Laissez - le ici, dc pewr
que vous no laperdiez .
XII.—Namust be used, but the v erb must be in the indica
tive mood, after autre, other autrement, otherwise, and also after
comparatives ofafljectives andadverbs.
H e act ed otherwise than I thought he would. l l a agi aumment queje napensais.
It isbetterthan I expected. Il estmeilleurgueje nem’
y attendais.
184
Que st ions on G rammar.
H ow must no be.
translat ed in answer to a question ?
Is the particle ne wanted when not precedes another adverb, no verb
being expressed ?
3. Which are thefourverbs in French which can be used negativelywith no, without pas or any other negative expression ?
4. What verbs require the verb ofthe dependent sent ence to be alwayspre ceded by ne whether the verb be used negatively or not ?
5. What conjunctions require are before the verb that follows them,
the verb being in the subjunct ive mood ?
6 . What expre ssions require no before the verb thatfollows theifi,theverb being in the indicative mood ?
C onve rsat ion.
Ihave not been out thismorning .
Will you come with me ?
D o you not think it will rain ?No the wind ismuch too strongand I do not think we shall haverain before the sun sets.
Do you always go out beforedinner?
Not always ; in summer I preferto take a walk at dusk .
H as your brother returned fromthe country ?
Not yet ; I do not expect him
before the day aft er t o -morrow.
Do you fear that he will not beable to remain here for a longt ime
I not only fear that but I amafraid that he will not come atall ; and that ifhe come he
will only stop afew hours.
Is he better than he was lastweek ?
There is not much improvement ,and the physiciansfear that hewill not recover before theautumn.
Je ne suis pas sorti ce matin.
Voulez —vous venir avec moi ?
Ne croyez -vous pas qu’
il pleuve ?Non ; le vent est beaucoup tropfort , e t je ne crois pas que nous
ayons de la pluie avant locoucher du soleil.
Sort ez - vous toujours avant diner?
Pas toujours en été'
e préfere mepromenerala t ombee de lanuit .
Votre frere est - il revenu de lacampagne ?
Pas encore ; je no l’
attends pasavant aprés- demain.
C raignez- vousqu
’
ilno puisse resterlongt emps ici
Non seulement je crains cela ;mais j
'ai peur qu
’il ne vienne
pas du tout , et que , s’
il vient , ilno s
'arréte que que lquesheures.
Est - il mieuxportant qu’
ilne l e taitla semaine derniere
Il n’
y a. pas beaucoup d’
amélioration, et lesméde cins craignentu
’
il ne se rétablisse pas event1 automne .
1 85
R e ading E x e rcise No . 36 .
On rapporte , dans unjournal anglais de 1 762 , qu’un pauvre
homme qui avait ét é ramasser da bois i nert, eu mois dc décembre ,
dans les taillis de H yde Park , apergut soudain un gentilhomme,
élégamm ent vétu,I ayant une épée au2 c6té e t une cocarde3 eu
chapeau, qui se promenait4 tout seul, d’5
nu air reveur6 e t
mélancolique . Le pauvre homme , croyant7 que c’était un
ofiicier qui était venu8 pour se 'battre en duel,” se cacha derriere
nu arbre afin de voir1°ce qui allait1 1 se passer.
1 2 Mais que l nefut pas
\son étonnement quand il vit
13 le gentilhomme , qui venaitde lire“une le ttre , essuyer les larmes dont16 ses yeux étaientremplis ; puis tirer un pistole t de16 se poche , e t le porter a son
front . Toutefois, comme le coup me partait point"; l’hommes
’élanga
18 sur l’ofiicier e t lui19 arracha son pistole t . L
’offieier,
croyant avoir affaire un malfait eur,on offense de ce qu
’mon
prit 2 2 la liberté de s’opposer a son proje t, tira23 son épée e t
voulut 2 61 enz5 percer son sauveur. Frappe z ,” lui dit cc dernier,
2 6
en lui présentant se poitrine “il y a plus de cinquante ans que
je vis2 7 clans l’indigence je ne crains2 8 pas plus que vous une
mort qui serait pour m oi la fin de mes souffrances e t de mes
privations mais c’est aDieu que je dois la Vie , et je laisse le soin
a se providence d’
y me ttre29 un t erme
, quand il lui plaira.
3°”
Touchédg tant de31 courage e t de resignation , le g entilhomme
remit32 son épée eu33fourreau, rem ercie le Vie illard de34 la legon
qu’il venait de lui donner,35 lui mit36 se bourse dans la main
, et
lui promit37 deh
ne plus jamais renouveler38 se criminellet entative .
39
1 oétn, dressed, 2 an, at his, 3 coea'rde , cockade , 4 se promenad ,
was walking , 5 d'
,with, 6 révewr, thoughtful, 7 croyant, believing ,
8 était venu,had come
,9se battre en due l, t o fight a duel, 1 0 afin
de voir, in order to se e , 1 1 allait, was g oing , 1 2 se passer, t o happen,
13 m'
t, saw, 1 4 oenae'
t de lire , hadjust read, 1 5 dont, with which ,1 6 ole , out of, 1 7 lo coup ne parlait pas, the pistol did not go off,
’
1 8 s’élanca, rushed, 1 9 lui, from him
,2 0 avoir afiaire a, t o have to
do with , 2 1 de ce qu’
, be cause , 2 2 on prlt, one t ook,2 3 tira,
drew ,2 4 vo ulut, wished, 2 5 en, with it , 2 6 lui ol'll ce dernier, the
let t er said t o him ,2 7 il y a p lus ole cinquante ans que je M S
, I havelived more than fifty years, 2 8 je crains, I fear, 2 9meme
, put ,30 quand
'll lni p laim ,when it pleases H im , 31 tant ale , so much,
32 remit , put up, 33 an,in its
,34 de
,for
,35
,fl venait ole lui
donner, he hadjust g iven him ,36 mil, put , 37 promit, promised,
38 do ne plusjamais renouocler, never to renew, 39 tentative, at t empt .
THIR TY- SEVENTH LE SSON. Trente- septeeme L egon.
Synt ax oft h e Art icle .
R ULE I.—The definite article must be used in French before
any noun used in a definite sense .
A noun is said to be used in a definite sense when it refersto a de terminate person or thing , or to the whole ofa species ;and also when it is de termined by a complement or a sentence.
D onnez -moi nnefeue’ lle da papier qui est sur la table . G ive mea she et ofthe paper which is on the table .
J’
aime beaucoup les animaux. I like animals very much .
Je n’
anran'
s pas réussi sans laprotection de'votre pe
’
re. I shouldnot have succeeded without yourfather
’
s prot ection .
II.— The definite article le must also be used before any
words used substantive ly.
J’
aflmc le c ert, matsje n
’
aime pas le range . I like green, but Ido not like red.
L e 'vrat pent guelqnefois n’
é‘
tre pas vraisemblable. Truth maysometimes not be likely.
L e parler ole cet homme no me plait pas. The language ofthatman does not please m e .
III.— The definite article must be used before all geogra
phical names,but names oftowns.
L’
Angleterre a une marine tres puissante. England has a verypowerful navy.
L es A lpes séparent la F rance de Z'Italie. The Alps separate
France from Italy .
L a Tamise est p lns large a L ondres{we ne l est la Seing aParis.
The ThamesTs'
w—
ider 56 5 1321011 t an t e eine at Paris.
EXC E PTIONS .—The artip le gan g enerally be dispensed wit h after
de before the names ofcountries wluch' are “
ofthe'
fe‘
minfnejgander, andafter the preposit ion en.
J’
arrive ole I arrivefrom France .
H enry IV, roi de France , était tres aime de ses sujets. H enryIV, king ofFrance , was much loved by his subjects.
Mon arm“
est en Ang leterre . Myfriend is in England.
But it would be incorre ct to say :j’
arrire de Bréstl, Maximilien,
empereur ole Mexique ; it is necessary to say da Brésil, da Mexique.
R EMAR K .— The article is used before the nam es ofcertain t owns,
like 70 H dw e, la H ate, le Bourget, ne . , because lecture, hate, bourget
(p etit bonrg) , are common nouns used as proper nouns.
It would also be correct to say :j'arrioe de la France.
1 88
Que stions on G rammar.
When must the definit e article be used in French 1
When is a noun said to be used in a definite manner?
Before what words, other than nouns, must the article be used
What are the geographical nam es which do not require the article ?
When can the article be dispensed with before names ofcountries ?What is the preposition which never requires the noun to be pre
ceded by the art icle
7. What are the names oft owns which take the definite article ?
C onve rsat ion .
H ave the kindness to give me a
sheet ofpaper.
What paper do youmean ?The paperwhich is near you.
To whom do you write this let ter?
To myfriend in Algeria.
I have receivedfrom him a let ter
dat ed from C onstantine ; he
pleaded the pro and con ofthequestion ofthe civil governm ent .
What do you think about that
question ?
I think that the French do
not know how to coloniz e ,and that they ought t o t akesome lessonsfrom their neigh
~
hours on the other side oftheC hannel.
Had the English not also con
siderable difficulties to overcomein L idia ?
Yes, but theyhave overcome them ,
and their colonies are t o -daymore flourishing than ever.
H as your.cousin come back fromLe Puy.
"
Yes, he returned yesterday.
D oes he think ofgoing to “L eMans, this year.
H e will probably go there at theend ofthe autumn.
Was he not in Mexico severalyears ago
N0 , he was in Australia.
Aye z la bonté de me dormerunefow ’
lle de papier.
D e que l papier voulez -vousparler.Du papierqui est is cfité de vous.
A qui écrivez-vous cett e le ttre ?
A mon ami d’
Algérie .
J ’
ai recu de lui une lettre datée deC onstantine il laidait le pour
et le centre de a question du
gouvernement civil. { a
Que pensez -vousde cet te question?
Je pense que les Francais na
savent pas coloniser et qu’
ile
devraient prendre des,leeons
dc leurs voisinsd’
outre -Manche .
Les Anglais n'ent -ils pas en aussi
des diflicultés considerables asurmont erdens l
'Inde ?
Oui, mais il les ont surmontées, etleurs colonies sont aujourd
’
hui
plus florissantes que jamais.
Votre cousin est -il revenu duPuy ?
Oui, il en est revenu hier.
Pense - t- il aller au Mans cette”
an'
née .
Il ira probablement a la fin del
’
automne .
N ’
avait - il pas été an Mexique, il
y a plusieurs années.
Non, il était en Australia.
1 89
R eading E x e rcise No . 8 7 .
U n prédicateurbien connu1 tonnait un jour du haut de lachaire 2 contre la coque tterie
3 des femmes,e t, dans lo courant
4 de
son sermon, il s’eoria5 soudain qu
’il y en avait une6 qui l
’entendait ,
e t dont la coque tte rie était scandaleuse ; pour rendre hommage7
a la vérité, il allait 1a faire connaitre .
8 C ependant , pourménager
9 la reputation de sa famill e , e t pour ne pas prononcernu nom qui était honorablement porté10 par des personnesconnues de toute la ville , il allait lui je ter sa calotte l l e t la
désigner de12 ce tte maniere . Puis prenant se calo tte de 13 la maindroite
,il fi t 14 lo geste de la jeter dans une certaine dire ction.
Mais il arriva15 que non seul em ent unc fem me se baissa16 pouréviter le coup qu
’elle se croyait17 destiné, mais que , poussées par
une terreur involontaire , un certain nombre d’entre e lles18 firent 19
le mem e m ouvement . H élas s’eoria Ie prédicateur
,d
’ 2 0une
voix terrible mais lam entable ; je croyais2 1 qu’il n
’
y avait
parmi vous qu’une seule pécheresse”, celle que j
’avais I’intoutien
de vous désigner, e t voila2 3 qu’a mon grand chagrin je viens de
m ’apercevoir
“,a n
’en pas douter
25, que plus d
’une s
’était sentie2 6
atteinte 2 7 par mon accusation. La vertu ne courbe2 8 jamais 1a
téte , méme sous le vent de la calomnie .
1 covznu, known, 2 du haut de la chain , from the pulpit ,3 coqnettem
'
e, coquetry, 4 courant, course , 5 exclaimed,
6 c'
l y en avait une, there was one , 7 frendre hommage, to pay
homag e , 8 faire conna'itre, make known
, 9 ménager, t o save ,
10 porté, borne , 1 1 calcite, skull- cap, 1 2 ale, in, 1 3 de , with,
1 4fi t, made,1 5 arriva , happened, 1 6 ea baissa , stooped, 1 7 croyait,
believed, 1 8 d’
ent're elles, among them ,1 9firent, made , 2 0 d
’
,
with, 2 1 croyais, believed, 2 2 pécheresse , sinner, 2 3 voila, behold,
2 4 jc m’
ens dc m’
apercevoir, I have just found out , 2 5 d n'en pas
doutcr, undoubtedly, 2 6 s’
étaz'
t sm ite,had felt herself, 2 7 atteintes
touched, 2 8 cow -be, bows.
190
a arr-nro .qrn Lassen. Trente - huitmne L econ.
Sy n tax ofth e Art icle ( concluded) .R ULE IV.
— The article is not used before proper nouns.
EXC EPTION a .—_
The plural article is used before propernouns, inSpeaking ofdifferent persons ofthe same name , or in a figu
r
at ive sense
speaking ofpersons similar to those whose nam es are used.
Le s deux Racine vivaient sous le régne ole L ouis quatorze . The two
Raeines lived under the reign ofLouis the fourte enth.
La. gloire des C esars est ephemere . The glory ofthe C e sars is ephemeral.
b.—The article is also used when the proper noun is preceded bya title —La. reine Victoria. Queen Victoria.
L e general Wolseley. G eneralWolseley.
c.—The article is used before the names ofseveral men offame,
principally ofItalian origin.
Le D ante,l'Arioste ci le Tasse sont les poétes les plus illustres de
l’
Italie . D an te, Ariosto and Tasso are the most illustriouspoets ofItaly.
‘
V.—No article is required before nouns placed as titles at the
head ofchapters nor before the numeral adjectives placed afternouns .
C hapitre trois. C hapt er the third.
G eorge um. G eorge the se cond.
VI.—No article is placed before nouns in apposition or used
adjactively.
L ouis trea’
u, roi do Fm ace, étaitfi le ole H enri quatre . Louis the
thirteenth ,kin ofFrance , was the son ofH enry thefourth.
E st - il Ita l ion s he an Italian ?EXC EPTION.
— The indefinite article must be used before the nounifthe demonstrative pronoun cc be used instead ofthe personalpronoun
—C’
est u'n. médecin. H e is a physician.
VIL—The definite article is used instead ofthe indefinitearticle before a noun used as‘
uni ty ofmeasure .
C ’c drop come deuxfraqws le metre . This cloth costs twofrancs ametre .
The preposition par must be used instead ofthe article totranslate a. before year, quarter, month, week, day or hour.
JMQW QM M . I give him two pounds a week.
V I I I . —The article le is variable in superlative s when thereis an idea ofcomparison with o ther persons or things.
E lle est la plus heureuse dcs quatre soeurs. She is the happiestofthe four sist ers.
But it remains invariable when there is no such idea ofcomparison, no article being used in English insuch sentences.
E lle n’
estjama is découragée , meme lorsgu’
elle est le p lus malheureuse .
She is never discourag ed, even when she is most unhappy .
IX.—The (“ tid e is not necessary before nouns in proverbial
sentences.
Pam-fete n‘
est pas rice. Poverty is no vice .
192
Q ue st ions on G ramm ar.
Is the article used in French before proper nouns ?When is the article used before proper nounsWhen is the article used before the names ofsingle persons !When is the art icle not required before numeral adje ctivesWhen is the art icle not required before common nouns
When is the definite article used instead ofthe indefinit e art icle
When is the preposition par used inst ead ofthe indefinit e article ?When is the definite article variable before superlativesIn what sentences can articles be dispensed with 1
2
C onversat ion .
Who were the two C orneilles ’2
They were two brothers who lived
under the reign ofthe greatking ; but one is much more
ce lebrat ed than the other.
D id King Louis XIV deserve his
surname ofgreatH e certainly deserved it
,ifwe
only considerthe encourag ement
given by him to letters, sciences,and fine arts.
Was C ardinal Mazarin a Frenchman ?
No , he was ofItalian origin.
In what volum e can I find interesting de tails ofthat period ofFrench history
You will find them volume thethird, chapt er the fourth.
H ow has this history been published ?
In monthly parts.
What is its price ?
Ipaid for it at the rate offiftycentimes a part .
H ow much did you pay for thebinding ?
I paid four francs fifty centimesfor each volume .
Qui étaient les deux C orneille ?
C etaient deuxfreres qui vivaientsous la régne dugrand roi ;maisl'un est beaucoup plus célebre
que l’autre .
Le roi Louis XIV a- t - ilmérité sonsurnom de grand
?
Il l’
a certainement mérité, si l’on
ne considere que l'encourage
ment donné par lui aux let tres,aux sciences et aux arts.
L e cardinal Mazarin était - il Fran
caisD f 0 I I Q
Non,11 e tait d origine italienne .
D ans quel volume pourrai-je trou
ver des details intéressants sur
cet t e époque de l’
histoire de
France ?
Vous les trouverez volume troi
smme , chapitre quatre .
C omment cett e histoire a- t - elle été
public’
e ?
Q3? livraisons mensuelles.
Quel en est lo prix?
Jc l’ai payée araison de cinquantecentimes la livraison.
C ombien ave z -vous payé la re
liure
J ’
ai payé quatre francs cinquante
centim es pour chaque volume .
1 93
R e ading E xerc ise No . 38 .
U n v icux paysan ,é tant de venu1 aveug le , connaissait2
ce pendant asse z bien ls villag e pour se dirig e r sans guide .
1 1 demeurait ave c se fille . U n soir, qu’3 il faisait4 déja
sombre,ce t te derniere5 tombasubit em ent6 malade , e t comm e
le vie illard était seul ave c e lle a7 la maison,il fut oblig é
de se résoudre8 a sort ir pour aller chercher un méde cin.
Il alluma donc une lanterne e t la prenant9
r
la main,il
descendit dans la rue . Mais ape inel l avait - il fait l 2 que l
que s pas qu’13il fut rencon tré par une de se s connaissances.
Que faites- vous14 ici ave c une lant erne , lui15 demanda
t - on d’
un air railleur “vous passie z
l 6 dans le villag e pour1 7
nu homme senséls, mais il e st évident qu’
il n ’
en e st rien19,
puisque ,étant aveug le , vous prene z 2 0 une lant erne al
lum ée 2 1 , pour sortir pendant la nuit . N’e st - cc pas 1a de
lafolie 2 2 ? — “Je ne suis pas sifou que vous ls croye z2 3;
répondi t l ’e vangle ,“e t sij
’
ai pri52 4 ce t te lant erne allum ée ,
cc n’
e st pas pour moi : c’
est pour vous e t pour vos sem
blab1e 5 2 5, afin que vous puissie z 2 6 m e voir2 7 e t vous 6t er3z
de m on chemin . C esse z donc de m e m iller-2 9,il est bien
de s30 g ens31qui croient32 y voir33 de34 leurs deux yeux ,
e t qui auraient plus beso in d’
un guide qu’un véritable
aveug le comm e35 moi.”
1 étant devenu , having becom e,2 connaissaz
‘
t, kn ew, 3qu’
, when,
4faisait , was, 5 ce tte dem iére, the latt er, 6 subitement, suddenly,
_
7 a, in, 8 se résoudre, t o make up his mind, 9menu/at, taking ,19d, in, 1 1 d peine , hardly, 1 2 fait, walked, 13 qu
’
, when,
1 4fades- emm, are you doing , 15 lui, from him, 1 6 vouspassiez , you
were known, 1 7 pour, as, \18 sense, sensible , 19qu
’
z’
l n’
en est rien,
that you are nothing like it ,"
2 0 from prenez , you take , 2 1 e llama’
e,
lit up, 2 2 n’
est- ce pas ld ole lafolie , does that not look like madness,
2 3 vous croyez , you believe , 2 4 pris, taken,2 5 c os semblables
,the
people like you, 2 6 vous puissiez , you would be able , 2 7 voir, to se e ,2 8 arms om de, take yourselves out of, 2 9me m iller
, to laugh at me,
30 il est bien des, there are many, 31 gens, people , 32 croient, be
lieve , 33 y'vm
'
r, to see well, 34 de , with, 35 com/me , like.French Gramma r. 7
194
TH IR TY- NINTH LE SSON. Trente—neamléme L egon.
Syn t ax oft h e N oun s .
R u le s h ow t o asc e rtain t h e g e nde r ofF rench nouns .
The gender ofF rench nouns can be ascertained e ither bytheir signification or their termination .
R ule s t o asc ertain.
th e g e nd e r ofnouns by t h e irs1g n1fi c at 1on
Are masculine
1 . The name ofG od and all supe rnatural beings.
Ange , ang el ; seraphz'
n, seraph ; demon,demon.
2 . Nouns which designate man in his diffe rent conditions.
frere , brother; oncle , uncle ; roi, king ; soldat, soldier; paysan, peasant .EXC EPTIONS .
—sentinelle,sentry, and recrue , recruit .
3. Nouns which designate the males ofanimals.
lion, lion cheval, horse ; tigre , t ig er ; corbeau,raven.
E XC EPTION — C ertain nam es ofanimals are feminine irrespectiveofsex ; as— baleine , whale ; autruche , ostrich ; girafe , giraffe .
4 . Names ofm e tals.
Or, gold argent, silver fer, iron bismuth, bismuth p latine ,
plat inum ; managanese, manganese ; aluminium , aluminium.
5 . Names ofcolours, and generally all words used substantively.
le rouge , red le blanc, whit e ; le bleu,
blue le violet, violet ; ls
beau,fine ; le bien ,
the g ood; lamanger, eat ing ; le coucher, set ting .
6 . Names ofthe days,months, seasons,winds,and cardinal points.
L undz’
, Monday Jeud'l , Thursday ; Jan'mier, January ; Mars,
March ; printe'mps, spring ; été, summ er ; Nord, North ; Sud,
South Guest, West Sirocco, sirocco .
ExcE PTIONs.—Automne is ofboth g enders, but is more g enerally
used as a masculine noun. Btse, north wind, isfeminine .
7. Nam es oftre es and shrubs.
C hene , oak sapin fir tree ; p latane , plane tree ; laur'ler
,laurel ;
roster, rose tree ; pommier, apple tree , th e .
Exc E PTIONs.— Yeuse
,holm ; aube
’
p'tne , hawthorn, and a few
others seldom used.
8. Nouns belonging to the me trical system .
Metre , litre , stére , are , gramme , dec .
9. G e ographical names not te rminated in e or es.
le Portugal, Portugal ; le D anemarle , D enmark ; le Japan,Japan ; le Peron, Peru ; ls C hili, C hili ; Paris , Paris ; Lyon,Lyons te R hin,
the. Rhine les Apenntns, the Apennine s.
R unning — H owever, some geographical names, ending in e are
also masculine as,
le H anan-
re , H anover ; le Mexique, Mexico ; le D anube the
Danube le R hone, the Rhone ; la Tage, the Tagus, &c .
196
Que st ions on G rammar.
How can the gender ofnouns be ascertained in French?What is the g ender ofall supernatural beings ?G ive the nouns which, although designating men, are ofthe femmm e gender.
4. Are all nouns, which designat e the males ofanimals ofthe masouline gender?
to theirmeanings .
What is the gender ofautomne I
G ive the other nouns which are ofthe masculine g ender, according
Which are the g e ographical nam es that are masculine ?
G ive some geographical names ending in e, which are ofthe masculine gender.
C onv e rsat ion .
Inwhat countrieshave youalreadytravelled?
I have already been in Swit zer
land, Italy, G ermany, Spain,Belgium, Denmark
,Peru and
Mexico.
In what parts ofG ermany haveyou been?
In Hanoverand Saxony.
What are the mountains which
youhave seen in Italy ?The Apennines.
What rivers have you crossed in
yourjourneys?I can hardl remember them
all : I she ] only mention the
Rhine , the Danube , the Rhone ,and the Tagus.
Which is the longe st oftheserivers?
The Danube , which is about three
thousand kilometres long .
Which are the most rapid?
The Rhone and the Rhine .
What metals are extracted fromthe mountains ofSpain?
Nearly all precious met als, butmore e specially quicksilver,which is found abundantly in
that country.
Dans quels pays avez -vous déjtvoyag é
J’
ai déjaété en Suisse , en Italie ,en Allemagne , en Espagne, en
Belgique , en D enemark, an
Pérou et au Mexique .
D ansquellespartiesde l'Allemagne
ave z - vous été?
Dans le H anovre et dans la Saxe .
Que lles sont les montagnes quevous avez vues en Itahe ?
Les Apennins.
Quels- fieuve s avez -Vous traverses
dans vos voyag es?
Je pourrais apeine ine lesrappelertous :je vous citerai seulementle Rhin, lo Danube , lo Rhfine,e t le Tags.
Quel e§t lo plus long de cesfleuves?
L e Danube , ui a environ troismille kilom tres de longueur.
Quels sont les plus rapides?L e Rhone e t ls Rhin,
Q ucls métaux extrait - on desmontagnes de l
’
E spagne ?
Presque t ous les métaux précieux,mais plus spécialement la mercure qu
’
on trouve abondammentdans ce pays.
1 97
R eading E xercise No . 39.
L e c élébre Brumm e l était nujour ac cusé par plusieursde ses am is de manque r de vigueur, e t d
’
éne rg ie e t le
prince de G alle s,1 qui se trouvait 2 présent , n’
était pas le
de rnier a railler le roi de la m ode , quand ce de rnier3 prenant la paro le4 “Je parie deux mille livre s, dit - il
,5 en
s’adressant an6 prince , que 3e porterai vo tre alt esse royale 7
depuis8 lo c oin de Hyde - Park,9jusqu
’
a10 la tourde L ondre s .
sans m’
arrete rl 1 un seul1 2 instant . ” C e s paro les fure ntacéue illiesl 3 par de joyeux éc lats de rire 14 ; le pari fut ao
oept é e t l’on convint l5 de se rencontre r16 le lendemain1 7
amidi18 prec isl9. L’heure ne ccnv enait 20 pas beaucoup e u
pi ince , mais, comm e il était convaincu2 1 que toute l’aifaii e
n’
était qu’
une plaisanterie , il avait fini par donner2 2 son
assentim ent L e lendemain la prince de G alle s, Brumm e le t leurs tém oin8 2 3 étaient ponc tue ls eu 1 ende z - vous, e t
comme la nouve lle s’
é taiw itéefl
, il y avait 2 5 la,nu
g i and nombre de spe c tateurs . Api e s nu m oment d’
hési
tation,le prince se préparait 2 6 aenfourche r2 7 samonture 2 8
,
lorsque Brumme l pro te sta.
“U n instant 2 9,
”dit - il
,
“j
’
ai
promis30 de portervotre alt e sse , maisje n’ai pasmentionné
”
l ’habit . L e p rince ne t rouva rien a répondre e t fi t31 as
qu’
on lui32 demanda1t . s’
écria- t - il . —"Pase ncore ; ii vousfaut34 ég alem ent 6te r vos bot te s .
”O te r
m e s bot t e s?”
C ertainemen t , e t aussi votre g ile t , \vo tre
c ravat e , vo tre L e prince ne voulut35 pas en savoir
davantag e36 e t fut oblig é de conv enir37 qu
’il avait pe rdu
lewpari.
1 prince ole Galles, prince ofWales, 2 se trout-ait, was, 3 cc der
m’
er,the lat ter, é prenant la parole, beginning to speak, 5 dit- il
,he
said, 6 s’
adressant au,addressing the , 7 votre altesse rag/ ale , your
R oyal H ighness, 8 depuis, from , 9la coin dc H yde Park, Hyde Park
c orner, 10jusqu’
d,up to , 1 1 m
’arréter, stopping 1 2 seal, single ,
13 accueillz’
c’s, received, 1 4 éclats de fi ne, bursts oflaughing , 1 5 l’
on
c onvint, they agre ed, 1 6 se rencontrer, t o m ee t,1 7 lo lendcmain
,the
next day, 1 8 midi, at twelve , 19précis, sha1p, 2 0 convenait,suited,
2 1 convaincu, convinced, 2 2 il avaitfim’
par donner, he had g iven at
last , 2 3 te'
moins, seconds, (2 4 s
'étm
’
t ébm itt c , had 511 1 ead about , 2 5 { l
y ava zt, there were , 2 6 36 prépam it, was prepai ing , 2 7 enfourcher,
to bestride , 2 8 monture , mock horse,2 9un instant
, wait an instant ,30promis, promised, 31 fi t, did, 32 lui, from him
, 33partons, le t
us start , 34 vousfaut, you must , 35 voulut, wish, 36 napas en
imi
m'
r davantage , to know any more about it , 37 convenir, to acknowerg c .
F OR TIETH LESSON. Quarantiéme Loren.
R ule s t o asc e rtain t h e g e nde r ofnouns by t h e irsig nifi c at io n conc luded
Are feminine :1 . Nouns which designate woman in all her conditions.
Epouse , wife mere , mo ther ; soeur, sister ; cousine , cousin.
2 . Nouns which designat e the females ofanimals.
C hienne, bitch cha tte , cat brebis, sheep jument, mare .
3. Names ofqualitie s, virtues, and vices.
Beaute'
,beauty ; bonté , goodness ; paresse , laziness.
— Cfomjagc, courag e ; genie , g enius ; mérite , merit ;’
ld lent , talent .
4. G eOgrapl-
ai cal nam es ending in e or es.
La F rance , fi ance la Seine , the Seine les Alpes, the Alps.Se e the preceding lesson
—for exceptions.5. Names offruits, with very few exceptions.
To asc e rtain t h e g ende r ofnouns by th e ir ending s.
1 . There are no substantives in French terminating inj, z', w.
2 . 1 1 letters terminat e masculine nouns without exceptions.b, c, d, g , l, p, q, z , and h, k, y. The latter are onlyfoundin nouns derivedfrom foreign languages.
3. Nouns terminating with the vowe ls a, i, o, u, and the con
sonantsf, m, s, t, are also masculine, but there are some
exceptions to this rule the exceptions are asfollowsa, dim ,
diva ; sepia , sepia ; verand a, veranda ; villa, villa, and thenouns ofdances as
,—pollca ,
mazurka , cfcc.i (tyres
-midi, afternoon ; dem i, half; merci, mercy ;fowmni, ant ;foi,faith loi, law paroi, partit ion, wall.
0 quasz’
modo, quasimodo ; virago, virago .
u bru, daught er- in- law ; g lu, bird- lime ; tribu, tribe ; vertu, virtue.
fclef, key ; vzqf, nave ; soif, thirst .
mfaim ,hunger. L
’ [as brebis, sheep ; oasis
,sis ; souris, mouse ; m
’
e , screw ;fois, t ime .
t dot, dowry ; dent , t ooth ;forét, forest ; jmnent, mare ; mart, death ;nuit, night hart, withe part, part .
4. Nouns terminating in n are generally masculine, but thereare several exceptions, as follow
a.-fin, end ; main
,hand faqon, make ;
'
lecon, lesson rancon, ran
som rebe llion, rebellion.
b.—Nouns ending in cion, g ion, m’
en, sio'n, tion, vion, mien ; as,
susp icion, contagio n, reunion, suspensimi, admiration, allum’
oa, com
plexion, «t o. (These words are the same in English as in French . )EXC EPTION.
—Bastion , bastion, is masculine
a—Nouns ending in son as,
déclina ison, de clinat ion maison, house ; raison. reason, (t o.
Excnr'rroxs .—Bz
‘
son, bison blason,coat ofarms ; grim“. don
key oison, gosling poison, poison son,sound limi t , brand.
2 00
Que s tions on G rammar.
Which are the nouns which are all ofthe feminine gender!What is the gender ofnouns ofqualit ies and vices!Which are the nouns ofqualitieswhich are ofthe masculine genderlWhat g eographical names are feminine ?Name the thre e consonants which do not t erminate any Frenchnouns?
G ive the eleven consonants which only terminate masculine nouns.What are the vowels which t erminat e masculine nouns, and thefourconsonantswhich generally terminate nouns ofthe samegender?G ive some nouns in a, i, o, a , which are feminine ?What is the only noun ending in m , which isfeminine !What is g enerally the g enderofnouns ending in at ?
What is g enerally the gender ofnouns ending in ion !Name the only noun ending in tion , which is ofthe masculineg enderI
C onve rsat ion .
Which are the two countries that
have the greatest fleets in the
world?England and France .
Is England by far the greatestmari time power?
Yes, it is stated that the numberofher shi 8 equals the total
number 0 the vessels ofallother countries .
What is the country which can
boast ofhavino the most perfectmilitary organisation?
G ermany.
Is everyone obliged to be a. soldierin that country ?
Yes,military service is obligatory
on all classes ofsociety.
Is there any other country wherethe same obligations are imposedon all citiz ens.
France, since the war ofeighteenhundred and seventy- one.
Quels sont les deux pays qui ontles deux plus grandee flottes damonde ?
L’
Angleterre e t la France.
L'Angle terre est - elle de beaucoupla plus grande puissance marlt ime
Oui, on assure que le nombre deses navires égale le nombre totaldes batiments de tous lesautres
pays.
Quel est le paysquipent se vanterd
’
avoir l'organisation
la plus parfaite lL'Allemagne .
C hacun est - ii oblige d'étre soldat
dans ce pays- la?
Oui ; lo service militaireobligatoire ourtouteslesde la societ
Y a- t - ii un autre pays oh lamemeobligation soit imposée a tousles citoyens?
La France, depuis 1a guerre dodix-huit cent - soixante et onz e .
2 01
R e adin g E x ercise No . 40 .
Parmi les nombreuses occupations d’un dire cteurl de theatre ,
figure2 la reception de sjeune s auteurs qui, se croyan t3 tous doués
d’4 un talent de premier ordre , viennent5 lui presenter leurs chefsd’oeuvre
6 inédits". Or,8comm e tout dire cteur est homme du
monde , il est oblige de recevoir polim ent ces visiteurs importunsg
e t pour s’
en débarrasser,10 il leur promet1 1 invariablement de
lire 12 leur piece 1 3 ave c attention e t dans le plus brefdélai
possible . C’
est pourquoi l’un de nos Sardous en herbe
,“qui avait
déjarecu vingt fois une prome sse analogue , se présentait derniere
ment 15 che z l'un de nos directeurs les plus connus16 cc dernier,
voulant1 7 en finir18 une bonne fois”,ordonna qu
’on l
’introduisit 2 0
dans son cabine t“,e t , lui remettant
2 2 son manuscrit,lui annonce
qu’apres le cture
2 3 de se com édie,il regrettait que se piece ne fut
pas du genre?”t de ce lles qu
’il faisait représenter
fif’. Le suje t en
était trop frivole ls dialogue manquait d’2 6animation le dé
nouem e 11 t 2 7 était mal amenézs,l’inexpérience du jeune auteur se
trahissait29 a chaque scene , quoiqu
’on y découvrit a certains
passaffes la marque
30 d’un talen t veritable . L
’auteur na répondit
1 icn mais dénouant31 ls ruban qui attachait le rouleau de
papier, il'
fit voi132 eu directeur qu’il na contenait33 que du papier
blanc .
1 directeur, manager, 2 figure, figures, 3 se croyant, believing
themselves, 4 doués d’
, g ifted with , 5 siennent, come, 6 chefs
d’
oeuvre, mast er-pieces, 7 inédits , unpublished, 8 or, now, 9 1m
po'rtuns, troublesome
,1 0 se debarasser, to g et rid of, 1 1 prombt
promises, 1 2 fle lire , to read,
1 3piece , play, 1 4 en he?be, rising ,
15 dem iérement, lately, 1 6 les plus connus, best known, 1 7 voulant,
wishing , 1 8 en fin ir, to bring mat t ers to a close . 1 9 une bonne
fois, onceWall,
2 0 qu'on l
’
introduisit, that he would l e shown,
2 1 cabinet, study, 2 2 remettant, handing , 2 3 apres lectm e, aft c 1
reading , 2 4 genre , kind, 2 5 ilfaisai t repre'
sentei , he caused t o be
represent ed, 2 6 manquait d'
, was lacking , 2 7 de‘
nouement,unrave l
ment , 2 8 amené, bl ought in, 2 9 se t’l ahissait,betrayed itse lf
,
30 la marque , the stamp, 31 dénouant, loosing , 32 fi t c oir, showed,33 contenait, contained.
F rench G 'ranunar.
F oBTY - F rnsr L E SSON. Quarante e t um eme L egon.
S yntax oft h e Substant ive ( continued ).
R ul e s t o asc e rt ain t h e g ende r ofnouns by th e ire nding s ( ctmc luded) .
6 . Nouns ending in r are generally mascul ine .
The exceptions are
a .—0hair, flesh ; mer, sea ; cutller, spoon ; cour, yard.
b.—Nouns ending in cur which denot e a quality, a normal stat e or
dim ension ; as, — douceur, swe etness ; douleur, pain ;ferveur, fervour ; ampleur, amplitude ; largeur, width ; longue ur, leng th, 850.
c .— C lameur, clamour ; couleur, colour ;flew , flower ; liqueur, liquor;lueur, gleam ; humeur, humour ;moiteur, moisture ; odeur, odour;palear, paleness ; mtmeur, rumour ; savour, savour ; soeur, sister;Splendeur, splendour ; sueu
'r, perspiration.
6 . Nouns in a are e ithermasculin e ; as,choice , choice ; courroux, ang er ; crucifix, crucifix ; épouz , husband ;fataz, burden ; flux, flow ; houx, holly ; phénix, phenix ; prix,price ; reflux, ebbing ; thorax, thorax.
Orfeminine ; as,chauez, lime ; crota, cross ;fguzc , scythe ; walnut ; palm, peace ;per
-arias, partridge poise , p1t ch ; toute , cough ; cote}, voice .
Nouns in e'
are masculine , excepta .
— am itz’
é, friendship ; enmity ; moitié, half; pity.b.
—Nouns ending in té ; as,— amabilité, amiability ; beauté, beauty ;
clarté, brightness ; dur té, hardness; &c . ; however the followingare mas culine : arrég ,
arrest ; grace ; comté, county ; cdte
’
, side ;depute, deputy ; précz
'
ptté , precipitate ; the, t ea ; traité , treaty.
8 . Nouns ending in e are generallyfeminine .
These are very numerous in French,there being no fewer
than but only two thirds follow the rule we have justgiven . It will then be ne cessary to refer to the rules given to asc ertain the g ender ofnouns by their sense .
Nouns ending in age, asme, fleme , tste, éme , aume, (Sme , are all
mas culine , with the followm g excepti ons.
cage , cag e ; image, image ; wa ge , swimming ; page, pag e ; plage,
beach ; rage , rag e ; bal'iste , cross- bow ; batiste , cambric ; liste,
list ; piste , stack, and the nouns which refer to women trades ; as,—cafme
’
rtste , chambermaid fleurtste, florist mode'
ste, milliner, St e .
NOTE —We have given the rules for ascertaining the gender ofnouns, because they must have a place in a complet e grammar oftheFrench lang uage , and also because questions are frequently asked on
that subje ct , in examinat ion papers. But practice , more than anythingelse , wi
l
l enable the student to overcome the difficulty.
2 04
Que st ions on G rammar.
1 What is the gender ofnouns ending in r ?
(O
«
fl
a
g
-e
a
G ive some nouns ending in r which do not follow the general rule .
G ive some nouns ending in as which are masculine .
G ive somefeminine nouns ending in as.
What is the gender ofnouns ending in 6.G ive some nouns ending in 6 which do not follow the general rule.What is g enerally the g ender ofnouns ending in e ?
Are there many nouns ending in e which do notfollow the rule ?9. G ive the endings which, although terminated by e, belong , withfew exceptions, to masculine nouns.
10. G ive some nouns ending in age and iste which do notfollow therule givenfornouns with that termination.
C onv ersat ion .
Are the rules given by gramma
rians such as to enable astudent
ofthe French languag e to asoer
tain with certainty the genderofa noun
N they are veryfarfrom being
Is it then useful to devote one's
time to study these rules ?
Undoubtedly but there are manyexceptions.
C ould you, however, point to some
rules which are subject tofewerexceptions ?
We recommendyou those based on
the meaning ofnouns.
And amongst those based on the
termination
The rules which stat e that all
nouns ending in tion, but bastion,arefeminine ; and that all nounsendin in b, c, d, g, l, p, q, z , aremasc 0.
Les regles données par les grammairiens peuvent - elles met trece luiimi. studieJeJangueJrancaise ameme d_
e_reconnaitre avec
certitude le genre d’
un sub
Non ; bien loin de 1a.
Est - ii donc utile de'
consaerer son
temps aétudier ces regles ?
Sans doute mais il y a. beaucoupd'exceptions.
Pourriez - vous cependant designercertaines régles qui soient su
jettes amo ins d’
exceptions ?
Nous vous recommandons cellesqu1 sont basée s sur lo sens desnoms.
E t parmi cell es qui sont basées surla t erminaison
Les regles qui disent que tous lesnoms t erminés en tion, sontféminins except é bastion
, et
que tous les noms t erminés en
b, c, d, g , l, p, g, z, sont masculins.
2 05
R eading E xercise No . 4 1 .
E n 1683,L ouis XIVayant charg é1 l
’
am iral Duquesne
do bombarder2 Alg er, pour punir le D ey de son inso lence,
la flotte francaise vint prendre3 posit ion devant la v ille .
Ne sachant4 comment répondre d’5 une maniere efi’
icace eu
feu t errible de l’
ennemi, le D ey ordonna d’
attacher les
e sclaves francais a la bouche 6 de s canons e t d’
envoyer
leursmembressang lantsjusque 7 surles vaisseaux chré tie ns.
Au moment pour obe 1r ace t ordre , le s corsaire s9 al
laient 10 attache r nu oifi cier, nommé C hoiseul , a la bouched ’
une p ie ce , un capitaine alg érienl l
, qui avait autrefois étéson prisonnier e t avait été traité par lui ave c une g randehumanité
,vint passe r e t le re connut13. Immédiat e
ment il s’
adresse a l’
ofii c ier commandant14 e t lui demanded
’
épargner15 lo malheureux mais se s supplicat ions sont
inut iles : le s ordre s sont pre cis e t doivent 16 etre exécutés
a la le ttre 1 7. F ou de 18 désespoir, l’Alg érien se je tt e sur
le F rancais e t l’
embrasW roitement l9, disant2 0 que s’il ne
pe ut 2 1 le sauver,il partag era du moins2 2 son trist e sort2 3.
H eureusem ent pour le g énéreux corsaire , le D ey arriva sur
ce s entrefaites2 4; il demanda que lle é tait 1a cause de ce t te
altercation, ne put s’empécher d
’
é tre 2 5 touché par nu si2 6
noble exemple de re connaissanc e, e t accorda la g race 2 7 de
l’
officierfrancais, qui échappa d’2 3une maniere si ex traor
dinaire e t si imprévue 2 9 a la mort t e rrible qui le me
nacait .
1 charge, charged, 2 bombarder, bombard, 3 vint prendre , came
and took, 4 ne sachant, not knowing , 5 cl’
,in
, 6 bouche , muzzle ,
7jusque, asfar as, 8 on, when, 9corsaires, corsairs, 1 0 allaient,
were g oing , 1 1 algérien, Alg erian,1 2 pint o, happened to , 13 re
connut, recognised, 1 4 commandant, commanding , 1 5 épargner, to
pardon, 1 6 doivent, must , 1 7 o. la lettre, punctually, 1 8 ole, with,
19étroitement, closely, 2 0 disant, saying , 2 1 peut, can, 2 2 da
moine , at least , 2 3 sort, fate , 2 4 car ces entref”aites, in the mean
while , 2 5 ne p ut s’
empécher ol’
étre, could not restrain from being ,
2 6 an si noble , so noble an ,2 7 grdce, pardon, 2 8 d
'
, in, 2 9 int o
prévue , unexpect ed.
2 06
F oarr- snoonn L E SSON . Quarante - deumeme L egon.
S yntax oft h e Noun ( continued) .
G ende r ofse ve ral Nouns .
Amour, love , is masculine in the singular and plural ; but isfeminine in the plural when it means the at tachment ofone sex
towards the other.
D e tous les amours, l’
amour d'une mere est lo plus constant. Ofall
loves, a m other's love is the most constant .
L es malheureuses amours ole R omeo et Julie tte sont le sujet d’
un dos
drames les p lus celebres de Shakespeare. The unfortunat e love ofR omeo and Juliet t e is the subje ct ofone ofthe most celebrat eddramas ofShakespeare .
D e'
lice, delight, and orgue , organ, are masculine in the sin
arandfem inine in the plural.L a lecture ww w élice pour son esprit. R eading is a great de~
light for h1s mind.
Nut n’
appre’
cie mieux que moi les délices de la vie defa/mille . Noone appreciat es bet t er than I the
“
delights offamily life .
G et or ue n’
a pas u/n beau son . This organ has not a fine sound.
Les argues de Fribourg en Suisse sont renomone'
es . The organ ofFreiburg in Swit zerland is celebrat ed.
"
Aig le , eagle , isfeminine in the sense ofimperial ensigns and
also when spe aking ofthe female bird,but masculine in any o ther
sense .
L es aig lesfurent distribuées a l'armée en presence de l’empereu'r. The
eag les were distribut ed t o the army in the presence ofthe emperor.
J’
ai me a la ménag erie une aig le et ses aiglons. I have seen in the
menag erie a she - eagle and her eaglets.
C ouple, couple , is masculine when it signifies the un ion oftwo beingsfor a common purpose .
Votrefrere et sajeunefemme sont un coup le bien assorti. Your brother and his young wife are a w ell mat ched couple .
C et homme et son ami sont un couple defripons. This man and hisfriend are a couple ofscoundrels.
It isfeminine when it means simply two obje cts ofthe samekind.
—D onne z -moi une couple d’
oeufs. G ive m e two eggs.
Enfant, child, is generally ofthe masculine g ender, but isfeminine when the sense ofthe sentence clearly indicates that thechild is a girl .Les enfants sont généralementjoueurs. C hildren are g enerally playful .VotreJille est une belle enfant . Your daught er .is a beaut iful child.
F oudre, lightning , isfeminine in its proper sense , but mas
culine when it denotes a great man, or means a large'
cask .
D euxpersonnes ont étéfrappées par lafoudre . Two persons havebeen struck by lightning .
Turenne était unfouolre de guerre . Turenne was avery great g eneral .Tous lesfouolres qui sont dans notre cave ont été remp lis. All thelarg e casks which are in our cellar have be en filled.
2 08
Que st ions on G rammar.
What,is the gender ofamour?
When is amourfeminine ?When is de lice ofthe feminine gender?When is argue masculine ?When is aig lefeminine ?What is the difference be tween un coup le and une couple ?
What is g enerally the g ender ofenfant ?What is the meaning offaudra whenfeminine ?
C onv e rsat ion .
What is the title ofthe book youwere reading when I entered theroom
It is C atherine , a beautiful novelby Jules Sandau.
What is the subje ct ofthis novel ?
The chast e love ofC atherine , theniece ofa poor country person,and R oger, a young . Viscount ,who thinks at first that he loves
her, but afterwards basely abandons her.
What becom es ofthe poor g irl ?She marries aftera long resistance ,
andfrom gratitude , C laude , a
poorschoolmast erwho has loved
her since he knew her, and
never ceased to love and to pro
t ect her, in spite ofher indifference towards him .
Did you begin reading this book
a long t ime ag o?
I have been deli ht ed with this
reading for the ast thre e we eks.
Lend it to me , and let us 0 and
try the new organ ofourc urch.
Who is that lit tle girl?
This beautiful child is the dunght er ofthe mas onwho was struck
by lightning at the end oflastsummer.
Please lend m e a couple offrancsthat I may give them to her.
Here they are .
Quel est le titre du livre que vouslisiez quand je suis entré dans
la chambre ?
C’
est C atherine , nu beau roman
de Jules Sandau.
Quel est le suje t de cc roman ?
Les chastes amours de C atherine ,niece d
’
un pauvre curé de cam
pagne e t de R og er, jeune vi
comte , qui croit d’
e bord l'e imer,
mais plus tard l'abandonne 1a
chement .
Que devient la pauvre fille?
E lle épouse , apres un e longue ré°
sist ence et par reconnaissance ,C laude
, un pauvre maitre d’
ecole
qui I'aime depuis qu
’
il la con
nait et qui n’a jamais cessé de
l'aim er e t de laprotég er, malgré
son indifference pour lui.Y a- t - il longtemps que vous avez
commence alire cc livre ?
Je fais mes délices de cett e lecture depuis trois semaines.
Fréte z - le moi e t allons essayer lesnouvelles orgues de no tre église,
Qui est cette petite fille ?
C et te belle enfant est la fille dumacon qui a été frappé de lafoudre ala fin de l
'été dernier
,
Veuillez me pret er unf couple de
francs, afin que je puisse les luidonner.
Les voici.
2 09
R e ading E xerc ise No . 4 2 .
Lapréséancel aque lquefo is donné lieu2 ade s inc idents
ext rémeme nt plaisants.3 On racont e qu
’avan t que F ré
déric I, ro i de Prusse , n’e l
’
it mis4 sur sa t et e la couronne
royale , e t alors qu’5 il n
’
était encore 6 qu’
é le c teur de Bran .
debourg , il envoya un ce rtain MonsieurBe sser comme am
bassadeur a la cour de L ouis XIV. Il s’
y trouvait 7 e n
meme t emps8 un ministre de la république de G enes,9 e t
ce s de ux personnag e s eurent une conte station pour savoir10
leque l des deux11 aurait la préséance . Ne sachant 1 2 com
ment me ttre nu t erme aw une si14 importants discussion ,
ils conv inrent15 que ce lui qui arriverait lo prem ie r a Ve rsaille s16 le lendemain1 7 se présente rait le prem ier eu roi.
Afin de 13 de vance r 19 son compétiteur, Besser passer?“tout ela nuit dans la. galerie du palais. Mais l
’
ambassadeur
génois2 1 étant arrivé de bon mat in2 2
,entra dans la gale rie ,
sans etre apercu duZ 3 mm Brandebourg , qui s’
en
tre tenait 2 4 avec nu courtisan dans l’
embrgsure2 5 d’
une fenetro , e t remarquant que laporte de la chambre d
’
a‘udience 2 6
était entr’
ouve rte 2 7 , il s’
y g lissa2 3 le st em e nt . ToutefoisBesser
,ape rcevant que lque s g en tilshomm e s29 g énois de vant
la port e , se douta de30 cc qui é tait arrivé31 . R apids comm e
l’
éclair32 il vo le33 ve rs c e t t e porte , e t tirant l’
Italien bo -
rs de
la chambre par le pap“de son habit , en dépit de35 se ré
sistence,e t au m oment 0 1136 il allait37 c omme nce r sa ha
rangue33
,il se m e t39 se plac e e t adre ss e son discours an
roi, qui, malg ré se sévérit é, no put
41 s’
empéche r‘l2 de rire .
1 préss'
ance , pre cedence , 2 donné lieu, given occasion, 3p laisant,comical, 4 mis, placed, 5 alors gu
’
, when, 6 encore , but ,7 it s
’
y trouvait, happened to be there , 8 en meme temps, at the same
time , 9G enes, G enoa, 10pour saoOir to know, 1 1 des deux,of
both , 1 2 ac sachant, not knowing , 1 3mettre un terme a, t o bring to
an end, 1 4 uue si importante , so important a, 1 5 conviurent, agre ed,1 6 Versailles, Versailles, 1 7 le len demain , thefollowing day, 1 8 afindo
,in order to, 19devancer, outrun,
2 0passa, spent , 2 1 génois,
g enoese , 2 2 de bon matin, early, 2 3 da , by the , 2 4 s’
eutretenait, was
conversing , gag embrasure,recess, 2 6 chambre d
’
audience , audience
room ,2 7 entr
’
ozwcrte, ajar, 2 8 se glissa, slipped, 2 9gentilshommcs,nobleman, 30 so douta dc , guessed, 31 était arrive, had happened,32 l
’
eclair, the lightning , 33 vole , flies, pan, flap, 35 cu dépit
de, in spit e of, 36 o il , when, 37 allait , was going: 38 harangue ,liarangue , 39se met, puts himself, 40 c
‘
c,in, 41 put, could no t ,
42 s'empécker ole Tire, he lp laughing,
2 10
Fonrr- rnrnn Le sson. Quaran te- troisieme Lepon.
Syntax ofthe Noun ( continued) .
requires the adje ctive s which precede it to bein the feminine , and those whichfollow it to be in the masculine.Howeve
’
TTthe adje ctive tous must be in the masculine when not
another adjec tive or when followed b an ad'
e c tiVewhich has tim e form‘ for both genders.
'I'Ee adjec t ive Will also
be firt hé'
h'
iasfiuline when gens is followed by another nounfromwhich it is separated by the
“
pre position dc se,—gens do lettres,
lite rary men gens de robe , lawyers.
M W
C e sont les nwilleures gens que j'
aie jamais vus. They are the bestpeople I ever saw.
C’et hopital a été bri ti pour les m'
eillcs gens. This hospital has beenbuiltfor old people.
Ces gens sont tres relig ieux . Those people are very relig ious.Tous les gens qui so nt chez lui, l
’
aimont pour eu bo nté. All the peoplewho are with him like him be cause ofhis kindness.
Tous les honnétes g ens sont ses amis. All honest people are hisfriends.lent pas acceptor cette proposition. C erwish to accept this proposal.
Orge, barley, is generally fem inine but is masculine in the
two expressions orge monde'
,hulled barley, and orge parle, pearl
barley .
Les orges de cette année sont tres belles. Barley is very fine this year.D onnez -moi unc livre ol
'
orgaperle’
. G ive m e a pound ofpearl barley.(Euvre, work , is masculine in
_
le grand oeuvre, the search afterthe phllosopher
’s stone , or when it means the collection ofthe
works ofa composer ofmusrc, engrave r, &c.
It isfeminine in every o ther case , and always feminine inthe plural. 1m m
Beaucoup de servants de moyen age ant liar-aille au grand oeuvre.
Many learned men in the mediaeval ag es have been searching forthe philosopher
’
s stone .
C ette broderie est une oeuvre dc patience . This embroidery is a workofpatience .
H ymne isfe rnmn’
re when it means a re ligious hymn, but ismasculine_irl _any other case .
Lcs hymnes de cc bréviaire sont tres belles. The hymns ofthisbreviary are very beaut iful.
LaMarseillaise est le plus entratnant ole tous les hymnes patrz'
otiques
queje connaisse . The Marse illaise is the most spirit ed ofall thepatriot ic hymns that I know.
Personne isfeminine as a noun, and mas culine as a pronoun.
J’
ai 'vu la personne que vous m’
avez reeommandée. I have seen theperson whom you have recomm ended to me.
Personne n’
est parfait. N0 one rs perfect .
5
2 1 2
Que st ions on G rammar.
1 . Wh at is the rule as to the agreement ofthe adjec tives that pre cedeorfollow gens?When is tous used instead oftoutes, before gens ?When is orge masculine ?
What is the gender ofoeuvre , when it means the whole ofthe worksofan artist
When is hymns mascul ine , and whenfeminine ?When ispersonne ofthe masculine g ender?
C onve rsat ion .
C ould you t ell me who these old
people are?
Yes, they were servants at myfather's
,and I considerit a good
action to assist them in their
old age .
Do you know many people here ?
great many, formyfather wasacquaint ed with all the literarymen and lawyers ofthe town .
Was not yourfather an artist ?
Yes ; he was an engraver; and
you can se e the whole ofhisworks at the museum ofour
town.
Did he not also write several
novels ?
H e did : and I shall be very .
pleased to forward you a copyofhis works, ifit be agreeable
t o you.
I shall be very ha py inde ed toreceive and to rea them, as Ihave heard them highly praised
by two friends ofmine who are
people ofwit and tast e .
What are you drinking there ?Pearl barley water: I g enerallydrink some at the beginning ofevery spring .
knew aperson that re commended“
m e to do the same . Nobodycan say that it is an expensive
ordangerous remedy.
Pourriez - vous me dire qui sont cesvieilles g ens?
Oui, ils ont été domestiques chez
mon pére , e tje considere commeune bonne oeuvre de les secourir
dans leur vieillesse .
C onnaissez - vous beaucoup demonde ici?
Beaucoup carmon pere connais
sait tous les g ens de lettre et
de robe de la ville .
Votre pére n’
était - il pas artiste ?
Oui ; il était graveur e t vous pouvez voir tout son oeuvre an
musée de notre ville .
N'
a- t - il pas aussi écrit quelques
romans?
Si vraim ent ; et je serai tres heureux de vous envoyer un exem
plaire de ses oeuvres, si celapent
vous étre agréable .
Je serai tres heureux vraiment de
les recevoir e t de les lire , vu
que je les ai entendu hautementlouerpar deux de mes amis quisont gens d
‘
esprit e t de gofit .
Que buvez - vous 1a?
D e l'eau d’orge perlé : j
’
en bois
éne’
ralement eucommencement
e tous les print emps.
J ’
ai connu une personne qui m'a
recommendé de faire la memechose . Personne ne peut dire
ue cc soit un remede dispenydieux ou périlleux.
2 13
R e ading E x e rc ise No . 43.
D eux hommes, étant descendusl dans une hote llerie 2 de3
Tours, donnerengeni dwepot un sac d’argent a l
’hotesse, qui était
veuve , e t lui re commandérent de no ls reme ttre a aucun d’eux
, a
moins qu’il ne fut accompagné de5 son camarade. Quelque temps
apres, l’un d
’eux se présenta seul e t la pria de lui donner l’argent,
prétextant que lui e t son compagnon en avaient besoin imme
diatement pour nu paiem ent important et‘
la veuve , oubliant lare commendation qui lui avait étéfaite ,6 e t a laquelle elle h
’
avait
fait7 que peu8 d’attention
,se dessaisitm du
9 sac . A peine l’habilefripon10 l’eut - il entre les1 1 mains
, qu’mil s’éloigna
13 ls plus Vit e
qu’il put, 14 e t ce ne fut qu
’
en remarquant sa precipitation que
l’hotesse se demanda si e lle n
’
avait pas agi imprudemm ent . Le
lendemain15 l’autre se presenta e t fit16 la meme demande, e t
,
comme la veuve lui racontait cc qui était arrive", il entra dansune vio lente colére , e t l
’assigna devant lo tribunal
“, en restitution
de son argent . Quelqu’un
,ayant
’
entendu parler19de l’embarrasde la pauvre fam ine , lui conse illa de dire 2 0 qu
’e lle avait re trouvé2 1
l’argent e t qu’e lle était préte a ls représenter
m,mais qu
’aux2 3
terme s de la plainte mem e 24 du demandeur2 5,elle na devaiifi sjen
( lessaisir’en presence 2 7 des deux compagnons : elle sommait 2 8
done le plaignant” de faire30 comparaitre
31 son camarade .
L’argument fut trouvé plausible32 par le tribunal, e t , comme lo
voleur se gardait bien defl3revenir34
,force fut eu demandeur35 de
se désister def"6 se reclamation”.
1 étant descendus, having alight ed 2 hbtellerie, inn, 3 ole, in,4 en,
as a, 5 ole, by, 6faite, made, 7fait, paid, 8 gaspeu, but
lit tle , 9 se dessaisit da, part ed with , 10fripon, rogue , 1 1 entre
les, in his, 1 2 qu’
, when, 13 s'éloigna, went away, 1 4 qu
’
il put,
he could, 1 5 lo lendemain,the next day, 16 fi t, made , 1 7 était
arrive, had occurred, 18 tribunal, tribunal, 19ayant entenduparler,
having heard, 2 0 ole dire, to say, 2 1 retrouoé, found again, 2 2 Te
p'l ésenter, to bring forth, 2 3 aux, according to the , 2 4 la plaintememe , the very complaint , demandeur, plaint iff, 2 6 elle devait
,
she sought , 2 7 en presence, in the presence , <g§ sommait , summoned,
2 9p laignant, plaint ifi‘
, _30 defaire , t o cause
, .
31 comparaitre , to
appear, 32 plausible , plausible , 33 se gardai t bien, t ook great care
not , 34 de revenir, to come back, 35force [a t au_
demandeur, the
plaintiffwas compelled, 36 de se désister, £6 desistfrom,
"
37 reclama
tion,claim.
2 14
F onrY - rounrn L e sson . Quarante -
qua trieme L egon.
Syn tax ofth e Noun ( continued) .Some other nouns are ofdifferent genders according to their
signification . The principal are asfo llow :
Nouns.
aide
aune
barbsbourgogneCapracarpe
cartouche
pretend
Masc unmn F EMININE .
assistant assistance
alder- tre e e ll (measure ofleng th)Barbary horse card
Burgundy wine Burgundy (the provi nce ofFrance)caper, private er caper, the bud ofthe caper shruba bone between the hand and carp, the fish
the elbowcartridg e (in sculpture and cartouch , cartridge
paint ing)champagne wine C hampagne (province ofFrance )coach not ch
ensign (ofllcer) woman’
s night capcrape pancake
crit ic criticismensign (officer) sign
- boardspace small piece ofme tal lowe r than the
types , used by print ers to se parate
untruth scythe [wordslast piece ofa symphony last letter ofa wordborerdrill
de ceiverke eper, soldier in the guardshour-frostre cord ofiice
guide , conductor
space be twe en two line s
gum- lake
book
cap ormun“made ofotterskin
handle
journeymanmemoir, memorandum, essaythankmode , waymould, castsailor boyornament engraved in pre
cions metalsC hristmas carolofficeSpanish game at cards, grayling (fish)
pag e (to a prince)c lownoldmeasure equal t o the widthofthe hand
paralle l, comparison
pendulumold province ofFranceclimax
,highest state
spade (at cards)platinum (me tal)stone , pall, canopypolitician
punter (at cards)post ofsoldiers , employmentpulrples (disease), purple (coour
pretext white robe worn by the young nobleman ofancient R ome
Iofa sabreke eping , guard, nurse , pro t e c t ion, hiltfabulous serpent used in heraldrygraftre in [print ers to separate linesa thin sheet ofme tal which is usedbylacquered ware
pound (money and weight)o tt er
sle eve , the C hanne l (betwe en France
manoeuvre [and Eng land)memory, remembrancemercyfiashionmusselmoss, frothblight , mildew
parallel lineclockrod , perch
period, epoch
pike , lanceunlock, plate ofa watchying panolit icsaying ofeggspost offi cepurple cloth , the royal dignity
2 16
C onve rsat ion.
Why does that man call for assistance ?
They are taking him to the guard
house and he pretends that
they accuse him wrongly ofhaving stolen a clock .
C ould I g o under any pretext andsee yourfriend 2
There you se e him : he holds a.
mould in his hand.
Do you know anybody who could
accompany us as guide across
the C hannel and in ourjourneyt o C hampagne and Burgundy.
I cannot recommendyouthisyoungman he was keeper in mycousin
’
s park andwas dismissed
on account ofthe theft ofse
veral earpsfrom the pondwhich
is situated in the upper part oftheforest .
Is there not s post offi ce in this
street ?
Yes, you se e it down there , near
the tribunal.
Have you a good memoryNot very why
Because I should like you to re
mind m e that I must answer
him before C hristmas.
D o you like the sleeves ofthiscoat ?
Pre tty well ; are they aft er this
winter'
sfashion ?Yes ; and how do you find thisneckt ie ?
Very re t ty, indeed ; where did
you uy it ?
At the shop whose sign board
you see , close t o the post- office .
I do not se e you rfriend's name inthe Dire ctory.
The page has been to rn by somebody.
Pour uoi cet homme crie - t -il bl'ai o ?
On l’
emmens an corps- de -
garde etil pretend u
’
on l’
accase a tortd'evoir vole une pend
'
ule .
Pourrai-je aller sous que lque pré.texte voirvotre ami ?
Vous lo vo ez la-bas, il tient un
moule a a main.
C onnaissez -vous que lqu'un qui
puisse nous accompagnercomme
guide , dans la traversée de la.Manche et notre voyage en
C hampagne et en Bourgogne .
Je no puis vous recommender os
jeune homme il était gardsdans le parc de mon cousin, et
a été renvoyé acause da vol de
plusieurs carpes de l'etang qui
est situé ala partie supérieurede laforet .
N’
y a- t - il pas un bureau de postedans ce tte ru e .
Oui vous ls voyez la-bas, pres da
tribunal.
Avez -vous une bonne mémoire
Pas tres bonne pourquoi ?
Parceque je voudrais que vousmerappelassiez que je dois lui ré
pondre avant la. N061.Aimez -vous les manches de cethabit ?
C omme cela sont - elles alamodede ce t hiver?
Oui ; et comment trouvez -vous
ce t te cravate ?
Tres jolie , en vérité ; on l'avez
vous achetée ?
Au magasin dont vous voye z l'en
seigne , tout pres de la poste.
Je no vois as le nom de votreami dans
’
annuaire .
La page a été déchirée par quel
qu’
un.
2 1 7
R e ading E xerc ise No . 44 .
U m homme , étan t m onté au somme t1 de lafleche 2 d’nne
ég lise pour t'
uire3 une répai ation au paratonne rre,4 pe rdit
l’
équilibre ,5 e t tomba d ’
une hauteur6 de quaran te m et rosmais iifut asse z heureux pour ne se faire aucun m al
,7 sa
chute ayant é té am ortie par un homme , qui passaitjust emen t8 ace mom ent 121 , e t quifut tué sur lo coup .
9 L es
parents de ce t infortuné porterent plaint e locontre l’
ouvrie r
e t l’
accuserent de m eurtre : ils demandaient que , si on no
lo condamnait pas amort , on luifit1 1 paye r au moins1 2 desdommag e s e t intéré ts
1 3. L e sjug es é taient ex trém ement
embarrasses : d’un coté14 ils ne pouvaie nt 15 nier que la
mort'
du passan t1 6 eut été la source de grandes pe rte s poursa famille ; de l
’
autre ils no pouvaient 15 c ondamne r un
homme qui avait é té si innocemm ent la cause de c e mal
heur, L’
un d’
eux sugg éra toutefois17 nu comprom isls
,e t
le tribunal déc ida que , désirant donne r alafainille du défunt 19unejuste sat isfact ion,
il c ondamnait le m e urtrier in
volontaire 2 0 a se placer exactement al’
endroit 0 13. la vic t ime
s’
é tait trouvée , quand e lle avait é té frappée amort : nu des
membres de lafam ille mont e rait sur le clocher e t se lais
serait 2 1 tomber sur lui. Mais il fallait 2 2 que que lqu’
un,
frére ou cousin,consent it ajoue r le role 2 3 de bourre au2 4
,
e t ils préférerent renonc er a leurs réc lamat ions que de
s’
exposer l’un ou l ’autre a devenir2 5 l
’
instrum ent d ’
une si
périlleuse 2 ‘5 execut ion .
1 sommet, top, 2 flecks, spire , 3pourfaire, to make , 4pam
tonnerre,lightning rod
,5 l
’
équilibre , his balance , 6 hautewr,alti
tude, 7 sefaire aucun ma l, not to do himselfany harm , 8 pas
saitjustement, was just passing , 9sur la coup , on the spot , 1 0 par
térent plainte, brought an action, 1 1 on luif'it, they should make him ,
1 2 au moins, at least , 13 dommage et intéréts, damag es, 1 4 d’
wn
coté, on one hand, 1 5 pouvaient, could, 1 6 passamt, passer-by,
1 7 toutefois, however, 1 8 compromis, compromise , 1 9défunt, defunct ,2 0 involontaire, unwilling , 2 1 se laisserait, would allow himself
,
2 2 t'
lfallait, it was ne cessary, 2 3 Mile, part , 2 4 bourreau,execu
tioner, 2 5d devenir, to become , 2 6 d’
une Si périlleuse, ofso perilous an.
F O R TY - F I'F TH L E SSON. Quarante - cinqm eme L e gon
S yntax oft h e Noun ( continued)
N ouns which are ofdiffe re n t g ende rs ac c o rding t oth e ir m e aning s ( concluded) .
Masculine . F eminine .
quadrille troop ofhorsesfor a tournamentJob:c arriage coach - house
sat ire , halfgod ofthe paganssat ire , critical writing
balance ” M ary, paysle ep,
nap sum
smile“mouse
statuary (sculptor) statuary (sculpture)tour, excurs ion walk,triimpe ter trumpetvague wavest e amer ste amvase mudve il sail
F em inine ofsom e Nouns .
Som e nouns can be used indifferent ly in speaking ofmalesandfemale s ; ils ,— auteur, author ; écrivain,
writ er ; poete , poe t ; té
mom,witne ss, and the g enerality ofnames ofanimals.
The following is a list ofnounswhich are different in thefeminineabbé
ambassadewr
dnebaron
bélier
boucranard
J ar-f
ohun l ine
cheval
chevreuit
cocho n
compagnon
compare
coqdevixn
dieu
dindon
duo
emperm/r
gcndre
gouverneur
hémenew
abbot abbesse jars gander
ambassador ambassadricc lion lion
ass anessa loup wolfbaron baronne maitre masterram brebis mule t mulelie -
goat chém‘
e negro negrodrake cane neveu nephew
stag biche oncle uncle
C anon chanoinesse pair pe er
horse jument pcwn peacockroe - buck chevrette
pig cache, 1rate
companion campag ne
g od-fathe r commcre
cock poule
guesser devineresse
god déesseturkey di ruleduke duckesse
emperor tml'ératrice
son- in- law bru
g overnor gouvernante
h ero héroiinehost hé tesse
Afew nouns have two feminine forms,which have different
me anings. They are asfollow :
bailleur bailleuse one who often gapes baillcresse lessor
chanteur chanteuse ordinary sing e r cantatricc opera singer
chasseur chasseuse huntress chasseresse
débiteur débilcuse seller débitrice female debtordemandeur demandeuse one who oft en asks demanderessc plaint iffdevineur deviozeuse one who easily guesses devineresse conjurerliseur liseuse one who reads much lectrice professional readerpécheur péclwuse fisherwoman
pécheur pécheresse sinner
procure ar procureuse at torney‘
s wife procum trice proxyvendeur vend euse seller vcndcresse vendor
2 2 0
C onv e rsation.
What is the tower which I se e
down there on the horizon?
It is the keep ofWindsor castle ;let us have a walk along the
river, and we shall soon be
there .
Is the que en at the castle justnow ?
No ; she is in Scot land with the
princess.
Will she soon come back, or willshe g o directly t o London?
She will arrive here next we ek and
then proce ed to London to hold
a drawing room, at which all
ladies ofthe court , duchesses,countesses, baronnesses, wives
ofambassadors, &c . , are to be
present .
Will your aunt attend the re cept ion ?
Yes, she w ill go there and intro
duce to hermajesty her. daugh
t er- in- law.
H ave you been to Greenwich parkye t
?
Yes, and I was very pleased t o
see the de er running at libe rtythrough the park, and comingto ask us ifwe had not some
crumbs or a lit tle bit ofbreadtT give them .
What is that beautiful bird?It is a peacock , and the otherbird,ratherugly thanbeautiful, is itshen which never leaves it
morning till night .
What is the roaring I have justheard?
It is that ofa lioness.
From what country does it come ?From North Africa.
H as it be en a long time at the
Z oolog ical gardens?
I think it was only bought at thebeginning oflast year.
Quelle est la tour que je vois It
has al’horizon?C
’
est la donjon du chat eau de
Windsor faisons un t ourla longde la. riviere e t nous y serous
bientfit .
La reine est -elle a présent eu
Non ; elle est en Ecosse avec la
princesse .
R eviendra- t - elle bientot , ou ire - t
elle aLondres dire ct ement ?
Elle arrivera ici la semaine ro
chaine et se rendra a Lon res
flour y donnerune recept ion, aquelle tout es les dam es de la
cour, duchesses, comtesses, ba
ronnes, ambassadrices, &c . , doivent etre présentes.
Votre tante assistera- t - elle a lareception?
Oui , elle ira et présent era se bruaSe Majesté.
Etez - vous deJe. allé dans le parcde Greenwich ?
Oui, j’
ai été tr'es cont ent de voir
les chevremls courir en liberte'
atravers le parc , e h venir nousdemander si nous _
n’
avions pas
quelques rates on an petit morceau ( le pain aleur dorm er.
Quel est cc bel oiseau?
C’
est nu paon, e t l’
autre oiseau,
plutot laid que beau est sa
pacnne qui ne le quitt e jamaisdumatin au soir.
Qnel est le rug issement que jeviens d
’
entendre ?
C'est celui d
'une lionne .
D e quelle contrée vient - elle ?
D e I'Afrique du Nord.
Y a- t - il long temps qu'elle est en
jardin zoologique?
Je pense qu'elle n
'a été achetée
u'au commencement de l
'année
ermet e.
2 2 1
R e ading E x e rc is e No . 45 .
En 1643, Saint Preuil, gouverneur d’Amiens, voulant
ls’em
parer d’2Arras,imagina une ruse pour laquelle il avait be soin
du concours3 d’un homm e habile e t determ ine. Il pensa aun
soldat nommé C ourcelles, qu 1 1 savait4 posséder les qualitésnécessaires
,e t le fi t5 venirs : J’
ai résolu7,
” lui dit - il,
“dem
’emparer d
’Arras par un coup de mains ; vous etes l’homme
qu’il m e faut9pour l’exécuter, e t sivous réussisse z , je ferai1°votre
fortune . Voici1 1 cc que vous aure z a faire 1 2 Vous vous
déguisere z en13 paysan e t vous en trere z en ville ave c une charge
de fruits sur a t éte . Arrive sur la place,vous trouvere z nu
prét exte pour vous disputerl“avec un habitant que vous tuere z
d’un coup de poignard15. On vous arrétera
,on vous jugera e t
l’on vous condamnera a etre pendu. Or16 vous savez
1 7que ,
d’apres la coutnm e , les executions se font 18 hors de la ville .
J ’aurai place une embuscade 19pres de la porte 2 0 par laque lle vous
sortire z,e t aussitot que
2 1 l’att ention générale sera suf‘risannnent '
32
excitée , m es homme s s’empareront
2 3 de c e t te portc , e t comme jeserai pret ave c m e s troupes
, je marcherai en avant 2 4 a leursecours2 5, e t je m
’anrai pas de difiiculté am e rendre maitre 2 6 de la.
plac e”. Aussitot apres, je viendrai2 8vous délivrer2 9. Que dit es
vous3°de mon proje t ? C ource lle s, rest-a que lque s minutes sans
répondre , puis, s’adressant a Sain t PreuiI : “Vo tre proje t me
par-
ait incomparable lui dit - il3l,
“seulem ent je vous proposerai
de changer32 de ro les” ; je prendrai34 le commandem ent rle
l’embuscade e t vous pénétrerez dans la ville sous le costume du
paysan .
”
1 voulant, wishing , 2 s’emparer d
’
, to capture , 3 concours,
co - operat ion. 4,cl savait, he knew , 5 fit, made , 6 '
vcm'
r, come ,
7 résolu,resolved, 8 coup de main , surprise , 9 qu
’
z’
l me faut,Whom I want , 10 jeferai, I shall make
,1 1 voz
’
ci,this is
,1 2 ce
que vous aurez afaire , what is t o be done , 1 3 en,as a
,14 vous
di'
sputer, t o quarre l, 15 coup de poignard, stab,
1 6 or, now,
1 7 ”c ows savez , you know, 1 8 sefont , take place , 19 embuscade
,
ambuscade , 2 0 porte , gat e , 2 1 aussiwt que , as soon as, 2 2 suffisamment, suffi ciently, 2 3 s
’
empareront dc , will capture , 2 4 jemmrchcm i en avant , I shall advance 2 5 ft leur secours, to the ir
assistance , 2 6 me rendre mattre ale,t o capture , 2 7 place , fortress,
2 8jc viendrm’
,I shall come
,2 9 vous deliw er
, to fre e you, 30 elites
vous, do you say, 3] dit - il,he said
,32 changer, to exchang e ,
33 ale roles, our parts, 34je prendrai, I shall take .
2 2 2
FOR TY- SIXTH LE SSON. Quarante- st'
azfiéme L econ.
S y nt ax ofth e Nouns ( continued) .
R em arks on th e Numb e rs ofNouns .
Proper nouns do no t take the mark ofthe plural.L es R acine , les C orneille , les Boileau cl les Moliere peuvent etre con
sidere’
s comme lesfondateurs de la languefrancaise . R acine, C or
ne ille,Bo ileau and Moliere may be considered as the founders of
the French languag e .
EXC EPTION.— Pl‘0per nouns take the mark ofthe plural when
they are used in speaking ofmen whose name s are employed as
common nouns, and ofdynast ies or families who have occupied an
hereditary rank and also when they are used to designat e the worksofauthors or paint ers.
Peu ale pays ont en la g loire de donner lejour a. des H omeres et o (t esVirg iles. F ew countries have had the glory to give birth t o poetslike H omer and Virg il.
L e comte de C hambord était l’
he'
r'itier des Bourbons de la branche ainee .
The count ofC hambord was the he ir ofthe Bourbons ofthe eldestbranch.
L e musée da L ouvre renferme des Raphaels et des Veronéses d’
une
valeur immense . The Louvre museum contains paintings by Raphael
and Ve ronese ofan imm ense value .
There are also nouns which never take the mark ofthe pluralbecause they express always a single idea. Such nouns are
Nam es ofm etals ; as,— ar
, gold ; argent, silver cutrre , copper, &c.
Aromatics ; as, canne lle , cinnamon; myrrhe , myrrh ; encens, incense .
Virtues and vices as,—pureté, purity innocence, innocence
paresse , laziness ivrognerie, drunkenness, &c .
Adje ctives used . substant ively in an abstract sense ; as, —lo beau,
the fine l’
ut'ile , the useful l’
agréable , the agreeable , &c .
Nounswhich refer to the different stag es in life , and the five sensesas
,
— mollesse,effeminacy ; pauvrete
’
, poverty enfance , child
hood ; m’
ee’
llesse,old ag e ; odorat, smell ; cute , hearing ; cue ,
sight ; goat , tast e ; toucher, feeling , &c .
Nouns derived from fore ign langua es which have not ye t
be en naturaliz ed in the French language 0 not take the mark ofthe plural.
The following are the principal Latin and Italian Words
which, acco rding to the Academy , must take an s in the plural
m
gr-
co
w»
aeeesslt,honorable ment ion duo
,due t pensum , extra lesson
ag enda,memorandum be ck duplicata, duplicate piano , pianoalbum, album errata
,misprint quatuor, quart et t e
alinea , end ofa paragraph factotum,fac to tum quiproquo, m isunderstand
alto, alto folio, folio saprano , soprano [ingaparté. wordssaid aside on imbroglio, confusion ténor
,t enor
lvruvo , bravo [the stag e impromptu , extemporiz ing trio , trioconcerto , concert memento , memento ultimatum, ultimatumdonut , balance due numéro, number virago. Viragodeficit , de ficit opera ,
opera visa, visedomino, dominos (game) oratorto , oratorio zero, z ero
M aximum and minimum ,be come maxima
,minima.
Uarbonaro,m ember ofan Italian secret society ; dilettante , ama
t eur at music ; lazza'
rone,Ne apolitan beggar, are used in the plum]
with the same ending as in Italian; viz : carbonari, clilellantr’
, ZCLZ Z a I'
uu L.
2 2 4
Que stions on G rammar.
Do proper nouns take the mark ofthe plural?When do proper nouns take an s in the plural ?
What are the nouns which are never used in the plural ?
Do nouns derivedfromforeign languag es change in the plural 1G ive some words derivedfrom the Latin or Italian languag es whichare writ ten with an s in the plural.
What are the plurals ofmaximum and minimmn‘l
What are the plurals ofcarbonaro, dileltante, lazzarone‘
l
C onve rsat ion .
Are those portraits by Van Dykeor Rubens
They are both by Van Dyke.
To whom do these paintings Ilong
The belong to the Dandolofamilywho lent themfor this occasion .
What do these large albums
contain ?
Drawings and etchings by the
best artists ofthe last century.
Are there any duplicates ofthesebeaut iful prints?
I think they are very scarce but
I have been told that there wasa second copy ofthem at Paris
and another one at Milan.
What music did you buy tod ay
I bought two oratorios by H andel,and a quart e t t e by Bee thoven.
C an you lend me these two operas ?
With great pleasure but youwill
oblig e me by returning them to
me the day aft er to-morrow, as Iam leaving for the continent ,and should like to take themwith me .
shall not forge t to send themback to you.
C es portraits sont - ils des VanDycks ou des Rubens ?
C e sont tous deux des Van Dycks.
A qui appartiennent ces tableaux !
Il appartiennent ala famille desD andolos qui les aprétés acetteoccasion.
Que contiennent ces grands albums ?
D es dessins et des gravures desmeilleurs artistes du siecle derm er.
Y a—t - il des duplicates de ces bellesestampes ?
Je crois qu'elles sont tres rares ;
mais on m’
a. dit qu’
il y en avaitnu deuxieme exemplaire aParis,at un autre o. Milan .
Quelle musique avez - vous ache téeaujourd
’
hui
J’
ai achet é deux oratorios de Handel of. un quatuorde Be ethoven
Pouvez -vous me preter ces deuxoperas ?
Avec grand plaisir ; mois vous
m’
oblioerez en me les rcudautapresdemain, vu que je parspour le continent , e t que jevoudrais les emporter avec moi.
Je n’
oublierai pas de vous lesrenvoyer.
R e ading E x ercise No . 4 6 .
Ménager1 la chevre et le chou.
” Voila2 un proverbs qu’on
cite souvent sans en connaitre l’origine . Pent - etre est - ce ce qu
’on
va lire . U n homme avait un bateau, dans leque l il devait3 passer
de l’autre cote de la riv1 e re un loup,une chevre et nu chou, sans
qu’il luim 4 permis”de les prendre tous trois a la fois.
6 Or7 il'
n’
osait passer le loup en3 mém e temps que la chevre , de peur que9
l’un ne mangeat l
’autre
,e t se s craint es etaient les meme s
,s’il
essayait de transporter 1a chevre avec le chou, Ne sachant 10 que
faire“, il s’adressa aun vie illard1 2 qui, assis13pres du bard“, riaitde 15 son embarras. N’
est - cc que1 6 cela ?
”1ui répondit ce t homme ;
prenez la chevre tout e seule au premier voyage le loup,reste17
avec le chou, n’
y touchera pas. Puis vous viendre z chercher
le chou, e t , apres l’avoir débarqué, vous reprendrez 1a chevre
e t la ram‘
enere z18 au point de depart
”, vous la laissere z 2 0
pour embarquer le loup . Vous le passerez e t reviendre z chercher
la ch‘
evre qui h’avait couru aucun danger.
On voit 2 1 qu’il y avait 2 2 unmoyen23de résoudre 2 4 1a difficulté ,
tandis que2 5,en se servant 2 6 du proverbe cit é plus haut
,on veut
dire” : faire des concessions a tout le m onde e t ne content er
personne .
1 ménager, to spare , 2 worl d, that is, 3 devait
,
'
had t o , 4 sans :
qu't
‘
l luifdt, without being , 5 permis, allowed, 6 a let / 01'
s,at
the same t ime,
7 or, now, 8 en,at the
,9 do. pear que , lest ,
10 sachant, knowing , 1 1 faire , t o do,
1 2 vieillard, old man
,
1 3 assis, seat ed, 14 bard, bank,1 5 rimfit dc, was laughing at
,
1 6 n’est - cc que, is it only, 1 7 reste
,remained, 1 8 raméncrcz
,will ,
bring back , 19p oint de depart, starting place , 2 0 Za z’
sswrez, will »
leave,
2 1 rod ,se es
,2 2 il y avait
,there was, 2 3 moyen, way ,
2 4 résoudre , resolve , 2 5 tandis que , Whilst , 2 6 ac servant dc,using , ,
2 7 veut dire , means.
French G rammar.
2 2 6
FOR TY—SEVEN’I‘H LE SSON. Qua/ra/nte- septiém L epcm.
G ene ral R ul e fo r th e F ormat ion ofth e P lural ofC om pound Nouns .
In the plural ofcompound nouns,variable words which
enter in their composition may take the mark ofthe plural ;invariable words like verbs
,adverbs
,conjurwtions and interjections,
always remain unchanged.
ales oiseau -mouches, some humming -birds.
des chow -fleurs, some cauliflowers.
des basses- cow's,some poul try-
yards.
des passe -partout, some lat ch keys.
des avant -w ears,some fore - runners.
des chauves-souris, some bats.
EXC E PTIONS . 1 .—Wh en the two nouns are unitedby a preposit ion
the first only takes the mark ofthe plural.des cie ls- de - Zit, some bed- t este rs
des chefs-d’
oeuvre,some mast er-
pieces.
des arcs - en- cie l, som e rainbows.desjets-d
’
eau, some fountains.
2 .—Although variable , som e words will remain unchanged in the
plural when the sense clearly indicat es that they express asingularidea.des hote ls-D ieu, some hospitals (houses ofG od).des appuis-ma'én, some maulsticks (supportsfor the hand).des terre-pleins, some dams (full ofearth).ales tete -a- téte, som e privat e int erviews (head to head).des coq
- d- l’
dne , some cock and bull stories (from the cock to the ass).des casse - cou, some dang erous passages (break -neck).des abut-four, shades (bring down the light ).des révez
’
lle -ma tz’
n, alarums (that wake in the morning).3.—Ou the contrary, some nouns will always be writt en in the
plural even when the compound noun is in the singular, when the
sense clearly indicat es that the noun expresses a collective idea.
un cure - dents, a tooth-
pick (that cleans the t eeth)na bec-figues, a becafico (that pe eks figs)un serp ent -d
- sonnettes,a rat tle - snake (snake with bells)
na couvre -
p ieds, a count erpane (that covers the fe et )an essuie -m ins, a towe l (wipe hands)R EMARK .
— N0uns which in English follow each other without
the interposition ofany preposition, are translat ed into French in thereverse order and a preposition is placed between the nouns.
la gare da chemin defer da Nord, the Northern railway station.
wne table dc bois fiou en bois) , a wooden table .
The preposition d is used instead ofde or en to indicate thepurpose , or when speaking ofa feature be longing to a pecuhar
pers on or thing .
le couteau adécouper, the carving knife .la salle amanger, the dining room .
l’homme d. l’habit bleu, the man ofthe blue coat .
l'enfant aux yew :notre
,the child with the black eyes.
2 2 8
Que st ions on G rammar.
1 . G ive the general rule for the formation ofthe plural ofcompoundnouns.
2 . When a compound noun is composed oftwo nouns unit ed by a
preposition, which is the one that takes the mark ofthe plural ?3. When do variable words remain unchang ed in the plural ofcom
pound nouns?
4. When are nouns writt en in the plural even when the compound
noun is in the singular?
5. H ow are nouns translat ed into French which in Englishfollow each
otherwithout the int erposition ofany preposit ion 2
6. When is the preposition a used t o unit e two nouns instead ofaleor en ?
C onve rsat ion .
Where does your grandfather livesince he arrived in London
H e lives in the house which he
has let as an occasional resi
dence .
Are there any entresols in the
houses ofthis street ?
No, there are none ; but the
ground- floors are very high
above the street level.
Has this district be en long built
Only about two or three years
before it was nothing but wast eground, and the roadswhich led
there were real bone -breakers.
What rank did your brothers- in
law hold in the army ?
They were both lieut enant - colo
nels, and my first - cousins we re
aides-de - camp to the king .
D o you know ifthe news con
tained in ye st erday evening's
papers have been confirmed
No,I do not know
, but I believethey were only rumours .
Most likely they were .
O t‘
i demeure votre grand-
pere de
puis qu’
il est arrive aLondres ?
Il demeure dans la maison qu’
il a
louée comm e pied—a- t erre .
Y a- t - il des entre - sol aux maisonsde ce t t e rue ?
Non,il n
’
y en a pas mais les rezde - chaussée sont tres élevés eu
dessus du niveau de la rue .
Y a- t - il long temps que cc quartier
a ét é bati
Il n’
y a que deux ou trois ans ee
n’
étaient auparavant que des
t errains vagues, et les chemins
qui y conduisaient etaient devéritables casse - cou.
Quel grade vos deux beaux-freresavaient - ils dans l
’
armée
Ils etaient tous deux lieutenants
colonels, e t mes cousins-
ger
mains etaient aides- de - camp du
Savez - vous si les nouvelles cont e
nues dans les journaux d’
hier
soir ont ét é confirmées ?
Non, je ne le sais pas, mais jecrois que c e n
’
e taient que des
on-dit .
C’
est tres probab&l
2 2 9
R e ading E x e rc ise N o . 47 .
Le poete anglais Prior avait été envoyé a Paris comme
ambassadeur. Son nom y était connu aussi bien que Ses
écrits et se société fut recherchée 1 par les hommes les plus
éminents e t les plus nobles de la cour de France . Parmi eux on
remarquait2 ls comte de X qui ne se lassait3 pas
d’aceompagner Prior partout oh il y avait quelque chose avisit er.
4
U njour ils allerent tous deux al’Opéra italien, et la, d
’apres5 une
habitude tres répandue 6 a ce tte époque7 sur ls C ontinent , le
c om te,désireux
,sans doute
,de montrer la connaissance qu
’il
avait de la musique qu’on exécutait, ne cessait de fredonner8 les
airs,asse z haut pour incommodgr toute personne qui aurait voulu
9
é couter les chanteurs ave c attention. Prior, que lque 10 ennuyé1 1
qu’il fut
,ne dit 1 2 rien pendant 13 que lque temps, craignant de
blesser la susceptibilité du com te mais, voyant 14 que son silence
ne faisait qu encourager16 son compagnon, il se leva
17 e t apostro
phant 18 le chanteur eu milieu de 191a stupéfaction générale“Ne te
tairas- tu pas bienté tm,Italien de malheurfl
,
”s’eoria- t - il”. E t
comme le comte, qui ne eomprenait
23 rien a une action aussi
extraordinaire lui demandait de lui en expliquer1a raison. C e t
homme,
”lui répondit Prior, a une tres belle voix e t chants
divinement 24 mais ne voye z - vous pas25qu
’il m ’
empéche de2 5 vous
e ntendre ?”
1 ea sociétéfut recherché e, his society was courted, 2 on remar
quait, was conspicuous, 3 gut ne se lassait pas, who never tired,4 d visiter
, to be visit ed, 5 d’
aprés, according to , 6 tres répandue ,
widely spread, 7 d cette époque , at this tim e , 8fredonner, humming ,9voulu
,wished
,1 0 que lque , however, 1 1 ennuyé, worried, 1 2 dit,
said, 1 3 pendant, for, 1 4 vag/ant, se eing , 1 5 nefaisait que , was
doing nothing but , 1 6 encourag er, incit ing , 1 7 fl se leva,he rose
1 8 apostrophant, addressing , 19an milieu de, in the midst of, 2 0 ne
6 tairas- tu pas bientdt, wilt thou not be silent soon,
2 1,
de mal ,
wret ched,2 2 , s
’
écrt'
a - t - il, he exclaimed, 2 3 comprenat t, understood,2 4 divinement, very well, 2 5 ne voyez - vous pas, do you not see
,2 6 all
m’
empéche de , he preventsmefrom .
2 30
Fon'rv-mren'm L E SSON . Quarante -hnitiéme L egon.
Synt ax ofthe Q ualifying Adje c t ive .
Ag re ement ofadje c t ive s with nouns or pronouns .
R ULE I.—An adjective qualifying several nouns ofdifi
‘
ercnt'
hders takes the“mark ofthe plural and remains in the mascu
Em, even ifthere be only one noun or pronoun in the masculinegender.
Monpen ct ma mere sont absents. Myfather andmotherare absent.Inn?at elle sont tres mé contents. H e and she are very dissatisfied.E lle a was robe at an chapeau notre. She has a black dress and hat.
Exonrrrous.-An adjective qualifying several nouns or pronouns
agrees with the last
l .—When the nouns are joined by the conjunction on.
Monpare onmaW e sera présenta. Myfather or my mother willbe present.
2 .—When the nouns express nearly the same idea and form a
gradation, the strong est expression being the last .l l a un esprit, nne intelligence vraiment étonnante . H e has a. wit , anintellect truly astonishing .
3. -When the att ention is specially called to the last noun.
II avait mérité l’amowr et la reconna issance generals. H e haddeserved general love and gratitude .
R ULE II.—The adjectives nu, bare ; demi, half, and the participles ci
—inclus and cal—joint, enclosed ; excepte’, exce ted ; vu, seen;y com
'
3, included ; suppose; supposed, agree with e nounwhenthey ollow it, but remain invariable when they precede it.Il était nu- téta, il avait la téte mu , he was bare headed ; wne demilt'
vre,halfa pound ; m e livre at demie , a pound and a half.
Excep té votre sawr or votre soeur excep tée , except your sist er.
Je aims envoie ci- incT'Es o
'
r ci-joint nne lettre, Iforward you herewitha etter.
La lettre (ti- induce or ci-jointe, the enclosed le tter.
Excsrrion.—O‘i-_70int_gnd ci-inclns agree with the noun evenwhen
placed before it , when the noun is det erminat e .
Je vous envoie cat-joints la lettre que vous m’avez demandee. Iforward
you herewith the letteryou askedmefor.
R ULE Ill —The adjectivefen, late, de cease d, agre es with thenoun when placed be tween the article or the possessive ad
'
ectiveand the noun, but remains invariable when placed before 9 ar
ticle or the possessive adjective.Mafeue mere, my lat e mother.
Fm la reine , the lat e queen.
Fm mes amis, my lat e friends.L esfeue princ es, the lat e princes.
2 32
Que st ions on G rammar.
1 . What is the rule for the agre ement ofan adje ctive when qualifyingseveral nouns or pronouns ?
2 . With what noun does the adjective agree when the nouns are unitedby the conjunct ion on ?
3. What is the rulefor the agre ement ofthe adjective qualifying severalnouns expressing nearly the same idea and placed in gradation
4. When does the adjective agree with the last noun when the two
nouns express different ideas it5. What adjectives and participles agre e with the noun when placed
aft er it , but remain invariable when before it6. What is the rule peculiar to the adje c tivefeu
C onve rsat ion .
H ow do you like this fan and
dress ? I bought them for theball at the embassy .
H think them exceedingly hand
some the fan is very rich, and
the lac e that covers it is ofgreat value ; but it matches
badly in colourwith the dress.
D o you believe that either ought
to be changed
C ertainly, the fan the dress isreally exquisite , and will suit
you admirably.
It was made by Worth and everybody acknowledges that he hasreal talent and g enius, althoughhe is but a ladies
'tailor.
D o you not think that these arti
ficial flowers are a good imi
tat ion ?
The colours are ofan incomparable brightness and look perfe ctly natural. I especiallyadmire this halfopened rose .
Where did you buy the se flowersI did not buy them ; they were
g iven to me by my late mother.
C omment trouve z - vous ce t éventail et ce tte robe ? Je les aiachetés pour le bal de l
’
am
bassade .
Jc les trouve tres beaux ; l eventail est tres riche ; la dent elle
quiM ecouvre est d'u? grand
prix mais"
ire—st d
’
une couleur
mal assortie acelle de la robe .
C royez ~vous que l’
un ou l'autre
doive étre change?
Oui,l eventail ; la robe est d
'un
g out exquis et vous ira admi
rablement .
Elle a étéfaite parWorth et tout
le monde re connait qu'il a un
talent , un génie véritable , quoi
que as us soit aprés tout qu’
un
tailleurpour dam es.
Ne trouve z - vous pas que ces fleurs
art 1fic1elles sont bien imitées ?
Les couleurs en sont d'un éclat
incomparable et d’
un naturel
parfait . J'
admire part iouhére
m ent ce t te rose ademi épanouie .
Oh ave z - vous acheté ces fieurs ?
Je ne le s ai pas achetée s ; elles
m’
ont été données parfeu mamere .
2 33
R eading E xercise No . 47 .
L e Sultan Amurat avait l’
habitude l de se déguise re t de se promener,
2 pour s’
assurer3 que ses ordonnance s4
etaient fidelem ent exécut ée s e t pour entendre e s que se s
suje ts pensaient de lui e t de son g ouvernem ent . Que lque s
jours apres la publicat ion d’un edit qui défendait l
’usag e
du tabao dans se s états, il prit5 passag e dans lo bateau qui
transportait les voyag eurs de Scutari a C onstantinople , e t
y rencontra un soldat qui lui offrit une , _prise de tabac6
le Sultan demanda au/defi nquant
"s’il no craignait pas
d ’
etre dénoncé e t puni de son mépris8 pour le s décre ts.
L e so ldat ne fit que rire de9 c e tt e observation , e t , ne voulant
pas1° excit er se défiance l l , le sultan sortitl 2 une pipe de se
c einture e t se mit 13 51 fum e r, en affe c tant de prendre tout e sle s precautions pour ne pas etre vu14. E n approchant
dul5 rivag e , il invita a16 son tour 19 soldat al’accompagner
a t erm” :“il le conduirait , disait - il
,18 dans une maison ou
l’on vendait d’
excellent vin . L’
invitat ionfut acoeptée e ttous deux se dirig eront vers19 l
’
endroit 0 11 la sultan avait
donné rende z - vous2 0 ason e scorte e t il comptait fairearré ter2 1 c e lui qui prisait 2 2 e t ne refusait pas de boire laliqueur int erdite au vrais croyants
2 3. Mais ses meni eres
avaient éve illé les soupcons de son compagnon , qui saisit
soudain lamassue qui p endait a24 se ceinture , l’
en frappa2 5si fort qu
’
il le fi t2 5 t omber, e t prit lafuite 2 7 avant que losultan eut eu le t emps de se re leve r2 8
1 avait l’
habitude, was in the habit , 2 ole se promene'r, oftaking
walks, 3 s’
assurer, t o assurehimself, 4 ordmmances, ordinances, 5prit,
took, G’ une prise ole tabac, a pinch oTsnufi'
, 7 déh’
nquant, offender,8 mépri
’
s,cont empt , 9 nafi t que Tire de , d1d
’
noth1ng but laugh at,
10 we vo ulant pas, not Wishing , 1 1 .sa defiance, his suspicion, 1 2 sor
tit, pull ed out , 1 3 36 mit a, began t o, 1 4 pow) napas etre am, not
to be seen, 1 5 en approchant da ,on approaching the , 16 a, in, 1 7 a
terre , on shore , 1 8 disait- il, said he , 1936 dirigérent vars, proce eded to ,
2 0 ca avait donné panda - vous, which had appoint ed as a place ofme et ing , 2 1 it comp taitfaire ar'ré‘ter, he int ended to give in charge ,
2 2 prisait, took snuff, 2 3 lesvrais wag/ants, true believers, 2 4pendait c‘
c,
hung from , 2 5 I’
m frappa, struck him with it , 2 6 fi t, caused,
2 7 prit lafm'
te, ran away, 2 8 de se relefver, to g et up again.
2 34
F OR TY- NINTH LESSON. Quaramte-neuvieme L epon.
Synt ax ofthe Qualify ing Adje ct ive s ( continued) .
Ag re em ent ofadje c t ive s w ith nouns or pro nouns
R ULE IV.— In compound adje ctives,formed oftwo adjectives,
both agre e in gender and number with the noun.
D esjeunes fi lles sourdes—muettes. D eafand dumb girls.D espommes aigrca douces. Sourish apples.R ULE V.
—When one ofthe adjectives is used as an adverb,it does not agre e with the noun.
D es enfa/nts nouveau -M s. Newly born children.
D e l’
avoine clair- semée . Thinly sown oats.
EXC EPTION—H owever,fre ts, in the sense ofnewly, agrees with
the nounfor the sake ofeuphony .
D es/ raisesfratche s- cue illies. Newly gathered strawberries.
Rule VI.—When one ofthe adje ctives qualifies the other,
the first being expressive ofco lour, both remain unchang ed.
Une robe grits- clair. A light grey dress.
EXC EPTION.—However, both adject ives agree with the nounwhen
they indicate two separat e colours belonging to it .
L es p lumes de ccperroque t sontjaunes 'vertes. This parrot’
sfeathersare yellow and green.
R ULE VII.—Nouns used as adje ctives ofcolour do not vary.
D es gaet te paille. Straw - coloured gloves.D es rubans orange . Orang e - colouredribbons.
R ULE VI I I .—Adje ctives take the numbe r ofthe noun,
but the noun will never be writ ten in the plural for beingpre ceded orfo llowed by two adjectives.
L e remterit leg ego nd étage and not le premier et le second étages, thers and sec
'
ond oors.
” W "
D an at l’
autre métal and not l’
un et l’
autre métaua', eitherme tal.La lit/Maturefrancaise et la l'c
'
ttérature anglaz'
se, and not les Zittéra
turesfrangaz'
se et anglaise , the French and English literature .
R ULE IX.—Adjectives used to modify a verb are considered
as adverbs and remain invariable .
Nous avons payé cette maison tres cher. We have paid very dearforthis house .
Vous parlez trap haut. You speak t oo loud.R E ) 1AR K .
—Some adject ives can only be used to qualify persons,others to qualify things.
Une personne inconsolable . An inconsolable person .
U nefaute irrepardonnable . An unpardonable fault .
Only usag e and‘
the reading ofgood authors canmake the studentofthe French languagefamiliarwith these difficulties.
2 36
Que st ions on G rammar.
two adjectives ?G ive the rule for the agreement ofcompound adjectivesformed of
2 . Is an adjective used as an adverb in a compound adjective variableor invariable ?
3. What is the rule for compound adjectives formed oftwo adject ivesthe one qualifying the other 2
4. Is it correct to write a noun in the plural after two adjectives in thesingular1
Are adjectives used to qualify verbs variable ‘
l
G ive afew adjectives which can only be used to qualify persons, andothers which can only be used in speaking ofthings
C onv e rsat ion .
What is the building which I perceive down there on the hill,and has the appearance ofa
hospital 1
It is the hospital for deafanddumb people .
H ow are they dressed ?Their uniform consists ofa lightgrey coat and trousers, and a
cap ofthe same colour.
H ow are they admit ted into this
hospital ?Many come from the asylumwhere foundlings are received
the second and third floors arere servedforthose poorcreatures.
By whom is the first floor occupiedthen
The firs t is devot ed to deafanddumb people who are in a moreindependent condition, and paya certain amount .
Whence do those young girlscome ?
They comefrom the hospital garden
, and carry newly gatheredraspberries in their baske ts.
H ow do they provide for the ex
penses ofthe InstitutionIt wasfounded and is maintainedby means ofa sum ofmoneybequeathed bya charitable lady .
Quel est l’
édifice ue j’apergois
la-bas sur la col 111 0 e t qui a
l’
apparence d’
un hfipital?
C’
est l’
hospice des sourds-mue ts.
C omment sont - ils vetusLeuruniforme consiste enunhabit ,en nu pantalon gris clair, et enune casque t t e de méme couleur.
C omment sont - ils admis dans cet
hopital
Beaucoup y viennent de l’asileon You recue ille les enfantstrouvés le deuxieme étag e e t
le troisieme sont résfervés acespauvres creatures.
Par qui est done occupe le premierétag e 2
Le premier est affecté aux sourds
muets qui ont une position plus
inde’
pendent e , et quipaient une
certaine somme .
D’
ouviennent cesjeunes filles
Elles viennent du jardin de l’
hos
pice , et port ent dans leurspaniers
desframboisesfraiches- cueillies.
Elle a étéfondée et est entrctenpe
au moyen une sommg ar
gent
léguee parune ame charita e .
I
2 30
R e ading E x e rc ise No . 49.
Alphonse d’Aragon, comme la plupart des roial de cette
époque ,2 avait unfou3 aussi prudent que malin. U n jour, le roi
remarqua qu’il avait as la main un beau livre richement relié,5 et ,
ls lui ayant demande, il vit6 que os livre ne contenait que7 des
pages blanches. Interrogé, le fou répondit qu’il avait l’intention
d’
y inscrire8 ls nom de tous les fous du royaume . Le roi lui
accorda, en riant,
9 l’
autorisation d’
y inscrire les noms de tous
ceux qui lui paraitraient mériter d'etre appe lésfousm, an la con
dition toutefois d’indiquer la. cause qui lui semblerait justifier
cette inscription. Que lque t emps apres, ayant ouvert le livre, ily lut 1 2 les noms de plusieurs grands se igneurs de se cour, et , a
son grand étonnem ent , son propre 13 nom . C e tte audace lui causad’ebord de la colere e t de l’indignation puis, ayant 111 14 l
'anno
tation qui accompagnait son nom,il vit que le livre Specifiait
qu’il avait en lafolie 15 de confier deux mille pieces d’
or aw l’un de
ses officiers pour l’achat d’un cheval a l’etranger" C omment
se fait i119,” s’écria19 le roi,
“que vous m e traitie z de ion?"pour
ce tte raison’
i Le mandataire 2 1 de votre Majest é ne reviendra
jamais2 2 répondit ls boutfon2 3 e t si par hasard
2 4 il revenait, je
m ’empresserais d
’
y inscrire2 5 son nom alaplace de 26 ce luide votre
Majesté.”
1 la plupart dos rais, most king s, 2 époque, t ime , 3fan, jester,4 d, in, 5 relié, bound, 6 mit
, saw, 7 M contenait que , only con
tained, 8 d’
y imefire , t o put down in it , 9en m'
ant, laughingly,10fans , madmen, 1 1 d,
‘
under, 1 2 fl y lut , he read in it, 13propre,
own, 1 4 aya/nt ln, having read, 1 5folie , madness, 16 ale confier
deux mille piecesfor d l’
un,t o entrust one with two thousand gold
pieces,
'
1 7 d I’m-
anger, abroad, 1 8 comment sofait- il, how is it ,19s
’
écm‘
a, exclaimed, 2 0 que vous me trouiez dcfou, that you call mea madman, 2 1 mandataire , mandatary, 2 2 m rem
’
endm jamais, willnever come back , 2 3 boujan, jest er, 2 4 par Inward, by chance ,
2 5jg m’empressem
'zls d
'
y inscrire , I should hast en to put down in it ,
2 6 a la, place ale, inst ead of.
2 38
Fm'rm'rn LE SSON. C lnquamtiéme Lego”.
Sy ntax ofth e Qualifying Adjec t ive s ( concluded)Plaoe ofAdje c t ive s .
We have already said (see le sson 9) that the place ofqualifying adjectives was usually after the noun.
The following is a list ofthe adjectives which, be cause oftheir shortness, are generally placed before the nounsancien,
- ne , ancient
beau, belle, beautifulban,
-ne , good
dernier, - ere,last
digne , worthygrand,
- e,larg e
gros,- se, thick, large
jeune , youngjolt, - e , pret tymauvais, - e, bad
petit,- e, small
premier ,e re
, first
sage, wise
saint, - e, holymic/um, Metlle , oldmilam ,
- e , ugly
and all numeral adjectives, except whenjoined to names ofkings, andsomet imes to nouns indicating the divisions ofbooks.
The sense ofsome adje ctives changes according to the placethey occupy :un brave homme , an honest man
uue certaine nouvelle, a certain
piece ofnewsum commune com, a unanimousvoice
la derniere sema ine, the last weekunefausse clef, a skeleton keyum, gala/a t hom e , a gallant man
un grand homme , a great manbe haut ton, the fashion
an kennels homme , an honest manw e mac
’
gre diner, a bad dinnerbe malin esprit , the evil onelamauvais air, the unhealthy air,the awkward appearance
rm 'mechantpoéme , abadly writ tenpoem
em nouveau chapeau, a hat newlybought
k nouveau min, the newly boughtwine
um, pauvre homme , an unhappyman
,a.man oflitt le talent
une plaisante histoire, a strange ,unlikely st ory
ses propres; mains, his own handsan seul homme
, one man onlytristeprofesseur, abadprofessor
um. u'
lm'
u homme , a vile man
an homme brave, a courag eousmanune nowvelle certaine, an authent ic
news
une voice commune , a disagreeable
voicela semaine dem iere, last weekune cleffaw se, awrong keyan ham/me galant, a man polit e toladies
un homme gra/nd ,a tall man
la ton haul, the haughty mannerofSpeaking
un homme hon/néte, a polit e manun dinermaig
‘re , a fish dinner
l’
esprit malin, the maliciousmindl’
az‘
r mauvais, the wicked ap
pearance
uupoem méchant,a wickedpoem
an chapeau nouveau, a new fashioned hat
le min nouveau, the win e recentlymade
an homme pauvre , a poor man, a
man without means
une histoire p lateaute , an amusingstory
ses macawpropres, his clean handsun homme soul, aman alone
un professeur triste, a sorrowfulprofessor
uu homme oilain, an ugly man
2 40
Q ue stions on G ramm ar.
What is most frequently the place ofqualifying adjec tives ?
What will generally decide that the adject ive ought to be plt ced
either before or aft er the nounName afew adjectives which are , as a rule , placed before the nouns.
Where are numeral adjectives placed ?
What is the differenc e between um. brave homme and em homme brave?
What do es la derniere se aming mean what la semaine derniére ?
What is the difference between un grand homme and un ho mme
grand
8 . What is the difference betwe en an soul homme and un homme seul
C onve rsat ion .
H ere is an old mansion whosearchit ecture I much admire .
It was built in the last halfoftheeight eenth century.
Do you not like the neighbouringhouse as much ?
It is not that it looks bad, butg oodjudg es, unanimoudy criti
cise its pret entious and over
loaded style .
Are then any historical recolle c
t ions connect ed with these twomansions ?
The one on the right belong ed to
Field—Marshal one ofthegreat est g enerals ofhis ag e .
And what do you know about the
second ?
Several pleasant ane cdot es are
re lat ed about the differentowners who have successivelyoccupied it .
Are there many old houses left inthe t own
No and they become rarer evelyday.
Voici une ancienne maison dont
j'admire beaucoup l
’
archi t ec
ture .
Elle a été batie dans la derniere
moit ié du dix -huit ieme siecle .
N’
aimez - vouspas autant lamaison
voisine
C e n’
est pas qu’
e lle ait mauvais
air,mais les connaisseurs, d
’
une
commune voix, en critiquent
le style prét entieux et sur
chargé .
Y a- t - il quelques souvenirs his
toruTfi ésqui se rat tachent aces
deux maisons
C elle de droit e a appart enu eu
Maréchal un des plus
grands g énéraux de son'
t emps.
E t que save z - vous an sujet de laseconde ?
On racont e plusi plaisantes
ane cdote s an s difl'
érents
propriétaires qui l’
ont occupée
successivement .
R est e - t - il beaucoup de vieilles
maisons dans la ville
Non e t elles deviennent Chaque
jour plus rares.
2 4 1
R e adin g E x e rcise No . 50 .
Louis XIV,roi de F rance
,ainiait beaucoup le s éche cs. U n
jour, q11’ 2 iljouait
3 ave c l’un de ses c ourtisans, 11fit4 unfauxmauve
m ent,e t son adversaire risqua timidement une observation. Mais
le roi, qui ne souffrait pasfacilement la contradict ion, ne voulut
pas5 re connaitre6 qu
’il avait tort ,
7 e t en appe las aux gent ils
homm es9qui entouraient la table personne ne répondaitLlpi sque
le duc de G ramm ont entra dans le salon . Aussitot que le roi le
vit,il l
’
appela e t exposerlgle suje t
mais le due ne le laissa pas1 1acheverm.
“Votre Majesté a certaine
ment tort ,”dit - il
, 111 1“£901; (13ferme té qui étonna le roi e t qui
lui fitfroncer13 lo sourcil. C omment save z - vousl‘1que j
’ai tort ,
Monsieur le Due?”reprit 15 Louis XIV “
vous ne m’ave z mem e
pas .aissé le t emps de vous expliquer cc dont il s’
agissaitm
. Jele sais17 an
’en pas douter
lS,répondit le duc de G ramm0 11 t ;
“car
w , ”
tous cesMe ssieurs, que vo tre Maje sté consultait19au momeiit on”
. . n. - ~ l'
je msuis
”
arrivé , ne 1 épondaient que par leur silence Ils se seraient
unanimement empressés2 1 de prendre, ‘
y otr'e: parti”,
si votre
Majest é avait eu raison2 3.
” Le roifut frappé de la plausibilitéz“
de ce t arg um ent,e t admit 2 5 qu
’il s’
était trompézfi
.
1 aimait beaucoup, was veryfond, 2 qzt’
, as, 3jouat'
t,was playing ,
4 ilfi t, he made , 5 voulut pas, did not wish ,6 la reconnaitre , t o
acknowledg e , 7 q-u
’
il avait tort, that he was wrong , 8 en appela,
appealed, 9 aux gentilhommes,to the noblemen
,10 exposer, to
explain,1 1 ne la laissa. pas, did not allow him ,
1 2 achever, to finish ,
13 gm lut fi tfroncer, caused him to frown ,1 4 sat ez 'v- ozts, do you
know ,15 vep
'rit, rejoined, 1 6 ce dont ’t l s
’
ag i‘
ssait, what the question
was, 1 7jc sais, I know,1 8 d n
’
m pas douter, undoubt edly, 19con
calle d ,was consulting , 2 0 on, when ,
2 1 ils se sen t ie nt unam’
me
ment empressés, they would have be en unanimously eag er, 2 2 pwnd're
votre parti, t o take your part , 2 3 avait en raison, had be en 1 ight ,
2 4 plausibilité, plausibility, 2 5 admit, admit ted, 2 6 gm’
t l s'étatt
i/rompé, that he had made a mistake .
F IFTY- F IR ST LE SSON. C inquante et untéme Lepon.
S y ntax ofth e Q ualify ing Adje c t ive s ( concluded)
Adje c t iv e s ofD im e nsions .
Adjective s ofdim ension are placed in F rench before the’
name
ofthe measure from which they are separat ed by the preposition de.
Lamaison est haute dem'
ngtmetres. The house is twenty metreshigh.
La m am est profonde de trois pieds. The river is three fee t deep.
La table est épaisse d’
unpo't t ce . The table is one inch thick.
Ld'
fife est long'
ile'
demillemetres. The street is one thousand me tres.long .
H owever,the same construction should be observed as in
English , the verb ae oi'r being used inst ead ofe‘ tre,and the adje ctive
being translated by the corre sponding noun.
La maison a vingt metres de haut eur. The house is twenty metres
high.
L a Tim'
ere a troisp ieds de profondeur. The river is three feet demi.La table a un pouce d
’
épaisseur. The table is one inch thick.
La rue w mille metres de longueur. The street is one thousand
m e tres long .
The Adjectives ha ut, long and large, can be used instead ofhauteur
,longueur and largewr.
Oet arbre a cinq metres ole haut . This tre e is five m etres high .
C'c bé ton a. deuxpieds ole long . This stick is two feet long .
L e ruisseau a ving t pieds de larg e . The stream is twentyfee t wide .
Adje ctives after the expression avotr l’a't
'
r agre e w ith the sub
je ct when (weir l’a/i/rm eans to seem ,
but remain invariable when itmeans to have a physical appearance .
Votre mere a 1’-air tres bonne . Yourmother seems very kind.
C ette dame a Pair hautain . This lady has a haughty cozm teau mce .
Adjectives can have the same complement when they governthe same preposition.
C'
c livre est utile cl agréable d tout le mantle . This book is usefuland agre eable t o everybody.
Ma mere était bonne et biene eillcm te pour tout le m ade . Mymother was kind and benevolent t o everybody .
But every adjective must have its own complement iftheygovern different prepositions.
Votrefi-ere est reconnaissant ent ers ses amis cl leur est fidéle. Your
brother is grat eful andfaithful to hisfriends.
Sat maison est e otst'
ne cle l’
egli'
se et y est contigue‘
. H is house is near
and close to the church.
2 4-4
Que st ions on G rammar.
What is, in French, the place ofadje ctives ofdimensionWhen should the same construction be used as in Eng lish
Name the adject ives ofdim ension which can be used instead ofsubstantives.
4. When do adjective s agre e with the subject after the expression
afvoir l'air
5. When is one and the same complement sufficient for two adject ives?
6 . What is to be done when the adjec tives govern different prepositions
C onv e rsat ion .
What bridg e is it which we se e
down there
The R oyal Bridge .
What are itsprincipal dimensions?
It is one hundred and twentyeight me tres long and sevent een
me tres wide .
Ofhow many arches is it com
posed?
Offive arches, whose diame ters
have an average oftwenty - two
m e tres.
What is about the depth oftheSeine ?
I do not know it exactly ; but Ithink that it is about t en me tres
de ep .
It does not look very rapid.
It is not very rapid, but the
spe ed ofit s current considerablyincreases during inundat ions
,
which take place nearly every
year.
The numerous bridg es ofParisare ag re eable and useful to
pedestrians, who can thus easily
passfrom one bank to the other.
Are there any st eamboats that plyon the Seine ?
Yes,there are small boats which
are called mouches (flies).
Que l e st le pont que nous voyonsla- bas
C’
est le pont R oyal.
Quelles sont ses principales dim ensions ?
11 a cent vingt- huit metres de
longueur et dix- sept metres (lelarg eur.
D e c ombien d’
arches se composet il ?
Il se c om)Jose de cinqarches, dontle diam tre moyen est de vingt
deux metres.
Que lle e st apen pr‘
es laprofondeurde la Seine ?
Je ne le sais pas nujust e ; maisjecro is qu
’
elle a!
environ dix
m e tres de profondeur.
Elle n'a pas l
'air bien rapide .
E lle n’
est pas tres rapide ,mais la
vit esse de son courant augments
considérablement au moment
( les inondations, qui ont lieu
.presque t out es les anne’
es.
Les nombreux ponts de Paris sontagréables et utiles aux
'
piétons,
qui peuvent ainsi passer facilem ent d
’
une rive al’
autre .
Y a- t - il des bat eaux avapeur qui
font le service sur la Seine
Oui, il y a de petits bateaux qu’
on
appelle mouches.
2 45
R e ading E x e rc ise N o . 51 .
Babylonel était située dans une plaine arrosée par l
’Euphrate
2,
e t dont le terroir3 é tait extrém em ent fertile . Ses murailles, qui
ont passe pour une des sgm; m erveilles du monde , etaient , suivant
le rapport4 de que lques historiens, d’une grandeur prodigieuse .
E lles avaient douze toises6 et demie d epaisseur, cinquante de
hauteur, e t vingt
-
quatre lieue s de circuit .6 E lles etaient tout es
baties de larges briques, cimentées de bitume,7 liqueur épaisse et
glutineuse 8 qui sort9de la terre 10 clans ce pays- la, e t qui lie1 1 plus
fortem ent que le ni ortier, e t devient 1 2 beaucoup plus dure que la
brique ou la'
pierre,auxque lles e lle sert de 13 cim ent . C e s inurailles
etaient entourées d’un vaste 14
'fossé revétu -de 15 briques des deux16
cotés. C haque coté de ce grand carré17 avait vingt- cinq porte s
d’airain18 massif entre ces port es. et aux angles de chaque carré ,
il y avait plusieurs tours éleve'
e s19de dix pieds plus haut que 2 0 le s
muraille s. D ans le s palais de ce tte immense e t magnifique cit é
etaient ce s jardins suspendusm, si renommés2 2 parmi les G re cs2 3.
Ilsformaient un carré, dont chaque cGt é avait quatre cents pieds.
Ils étaient élevés e t formaient plusieurs larges terrasse s, posées enform e d
’flaniphithéatre
zi dont la plus haut e égalait la hauteur
cles'
murs de la vill e . On montait d’une t errasse £1 l
’autre paruu
e scalier large de dix pieds.
R OLLIN (H istoire ancienne).
( to be continu ed. )
1 Babylone , Babylon, 2 Euphrate , Euphrate s, 3 terroir, soil
,
4 rapport, relation, 5 toise, fathom, 6 circuit, circumference, 7 bi
tnme , bitu‘inen
, 8 g lutineux, glut inous, 9 sort, issues, 1 0 terre,
ground, 1 1 1 lie , binds, 1 2 devient , becom es, 13 sert dc,serves as
,
1 4 paste , vast , 1 5 revela ( le , lined with . 1 6 (les deux, 0 11 both, 1 7 carré ,square , 18 airain
,brass, 19elee l es
,raised, 2 0 plus haul que , above ,
2 1 suspendns, hanging , 2 2 renommés, renowned,2 3 G recs
,G reeks
2 4 enforme d’
, in the shape of,2 5 amphitheatre , amphitheatre ,
2 6 égalait la hauteur ( les, had the. same height as the .
2 46
F IF TY- SE C OND LE SSON. C inquante- deuxie
‘
me L epon.
S yntax ofthe D e t erm inat iv e Adje c t iv e s .
Po sse ssiv e Adje c t ive s .
In F rench,possessive adjectives can only be used before
nouns indicating parts ofthe body when the sense does not indicat e clearly enon h what person is meant .
31 0 11. bras droit a été casse’
densefois. My right arm has be en brokentwice .
Regardez ma téte . Look at my head.
After active verbs, possessive adje ctives are translat ed by thedefinit e article
,but the verbs are used refiectively.
Je m e suis casse‘
le doig t . I broke my fing er.
Il se la've les mains. H e washes his hands.
In Speaking ofthings, the possessive its and theirs can onlybe translated son, sa, ses, lewr, leurs when the nouns to which theyrefer are in the sam e sentence .
Chaqne chose a son bon et son man/vais cote. Everything has its good
and its bad side .
C es livres ont leurs beautés. These books have their beauties.
But ifthe possessed thing be not in the sam e sentence as
the posse ssor, possessive adje ctives could not be used in French,
and the pronoun en would be placed before the verb.
Je connais cette lan ue, j’
en ai étudié toutes les defi cultés. I knowthat lang uag e , I ave studied all its difficulties .
J’
ai été aParis j’
en connais lesprincipales curiosités. I have beenat Paris I know its principal curiositie s.
H owever, the“possessive adje ctive ought to be used ifthe
noun expressive ofthe possessed obje ct be the complem ent ofaprop nsition .
J’
ai acheté cette grammaire je vous la recommande a cause de lasimplicité ole ses régles . I have bought this grammar ; I recomm end it to you because ofthe simplicity ofit s rules.
Possessive adje ctives, like articles,must be repEat ed before
every noun or adje ctive , except when the second noun is used toe xplain the first
,or when the two adje ctives qualify'thc same
noun and refer to the same person.
C'haque ville dans cc pays a son bourgmestre on maire. Every townin this count iy has its burgomaster ormayor.
ll a été pour lui an bon clfidéle ami. H e has been agood andfaithfulfriend to him.
2 48
Que st io ns on G rammar.
When are possessive adjectives used in French before nouns indicating the parts ofthe bodyHow are possessive adje ct ives translated before nouns which arethe objects ofactive verbsH ow are its and their translated in speaking ofthings when thething and possessor are in the same sentence ?
H ow are its and their translated when the possessed thing and the
possessor are not in the same sent ence ?
When have possessive adje ct ive s not to be repeat ed before nouns oradjectivesjoined by the conjunct ions cl or on.
C onv e rsat ion .
You look ratherunwell what is
the mat t erwith you
I have a head-ache ; andmy t e eth
have revent ed me from sleeping t e greater part ofthenight .
Put a little cotton-wool soakedin olive oil into your ear
, to
p reserve that organ from the
contact ofthe air.
Do you think it will do me
good ?You will find that the pain will
disappear and never come back
as long as you take the same
precaution.
Who gave you that remedy ?I found it in an old book ofmedicine . I read that book
and its preface , and admiredits clearness.
I do not believe much in old
women’
s remedies they have
at any rat e the merits ofsimplicity and cheapness.
R ead this book you will find ita useful and sincere adviser.
Thank you, Ihavejust now plentyoft ime and will occupy myevenings by studying it frombeg inning to end.
When you have finished,le t me
know your opinion about it .
Vous avez l’airnu peu soufl'
rant
qu’
ave z - vous
J ’
ai mal ala t éta ; et les dentsm
’ont empéche
'
de dormir une
grande partie de la nuit .
Me ttez -vous nu peu de coton imbibe d
’
huilg d’
olives ans 0
cet organsdu contact de l
’air.
Pensez -
vous que cela me fasse dubien
Vous verrez que la douleur disparaitra et ne reviendra pastant que vous prendrez la.meme precaut ion.
Qui vous a donné ce rem‘
ede ?Je l ’
ai trouvé dans un vieux livrede médecine . J’
ai ln cc livre etse preface , e t j
’
en ai admire laclart é.
Je ne crois pas beaucoup aux
remedes de bonne femme ; ilsont d
'
ans tous les cas le mérite‘
de la simplicité e t da bonmarché.
Lisez cc livre ; vous y trouverezun ut ile e t sincere conseiller.
Merci, j’aijust ement beaucoup dc
t emps et je veux employermessoiree sal
’
étudierdepuis le commencement jusqu
'
ii la fin.
Lors ue vousl’
aurez fini,faites- 111oi
savo1rI'opnnonque vousenavez .
2 49
R e adin g E x e rc ise No . 52 .
( C ontinuedfrom No . 51 .
La masse entiere était soutenue 1 parde grande e voute s
batie s l ’une sur l ’autre,e t fort ifi ée d’ 2 une muraille de
ving t- deux pie ds d
’
épaisseur qui l’
en tourait de tout e s
parts.3 Sur lo somme t4 de ce s vofi t e s on avait posé5 do
g randes pierre s plat e s, de se iz e pie ds de long at de quatre
de larg e . On avait m is 6 par de ssus7 une couche8 de roseauxenduits9 d’
une grande quant ité de bi tume , sur laque lle il
y avait deux rang s10 de briques liée s11 fort ement ensemble
ave c du m ortie r. Tout ce la é tait convert de plaque s1 2 deplomb ; e t sur ce t te derni ere couche était posée la t erre 13
dujardin . C es plat eforme s14 avaie nt ét é ainsi construite s
afin que l’hum idi t é15 de la te rre ne percz
‘
i t l6 point on bas
e t ne s’
écoulat 17 point eu travers des vout es. L a. te rre qui
y avait été jet ée 18 était si profonde , que le s plus g randsarbre s pouvaient 19y prendre racine : aussi2 0 toute s le s t e r
rasse s e n étaient - e lle s couvertes, aussi bien que de tout e s
sort e s de plant e s e t de fleurs propre s a embe llir2 1 un lieu
de\ ‘plaisanc e
2 2. Sur la plus haut e t errasse , il y avait une
pompe qui na paraissait point 2 3, par le m oyen de laque lle 2 4
on t irait 2 5 en haut 2 6 l ’ eau de la. riv 1ere , dont on arrosait de
la tout lo jardin . On avait m énag é2 7 dans l’e spaoe qui
séparait le s voute s sur le squelle s était appuyé2 8 tout l’
edi
fice , de g randes e t magnifique s salles2 9 qui étaient fortéc lairée s30 e t avaient une vue tres ag réable .
R OLL IN (H istoire ancienne .)
1 soutenue, supported, 2fortifi ée d’
, strengthened by, 3ale toutes
parts, on all sides, 4 sommet, summit , 5 posé, laid, 6 mis, put ,
7 par dessus, over it , 8 couche , layer, 9endu'its, covered, 10m ugs,
rows, 1 1 liées, bound, 1 2 plaques, plat es, 13 terre, mould,
1 4plateformes, platforms, 15 hw nidité , moisture, 1 6 pergdt, should
penetrat e , 1 7 s’
écouldt, shouldflow,
1 8jetée, thrown, 19pouvaient,
were able , 2 0 aussi, therefore , 2 1 embellir, embellish, 2 2 lieu de
pla isance , pleasure resort , 2 3 we paraissait p oint, was not visible,
2 4par le moyen de laque lle, by means ofwhich, 2 5 on lim it, theydrew
,2 6 en he a t, up, 2 7 mnagé , contrived, 2 8 appuyé, support ed,
2 9salles, halls, 30 éclairées, light ed.
N.
)
or
O
F IFTY -TH IRD LESSON. Ctnqaante—troisieme L epon.
S yntax oft he D e t erm inat ive Adje c t iv e s ( comluded)
Indefinit e Adje c t ive s .
Me‘
me is sometimes. an adjective and some times an abverb.
According to the general definition ofthe parts ofspeech,meme is an adje ctive when de termining a noun or
‘pronoun and is
equivalent to the Eng lish words same and self; i t is an adverbwhen modifying a verb, adjective or another adverb and answers
to the English word even.
C es livres nasont pas les memes. These books are not the same .
Je leur en parlerai a ewe-memes. I shall speak ofit t o themselves.
Ils travaillaient mémependant la nuit. They worked even duringthe night .
Ils sont durs cl M me cruels. They arc'
hard, even cruel.
Tout is sometimes an adjective and some times an adverb.
It is an adjective when it m eans all, each orwhole it is an
abverb when it means quite.
Tonto ville , every town toute la contrée , the whole country ;tous les hommes, al l men.
Ils sont tout élonnés. They are quite astonish ed.
H owever, tout, as an abverb, takes the mark ofthefemininebefore a singularfeminine adje ctive beginning with a consonant,for the sake ofeuphony.
E lleW de son depart . She is quite sad because ofhisl dcparture .
Quelque is sometime s an adje ctive , some times an adverb itis an adjective before a noun in the sense ofsome
, afew, and an
verb before an adjective or an adverb in the sense ofhowever.
J'
ai quelques amis. I have some friends.Quc lguem
‘
kw’
ik soient ils m sont pas heureux. H oweverrichthey may be they are not happy.
Que l que, written in two words, is used before the verb etre.Quel is then variable
, and que remains invariable . 1 t translatesthe English whatever.
Qae lles que soient searaisonsje ne les admettraipas. Whateverhisreasonsmay be I shall not admit them.
Qucls que soient ses talents 11 no réussz'
l pas aussi bien que je lacroyais.
"Whatever his talents may be he does not succeed as
well as Ithought .
Aucun,aucune, nul, nulle, no, none, can only be used in the
lural before nouns which are never used in the singular.
Aucuncafunérailles nefurenl jamais aussi solemwllcs que celles deNapoleon premier. No obsequies were ever so solemn as those
ofNapole on the first .
2 52
Q ue st ions on G ramm ar.
When is méme an adje ct ive 1
When is méme an adverb ?
When is toat an adject ive 2
When is tout an adverb
When is tout variable in the sense ofquitefWhen is quelque an adjective
When is quelque an abverb
When is quel que used
When can aucun, aucune, ora l, walla be used
C onv e rsat ion .
Francis, have the sam e persons
come to askform e during myabsence ?
Yes, sir,they came back ; they
even waited about a quart er ofan hour, saying that they ab
solut ely must see you .
You were wrong to show them in
any t ime I am out,I forbid you
to allow anybody to ge t in.
It was because , sir,they se emed
very much annoyed at not
se eing you.
D id you not speak to Madamabout it ?
Madam herselfwas quit e put outby their obst inacy.
That is enough . You will find
this evening afew le tt ers on mydesk you will not forg et t opost them before you go to bed.
No , sir.
D o not disturb m e any more . Iam exceedingly tired, and as Imust g e t up to morrowmorningvery early, I want a night ofcomple t e rest .
N’
en avez - vous rien dit amadame ?
Madame était elle -meme tresennuyée de leur obstination.
C’
est assez . Vous trouverez cc soir
quelque s le t tres sur mon bureau vous n
’
onblierez pas delesmettre alaposte avant d
'aller
vous coucher.
Non,m onsieur.
Ne m e dérange z plus. Je suis extrémement fat igue e t comme
je dois m e lever demain mat in
de tres bonne heure , j’
ai besoin
d’
une nuit de repos complet .
Francois, les memes personnessont - ellesvenuesdemandera resm o1 pendant mon absence
Oui , monsieur,e lles sont revenues;
e lles ont meme at tendu presd
’
un quart d’
heure,disant qu
’
elles avaient absolument besoinde voirmonsieur.
Vous avez eu tort de les faire en
trer ; tout es lesfoisque je seraisorti, je vous défends de laisserentrer personne .
C’
est que , m onsieur,elles avaient
l’
air tout es contrariées do nopasvous voir.
2 53
R eading E xercise No . 53 .
Notre pére était trop pauvre pourdonne r une servantsama m ere
, e t j’é tais trop pe t it e 1 pourfaire t out e seuie lo
m énag e .
2 L e s voisine s venaient bien3 de bon occur,4quand
je le s priais , t irer pour nous le seau du puits, me t t 1 e 1a
grosse buche 5 anfeu, e t pendre la marmite 6 a la crémail
lere"; mais ma me re et moi,nousfaisions8 tout le re ste .
Aussitot que j’
avais pu9 marche r seule dans la chambre ,
j’avais été la servante née 10 de la maison , les pieds de ma
m e re, qui n
’
en avait plus d’
autres que le s m iens. Ayant
sans ce sse be soin11 de que lque chose qu’
e lle ne pouvaitaller che rcher1 2 aujardin , dans la cour
,dans la chambre ,
anfeu, sur l ’evier, sur la table , sur unmeub1e 13, e lle s’
était
aocoutumée 14 a se servir de 15 moi avant l’ag e
lfi,comme e lle
se serait servie d ’
une troisieme main ; e t moi, j’
etais fiere
t011te 17 pe t ite que j’étais, de me sentir18 néc essaire , ut ile ,
serviable comme une g rande personne 19 a la maisonzo.
C e la m ’
avait rendue 2 1 at tent ive,mure
,sérieuse , raison
nable , avant 1 ag e do huit ans. E lle me disait 2 2 : G enevieve , 11 m e faut 2 3 c e la
,11 m e faut ce ci ; apporte -moi ta
pe tite soeur Jose tte sur mon lit,remporte - la2 4 dans son
berceau, e t berc e - la du bout de ton pied jusqu’
a cc
qu’
e lle dorm e ; va m e chercher m en has ramasse m on pe
loton2 5, va couper une salade an jardin; va au poulaillertat er2 6 s
’
il y a de s oeufs chauds dans le nid de s poules ;hache de s choux pourfaire la. soup e ‘
a ton pere ; bats2 7 lobeurre ; me ts du bois aufeu écume la marmit e qui bout ;
je t tes -
y le sel ; étends2 3 la nappe ; rince 2 9 le s verre s; de scends a la cave
,ouvre lo robinet , remplis an t onne au la
boute il le de vin.
L AMAR TINE ( Histo z'
re d’
une sero ante .)( to be continued. )
1 trap petite , t oo young ,‘
2 ménage, housekeeping , 3 venaient
bien, came inde ed, 4 de 6011. clear, very willingly, 5 bitche,log ,
6 marmite , pot , 7 cremaillere , book, 8faisions, did, 9aussitot que
f'avais pu, as soon as I was able , 10M e, born, 1 1 ayant besoin ,
being in ne ed, 1 2 elle na pouvait aller che rcher, she could not g o and
fe t ch , 13 meuble , piece offurniture , 1 4 s’
était accoutumé e, had ao
customed herself, 1 5 se servir de , employ, 1 6 avant l’
dge, though.
very young , 17 toute, however, 1 8 ale me sentir, to feel I was,19 grande person/rt e, grown up person ,
2 0 a la maison, at home,
2 1 rendue , made , 2 2 disait,said, 2 3 il mefaut , I want , 2 4 rem
porte - la, take her back, 2 5peloton, clew ,
2 6 tater, tofe el, 2 7 bats.churn, 2 8 éterwls, spread, 2 9rim e
,rince .
2 5-1
F IF TY- F OUR TH LESSON. Ginquante-
quatrieme L epon.
S yntax oft h e Pronoun .
P e rsonal Prono uns .
C onjunctive personal pronouns, used as subjects to the verb,are placed before the verb. Except
1 . In interrogative sentences.
E tes- fvous content ? Are you contented?
E st - e lle malade Is she ill
2 . In some exclamatory sent ences.
E st - il intelligent H ow int ellig ent he is
3. When the verb is in the subjunctive m ood at the beginning ofthe sent ence , without being preceded by any conjunction .
E usse-je su cela auparavant. H ad I known that before .
4 . When the verb forms a separate proposition, stating that
somebody’s words are report ed.
Je voudrais,dit - il
, que vous l'enssiez amené. I wished, he said, that
you had brought him .
Aussi, also p ent
- etre , perhaps ; encore , yet ; toujours, however ; envain
,in vain ; da mains, at least apeine , hardly, andafew others.
5 . When the sentence begins with one ofthe adverbsPent - etre ne me croirez vouspas . Perhaps you will not believe me .
D 14 mains m’
e’
conterez - pons. At least you will listen to me .
A p eine était - it arrive. Hardly had he arrived.
The inversion ofthe noun subject also takes place in sentencesbeginning with re lative pronouns, which are not the subje cts ofthe following verbs, the abverb on
,and the conjunction quand.
C e n'était pas la ce que pon lait mon ami . This was not what myfriend want ed.
Est - cc te livre dont parlait votre pere Is it the book ofwhich yourfather spoke
D ites -moi oil demeure lo docteur. Tell me where the doctor lives.
Je ne sais quand reviendra la reine . I do no t know when the queen
returns.
Personal pronouns subjects to the verb must be repeatedbefore every verb when the sent ences are conne ct ed by anyc onjunctions other than et
,on
,ni
,mois.
Je pienclrai sij’
ai le temps. I shall com e ifI have time .
Vous nous dire: quand e ons partirez . You will t ell us when you
start .
Je lis et écris beaucoup . I read and writ e much.
Je ne te sais ni ne le sauraijamais . I do no t know it , neither shallI ever know it .
2 56
Que stions on G rammar.
1 . In what sentences are conjunctive personal pronouns, used as sub
jects to the verb, placed aft er the verbWhen are they placed aft er a verb in the subjunctive mood
What is their place in a separat e proposition stating that some
body's words are reported ?
4. Which are the adverbs which , placed at the beginning . ofthe sent ence , require the pronoun subjec t t o be placed after the verb 1What are the ronouns
,the adverb ofplace , and the conjunction
which allow t e inversion ofthe subject to take place‘
Q
6. Which are the four conjunctions which do not require that the pronoun subject should be repeated before every verb 2
C o nv e rsat ion.
Are you satisfied with your new
servant
Fairly ; she is industrious, and,above all, very honest ; but she
has a very bad t emper.
Had you said that to me before ,I should have made her some
observations on the subject yestorday.
Perhaps she would have felt offended at my having complained
to you about thisfault .At least she would have knownthat I was informed ofit , and
she would, I am certain,have
endeavoured t o repress hence
forth herfits ofbad t emper.
Will you come to see me to—morrowifyou have tune ?
I shall probably come, but I will
write you a few lines, ifI beprevented by any unexpe ct ed
causefrom doing so .
D id you know my uncle
I knew and venerated him : his
memory is honoured by everybody ia the town.
Do you know my cousin 2
I know him a little and m eet him
occasionally .
E tes- vous satisfait de votre nou
velle servant s ?
Passablem ent ; elle est laborieuseet surtout tres honnéte ; maiselle a uh tres mauvais caractere .
M’
eussiez - vous dit,cela plus tot,
que je lui aurais fait hier desobservations aco sujet .
Pent - etre se serait - elle formaliséede ce que je m
’
étais plaint avous de cc défaut .
Du moins aurait - elle eu que J enétais informé, et elle aurait , j
’
en
suis cert ain,fait des efforts pour
réprimer dorénavant ses accesde mauvaise humour.
Viendrez - vous me voir demain, Sivous avez le t emps
Je viendrai probablement mais
je vous écrirai quelqueslignes,srj
’
en suis empéché parnumotifinat t endu.
Avez—vous connu mon oncle ?Jo l ’ai connu et vénéré : sa memoire est honoree de toute laville .
C onnaissez -vous mon cousin ?
Je le connais un peu et le roncou
tre de t emps en temps.
2 57
R eading E x ercise No . 54 .
( concludedfrom. No.
E t puis, quandj’avais fini, qu
’on avait dine et que tout allait
bien,1elle me disait Va t
’amuser2 maintenant sur la porte avec
les emf-ants des voisine s, qu’
ils voient3 que tu es aussipropre, aussi
bien mise4 e t aussi peignée5 qu’eux.
” E t j’
y allais un mom ent
pour luifaire plaisirs ; mais je n’allais jamais plus loin"que le
seuil de la cour, pour pouvoir8 entendre si ma more me rappelait ,
e t je n’
y restais pas longtemps, parce que les enfants se moquaientde9moi et disaient entre eux10 “Tiens11 , la sérieuse , elle ne sait 12
jouerl g rien, laissons~la13
.
” J ’
aimais mieux rentrer14 et me t enir
debout aupres du lit de mamere , épiant lf'dans ses yeux cc qu’elle
pouvait avoir ademander. Tous lesjours se passaient ainsi jeme levais la premiere , je me couchais16 la derniere . Je no
respirais l’air que par lafenetre , je ne voyais le soleil que sur 1c
seuil de la porte , e t voila17 pourquoi, Monsieur, j
’avais le visage
blanc . On disait ama m‘
ere :“Votre pe tite a done les pales
“Oh ! non,
”répondait - e lle ,
“mais c’est qu
’elle a
la pale vie . Je n’allais pas meme a l ecole . C e tte longue
infirmité de ma mere,en la re tenant 19 tant d
’
années ainsi immo
bile 2 0 e t désoeuvrée de corps2 1 clans son lit , l’avait rendue instruite 2 2
comm e une dam e et dévouée comme une sainte . L es fils de nos
voisine s qui allaient en classe 2 3 ou qui revenaient en vacances2 4
chez leurs parents, prétaient leurs vieux livres par charité a la
pauvre vitriere 2 5 infirme, par l
’entremise 26 de mon jeune fr
‘
ere,
pour lui abréger le t emps”.
LAMAR TINE (Histoi're d’une servante , )
1 tout allait bien, all was going on satisfact orily, 2 ca t’
amuser,
go andenjoy yourself, 3 gu’
t'
ls coe’
ent, that they may see , 4 bien misc,well dressed, 5 peignée, combed, 6 luifar/ire p laisir, please her,7 plus loin ,
farther, 8 pour pouvoir, in order to be able,
9 so
moquaient de , laughed at , 10 enlfre ense , among themselves, 1 1 liens,
see , 1 2 elle ne sail, she cannot , 1 3 laissons- la ,le t us leave her alone ,
1 4 rentrer, t o go in again, 1 5 épe'
ant, watching , 1 6 ye me couchais, .
Iwent to bed, 1 7 fvoe'
lc‘
e, this was, 1 8 les pales couleurs, the green
sickn ess,19 retencm t , keeping , 2 0 immobile, mot ionless, 31 de
scezwre'e de corps, bodily helpless, 2 2 instruite , learned, 2 3 en classe
,
t o school, 2 4 en vacances, for the holidays, 2 5 vilrle‘
re , gla2 1er's wife ,
2 6 entremise, mediation, 2 7 abre’
ger le temps, to cause t ime to pass
away.
French G rammar.
2 58
F IFTY - FIF ’I‘H LESSON. Ctnquante- ctnqutém L epon.
S y ntax ofthe Pronouns ( continued) .
Pe rsona l Pronouns ( cm tinwed) .
When two ormore subjects ofa verb are ofdifferent persons,the verb must be in the plural, and is generally pre ceded by apronoun ofthe first person plural ifone ofthe subje cts is a
pronoun ofthe first person, and ofthe second person plural ifthesubje cts are ofthe second and third persons.
Lut et me t,nous c ierwlrons. H e and I shall come .
Vous et eux, vous e_ t_es attendees. You and they are
Personal pronouns must be repeated ifobje cts ofdifferentverbs
,when those verbs are in a simple tense repetition is
optional in compound tenses.
Je lo connais etje l’
estt'
me . I know and est e em him .
Je l’at cu et informe’ ale votre arrie te. I have se en and informedhim
ofyour arrival.
The personal pronouns te, la, les are often used in French, nosuch pronouns being used in English, to refer to nouns expressedin a preceding sentence referring to adjectives or to nouns usedadjectively, that is to say, without articles or de t erminativeadjectives, lo must be invariably used.
E tes - cous la soeur ale mamamt ? Oui, je la suis. Are youmyfriend’
s
sist er Ye s, I am.
E tes c ous ooficiers l 0w,nous lo sommes. Are you officers ? Yes,
we are .
E tes vous contente ? Non,j_e_ne le
_suisp cts Are you satisfied No
I am not .
L e must also be used when it refers to a whole sentence .
Stj’
ai obtenu cette place , je le dots o‘
t rue tre bonté . IfI have obtainedthat place , I owe it to your kindn ess.
L e,let , les must be used be tween the demonstrative co and the
auxiliary etre, speaking ofthings.
Est - cc lo. votre maison ? Owl, cc l'est. Is that your house ? Yes,
it_1s
Sont - ce lct 'vos crayons ? Non, cc m les sont pas. Are these your
pencils ? No , they are not .
But , speaking ofpersons, disjunctive personal pronouns oughtto be used and placed after the verb etre.
E st—ce la votref'ré're ? Out , c’
est lui. Is this your brother? Yes,he IS
Sont - ce la c os amis .? Non
,ce nasont pas eux. Are these yoprafriends?
No , they are not .
2 60
Que stions on G rammar.
I What is the pronoun which must be placed before a verb when its
different subjects are ofdifferent persons2 . When must personal pronouns, obje cts ofthe verb, be repeated?
3. When must le, la , les be used in reference t o words mentioned
precedingly
4. When must the invariable pronoun lo be used
5. What are the words which must be used between cc and the verb
etre in speaking ofthings 26. What are the words which must be used after06 and the verb etrein speaking ofpersons ?
C onve rsat ion.
It is a long time since I haveseen you, your wife , andchildren.
It is because my wife and myselfhave been passing two monthsin France with herfamily.
Do you know the town ofStrasbur
I know and like it , as one likesthe town where one has passedthe best years ofone ’
s child
hood.
Were your brother and yourselfborn in Alsace ?
My brotherwas, but not myselfI was born at Bour; e ;, in the
department ofthe C her.
Are these ladies your sist ers ?
No, they are not .
Are they used t o the customs ofthis country
Yes, they are .
Is not that the table you boughtlast we ek ?
No , it is not .Is this gentleman your friend
’
s
brother
No,he is not .
Are these g loves yours ?
No , they are not .
Are these the children ofwhomyou spoke to me
Y es, they are .
11 y a longt emps que je ne vous
ai vus. vous, votre femme e t
vos enfants.
C’
est que mafemme e t moi, nous
avons passé deuxmois en Francedans safamille .
C onnaissez -vous la ville de StrasbourgJe la connais et I’aime , comme onaime la ville onYou a passé les
plus belles années de son en
fance .
Votrefrere e t vous, étiez -vous nésen Alsace ?
Mon frere y était né, mais non
pas moi ; je suis né aBourges,dans lo départ ement du C her.
C es dames sont - elles vos soeurs ?
Non, elles ne les sont pas.
Sont - ellesfaites aux coutumes decc pays
- oi ?Oui
, elles le sont .
C e tt e table est - elle celle que vous
avez achetée lasemaine 4erni
‘
ere?Non, ce ne l
’
est pas.
C e Monsieur est o il le frere devotre ami ?
Non, cc n’
est pas lui.C es gants sont
- ils les v6tres?
Non, cc ne les sont pas.
C e s enfants sont - ils eeux dont
vous m’
avez parlé ?Oui, ce sont euX.
2 61
R e ading E x e rcise No . 55.
Plus1je rentre en moi, 2 plus1 je me consulte , et pluslje liscesmots écrits dens mon ame . Soisjuste e t tu seras heureux.
" l l
n’en est rien3 pourtant, aconsidérer4 l
’etat présent des choses le
méchant prospere , e t le juste reste opprim é. Voye z"aussi quelleindignation s
’allume6 en nous quand cette attente est frustrée l
La conscience s’éleve"et murmure centre son auteur elle lui
crie en gémissant : Tu m’as trompé 1”
On dirait,8 aux9 murmures des impatients mortels, que Dieu
leur doit la. recompense avant le mérite , e t qu’il est oblige de
payer leur vertu d’avance .
lo Oh soyons bons premiérement, et
puis nous serons heureux. N’exige ons pas
11 le prix avant la
victoire , ni ls salaire avant le travail. C e n’est point dans la
lice lz,” disait13 Plutarque“, que les vainqueurs
16 de nos jeux
sacrés sont couronnés, c’est apres qu
’ils l’ont parcourue lft
”
Si l’ame est immatérie lle , elle peut17 survivre 18 eu corps ; et si
elle lui survit , la providence est justifiée . Quand Je n’eurais
d’autre preuve de l’immate
'
rialité de l’ame que le triomphe du
méchant et l’oppression du juste en cc monde, cela seul19m ’em
pécherait d’en douter. U ne si choquante 2° dissonance2 1 clans
l’harmonie universe lle m e i
'
erait 2 2 chercher23 a résoudre . Je
me clirais25 tout ne finit pas pourmoi avec la vie tout rentre
dans l’ordremalamort .”
JE AN JAC QUE S R ousse au (Emile)
1 Plus, the more , 2 je rentre en moi,I retire into myself, 3 il
n’
on est m'
en, it is not at all the case , 4 a considérer, ifwe consider,
5 Voyez , behold, Ss’
allume, kindles, 7 s’
e’
leva, protests, 8 o n(lim it,one could believe , 9aux, by the, 10 d
’
avance , in advance,1 1 navi
goonspas, do not let us exact , 1 2 la lice, the lists, 13 disait,
said, 14 Plularque, Plutarch, 1 5 oainqueurs, conquerors, 1 6 l'
onl
parcowrue, have run the course , 1 7 pea t , can , 1 8 sw irl/ore , to survive
19 seal, alone , 2 0 am 311 choquante, so shocking a, 2 1 dissonance ,dissonance , 2 2 meferait, would make me , 2 3 chercher, try, 2 4
résoudre, to explain, 2 5 iame diraz’
s, I would say to myself, 2 6 tout
rentre clans l’
ordre, all is restored to order.
2 62
FIFTY - SIXTH L e sson. Ginquante -sixie‘
me Logan.
Syntax ofth e Pro nouns ( cmctz'
nuedJ
Pe rsonal Pronouns ( concluded.
The refle ctive pronoun se , himse lf, herself, itself, themse lves,is conjunctive , and consequently always used before the ve rb it
can be used indifi'
erently in speaking ofpersons or things.
It sefial/c. H e flatters himse lf. C’clte p lante so trou've clans les pays
chat tels. This plant isfound in hot countries .
Sat, one’s self, is disjunctive , and can only be used afte r the
verb. 8013 can be used in speaking ofpersons, but only in an
inde terminate manner, the subject ofthe verb being one oftheexpressions aucun, no one, chacun, everyone , nnl, no one
,o n
,they
people, personne, nobody, elqu’un, somebody, quiconqne,whoever,
tout te mo-nde, everybody, c .
On no doitpas no penser qu’
c‘
c soi. One must not think only ofone’
s
self.Personne 'nopg
rle dc soi sans nu peu dc partial'ité. No one speaks of
himselfwit rent a lit tle part iality .
Tout lo monde travaille p our soi . E veryone worksfor himself.
Sat translates itselfafter prepositions.La oertu trouva en soi sa recompense . Virtue finds its reward initself.
C'ctte proposition a en soi nu bon et un mauvats coté. This proposalhas a oed and a bad side in itse lf.
C ela oa soi. That is a mat t er ofcourse .
The disjunctive pronouns lui, elle, ewe, elles, he , she,they
,
pre ceded by a preposition, and the conjunctive lui, to him ,and
leur, to them,-as indirect objects can only be used in speaking
ofperson s .
C’es l
l
wmmes ne peasant q u’a eux. These men think only ofthem
se ves.
Manfrom m ’
a promis dc m’
cmmener avec lui. My brother has
promised to take me with him .
Je leurparlera'l . I shall speak to them.
E n and 31 must be used instead ofthese pronouns whenspeaking ofthings.C ette pomme est bonne , en voulez - vous lamoitié This apple is good,will you have halfofit
J’at lu ces régles all y a long temps, m is je n
’
y pensais plus. I readthese rules long ag o , but thought no more ofthem.
Vous avez vu la nouve lle maison q ue nous avons acheté e ; qu’
en p ensez
vous You have seen the new house we have bought what do
you think ofit?
2 64
Que st ions on G ramm ar.
When must the reflective pronoun so be used
When must 3013be used in speaking ofpersons ?
When must itselfbe translated sot
What are the words which must be used as indirect obje cts in a
definit e manner in speaking ofpersons
5. What are the pronouns which must be used instead oflui, elle, cum,elles, as indire ct objects in speaking ofthings ?
C onversat ion .
Is not every man subject to makemistakes ?
U ndoubtedly ; one ought neverto
trust to one’
s own judgment ,when one can have the advice
ofthose who know life .
That is a mat ter ofcourse .H ave you never heard young
people who are comple telyignorant ofthe things ofthisworld, speak ofthem with
unparalleled assurance and
effront eryToo oft en.
Do you think this assurance and
efi‘
rontery are g enuine?
I do not believe it , for it is impossible t o admit that those
who have no experience know
life as well, ifnot be tt er, thanthose who have experienced its
vicissitudes.
True wisdom really consists inmistrusting one
’
s self.My friend
’
s father oft en toldhim that maxim ; and everyt im e he thinks ofhim and his
g ood advice,he asks himself
why he did not profit by it .
C haque homme n’
est - ii pas sujetase tromper
Sans aucun doute ; on ne devrait
jamais s’
en rapporter a soi,
quand on peut avoir les conseilsdo ceux qui connaissent la vie .
C ela va de soi.
N'ave z -vous jamais ent endu des
jeunes g ens, qui ignorent com
plet ement les chose s de cc
monde , en parler avec une
assurance , une efi'
ront erie sans
pareille
Trop souvent .
C royez- vous que ce t te assurance ,
cet te efi'
ront erie soit sincere
Je ne ls crois pas, car il est im
possible d’
adme t tre que ceux
qui n’
ont pas d'expérience con
naissent la vie aussi bien, si cc
n’
est mieux, que ceux qui en
out éprouvé les vicissitudes.
La vraie sagesse consiste réell e
m ent ase méfier de soi.Le pere de mon ami lui disait souvent cet te verite
’
e t chaquefoisqu
’il pense a lui c t ases bons
conseils,il se demande pourquoi
ii n’
en a pas profité.
2 65
R e ading E x e rc is e , No . 56 .
Le premier combat1 fut celui de la lutte .
2 U n Rhodien3
d’environ trente - cinq ans
4surmonta6 tous les autres qui oserent se
presenter} . lui il était encore dans toute lavigueurde lajeunesse ;ses bras éte int nerveux et bien nourris au moindre m ouvem ent
qu’ilfaisait ,6 on voyait tous sesmuscles ; 7 il était également souple
e tfort . Jc ne lui parus pas digifi d’étreB vaincu, e t , regardant
avec pitie ma tendre jeune sse , il voulut9se re tirer1° mais je m e
présentai alui . Alors nous nous saisimes l’un l’autre,nous nous
serramesu a perdre la respiration”. Nous e’
tions épaule centre
épaule,pied contre pied
,tous les nerfs tendus13 et les bras
entrelace’ s14 comme des serpents chacun s’efforcant 15 d
’enleverl"
de terre 17 son ennemi.
Tantc‘
it 18 il essayait de me surprendre en me poussant du cété
droit18 tant6t il s’efforcait de me pencher20 du cote gauche
”.
Pendant qu’il m e tatait 2 2 ainsi, je le poussai avec tant de violence
que ses reins plierent23 il tomba sur l
’arene z", e t m ’
entraina25 sur
lui. En vain ii tacha de me me ttre dessous26, je le tins” immobile
sous moi tout le peuple 2 8 cria, Victoire au fils d’U lysse
29 et
j’aidai au Rhodien confus ase re lever30
FENE LON (Aoentures do Telemaque).
1 combat, contest , 2 lutte , wrestling , 3R hoollen Rhodian, 4 d’
en
w‘
ron trente - cinq am,about thirty
- five years ofage , 5 surmo nta,
overcame, 6faisait, made, 7 on fvoyac
'
t tous scs muscles, all his
muscles could be seen, 8 ol’
étre, ofbeing , 9voulut, wished, 10 so
retircr, t o withdraw, 1 1 serramos , pressed, 1 2 a perdre la respira
tion, till respiration was almost stopped, 13 tendus, stretched, 14 en
trelacés, entwined, 1 5 s’
cfi orcant, endeavouring , 1 6 enlever, to lift ,1 7 de terre , from the ground, 1 8 tantot, som e times, 19du cote
'
droit,
to the right , 2 0 pencher, to incline , 2 1 du cote gauche, to the
left,2 2 tdtait, was handling , 2 3 plieront , bent , 2 4 arena, arena,
2 5 m’
entra’lna, dragg ed me down
,2 6 de me mettre dessous, t o put me
beneath him,
2 7 tins, held, 2 8 tout le peuple , all the pe ople ,
2 9 U tysse , U lysses, 30 a se relever, t o rise again.
Frenc h Grammar.
2 66
Frrrr- smvnu'ru L E SSON. C o'
nguanto- sep tcemo L ogan.
Syntax oft h e Pronouns ( continued) .
D em onst rat ive Pronouns .
Although co is ordinari ly used before the verb e‘
tro,it can
also be used before the verbs doo oir, pouvoir, when followed byltro, and before sembler.
Jo n’
ai jamais monté a cheval, cc doit dt'rc tres agréable . I neverrode on horseback, it must be very pleasant .
Jo no l’
a'l pas entendu dire, mats copout étro vrai . I have not heard
of may be true .
Vous arro‘
o oz bien tard, co m oomblo. It seems t o me that you
arrive very lat e.
C e must be used ple onastically before étro when the verb
t he is placed be twe en tw o infinitives.
A liner, c'est soufi ro
'
r. To love is to suffer.
C o must also be used when the first sent ence begins with co.
followed by a re lative pronoun, such as qui, que, dcmt.
C e qu’
c’
l prefero c’
est do consacrer son te mps o l'étuolo dos sciences ot
des arts . What he prefers is to devote his tim e to the study ofscience and art .
06 dont jo mo p lains lo plus, c'est sa paresse . What I chiefly com
plain about is his laziness.
C o, however, must not be usedwhen the verb é‘
t're isfollowedby an adje ctive or anoun preceded by the indefinite article na, une.C c que vous mo racontez est tnconceoablo. What y ou t ell me is inconceivable .
C e qui vous est arm'
vé est nu grand malheur. What happened to youis a great misfortune .
C o qg'tl dit est é'mldcmmont un mensongo. What he says is evidently
a 0 .
C o is also used to sum up a whole sentence which is subjectto the verb étro
,and t o give more force to the idea.
Le plus grand malheur qui puisse a-m-
z'
vor a un homme , c’
est do
n’
avoir confiance on personne . The greate st misfortune that canhappen to aman is to have confidence in none .
W hen the sentence begins with c’est
,c’etact
,co sera
, at e ,the
infinit ive whichfollows must be preceded by do, que orwe do.
(Test etre impudent que de fine -demander ce la . It is impudent to ask
me that .
C e que jo vous demande , c'est d
’
étro patient . What I ask you is to bepati ent .
C"est renoncer a lafortwrw que de signe r um.paroil oontm t. To sign
such a contract is to renoun ce fortune
2 68
Que st ions o n G ramm ar.
What are the verbs before which cc can be used when they are
followed by etre ?What is the word which must be used by pleonasm before étre, whenthe verb is placed betwe en two infinit ives
What are the expressions which, being at the beginning ofa sent ence , require as to be used before the verb étre
When must cc not be used when the first sent ence begins with cc
qui, cc que , doc.
What is the way ofgiving m ore force to the idea when the sub
ject to etre is a whole sent ence
What are the words which must be placed before an infinitive when
the sent ence begins with c’
est, c’
étatt, cc sera , dt-c.
C onv e rsat ion.
You arrive very late , I thinkhad youforgot ten that we wereto m eet at half-past e ight
Be assured, my dear sir, that I
am very sorry to be late but
ifI have not be en in time this
can only be because 1 could not
help it .
What I told you was only to
t ease you a lit tle .
I wondered at your severity .
I know that you appre ciat e allthe value ofthe English pro
verb Time is money .
To be punctual is, in my opinion,the indispensable condition ofsuccess.
It at once prejudices a strang er
against you ifyou keep himwait ing a quarter ofan hourand sometimes more .
Well, you pardon me
Yes,but ifI do so this time , it
is upon the condition that it
will never occuragain.
Vous arrivez bien tard, cc me
semble ; aviez vous oublie'
quenous devious nous réunirahuitheures e t demie ?
Soyez convaincu, mon cher mon
sieur, que je suis désolé d'
étreen re tard ; mais si je n
'ai pas
é té exact,cc ne peut étre que
parceque je n’
ai pufaire autre
ment .
C e que je vous ai dit , c etait
seulement pour vous taquiner
un peu.
Je m ’
étonnais de votre sévérité.
Je sais que vous appréciez toutela valeur du proverbe anglais
Le t emps est de l’
argent .
”
E tre ponctuel, c'est , ames eux,
la condition indispensab e dusucces.
C’
e st indisposer a premiere vue
nu étranger centre soi, que de
lo faire at tendre un quart
d'honro et quelquefois davan
tag e .
Ainsi donc, vous me pardonnez ?
Oui, mais si je vous pardonne
cet te fois, c’
est ala condition
que cela ne vous arrivera plus
jamais.
2 69
R e adin g E x e rc ise N o . 57 .
Pour me montrer le caractere d’une fleur, les botaniste s
1 me
lafont voir2 seche , décolorée3 et étendue4 dans un herbier.
6 E st
ce dans cet état que je reconnaitrai nu lis ? N’est - ce pas sur le
bord d’un ruisseau, élevant au milieu des6 herbes se tige auguste ,
et réfléchissant dans les eaux ses beaux calices7 plus blancs que
l’ivoire , que j
’admirerai le roi de s vallées ? Sa. blancheur incom
parable n’est - elle pas encore
"plus éclatante 8 quand elle est mou
chetée9comme par des gout tes de corail par de pe tits scarabées10
écarlates,hémisphériques,1 1 piqués1 2 de 13 noir, qui y_
cherchent
presque toujours un asile'l Qui est - cc -
qui peut14 reconnaitre dans
une rose seche la reine des fieurs Pour qu’ell eus soit alafois16
un objet de l’amour e t de la philosophic , ilfaut 1a voir lorsque ,
sortant desfentes“d’un rocher humide , e lle brille sur sa propre
verdure,18que le zephir 1a balance sur sa tige hérissée
19 d’zo
épines, que l’aiirore
2 1 l’a. couverte de fleurs
,e t qu
’e lle appe lle par
son e'
clat 2 2 e t par ses parfums la main des amants. Quelquefoisune cantharide ,
” nichée 2 4 clans sa corolle,
2 6en reléve 2 6 le carmin2 7
par son vert d’ém eraude ;
2 8 c’est alors que cette fleur semble nous
dire que , symbole du plaisir par ses charm es e t par sa rapidité ,2 9
elle porte3° comm e lui le danger auteur d’elle e t le repentir dans
son sein.
BE RNAR D IN DE Sr. PIE RRE ( E tudes de la Nature.)
1 botanistes, botanists, me lafont voir, show it to me , 3 décolorée,
discoloured, 4 étendue , spread out , 5 herbier, herbarium,6 cm
milieu des,amidst the
, 7 calic cs,calyxes, 8 éclatante , brilliant ,
9mouche tée, spot t ed, 1 0 scarabe‘
es, be e tle s, 1 1 he'
misphe’
riqu-e,hemis
pheric , 1 2 piqués, dot ted, 1 3 de , with, 1 4 pent, can,1 5 F our
qu’
ellc, in order that it , 1 6 a lafois, at the same t ime,1 7fentes,
crevices, 1 8 verdure , foliage , 1 9hém’
sse’
c,brist ling , 2 0 d
’
,with ,
2 1 l'aurore, the dawn, 2 2 éclat , brightness, 2 3 cantharide, cantha
rides, 2 4 nicht'
e , nestled, 2 5 com /le , corolla, 2 6 re leve,sets off
,
2 7 car-min
,carmine , 2 8 t er
-t d cmem ude, emerald green, 2 9 sa
mp iclicé , its brieflife , 30 ports, bears.
2 70
F IF TY - E IGH TH L E SSON. C inquante- kuiteemc L ogan.
S yntax oft h e Pronouns ( concluded) .
Inde finit e Pronouns .
L’un l’aut're, one another, l
’un d l
’autre
,to one ano ther
,require
the verb in the plural, as the words express an idea ofre ciprocity,and consequent ly ofplurality.
R s se saluérent l’
un l'autre . They salut ed one another.
Ils s’
écm‘
vaient souvent Pan 5. l’autre . They often wrote to one
another.
D an at l’autre
,both, is synonymouswith tous deux, and must
always be followed by the verb in the plural.L
’
un et l’
autre sont venue . Both have come .
L’un ou l
’autre, e ither
‘
, require the verb to be in the plural ifthe idea expressed by the verb can be attribut ed to both
,but the
verb must be in the singular when the idea can only be at
tributed to one.L
’
un cu l’
autre seront punis. Either one or the other will be
punished.
L’
un ou l’
autre remportera le premier prix. Either one orthe otherwill win the first priz e .
No:l’un ml l’autre
,neither,follows the sam e rul e .
Ni l’
un ni l’autre ne Mend/rant Neither will come .
Ni l’
un ni l’
autre m sera nommé ambassadeur aBerlin Neitherwill be appointed ambassador at Berlin.
Rien and personne, also the adverbjam ais, do not require theparticle we to be placed before the verb when they mean anything, anybody, or ever.
E st- il rien d’
aussi beau que cette rose .f Is there anyt hing finer than
this rose 1
Personne a - t - il cu mon livre ? H as anybody seen my book ?Je conservem i a jamais cet anneau comme un gage de votre afiectz
'
on.
I shall keep this ring for ever as a t oken ofyour affection.
Chacun requires the possessive adje ctives, son, sa, ses, beforethe noun whe n it follows the dire ct obje ct ofthe verb.
outfait do longs discow s, chacun suivant son opinion They
made long speeches, everyone according t o his opinion.
Ils out meublé leurs maisons, chacun suivant ses w yons. They have
furnished theirhouses , every one according to his means .
But leur, leurs, must be used instead '
ofson,sa
, ses,when
chacun precedes the dire ct object, or the indire ct obje ct ofaneuter verb.
Ils outfait chacun leur discours. Every one has made his Spee ch .
Ils out dormi chacun dam leur chambre . Every one has slept in
his room .
2 72
Que st ions on G rammar.
In what number must the verb be when it has l'wn l
’
autre as itssubject !
In what number must the verb be when it has l'un cl l
'autre as its
subject ?
When do I'm on l'autre and ni l
’
un m:l’autre require the verb tobe in the plural ?
When do rien, persomw, andjamais not require the particle no tobe placed before the verbWhen does chacun require the adjectives son, ao , ses, before thefollowing noun
‘
Q
When does chaowa require lewr, low-s, before thefollowing noun
C onv ersat ion .
These two pas es ofhis 9 ee ch C es deux passag es de son discourscontradict e other do se contredisent l
’
un l’autre ; je
not think anybody understands no pense pas no personne comwhat he means.
I agree with you ; besides both
could have been suppressed, asneither adds anything to the
development ofhis subject .
H e may say what he likesneither ofthe amendments he
has proposed will be adopted.
Have -
you ever heard Mr.Speak l
I heard him last week ; but , according to my opinion, Mr.
Y . . .
’
s eloquence is more at trae
tive .
That is also what I think ; butMr reasoning is more cc
herent and convicting .
Each has his own kind ofeloquenco , and general] succeeds
in producing the ect he has
in view, in the manner and bythe means which are peculiarto him.
When do you think that Messrs.
X . and Y. will speak?
Neither will speak, I think, before Saturday.
prenne ce qu’
il veut dire .
Je suisde votre avis, d'autant plus
ue l’
un et l'autre auraient putre sup rimés, car ui l
’un ui
l'autre n ajoutent rie n au dévo10ppement de son sujet .
Il dire ce qu’il voudra ; ui l
'un ui
l’autre des amendements qu’
il
a proposée no seront adoptés.
Avez -vous jamais entendu parlerMonsieur 2
Jo l’
ai ent endu la semaine derniére ; mais, 5 mon avis, l
'élo
quence de Monsieur est
plus attrayant e .
C'est aussi ce que je ense ; mailMonsieur a e raisonne
ment plus suivi e t plus con
vainquant .
Ils ont chacun leur g enre d’
éloquenes et ils arrivent g énéralement a produire l'efl
'
et qu’
ils
out on vue chacun a se
maniere et par les moyens quilui sont part iculiers.
Quand ere
gez -vous que Messieurs
et prenn'ent la parole ?Ni l
’
un ui l’autre no parleront,je crois, avant samedi.
2 73
R eading E xe rc ise No . 58 .
C haque homme a an m ilieu dul coeurun tribunal 011 i]commence par se jug e r so i-m em e
,en at t endant que 2
l’
aixtitre souverain3 confirme la sent ence .4 Si le vice n
’e st
qu’5 une consequence physique de notre org anisation ,
6 d’
ou
vient ce t te frayeur7 qui trouble lesjours d’
une prospéritécoupable ? Pourquoi lo remords e st - il si t errible , qu
’
on
préfere souvent se soume t tre 8 a la pauvre té e t a t out e larigueur de la ve rtu plut6t
'
que9 d
’
acquérir10 de s biensl l
illég it ime s Pourquoi y a- t - ill 2 une voix dans le sang ,
une paro le dans la pierre ? L e tig re déchire sa proie e t
dort l ’homme devient 13 hom ic ide 14 e t ve ille 15. 11
che rche 16 1e s lieux déserts, e t cependant la solitude l’
effraieil se traine 1 7 autour de s tombe auxls
,e t cependant il a peur
de s tombeaux19. Son regard e st inquie t e t mobile 2 0, iln
’
ose fixer2 1 lo mur de la salle dufe st in2 2 dans la crain te
d’
y voir de s carac tere sfune ste s2 3. Tous se s sens semblentdevenir m eilleurs pour le tourmenter2 4 ; il voit au m ilieude la nuit de s lueurs m enacante s ; il e st toujours environné
de l’
odeur du carnag e2 5 il découvre l ’
odeur du poison
jusque 2 6 dans le s m e ts2 7 qu’il a lui-m eme apprétés
zs; son
ore ille , d’
une étrang e subt ilit é29, trouve lo bruit tout lo
monde trouve le silence ; e t , en embrassant30 son ami,il
croit sentir sous ses vét ements31 un poignard caché .
C HATEAUBR IAND ( G enie da Christianisme) .
1 an milieu olu,within his, 2 en attendant que
.
until,
3 souverain ,suprem e , 4 sentence, verdict , 5 n
'est gu
'
,is but ,
6 organisation ,organisation, 7 d
’
ou oient cette frag/cur, whence
comes that fear, 8 se soume ttre , to submit , 9p lutot que , rather
than,
1 0 d’
acgué'rir, to acquire , 1 1 biens, riches, 1 2 y a - t- i l
,is
there , 1 3 devient, becomes, 1 4 homicide , a murderer, 1 5 sei lle,
cannot sle ep, 1 6 cherche , seeks, 1 7 se traine , crawls, .
1 8 tombeaux,tombs, 19 it a peur des, he fears the , 2 0 mobi le , shift ing , 2 1 fi xer,
look st eadily at , 2 2 salle olufestin, banquet ing hall, 2 3funeste ,fatal
, 2 4 tourmenter, to torture ,‘
2 5 carnage , slaughter, 2 6 jusque,
even,2 7 mets, dishes, 2 8 appréte
’
s, prepared, 2 9subti li té, acut eness,
30 embrassant, embracing, 31 oétements, clothes,
2 74
F IFTY- NINTH Le sson. Cinquante-muviéme L epon.
Syn t ax ofth e V e rb .
Subjec t oft h e V erb .
Every verb in a persona l mood, except in the imperative,must have a subject , which may be a pronoun, noun orword usedsubstantively.
Il est content. H e is content ed.
Monfrere viendra . My bro therwill come .
Ment ir est honteuaz. It is shameful t o lie .
The verb takes the number and person ofits subject . Allrules given for the agre em ent ofthe adje c tive w ith the noun it
qualifies can be followed for the agre ement ofthe verb with itssubje ct (se e Le sson
Wh en the verb etre, pre ceded by as, is followed by nous or
vous, it remains in the singular, but must be put in the plural
whenfollowed by a plural noun, or a persona pronoun in the
third person plural.C'est nous, ce n
’est pas vous. It is we , it is.not you.
C e sont enez. It is they.
C e sont mesfreres. The y are my brothers.
The verb t he remains in the sing ular even whenfo llowed bytwo ormore nouns, singular or plural, when the first is in the
singular.
C e que j’
aime le mie ns: chez nu homme,c'est la.franchise et la
simph’
silé . What I like best in aman isfrankness and simplicity .
Asa - e ous lu lo nouveau roman .P'
c’
est toujours l'
e méme inte'
rét et lesmémcs beauta‘s de style . H ave you read the new novel ? there is
just the same int erest and the same beaut ie s ofstyle .
The verb étre must also be in the singular, although be ingplaced before a plural noun, when this noun is modified by a
numeral adje ctive .
C'est deux he ures qui viennent de sonner. It is two o
'clock which has
just struck.
C’est trente millefrancs gu’
il lu ifaut . It is thirty thousandfrancsthat he wants.
F or the sake ofeuphony, the verb etre in the future remainsin the singular in interrogative sentences.
Sera- cc vosfré'res qui seront punts ? Will it be yourfriendswho willbe pu nished 2
This is also the case when etre is used in the ’
past inde finiteQ uandj
’ai été trahi
, e'a été presque toujours par des amis. When I
have be en betrayed it was always byfriends.
Aft er the re lative pronoun qui, the verb takes the number
and person ofthe antecedent .C
’
est moi qui parlerai. It is I who will speak.
0"est 'vous qui nous conduirez . It is you who will lead us.
2 76
Que st ions on G rammar.
What are the words which can be subjects to verbs ?
H ow does the verb agre e with its subject'.l
What are the rules which can be applied to the agreement oftheverb with its subjects ?
4. Before what personal pronoun will the verb étre , preceded by so,
be in the pluralif
5. When will the verb étre be in the singular, even when followedby several subject s ?
6. In what number and person must the verb be which has a relative
pronoun as its subje ct ?
C onv ersat ion .
This spot is delicious it is more
charming than any ofthose Ihave visited before to live
here would be the dream ofmylife .
Would a lit tle house , a garden ofsmall siz e
,be suffi cient to
satisfy your tast e s ?
D o you think it necessary to
possess a park and castle t o
be happy
I amfarfrom thinking so but Ithink that , iffortune be not a
condition indispensable t o hap
piness, at least it contribut es
g reatly to it .
I do not altog ether partake ofyour ideas on that subject . It
is not great riches that makesa
man happy, for they are in
separable from great preoccu
pat ions and chang es not less
considerable .
You would prefer to be poor
then ?
N0 ; but it is moderat e wealth,and the idea that one can
amplyprovidefor the nece ssit iesofone
’
s family, that procuresthat tranquility ofmind without which no comple t e happi
ne ss is possible .
C et endroit est délicieux : il es
plus charmant ‘qu
’
aucun-
fl'
e
ceux que j’
ai v131 tes aupara
vant y demeurer serait'
le révede ma vie .
U ne pe tit e maison , un jardin depeu d
'
ét endue , seraient - ils suffisants poursat isfaire vos g ofits?
C royez- vous qu
’
il soit nécessaire
pour etre heureux de posséder
nu pare et un chat eau !
Je suis bien loin de croire cela ;maisje pense que , si lafortunen
’
est pas une condit ion indis
pensable eu bonheur, du moinselle y contribue grandement .
Je ne partage pas tout afait vosidées acc sujet . C e ne sont pasle s grandes riche sses qui ren
dent um homme heureux ; carelles sont inséparables de
grandes préoccupat ions e t de
charges non moins considerables.
Alorsvouspréférerie z etre pauvre
Non mais c’
est l’
aisance et l'idec
que l’
on peut pourvo ir larg ement aux besoins des siens
qui procurent cet tei sranquillité
d’
e sprit _
sansm _ laq_uelle nu bon
heurcomple t n’
est pas possible .
2 7 7
R e ading E x e rcise No . 69.
Voici1 nu terrible jour, ma chére enfant je vous avoue 2 queje n
’en puis plus.
3 Je vous ai quittée dans un é ta t qui augm ente
ma douleur. Je songe4 atous les pas que vous faites,e t a tous
ceux que je fais e t combien il s’
enfeut5 qu’en marchant toujours
de cet te sort e ,6 nous puissions"jamais nous rencontrer.
8 Mon coeur
e st en repos quand il est aupres de vous c’est son état natural
,
e t le seul qui pent9lui plaire . C e qui s’est passe10 ce matin m e
donne l l une douleur sensible e t me fait nu déchire inent 1 2 dont
votre philosophic sait les raisons. Je les ai senties e t les sentirai
longtemps. ls coeur e t l’imagination remplis de vous
, je n’
y
puis penser sans pleurer, et j’
y pense toujours, de sorte que” l’etat
ouje suis n’est pas une chose sout enable 14 comme il est extrem e ,
j’espére qu
’il ne durera pas clans cet te Violence . Je vous cherche
toujours e t-
jk
e trouve que tout m e manque ,16parceque vous me
demande z . Mes yeux, qui vous ont tant rencontrée , depuis quatorze
mois, no vous trouvent plus . Le t emps agréable qui est passe rend
celui- oi douloureux, jusqu’acc que je sois nu peu accoutumée
mais ce ne serajamais pour na pas souhaiter16 ardemment de vous
revoir17 e t de vous embrasser18
En nu mot l",ma fille je ne vis que
pour vous. Jamais un depart n’a ét é si triste que la notre nous
ne disions pas ummot . Adieu”,ma chere enfant plaigne z -moi
de vous avoir quittée . H élas nous voila?1 dans les le ttres.
MADAME DE SfiVIGNfi (L ettre (2 so fi lls.)
1 voici, this is, 2 avoue , confess, 3je n
'en puisplus, Iam quite
exhaust ed, 4je songe, I think, 5 combien il s’
enfaut, how far are
we from it, 6 de cette sorte, in this manner
, 7 nous puissions, wemay be able
, 8 nous rencontrer, to meet , 9peat, can, 1 0 ce qui s’
est
passe, what occurred, 1 1 me donna, causes me, l g déchz
‘
rement,
heart -rending , 13 do sorte que, so that , 1 4 une chose soutenable, t o be
endured, 1 5 tout me manque , I am want ing everything , 1 6 souhm’
ter,to wish , 1 7 de vous revoir, to se e you again, 1 8 embrasser
, to
embrace , 19 en un mot,in short , 2 0 adieu
, good-bye , 2 1 nous voila
do ns les le ttres, now we must write to each other.
2 78
Summ it Lasson. Soixdntl eme L egon.
S y n t a x oft h e V e rb ( continued) .
Subje c t ofth e V erb ( concluded) .
When the subject ofthe verb is a colle ctive ex ression, com
posed ofa collective noun and another noun in t e plural, theverb takes the number ofthe colle ctive noun ifit expre ss thegenerality or totality ofthe obje cts or persons alluded to
,but
takes the number ofthe second noun ifthe collective noun refersto a part ofthe objects or persons only . The first colle ctivenoun is called a general colle ctive , and the se cond a partitivecolle ctive .
La
Tigném lt
'
té des ouem‘
ers le prefere au centre -maltre qui l’
a precede.
e generality ofthe workmen prefer him to the foreman who
preceded him .
Lafoule des courtisans se pnessaitfl amles g nltgkambres .da m i. Thethrong ofcourtiers crowded the antichambers 'ofthe king .
En troupe de soldats était rang e’
e dans la cour. A troop ofsoldierswasdrawn up
"iii the yard.
fl parm'
e ale mes a/rm'
s sont morls. A part ofmyfriends are dead.
Peu
1
ale gens connaissent sa valeur 'rée lle . F ew people know his real
va ue .
La moine ale ces champs appartiennent a man pare . The halfofthese fields belong to myfather.
According to the preceding rules such expressions as lawgrande partie de, le plus grand nombre, la_plupart, une infinite; arepartitive collectives
,and require the verb t o be in the plural.
IL ap lupa
'rt desfleurs ont ét é gelées. Most flowershayembe‘eg nfrozen.
Plus d’un, although implying an idea ofplurality
, requires
the verb to be in the singular.
Plus d'un homme a été e
’
ga'ré par son orgue z
'
l. More than one man
has be en misled by his pride .
L e pen de, in the meaning ofthe want of, governs the verb in'
the singular.
L e pea de connaissances de votre ami a été la cause de son insuccés.
The want ofknowledge ofyourfriend has been the cause ofhisfailure .
But the verb will be in the plural when .le pen de has thecaning ofthefew.
'
j L e peu ale parents que j’
ai a Paris m’
ont regu avec beaucoup de
bien've'lllance . The few relatives I have in Paris have rece ivedmewith much kindness.
In every case it is necessary t o consider very carefullywhether the at tention is more particularly called to the colle ctiveor to the noun that follows it . In English, colle ctive nouns are
generallyfollowed by a verb in the plural.
2 80
Que st ions on G ramm ar.
1 . When does the verb agre e with the noun that follows a collectivenoun
When does it agree with the collective noun
G ive some expressions which are part itive collectives.
When does lspeu govern the verb in the singular!
W'
hen does topeu govern the verb in the plural
To what must, above all, the att ention ofthe student be directed
to ascertain ifthe verb must ormust not agree with the noun thatfollows the collective .
C onv e rsat ion.
Why does that crowd fill the
squareI see amultitude ofpersons whoare gathered, and I hear noisyexclamations at every instant .
I am sure that the greater num
ber ofthe people who are there
and utter these deafening cries,do not
‘
even know what the
matter is.
It is often the case ; thefew spec
tators really interested in whatis oing on seem to me much
coo er than those who do not
understand anything about it .
Are not the police coming 2
Yes ; and se e how the great er
number ofthe spectators dis
perse immediat ely.
Just like the po ulace a trifleis enough to 00 ac t a mob, and
still less to disperse it .
Youwill see that , inafewminutes,there will be no one left in th esquare .
I admire the docility ofthecrowd there has not been the
least att empt at resistance the
mere appearance ofthe repre
sentatives ofthe law has re
established order.
Pourquoi ce tt e foule remplit- ellela place iJe voisune multitudede personnesqui sont rassemblées etj
’
ent endsachaque instant de bruyantesacclamations.
Je suis certain no la plupart desg ens qui sent a, e t quipoussentces cris assourdissants, ne saventmeme pas ce dont il s
’
agit.
C’
est souvent 19 can ; ls peu des ectat eurs véritablement iht eressés a ce qui se passe meparaissent beaucoupplus calmesque ceux qui n
’
y comprennent
N’
est - cc pas la police qui arrive ?Si et voyez comme le plus grandnombre des assistants se dis
persent immédiatement .
e peuple est ainsifait un riensuffit pour provoquer an attroupement , et , mains encore ,
pour le disperser.
Vous verrez que, dans quelquesminut es, il narost ers. plus personne sur la place .
J'admire la docilité de lafouleil n
’
y a pas en la moindre t entat ive de resistance ; la seuleapparition des représentantsde la loi a rétabli l ’ordre .
2 81
R e ading E x e rcise No . 60.
Je no suis, Mademoiselle, qu
’nn Vieux malade
,1 et ilfaut que
mon état soit bien douloureux, puisque je n’
ai pu répondre
plutot2 ala le ttre dont vous m ’
honore z , e t que je ne vous envoie
que de la prose pour vo s jolis vers.
3 Vous me demande z des“conseils ; ii ne vous en faut point d’
autres que6 votre gout .
L’étude que vous ave z faite de la langue italienne 6 doit”encorefortifier ce gout avec leque l vous etes née , e t que personne nepeut donner. Le Tasse8 e t l
’Arioste0 vous renclront 10 plus deservices que moi
, et la le cture de nos meilleurs poetes vaut
mieuir1 1 que toutes les lecons mais, puisque vous daigne z de si
loin me consulter, je vous invite a ne lire que les ouvrages qui
sont 1 2 depuis longtemps” en possession des sufi'
rages14 du public,
e t dont la reputation n’est point équivoque il y en a. pen, mais
on profits bien davantage en les lisant, qu ave c tous les mauvais
petits livres dont nous somm es inondés. Les bons auteurs n’out
de l’esPrit qu
’autant qu
’il en faut
,
15 ne larecherchent jamais,16
pensent ave c bons sens,
17 e t’
s’exprim ent ave c clarté . Il semble
qu’on n
’écrive plus qu
’en énigm es.
18 R ien n’est simple
,tout est
affecté , on s’éloigne
19 en tout de la, nature on a le malheur devouloirmieuxfaire que nosmaitres. Tene z—y ous
atout cc qui vo us plait _en aux. La moindre afi e ctation est un
vice . Les I taliens n’ont dége
’
néré,apres le Tasse e t l
’Ariost e, que
parcequ’
ils ont voulu avoir trop d’esprit
,e t les F rangais sont clans
lo meme cas.
VOLTAIR E (L ettre d Mademoise lle plus lard
Madame D upuy).
( to be continued.)
1 malade, invalid, 2 p lutdl, sooner, 3 vers, lines 4 vous fme
demandez ales, you ask me for, 5 ll ne vous enfaul point d ’
outras
que, you require none but , 6 italienne, Italian, 7 doll, must , 8 le
Tasse, Tasso , 9Z’
Am'
osle,Ariosto , 10 rendront, will render, 1 1 went
mieux, is bet t er, 1 2 sont, have been , 13 depuis long temps, for a longt im e , 1 4 sufim ges, approbation, 1 5 n
’
ont de l’
esprit qu’
aulanl gu’
c’
l
enfant, have but as much wit as is necessary, 1 6 we le recherchent
jamais, never strain after it , 17 peasant avec ban sens , refle ct Withood sense , 1 8 en énlgmes, in enigmas, 19on s
’éloigne, people wander
ar,2 0 tenez -
fvous limit yourselfto .
2 82
SIXTY- FIR ST Lnsson. Soixante at amama L egon.
S y n t a x oft h e V e rb
C om p lem e nt s ofth e V e rb .
A verb cannot have two indire ct complements expressing thesame relation (preceded by the same preposition).
It is therefore incorrect t o say, C’
est d fvous d quij’ai ecrit. It
is you to whom I have writ ten . The correct form is, C’est
d 'vous quej’ai écrit.
When two verbs do not govern the . same preposition theycannot have the sam e complem ent .
Thus instead ofsaying , Il divulge cl préside d tous les travails:— he directs and superintends all the works say, Il dirige tous
les travaux et d ypreside.
Ifthe dire ct and the indire ct complem ent be ofequallength, or even ifthe direct complement be no t much longerthan the indire ct , the form ermust pre cede the latter.
J'
a/l donné cc livre a. votrefrére . I have given your brother that book.
But ifthe indire ct obje ct be the shorter, it must be placed first .J'ai donné a notref'rére cc livre intéressant. I gave your brotherthis int eresting book.
Ofseveral indire ct objects the shortest must be placed first,and the others according to their respe ctive lengths, the longestbeing the last .
J'ai cu man ami avec Jean
,clans lejardin, ahuit heures dumatin, a
'u
moment onje sortais de la maison . I saw myfriend with John,in the garden, this m orning at eight o
’
clock, just as I was leavingthe house .
But the ear must , before all,de cide on the arrangement of
the different complem ents in a sentence .
When the verb has different complem ents, joined by one ofthe conjunctions, at, m,
on,those complements must be w ords of
the same kind, or propositions ofthe same nature . Thus inst eadofsaying , J
’aime la musique at d lira de bans auteurs
— I like musicand the reading ofgood authors—one must say, J
’aflmc la, musique
et la. lecture des bans auteurs.
Instead ofsaying , Ilfaut partir cl que 'vous reveniez bien mite
You must go , and com e back very quickly- one must say, Ilfautparler cl revenir bien m
'
te or Ilfoul que 'vous partiez e t que vous
reveniez bien mite. Inst ead ofIl na desire n'l son avancement ui
aller d Paris— he neither wishes to be promoted,nor to go to
Paris—we must say, Il we desire ni avoir de l’avancement ui aller a
Paris.
Verbs placed before an infinitive govern either the preposition d or (le
,or do ndt require any preposition what ever. The
lists ofthese verbs are given in Part 14, pag es 30 and 31 , to
which we refer the student .
2 254
Que st ions on G rammar.
Is it possiblefor a verb t o have two indirect complements precededby the same preposition
'Q
When it is impossible for two verbs to have the same complement 3What are the respective plac es ofthe direct and indirect complements ofa verb when they are ofequal length ?
is the place ofthe indirect object when shorter than the
direct object ?
H ow must the indirect objects ofa verb be placed ?What is the rule which must be followed when the different complements ofa verb are joined by the conjunctions, at, on,
C onv e rsat ion.
We wrote to ourfriends the daybefore yesterday, t o informthem ofthe birth ofour infant .
I have received one ofyour circulars, so has my father but
you were wrong in put ting onlya half-penny stamp .
I have done What I hadse en doneby most ofmyfriends.
I know it is ; but as the euve
lopes are not closed, a_c ertain
number ofthese circulars maybe lost , and those who have not
received them do not knowwhether they must at tribut e itto a want ofpoliteness on your
part .
People would be wrong to takeoffence at such a trifle .
That is true but we all have a
certainamount ofsusceptibility ,and it is bett er to avoid offending people , when it is oft en so
easy not to do so.
I have only been guided in thataffair by a motive ofeconomy,and I hope that yourapprehensions are exaggerat ed.
Nous avons écrit avant hieranosamis, pour leurfaire part de lanaissance de notre enfant .
J’
ai recu l’
une de vos let tres defaire -
part et men pere aussi ;mais vous avez eu t ort de n
’
ym e t tre qu
'un timbre de cinq
centimes.
J ’
aifait cc que j’
avais vufaire parle plus grand nombre de mesamis.
Jc sais qu'onlofait mais les en
veloppes n'étant pasfermés, uh
certain nombre de cesfaire -
part
peuvent s’
égarer ; e t eeux quine les out as rogus ne savent
pas s
’
ils doivent at tribuerlefaituh manque de politesse de
votre part .
On aurait t ort_de se formaliser
Elfi Si peu dc chose .
C’
est vrai : mais nous avons tousune certaine dose de susceptibilite, et il vaut mieux éviterde froisser les gens, quand il estsouvent
'
si facile de na pas lefaire .
Je n’
ai été guidé danscette affairsque par une raison d
'e’
conomie ,et j
’
espereh
que vos apprehensions sont exag érées.
2 85
R eading E xercise No . 6 1 .
( conc ludedfrom No.
Voye z ave c que l nature l Madame de Sevigne e t
d’autre s dames écrivent ; c ompare z c e style ave c le s
phrase s entortillée s1 de nos pe t its romans. Je vous cit e
les hérom es2 de vo tre sexe, parc eque vous me paraisse z
fait e pour leur re ssembler. 11 y a de s p ie cesde Madame
D eshoulie res qu’
aucun aut eur de nos jours ne pourrait
égaler.3 Si vous voule z que je vous cit e des homme s,
voye z av e c que lle simplic ité notre R acine s’
exprime
toujours. C hacun croit , en le lisan t , qu’
il dirait en prose
tout c c que R ac ine a dit en ve rs ;4 croye z que tout cc qui
ne sera pas aussi c lair,aussi simple , aussi élégant , ne
vaudra rien du tout .5
Vos reflexions,Madem oise lle , vous en apprendront6
cent fois plus que je ne pourrais vous en dire .
7 Vous
verre z que nos bons écrivains,F enelon
,Bossue t , R acine ,
Despréaux, employaient8 t oujours le m ot propre . On
s’
accoutum e9 a bien parler,en10 lisant souvent ceux qui
ont bien écrit ; on se fait 11 une habitude 12 d’
exprime r
simplement e t noblem ent 13 sa p ensée sans effort . C e n’
e st
point une étude il n’
en cout e aueune p e ine de lire cc qui e st
bon e t de no lire que ce la. On n’
a de maitre que son
plaisir e t son g out .
Pardonne z , Mademoise lle a ces longues reflexions
no les attribue z qu’ 14 51. m on obe issance 15 a vos ordres.
VOL TAIR E ( L e ttre a, Mademoise lle plus lard
Madame D upuy) .
1 phrases enlarlz'
llées, entangled sent ences, 2 heroines, heroines,
3 égaler, to equal, 4 en cars, in poetry, 5 ne vaudra rien da tout
will be worth nothing at all, 6 cans en apprenflront, will t each you
about it , 7 dire , to t ell, 8 emp loyment, used, 9on s’
accontume , we
become accustomed, 1 0 en,by, 1 1 on sefail, we acquire , 1 2
habitude,habit , 1 3 noblement, nobly, 1 4 m les attribuez qn
’
, at
tribut e them only, 15 obéissance , obedience .
2 86
SIXTY- SE C OND LE SSON. Soixante - deurcteme L epon.
S y n t a x o ft h e V e rb ( continued) .
U se Ofth e Auxiliary V e rbs .
All active verbs and the great er part ofneuter verbs takeavoir in the ir compound tenses. Neute r verbs ofmotion and all
reflective verbs take etre.(Se e Part 1 4, pag es 1 4 to
Some neuter verbs som e tim es take avo'ir, some times e
’
tre. It
will be rem embered that avoir indicates an action, and étre, a
state thus Il a demeure aParis m eans, he has lived in Paris, andIl est demeure (2 Parfi fi nfi h éM
‘
ifi ifié’
dfi Pfi fi s.
C ’c lie
ge a paru la semaine de rniere . This book was published last
we e c.
C e am est paru depuis long temps. This book has been publisheda long t ime ago .
1 L e the rmométre a monlé . The therm om et er has risen .
Il apasse devant mafene‘tre . H e passed before my window ,
l L e tern/(
3
1
.9 ole son bonheur est passe. The t ime ofhis happiness ispasse
U se ofth e Te nse s and Mo ods .
The present ofthe indicat ive is used some time s,instead of
the future , to express an action which will take place veryshortlv .
Je pars demain. I M start t o -morrow.
It is also used'
instead ofthe past, to give more life to the
narration.
Jefraprc a sa p'
orle , tl no me répond pas, j’
entre ,je lo trouve profondem c /zl. I knock at his door
, he does not answerm e ; Ienter
,I find him fast asle ep.
The presepj;L ofthe indicative is also used instead ofthefuture
,after the conjunction st
, where there is no doubt expressedby the first verb.
Je viendrai st vous voulez . I will come ifyou like .
But it is ne cessary t o say,J
’
e’
gnore s’
e'
lpourra c om‘
r. I do not know whe ther he can come .
The future absolute, and thefuture anterior, present andpast
ofthe conditional are used in F rench as in English. H owever,the future must be used in French to translate the Eng
lishpresent after such expressions as, when, quand as soon as
,ausL
s'ilo‘
t que, ( les que after,apres que as long as
, aussi long temps
que, tant que, or any similar expressions .
J'aurat fin
'l quand vous viendra“ I shall have finished when youc ome .
Je vous l’
enverrai de‘
s que je l’
aura'l termine
'
. I shall send it to youas soon as I have finished it .
2 88
Que st ions o n G rammar.
1 . What auxiliary is used inthe formation ofthe compound tenses ofact ive verbs and the greaternumber ofneuterverbs
'i
2 . “'hat are the verbs that take etre in theformation oftheir com
pound tenses ?
3. When a neuter verb sometimes takes etre and sometimes avoir, howcan it be ascertained which must be used ?
When can the present ofthe indicative be used instead ofthefuture ?When is the present ofthe ind icative used instead ofthe pastdefinite
6. When is the present, after the conjunction si, used inst ead ofthefuture
7. Is there any important difference in the use ofthe future and con
ditional tenses in French and in English ?
8. When is the Eng lish present translated by thefuture in French ?
C onve rsat ion.
We received an invitation to go
into the country ; we went on
Saturday afternoon, and arrived
at our friend’
s house in the
evening .
H ow long did you stay there i
We staid with them till Mondaymorning and were back in
Paris at half-past eleven.
Have you always lived in thishouse ?
This house has belong ed to myfor many years. My
grandfather had it built ; myather died and I was born here.
When will your brotherreturnSwi t z erland
H e leaves to -morrow morning bythe first train.
Shall you soon hearfrom him 3
Yes he promised to writ e to me
as soon as he has arrived at
G eneva.
D id he not inquire about theexact t ime the train starts
Yes ; he bought the new timetable .
Nous avons regu une invitation
pour allerala campag ne nous
sommes partie samedi apres
midi,e t arri vés chez nos amis
dans la soirée .
C ombien de t emps y etes vous
restés ?
Nous sommes rest és chez eux
jusqu’
e lundi matin, e t nous
étions revenus a Paris‘
a onze
heures et demie .
Avez -vous toujours demeure denscet te maison ?ett e maison ap art ient afamille depuis e longues eu
nées. Mon'
g rand-
pere l’avait
fait batir mon pere y est mortet j
’
y suis né.
Quand votre frere retourne - t - il enSuisse ?
11 part demain matin par lepremier train.
R ecevrez -vous bient6t de ses
nouvelles?ui, il a promis de m ecrire
aussitfit qu’
il sera arrivé a
G eneve .
Ne s’
est - ii pas informé de l’
heureexact e du dé art du train
‘
3
Si ; ii a achete lo nouvel indicat our.
2 89
R e ading E x e rc ise N o . 6 2 .
G énéraux, ofiiciers, sous- officiersl e t soldats de ma vie ille
garde ,2 je vousfais me s adieux ;3 depuis vingt ansjc suis content
de4 vous je vous‘
ai toujours trouvés sur la chemin de5 la gloire .
”
Les puissances6 alliées"ont armé toute l’Europe contre
moi la F rance a. voulu d’autres destinées8
Avec vous e t les braves9 qui me sont restés10 fideles,
j’aurais pu entre tenir11 1a guerre civile 1 2 pendant trois ans
,mais
1a France eut été malheureuse I aime z - la. toujours, aime z—la bien,cette chere patrie 13'
Ne plaigne z pas mon sort ;14je serai toujours heureux quand
je saurai que vous 1’étes15.
J ’aurais pu
16 m ourir rien ne m’eut été plusfacile , maisje
suivrai sans cesse le chemin de l’honneur. J ’
ai encore aécrire cc
que nous avonsfait 17
Je ne puis vous embrasser tous, mais j’embrasserai votr
général vene z , général
Qu’on m
’apport e l
’aigle
18
C here aigle que ces baisers retentissent19dans les coeurs
de tous les braves
Adieu, mes enfants mes vmux vous accompagneront
toujours conserve z mon souvenir.
”
NAPOLEON I. (Allocation adresse’
e a sa garcle, a
F ontainebleau, le 2 1 Avril,
l sous- ofi ciers, non- commissioned offi cers, 2 vieille gardc, old
guard, 3 jefais mes adieuac, I bid you farewell, 4 je suis content dew as
,I am satisfied with you, 5 le chemin ole , the path of, 6 puis
sances alliées,allied powers, 8 d
'autres destinées, another destiny,
9braves, courageous men, 1 0 sont restés, have remained, 1 1 entretenir,
to continue , 1 2 civile, civil, 1 3 patrie, country, 1 4 sort, fat e ,15 vous l
’étes, you are so, 1 6 j
’
aaraispa moarir, I might have died,1 7 avonsfait, have done , 1 8 qu
’
on m’
apporte l’
aig le , bring me the
eagle (standard), 19que ces baisers rctentissent, let these kisses echo,2 0 wear, wishesfor your happiness.
French Grammar.
2 90
SIXTY- TH IR D LE SSON. Soixante—troisieme L epon.
S yntax ofth e Ve rb ( continued)U se oft h e Tense s ofM o ods ( co ntinued) .
The Imperfect ofthe Indicative is used to indicate that theaction was perform ed simultane ously with another act ion at a
past time,and is translated by the English pre sent part ic iple ,
pre ceded by the past ofthe verb to be .
J’
écrivais quand nous etes cntre’
. I was writing when you ent ered.
It also indicat es an action which used t o take place , or tookplace frequently .
Jc mon tais a cheval tous les matins, I used t o ride on horsebackevery morning .
J’
allais souvent an theatre quand y étais a Paris. I oft en went tothe theatre when I was in Paris.
It must also be used in descriptions.
Mon ami était tres grand . Myfriend was very tall.Laplaine otait couverte de broui
’
llard. The plain was coveredwithfog .
The Imperfect ofthe Indicative is used aft er que when the
first ve rb is in a past t ense,and the second does not refer to any
thing indisputable , or e ternally true .
It is correct to say, on m’avait dit qu
’il emit a la campagne.
I was told that he was in the country but one must say, quand
j’etais enfant, on m ’
a enseigne’
que D ieu estjuste. When Iwas a childI was taught that G od isjust .
The Imperfe ct ofthe Indicative must also be used after si,except when the first verb expresse s an idea ofdoubt .Je serais heureuse si je recevais de ses nouvelles. I should be happyifI heard ofhim .
The Past D efinite must be used in speaking ofan isolatedfac twhich took place at a t im e entirely past , and in narrations.
Il 'vint hier, et il laissa sa cartc . H e came yest erday and left his card.
The Past Indefinite should be used ifthe period had not
elapsed. It is the tense generally used in conversation .
Je l'ai 1m deuxfois cette année . I have se en him twice this year.
When the fact is m erely mentioned as past , and does not
indicate any particular t ime , the past definite or past indefinitemay be used indifferently .
Napoleonfat or a été te plus grand homme des temps moderncs.
Napoleon was the great est man ofmodern t imes .
The Pluperfect refers to an action as being already past whenanother action
,expressed or understood
,took place .
J’
avaisfini quand nous étes venu. I had finished when you came .
The Past Anterior conveys the same idea as the pluperfect ,but can only be used after certain conjunctions, such as quand,lorsque, when ; de
‘
s que, anssitdt que , as soon as ; d peine, hardly ;apres que, after ; &c .
l l partit des qn’
il cutfini. H e left as soon as he had finished.
2 92
Que st ions on G rammar.
When is the imperfect ofthe indicative usedWhat is the t ense which indicates in French that an action used to
take place 3What is the tense used in description
When is the imperfect ofthe indicative used afterque 2Wh en must the imperfect ofthe indicative be used, inst ead oftheconditiona l
,after si?
When must the past definite be used ?
When must the past indefinite be used
What is there indicat ed by the pluperfect !When must the past anterior be used
C onv e rsat ion.
What was H enry doing , when
you ent ered his room
H e was sle eping his head lyingon his arm his hand still held
the pen with which he had
beenwriting apart ofthe night .D id you wake him 2I woke him and advised him to
g o to bed but he replied that
he had promised to finish a
certain work and to post it be
fore thre e o ’
clock in the morn
ing .
D id you also work in the eveningat the time you were readingfor the Military C olleg e Examination ?
No , I preferred working in the
morning , and rose very early,usually at five o
’
clock .
Why did you prefer working in
the morning to working at
night?
I found that in the morning , themind
,rest ed by seven or eight
hours slee was fresher,and
consequent y more ready to
acquire new knowledg e .
Que faisait H enri, quand vous
étes entré dans se chambre 2
Il dormait , la te‘
te couchée sur
son bras ; sa main t enait encore
la plume ave c laquelle il avait
écrit une partie de la nuit .
Le réveillat es- vous ?
Je lo réveillai e t lui conseillaid'aller se coucher ; mais il me
répondit qu’
il avait promis definir un certain travail et dele m et tre ala poste avant trois
heures du matin.
Travailliez -vous aussi le soir al
’
époque on vous vous pré
parie z aux exam ens de l’
Ecolemilitaire ?
Non, je préférais travailler lsmatin
,et je me levais de trés
bonne heure,a cinq heures
g énéralement .
Pourquoi préfériez - vous le travaildu matin acelui du soir
Jc trouvais que , le matin,l
’
espritreposé par sept ou huit heure s
de sommeil était plus frais et
conséque‘
mment plus apte aacguLir de nouvelles
'
con
naissances.
2 93
R eading E xerc ise No . 6 3 .
J’ai dit que j
’
aimais singulierement améditer dans ladouce 1 chaleur de mon lit
,e t que se chaleur ag réable
contribue beaucoup eu plaisir que j’
y trouve .
Pour me procure r ce plaisir,mon dome st ique a recu
l’ordre d’
ent rer dans ma chambre une demi- heure avan t
ce lle j’
ai réso lu de me lever.2 Je l
’
entends m archerlégerement3 e t tripoter4 dans ma chambre ave c discret ion ;e t c e bruit m e donne l ’ag rement de me sen t ir somme ille rzls
plaisir délicat e t inconnu de6 bien de s g ens.
On e st asse z éve illé7 pour s’
apercevoir que l’on ne
l’e st pas tout afait , e t pour calculer8 confusément9 quel’heure des affaires e t de s ennuis10 est encore dans le sa
blier1 1 du t emps. Insensiblement mon homm e devient 12
plus bruyant 13; il e st si difficile de se contraindre l d ’
ailleurs14 il sait que l
’heure fatale approche . Il regarde ama montre e t fait15 sonne r le s bre loque s16 pour m
’
avert ir ;
maisje fais la. sourde ore ille”; e t pour allong er18 encore
ce t t e heure charmante,il n
’
est19 sorte de chicane 20 que jene fasse ace pauvre malheureux . J
’
ai cent ordre s préliminaire s a lui donne r pour gagner du temps 11 saitfortbien que ces ordre s, que je lui donne d
’
asse z mauvaise
humeur2 1 , no sont que de s2 2 prétexte s pour rest er an lit
sans paraitre le désire r. Il ne fait pas semblant de 2 3 s’
e n
apercevoir2 4, e t Je lui en suis vraiment re connaissant .
E nfin ,lorsque j
’
ai épuisé tout es me s re ssources, il
s’avanc e au m ilieu de ma chambre e t se plante 1a2 5, le sbras
croisés, dans la plus parfait e immobilité .
XAVIE R D E MAISTR E ( Voyag e autour de ma chambre) .
1 dance , comfortable , 2 me lever, t o g et up, 3 légérenient, g ently,
2 4 tripoter, meddling about , 5 sommeiller, dozing , 6 inconnu de ,'
unknown to, 7 éveillé, awake , 8 calculer, realise , 9covtfuse’ment,confusedly, 10 ennuis, troubles, 1 1 sablier, hour
-
glass, clement,
becomes, 13 bruyant, noisy, 1 4 d’
ailleurs, besides, 1 5fai t, makes,
1 6 breloques, trinke ts
,17 jefais la sourdc - oreille , I turn
-
a deafear,1 8 allonger, to prolong , 19 it n
’
est, there IS no , 2 0 chic ane , trick,
2 1 hwmkur, temper, 2 2 ne so nt que ( les, are mere , 2 3 i t nofai t passemblant de , he pretends not , 2 4 s
’
en apcrcew ir, t o notice , 2 5 se
plante la, posts himselfthere .
2 94
SIXTY- FOURTH LESSON. Soixante-
quatriéme L epon.
Syntax oft h e V e rb ( concluded) .
U se oft he Te ns e s and Mo ods .
The1
Subjunctive Mood must be used after que when the first
imp ies an idea ofdoubt , uncertaint MW »
Jar—fear; it must also be used after verbs, accompanied by a.
noration and by impersonal verbs.
J"doute qu’
il t ienne . I doubt whetherhe will come .
IM t pas ear que cc soit la oérité. It is not certain that it is the truth.Je desire qu
’
ilfasse beau temps. I wish it .may be fine weather.
J'ordonme gu
’
il vous rende cc livre . I order him to return you thisJe crains qu
'il no soitmalade . I fear he is ill lbook.
Je nep ense pas qu'ilait raison. I
'
do not think he is right .Itfaut que vouspartiez . You must go .
Excnrrrorrrc gspérer, to hope , requires the verb to be in the Indicative .The Subjunct use d after que used to avoid the
repe tition ofsi, and the following expressionsafin que , in order that en cas que, in case amains que, unless
pour que, in order that sans que, without non que , not that
jusqu’
acc que , until an“
peu que , so lit tle that de peur que, lest
loin que, far from it pourvu que, provided de crainte que , forfear“
that that that
avant q ue , before [that soit que , whether bien que, althoughsuppose que, supposing pourpeu que , ifat all quoique , although
The Subjunctive Mood must be used afte rcu, where ; toplus,the most ; te premier, the first k demi/ler, the last to seal, the
only te moindre, the least and other adjectives in the superlat ive ; the phrases, dc sorte que, so that ; de maniere que, in such a.
manner, so that si cc n’est que , ifnot that tellement que, so much
i l. -
it and in any interrogative sent ences after que, when the
speaker int ends to indicate that there is doubt in his mind.
Je veua:une maison cuje sais independant. I want a house where Ican be independent .
C'e
I
st
k
l’
homme laplus grand queje connaisse. H e is the tallest man
D OW.
J’ai trouvé te seul logement qui me convtnt. I have found the onlyapartment that could suit me .
Croyez - oous qu’
il m'
ennc cc soir .? D o you think he will come this
evening
The present ofthe Subjunctive must be used when the first
verb is in the present orfuture , but the imperfect is used ifthefirst verb be in a past t ense or conditional.Je e eux qu
'il travaille . I wish him to work.
Je voulais qu’
il trace/illdt. I wished him to work .
Je voudrais qu’
il sortit. I should like him to go out .The Subjunctive is sometim es used in exclamations.
Plaise d D ieu cue nous ayons la pair ! G odgrant w e may have peace !“
2 96
Que st ions on G rammar.
Whenm ust the Subjunctive be used afterque ?What is the verb expressive ofwish, which does not require theSubjunctive after que l
8. G ive some expressions which always require the verb to be in the
Subjunctive .
4. G ive some expressions which occasionally require the verb to be inthe Subjunctive .
5. When expressions do not always require the verb to be in the
Subjunctive , when is the Subjunctive to be used ?
When is the present ofthe Subjunct ive used—when the Imperfect ?What is the mood which is oft en used in exclamations ?
C onv e rsat ion .
Who is calling meYour ma t er he wishes you to
g o to him in his study, withthe work you have done in the
mormn
I did not think he would call mebefore four o'clock , and I wishhe would wait a.few minut esI have not ye t finished learningmy lessons, and I fear he willpunish me .
H e will certainly punish you, nuless you give h im some plausibleexcuse .
I had a very bad headache thismorm
'
n it is the only excuseI can al age .
It is bet t er that you should go
yourselfhe will not doubt but
that you t ell him the truth .
H am going there immediat ely ;for I should not like him
to complain t o my father.
I should be very grieved ifmyparents had to complain con
cerning my apptlication.
am happy to ear you speaklike this. A child must fee lgrat eful towards his parents.
H
I know the sacrifices which theyimpose upon themselvesformyeducat ion.
Qui est - cs qui m’
appelle 2
C’
est votre maitre il veut que
vous alliez le trouver dans son
cabine t , avec le travail ue
vous avez fait dans la matine e .
Je re pensais pas qu’
il m’
appelét
avant quatre heures, et je voudrais qu
’
il at t endit encore quelques instants je n
'ai pas encore
fini d’
apprendre me s lecons et
je crains qu’
il no me punisse .
Il vous punira certainement , amo ins que vous no lui donniez
quelque excuse plausible .
J’
avais tres mal a la tét e cc
matin c’
est la seule excuse que
je puisse allé'
g'
uer.Il vaut mieux que vous alliez"
lui parler vous-meme il ne
dout era pas ue vous no lui
disiez la véritJ’
y vais immédiat ement ; car jene voudrais pas qu
’
il se
plaignit amon pere . Jc serais
désolé que mes parents eussent
a se plaindre de mon applica
tion.
Je suis heureux de vous ent endre
parler ainsi il faut qu’
nn eu
fant soit reconnaissant envers
ses parents.
Je sais quels sacrifices ils s impo
sent pour mon education.
2 97
R eading E xerc ise No . 64 .
R emarque z , je vous prie ,1 la conduite de s R emains
Apr‘
e s 1a défaite d’Anthiocus
‘
,ils étaient maitresde l
’Afrique ,de l
’
Asie e t de la G‘rrece ,2 sans y avoir presque de3 v ille s
en propre .4 Il semblait qu
’
ils ne conquissent5que pour
donne r mais ils restaient si bien le s maitres que , lors
qu’ilsfaisaient 1a guerre aque lque prince , ils l
’accablaient
,
pour ainsi dire , du poids de tout l’
univers.
11 n e tait pas t emps encore de s’
emparer6 de s pays
conquis. S’ils avaient g ardé les ville s prises a7 Philipp e ,
ils auraient fait ouvrir le s yeux aux G‘rre cs8 si, aprés la
se conde gue rre punique ,9 ou c e l le contre Anthiocus,ils
avaient pris des terre sl0 en Afrique ou en Asie , ils n’au
raient pu conserverde s conqué te s sipeusolidement établies .
Ilfal lait att endre que toutes le s nations fussent ac
coutumée s aobéir comme libre s e t comme alliéesu, avant
de leur commander comme suje tte s, e t qu’
e lle s eussent étése pe rdre 12 pen apeu1
3 dans la république romaine .
Voye z le traité qu’ils fi rent ave c les Latins apres la
Victoire du lac R égille ; ilfut un de s principauxfondement s
do'
lent puissance . On n’
y trouve pas un seul mo t qui
puisse faire soupconner l’
em pire 14.
C’
était une manle re lente de conque'
rir. On vain
quait un peuple , e t on no se cont entait pas de l’
afi'
aiblir ;on lui15 imposait de s conditions qui le minaient16 insensiblement ; s
’
il se re levait17, on l’
abaissait encore davan tag c, ‘
e t il devenait sujet sans qu’
on put donner une époque 18“
dese sujéti0n19.
MONTE SQUIE U ( G randeur e t decadence
(les R omaine) .
l je cons pria, I beg ofyou, 2 ole l’
Afm’
que, de lAs'cfc et de la
Grace , ofAfn'
ca, Asia, and G reece , 3presque de, scarcely any , 4 en
promis, in theirposes
-ssion, 5 conquissent, conquered, 6 dc,
to seize , 7 prises (2 , takenfrom ,8 ils auraientfait ouvri-
r les yous
am: G rass, they would have opened the eyes ofthe G reeks, 9p un ique ,Punic , 1 0pris des terms, se iz ed t e rritory, 1 1 alliées, allies, 1 2 so
perdre, to merg e , 13pen a pen,by degrees, l 4 qui puissefaire
soupcm ncr l’
empire , which would cause any suspicmn ofsovereignty,1 5 lui, upon it , 1 6 minaz
’
ent, underm ined, 1 7 se reiefvaz'
t, rose ag . 111 ,
1 8 donner ure époque, fix a time,19 374761 1071, subject ion.
Fran"AG rammar.
2 98
SIXTY- F IFTH LE SSON. Semante - cinquienw L epon.
S yntafoft h e Part ic ip le s .
Pre se nt Part ic ip le .
The Present Part/iciple is always invariable . But as presentarticiples are often used as adjectives, it is ne cessary to knowhow to ascertain whe ther such words must agre e or not with thenoun to which they refer. A word ending in ant is a presentparticiple when it expresses an action, and isfollowed by a direct
complement , or pre ceded by the preposition en, or the particle ne.Ma mere , le veg/«mt palir, lui dm amda cc qu
’
e’
l avait . My mother,see ing him turn pale , askedhim what was the mat t er with him .
'C’
est en travaillant que vous apprendrez . It is by working that youWill learn .
Ne sachant cc qu’
il dema/nda/it ils me l’mvoyérant . Not knowing
what he want ed they sent him t o me .
A word ending in ant is a verbal adjective when it expressesa state , and could be replaced by a qualifying adjective it is
neverfollowed by a dire ct obje ct , but can some tim es be followedby an indirect obje ct .
C’
est um histoire intéressa/ nte . This is an int erestin story.
E lle se termit tremblante devant moi. She stood tremiling before me .
In the above exam
ple trembla/nte is an adjective because it
describes the state in w ich she was when standing before me,rather than the action oftremblin g.
Past Part ic ip le .
The rules relative to the agre em ent ofthe Past Participle canbe reduced tofour cases.
lst . When it is not accompanied by any auxiliary.
2 nd. When it is accompanied by the auxiliary etre .
8rd. When it is accompanied by the auxiliary avoir and preceded bythe direct object .
4th . When,being accompanied by avoir, it isfollowed by the , direct
object .
1st C ASE .
Wh en the Past Participle is not accompanied by anyauxiliary, it is a real qualifying adjective , and agrees with thenoun it qualifies.
J’
ai trouvé une rosefane'e. Ifound a withered rose .11 m
’
a e -nvoyé une lettre tres mal e’
crite. H e sent me a very badlywritt en let t er.
zud C ASE .
When th e Past Partici le is accompanied by the auxiliary
etre,"
the participle agrees wit the subject .Sa. maison est bdtie sur la colline . H is house is built on the hill.C es enfants sont toujours é légamxment véms. Those children are
always elegantly dressed.
300
Que s tions o n G rammar.
What is the rule for the agreement ofpresent participles ?When is a word ending in amt to be considered as a presentparticiple
3. When is a. word ending in ant to be considered as a verbaladjective 2
How many cases are therefor the agreement ofpast participles ?What is the rulefor the agreement ofpast participles when not
accompanied by any auxiliary verb
6 . What is the rule for the agreement ofpast participles when aecom
panied by the auxiliary etre ?
C onve rsat ion .
What a charming ballad
It is quit e new ; the music has
been composed by and the
words by
Two great talents, contributingto a common work
, canno t failto produce something perfect .
It ought to be so. H owever, it
seems t o me that a. ballad is
still more touching when the
poe try and the music have
been wri t ten by the same pen .
D o you think a good poe t is oftena good musician ?
Sometimes ; and then the same
inspiration has dictated bo th ,and the two strings which the
charm of the poe try and
harmony cause to vibrat e, can
not fail to thrill in unison.
You have some perfectly - copiedmusic here .
It was copied by my sist er : thisballad se lling enormously it isvery difficult to g et it , and Ivery much want ed to have it tosing it this evening .
I should be very happy to hear
you, but my doctor forbids meto go out in the evening .
Quelle charmante romance
Elle est t oute nouvelle la musi
que a été composée par et
les paroles par
D eux grands talents, contribuaut
aune oeuvre commune , ne peu
vent manquer de produire
quelque chose (le parfait .C ela devrait etre . 11 me semblet outefois qu
’
ane romance est
encore plus touchant e quand la
oe'
sie e t la musique ont étécerites par laméme plume .
C royez - vous qu’
un bon poete soit
souvent un bon musmren
Quelquefois ; et c’
e st alors la
meme inspiration qui a dict é
l’
unc et l’
autre , et les deux
cordes, quefait vibrerdeghai‘
ni cdu vcrs e t de l
'harmonie , na
‘
euvent manquer de vibrer a
unisson.
Vous avez ici de la musique parfaitement copiée .
E lle a été copiée par ma soeur
cett e romance , se vendant énormoment , il est tres difficile dcse la procurer, e t je t enaisbeaucoup a l
'avoir pour la
chauter se soir.
Jc semis tres heureuse de vous
ent endre mais mon médecinme defend de sortir le soir.
301
R eading E xercise No . 6 5 .
I] y a des g ens qui parlent um mom ent avant que
d ’
evoir p ensé . 11 y en a d’
autre s qui ont une fade 1 at tent ion a os qu
’
ile disent, e t av ec qui l
’
on souffre dans la con
versation de tout le travail de leur e sprit ils sont c omm e
pétris2 de phrases e t de pe t its3 t ours 6 expre ssion , con
ce rtes4 dans leur g e st e e t dans t out leur maintien5 ils
sont puriste s,6 e t ne hasardent7 pas lo m oindre mot
, quandii devrait faire le plus be l efl’
e t du m onde rien d’
heureux
na leur échappe ,8 rien ne coule de source9 e t av e c
liberté10 ils parle nt proprem ent 1 1 e t ennuyeusementlz
.
L’
e sPrit de la conve rsat ion consist e bie n moins 5. en
mont rer beaucoup, qu
’
a en faire trouve r aux autre sl 3: ce lui
qui sort de 14 vo tre en tre t ien15 content de soi e t de son
e sprit , l’
e st de vous parfaitement . L e s homme s n’
aim ent
point a vous admirer,ils v eulent plaire ; ils che rchent
moins etre instruits,e t m eme réjouis1 7, qu
’
a etre
g outés18 e t applaudis ; e t le plaisir ls plus délicat e st de
faire ce lui d’
autrui.
Il ne faut pas qu’il y ait trop d’
imagination dans nosc onversat ions ni dans nos écrits ; e lle ne produit souvent
que des idées vaine s et puérile s19, qui ne servent point aperfe ctionne r2 0 le g out e t a nous re ndre m e illeurs ; nos
p ensées doivent étre prise s dans le bons sens e t la droite 2 1
raison , e t doivent 2 2 etre nu efi e t de notre jug ement .
C’
e st une g rande m isere 2 3 que de n’
avoir pas asse z
d ’
e sprit pour bien parler, ou assez de Jug ement pour se
taire .
Voilalo principe de toute impe rtinence .
L A BRUYERE L es C aractere s.)
1fade, faint , 2 pétris, made up, 3petits, petty, 4 concertés,affected, 5 maintien, deportment , 6 purifi es, purists, 7 hasardent,risk
, 8 échappe , escapes, 9dc source , naturally, 10 avec liberte’
,
fre e ly, 1 1 propreme'nt, corre ctly, 1 2 ennuyeusement, t ediously ,
1 3 enfaire trouver aux autres,causing o thers to find subjectsfor it ,
1 4 sort de,leaves
,1 5 entretien
,conversat ion, 1 6 cherchent mains a,
seek le ss t o,1 7 réjouis, amused, 1 8 9012158, appre ciat ed, 1 9puérilées,
childish,2 0p erfectionner, t o improve , 2 1 droite
,sound, 2 2 doivent,
should, 2 3 misere, misfortune .
302
e 'rr srx
'rn L assen. Soixante - sicm
'
éme L e g-
on.
Synt ax ofthe Part ic iple s .
Ag re em ent oft h e Past Part ic iple .
3rd C ass .
When the ast participle isjoined to the auxiliary avoir, it
never agrees wit the subje ct, but agrees with the dire ct object,when preceded by it .J'at
'
me beaucoup la maison que vous avez achetée . I like the houseyou have bought much.
L es fleurs que vous m’
avaz apportées me plaiuent beaucoup . The
flowers you have brought m e please me greatly.
4th C ASE .
When the past artici le is joined to the auxiliary avoir, itremain s invariable W enfo owed by its direct obje ct .Vous avez acheté une maison que j
’
atnw beaucoup . You have
bought a house which I like very much .
Vous m’avaz apporte ales jleurs qui me p laisent beaucoup . You have
brought me some flowers which please me much.
OBSE R VATIONS .— l . The past participle in the compound t enses ofre
flective or reciprocal verbs, although joined t o the auxiliary étre,follows the rule givenfor avoir, inst ead ofwhich it is used .
L esfi ewrs que ces messieurs se sont enboyées sont rares. The flowersthose g entlemen sent each other are rare .
2 . As neut er verbs have no dire ct objects, their past participles, used
with aomr, are invari e .
L es quatre eures'
b‘
it ej’
ai dormt m’
ont grandement repose. The fourhours I have slept have greatly rested me .
0
3. Past participles, precededby en, are invariable , as en has the m ean
ing ofofit, ofthem ,and is an indirect object .
Ame -vous on ales lions — 0u't ,j’
en at on anjardin zoologique. H ave
you seen any lions?Yes, I have seen some at the Z oological G ardens.
4. Past participles, followed by an infinitive , agre e with the pronoun
that precedes them when it is their direct object ,C ette dame a tone belle rota: je l
’
at entendue chanter. This lady hasa fine voice I heard her‘
sin
g'
ing .
But they remain invariab e when the pronoun is the obje ct ofthe infinitive .
C’
est une belle chanson, je l’at
‘
entendu chanter. It is a fine song , Ihave heard it sung .
Notice that in English the infinitive is translat ed by the present
participle in the first example , and by the past participle in the second.
5. Fa'
t is always invariable before an infinitive .
Area-vous 1m les habits quej’
aifaitfaire la smnae’
ne derniere . H ave
you seen the clothes I had made last week.
6. Pa , voulu, era , déstré, eu, permis, are invariable at the end ofasent ence when there is a verb understood, ofwhich the pronoun
that precedes is the object .Je na vous at pas envoyé tous les rensetgnenunts aw:j
’
aurats voulu.
I have not sent you all the information I should have wishgd.
Il n’
a pasfait les progrés qu't l awra'lt pu (faire, understood). He
has not made the progress he could have made .
304
Q ue st ions on G rammar.
What is the rulefor the agreement ofpast participles accompaniedby awoir when preceded by the direct object
What is the rule for the agre ement ofpast participles accompaniedby avoi
'r whenfollowed by the direct object ?
What is the rule for the agreement ofthe past participles ofreflect ive or reciprocal verbs
2
What is the rulefor the past participles ofneut er verbs whenjoinedto avoir ?
What is the rule for past participles preceded by en 2
What is the rule forpast participlesfollowed by an infinitive
What is the ruleforfait before an infinitive !What is the rulefor the past participles pu, voulu, cm , désiré, su,
andpermis ?
C onversat ion.
The goods you sent me did not
all arrive in good condition.
We are quit e astonished at what
you t ell us ; we superint ended
the packing and the loadingourselves, and we t ook every
precautions that the whole
should reach you safely.
Did you receive the let t er we
wrot e you on that subjectYes, we receivedit yesterday, and
if1 did not answer it im
m ediat ely it was because I ex
pect ed t o se e you to- day.
The invoice you forwarded us
containsone ortwo slight errors.
We regre t it much ; our clerkmade several also in other ao~
counts, and we have dismissed
You have very fine embroideries
here . I saw them embroidered
in yourworkshops.
I have expressly engaged the
wom en you saw embroidering ,but I did not find as many as Icould have wished.
Les marchandises que vousm'avaz
envoyée s ne sont pas toutes ar
rivées en bonne condition.
Nous sommes étonnés de cc quevous nous dit es 1a nous avons
surveillé nous - memes l'em
hallag e et le charg ement , e t nousavons pris tout es les precaut ions
pour que t out vous arrivait aon port .
Avez - vous recu la lettre que nousvous avons écrit e acc suje t
Oui, nous l’
avons regue hier, et si
je n’
y ai pas répondu immediat ement , c
'est parce que je
comptais vous voir aujourd’hui.
La facture que vous nous ave z
fait remet tre contient une ou
deux pe tit es erreurs.
ous le regrettonsbeaucoup:notrecommie en a fait aussi plusieurs daus d
fautres compt es,
e t nous. avons r_en
Vous avez la de tres bellesbroderies. Je les ai vu broderdaus vos at eliers.
J ’
ai engage t out expres lesouvrieres que vous avez vues
broder mais je n’
en ai pas
trouvé autant que j'aurais
voulu.
305
R eading E xercise No . 6 6 .
Monsieur Jourdaz’
n.—Je ne parle pas de ce la
,vous
dis-je . Je vous demande ce que je parle ave c vous, cc
que je vous dis ace tt e heure 1 qu’
est - cc que c’
e st2
Madame Jourdain.— D e s chansons.
M. Jourdaz'
n.—H é l non
,cc n
’
e st pas ce la. C e quenous discus tous deux, le lang ag e que nous parlons ace t teheure ?
Mad. Jourdaz'
n.— H é bien3
M. Jourdain.— C omm ent e st - c e que ce la s
’
appelle4
Mad. Jourdain.—C e la s
’
appe lle comme on veut
l'
appele r.
M . Jourdain.— C
’e st de la prose , iguorante .
ls
Mad. Jourdain.— D e la prose ?
M. Jourdain.— Oui; de la prose . Tout ce qui est
prose n ’
e st point vers,6 et tout ce qui n
’
e st point vers e stprose . E t voila ce que c
’
e st que7 d
’
étudier l (a Nicole) .li t toi, sais-
"
til“
bien comme ilfaut faire pour dire un UNicola— C omment
M. Jourdaz'
n.— Oui, qu
’
e st - c e que tu fais quand tudis U ?
Nico la—QuoiM. Jourdain.
— D is un peu U ,pour voir.8
Nicola—H é bien U .
M. Jourdain.— Qu
’
e st - ce que tufaisNicola— Je dis U .
M. Jm ad am—Oui, mais quand tu dis U , qu’est- c c
que tufaisNicola— Je fais c c que vous m e dites.
M. Jourdaz‘
n.— Oh l ’etrang e chose9 que d’
evoir
afi'
aire 10 ades bétesl 1 Tu allong e s12 les levres en dehors,e t approche s13 la machoire d
’
en hau t’ 4 de ce lle d’
en bas15.
U I vois- tu je fais la moue l6 U .
MOL I E R E ( L e Bourgeois G entilhomme .)
1 d cette heure, at this moment , 2 gu’
est- ce que c’
est, What is it ,3 he bien, well, 4 est - cc que cela s
’
appelle, is that called, 5 ignorante ,
you ignorant , 6 were, poetry, 7 et voila cc que c’
est d’
, and that is
the result of, 8 pour voir, just to se e , 9 Z'etrange chose, what a
funny thing it is, 10 d'acoirafiaire , t o have to doWith, 1 1 bétes,fools,
1 2 allo nges les lam-
os en dehors, protrude your lips, 13 approches,bring nearer, 1 4 d
’
en haut, upper, 1 5 do ce lle d’
en bow, to the under
one , 1 6jefais la mane, I pout .
C onseils sur l’
art d’écrire .
2 6 Novembre 1 733.
11 y a cinq jours, m on cher ami, que je suis dang ereusement malade d ’
une e spece d’
inflammat ion d’
entrailles;
je n’
ai 1a forc e ui de penser ni d ’
écrire . Je v iens de
re cevoir votre le t tre e t le commenc em e nt de votre
nouve lle allégorie . Au nom d’
Apollon ,t ene z - vous- eu a
vo tre premier suje t ; ne l’
étoufi'
e z pas sous nu amas de
fleurs étrang ere s ; qu’
on voie.
bien ne t tem ent cc que vous
voule z dire : trop d ’e sprit nuit que lquefois a la c larté . Si
j’
osais vous donner nu conseil , c e se rait de song e r a etre
simple , a pourdir votre ouvrag e d ’
une maniere bien
nature lle,bien c laire
, qui ne cout e aucune att ention a
l’
e sprit da le c teur. N’
aye z point d’
e sprit ; pe igne z ave c
vérité,e t votre ouvrag e sera charmant . 11 m e semble que
vous ave z p eine a écart er lafoule d’
idées ing énieuses qui
se présent e t oujours avous ; c’
est le défaut d’un homme
supérieur. Vous ne pouve z pas en avo ir d ’
entre ; mais
c’
e st nu défaut tres dang ere ux . Que m’import e si l ’enfant
est é toufi‘
é aforc e de care sse s on aforce d’
é t re battu ?
C ompt e z que vous tue z votre enfant en le care ssant trop .
E ncore une fois, plus de simplicité,moins de démang eaison
da briller ; alle z vite au but ; no dites que le nécessaire .
Vous aure z encore plus d ’
e sprit que le s autre s, quand vous
aure z re tranché votre supe rflu.
Voila bié'
n de s conse ils que j’
ai la hardie sse de vous
donner ; mais pe timus damusque e icissim.1 C e lui qui écrit
e st comm e nu malade qui ne sent pas, e t ce lui qui lit peutdonne r des conse ils aumalade . C eux que vous me donne zsur Adélat
‘
de ,2 sont d’
un homm e bien sain ; mais pourparler sans figure , je ne suis guere en état d
’en profi ter.
On vajouer la piece jac ta est alea.3
Adieu. D ites a M. de F ormont combien je l’
aime .
Je suis trop malade pour en écrire davantag e .
VOL TAIR E ( L e ttre d C ideville) .
P ourquoi l’homme nait plusfaible que le s animaux?
L’homme a été je té nu sur la t e rre ,faible , incapable
de vo le r comme l ’oise au,de courir comm e le c e rf
,de ram
per comm e le serpent ! sans m oyens de défe nse eu milieu
1 we alt ernat ely ask and g ive 2 Adelaide du Guesclin,a play of
Voltaire 3 the die is cast .
308
répandait sur ses traits comme nu rayon de be l liqueusefierté, de martiale ardeur. Si ensuite le s feux de fi le , le
tonnerre de l’
artille rie re tentissaient dans la plaine ; si
les regiments; marchant le s uns contre le s autres, simu
laient l’at taque , la Victo ire , la re traite e t tout le sp e c tacle
de la gue rre , l’
enfant alors, passionné par c e t te vue , s’élan
gait dans le s tourbillons de fum ée ; il se m élait aux
t irail leurs,il accompagnait le s piece s, il courait sur l ’aile
des e scadrons, s’
exposant a chaque instant a etre écrasé
par les colonnes ou maltraité par le s soldats dont il g énait'
les mouvements. L a revue finie il marchait enc adenceacoté de la tete du bataillon ,
le s yeux fix és, sur Ic_
c:cmmandant
,e t simulant
, par que lque g e ste , qu’
il obéissait a,
tous le s ordres, qu
’
il exécutait m entalement toute s les'
evolutions. C e s meni e re s le faisaient remarquer de lafoule , e t les gens riaient a le voir ; mais lui
, sous l’
empired
’
un sentiment sérieux, continuait de marcher en cadence ,insensible ala moquerie e t ivre d ’
emotions, de g loire , de
patrie e tI
de bataille s.
It onorrur. Tosprraa (Nouve lles G enevoz'
ses) .
L’Incendz
'
e de S t . Sylvain.
Aux approche s du hameau, tout n’é tait que désordre ,
confusion e t desolation. L e s bestiaux , qu’
on avait re tirésde s étables, vag uaient au hasard en poussant de long smugissements. D e s m euble s a demi c onsumes
,des bahuts
de chéne , de s sacs de grain ,des mate las, des court ines de
serg e verte , jonchaient le sol e t e nc ombraient les avenue s.
La,de pauvresfemm e s trainaient par la main leurs pe tits
en guenille s, désormais sans abri ici, toute unefamille se
lamentait sur le s débrisfumants de son humble fortune'
.
Quand C laude e t C atherine entrerent dans lo village ,l
’
incendie avait dévoré deux maisons ; une troisieme étaitenfeu. Attroupée devant la porte d’
ofi la flamme s’éohap
pait comm e d’
un cratere,lafoule inoccupée , mais non in
difi'érente , paraissait att endre , dans un e anxiété que nous
devons renoncer a décrire , lo dénofi em ent d’
un drame dontC atherine e t C laude n ’
avaient pu voir le commencement .Tous les occurs paraissaient profondém ent émus 1a paleur
‘
était sur tous le s fronts,1a t erreur: se lisait sur tous les
visag es.
309
Mon onc le ! e st mon onc le s coria C atherine quic he rchait F rancois Paty sans pouvoir lo t rouver. Mon
o nc le e st m ort l ”ajouta- t - e lle
’
en apercevant dans nu groupe‘
la vie ille Marthe , qui se t ordait le s bras e t qu’
on é tait
oblig é de re tenir pour l’ empéche r de se précipite r dans lafournaise .
Voic i ce qui s e tait passeL e s maitres du log is qui brulait n e tant pas encore
revenus de s cham ps, on s’
é tait empressé , aussitot que le
feu avait gagné le toit , d’
en em porter le mobilie r e t les
ustensile s, g isant pele -m éle sur la place de l ’eg lise 0 11 on
le s avait déposés . Tout était sauvé on a pen pres ; on
n’avait guere oublié qu
’un enfant au maillot
,suspendu par
sa lisiere aun clou, le long de la murail le , ainsi que cela
se pratique , encore aujourd’hui, pour la comm odité des
paren ts, daus plusieurs villag es de la Marche e t de la
Bre tagne . On no s’
é tait ap ercu de ce t oubli qu’en ent en
dant le s cris que poussait le pe tit malheureux , au milieudu craquement de s poutres e t du pét il lement de la flamme .
On voulut courir ; il n’
était plus temps.
L’incendie avait t out envahi
,e t pas nu de l
’assistanc e
ne se sentait le c ourag e d’
afi'
ronter l’
é lém ent t errible . U ne
mere seule l ’eut osé . L e pauvre pe t it criait toujours, carsa mere n
’était pas 1a.
C’
e st alors que , sans song er a son grand ag e et ne
consultant que son imm ense charit é , F rancois Paty, quis
’était m ontré partout dans c e désastre , encourag eant les
uns,dirig eant le s autre s, conso lant les vic tim e s
, désig nantla cure comme un refug e t oujours ouvert aux pauvre s e t
aux afflig és ; c’
est alors , dis-je , que F rancois Paty s’
était
avanc é au m ilieu des flamme s,aussi calme
,aussi sere in que
lo C hrist marchant sur le s flo t s de la m er irritée .
Vainem ent on s’
était écrié de tout e s parts qu’il n ’
allat
pasplus avan t , qu
’
il courait aune m ort certaine ; vaine
m ent son vicaire , M . Noircl e t la bonne Marthe s’
étaient
efforcés de le re tenir on avait vu sa tet e blanche
s’
enfonc er e t disparaitre dans le g oufi'
re embrasé .
D eux minute s, deux s1 e cle s s’
é taient écoulés, on ne
l ’avait pas vu reparaitre .
C ependant le feu re doublait de fureur. L a mais on
s’
afi'
aissait e t s’
écroulait partie par partie . L a to iture
menacait a chaque instant de s’efi
'
ondrer. L e s cris de
310
l ’enfant avaient ce ssé l’on n
’ent endait plus qu
’un g ronde
me nt sourd , pareil au bruit de la tempet e .
C’
e st surces entrefaite s que C athe rine venait d’arriver.
E n nu instant e l le apprit tout . Son premier crifut ve rs
D ieu,lo se cond
‘
vers C laude . D ieu, ui C laude ne répon
dirent . C laude s’
était p erdu dans la foule . L a paro lehumaine e st impuissan t e a rendre la scene déchirant e quise passa des lo rs dans c e pauvre villag e . E g arée , suppliante
,éperdue , C atherine al lait de l
’
un a l ’autre , em .
brassant ce lui- oi, prenant la main 5. ce lui- la.
Sauve z mon oncle , sauve z - le disait - elle .
“Pas nu dev ous n
’
aura- t - il le courag e de sauv er notre pere a tous ?
Que fe re z - vous, quand vous ne l’
aure z plus C rue ls, e stce ainsi que vous nous aime z Ne suis-je plus votre pe titeam ie , votre p e t ite vie rg e , votre pe tite fée ? D it e s
,parle z ,
ingrats l E st - il un seul de vous que nous n’
ayons c onsoledaus sa peine ? Vous autres
,vous m
’
ave z vue maitre e t
g randir . Vous, vos soeurs sont m e s soe urs e t vous é t e s
m e sfreres. L aisse re z - vous mourir mon onc le , votre ami,
vo tre v ieux pasteur9“Mes enfant s, m e s chers enfants l” disait ason tour lo
papaNo ire l, je suis bien pauvre,maisje prom e ts dix bons
écus a c e lui d ’
entre vousqui voudra se dévoue r pour notrecuré ; song e z que , si nous lo perdons, nous ne trouv erons
pas son pare il . C’
e st fort heureux,
”ajouta- t - il m entale
m en t,
“que mon gueux de fils ne soit pas 1a, car il y laisserait
pour sfir son g ile t , sa ve ste e t ses chausse s .
”
Me samis,me s chersfrere s, nu peu de bonne vo lont é
disait le vicaire sans trop de bruit,sentant bien qu
’
au lieude beaux discours, il aurait dfi p écher d
’
exemple .
“C omment , tas de fainéant s ,” criait Marthe en leur
m ontrant le s poing s,“vous re st ez la le s bras croisés
, quandvotre past eur n
’
a pas craint de se je t er dans c c brasier
pour en tirer nu de vos enfants Vous devrie z etre trophonorés,
'brig ands que vous et e s,de pouvoir vous faire
rotir pour un si brave homme .
”
Tout c e la se disait alafois, au m ilieu d’un trouble e t
d’
un tumu‘lt e dont ri en ne saurait donner l’idée t andis quel
’
inc endie lancait a travers le s t énebres ses g erbe s e t se s
fusée s d’
é tince llc s . On se reg ardait en silence , d’
un air
m orne e t décourag é .
R assemblant c e qui lui re stait de forc e e t d -e nerg ie ,la pe tite vierg e appe la C laude e ncore une fois.
31 2
l l m ’est ,
” disait - e lle,
“facileD
’élever
'
des poulets autour de ma maison
Le renard sera bien habileS
’il ne m
’en laisse assez pour avoir nu cochon.
L e porc as’engraisser cofitera peu de sonIl était
, quand je l’eus, de grosseur raisonnable
J’aurai
,le revendant , de l
’argent bel et bon .
E t qui m’empéchera de me ttre en notre étable ,
Vu ls prix dont il est , une vache e t son veau
Que je verrai sauter au milieu du troupeau ?Perre tte 1adessus saute aussi, transportéeL e lait tombe adieu veau, vache , cochon, couvée !
La dame de ces biens, quittant d’un oeil marri
Safortune ainsi répandue,
Va s’excuser ason mari,
En grand danger d’etre battue .
Le récit enfarce fut faitOn l’appe ls la pot eu lait .
LA Posu ma.
L e sing e qui m ontre la lant erne m agique .
Messieurs les beaux e sprits, dont la prose e t les versSont d
’un style pompeux e t toujours adm irable ,
Mais que l’on n
’eutend point
,écoute z ce tte fable ,
E t tache z de devenir clairs.U n homme , qui m ontrait la lanterne magique
Avait nu singe , dont les tours
Attiraient che z lui grand concours
Jacqueau, c’était son nom
, sur la corde élastique ,
Dansait e t voltigeait au mie iix,Puisfaisait le saut périlleux
,
E t puis surnu cordon,sans que rien ls soutienne
,
L e corps droit , fixe , d’aplomb,
Notre Jacqueaufait tout au longL
’exercice ala prussienne .
U njour qu’au cabare t son maitre était resté
(C’était ,je pense , un jour de fete),
Notre singe en libertéVeut faire nu coup de sa téte .
Il s’en va rassembler les divers animauxQu
’il peut rencontrer clans la vill e
C hiens, chats, poule ts, dindons, po'
urceaux
Arrivent bientOt ala file .
Entre z , cntre z , messieurs,
criait notre Jacqucau,C
’
e st ici, c’est ici qu
’
un Spe ctacle nouveauVous charmera gratis. Oui, m e ssieurs, ala porteOn ne prend po int d
’
argout , je fois tout pour l’honneur.
”
313
A ces mots, chaque spectateurVa se placer
,e t You a porte
La lanterne magique onferm e les vole ts,E t
, par un discoursfait expres,Jacqueau prepare l
’auditoire .
C e morceau vraiment oratoireF it bailler mais on applaudit .
C ontent de son succes,notre singe saisit
U n verre peint qu’il me t dans la lanterne .
11 sait comm ent on le gouverne ,E t crie
,en ls poussant E st - i] rien de pareil
Messieurs, vous voye z le sole'
il,
Ses rayons e t tout e sa gloire .
Voiciprésentement la lune et puis l’histoire
D Adam, d
’
Eve e t des animaux.
Voye z , m e ssieurs,comm e ils sont beaux
Voye z la naissance du monde,
Voye z L es spe ctateurs,dans une nuit profonde ,
E carquillaient leurs yeux, e t no pouvaient rien voirL
’appartem ent , le mur, tout était noir
Mafoi, disait un chat , de toutes les m erveillesD ont il étourdit nos oreilles
,
Le fait est que je ne vois .rien .
Ni moi non plus,disait nu chien.
Moi,disait un dindon
, je vois bien quelque chose ;Maisje ne sais pour quelle causeJe ne distingue pas tres bien.
”
Pendant tous ces discours, le C iceron moderneParlait éloquemment e t ne se lassait point .
Il n’avait oublié qu
’un point
,
C’était d
’éclairer sa lant erne .
Fnonrim .
L a Jeune C ap t ive .
L’epi naissant murit de lafaux respecté
Sans crainte du pressoir, le pampre tout l’ete
Boit les doux présents de l’auroreE t moi
,comme lui be lle
,e t jeune comme lui,
Quoi que l’heure présent e ait de trouble e t d’
ennui,Je ne veux pas mourir encore .
Qu’un st0 1que aux yeux secs vole embrasser la mort
Moi, je pleure e t j
’esp
‘
ere eu noir soufile du NordJe plie et re leve ma tete .
S’il est desjours amers, il en est de si doux
H élas que l mie l jamais n’
a laissé de degoutsQue lle m er n
’a p oint de tempéte ?
314
L’illusionféconde habite dans mon sein.
D’une prison surmoi les murs pesent en vain
J ’ai les ailes de l’e sperance .
E chappée aux réseaux de l ’oise leur crue l,Plus vive , lus heureuse , aux campagnes du ciel
P iloméle chants e t s’élance .
Est - cc amoi de mourir’
l Tranquille je m’endors,
E t tranquille je veille e t ma veille aux remords
Ni mon sommeil ne sont en proie .
Ma bienvenue aujourme rit daus tous les yeuxSur desfronts abattus mon aspe ct , daus ces lieux,
R anime presque de lajoie .
Mon beau voyage encore e st si loin de sa fin l
Je pars, e t des orm eaux qui bordent le chemin
J ’
ai passé les premiers apeine .
Au banque t de la vie apeine commence,U n instant seulement mes lévres out pressé
La coupe en mes mains encore pleine .
Je ne suis qu’au rintemps, je veux voir la moisson
E t,comme le sole
'
de saison en saison,
Je veux achever m on ann ée,
Brillante sur ma tige e t l’honneur dujardin,
Je n’ai vu luire encore que lesfeux du matin
Je veux achevermajournée .
O Mort tu peux attendre éloigne , éloigne - toi
Va consoler les coeurs que la honte , l’afiroi
,
Le pale désespoir dévore .
Pour moi Pal'
e s encore a des asiles verts ;Le monde , des plaisirs le s Muses
,de s concerts
Je ne veux pas m ourir encore .
”
Ainsi, triste c t captif, ma lyre toutefoisS
’
éve illait . E coutant ces plaintes,ce t te voix
,
C es voeux d’une jeune captive
E t secouant le joug dc mesjours lang uissants,Aux douces lois de s versje pliais les accents
D e se bouche aimable e t naive .
C es chants, de ma prison t émoins harmonieux,
F e ront a uel ue amant des loisirs studieuxChem er quelle fut ce tte belle
La grace décorait sonfront e t ses discoursE t
,comme e lle , craindron t de voirfinir leursjours
C eux qui les passeront pres d’
e lle .
A. C HENIE R .
31 6
A une fl eur.
Que me veux- tu, chére fieurette,Aimable e t charmant souvenir?D emi-morte e t demi- coque tte ,Jusqu
’amoi qui t e fait venir?
Sous ce cache t enve loppée ,Tu viens de faire nu lon chemin.
Qu’as—tu vu?que t
’a dit main
Qui sur lo buisson t’a coupée !
N’es- tu qu
’une herbe desséchée
Qui vient achever de m ourir?
Ou ton sein, pret arefleurir,R enferme—t—il une pensée ?
Ta fleur, hélas ! a la blancheurD e la désolante innocence ;Mais de la craintive espéranceTafeuille porte la couleur.
As- tu pour moi que lque message ?Tu peux parler, je suis discre t .Ta verdure est - e lle nu secre t ?
Ton parfum est - il un langage ?
S’il en est ainsi, parle bas,Mystérieuse messagers ;S
’il n
’en est rien, ne réponds pas ;
Dors sur mon coeur, fraiche e t lég‘
cre.
Je connais trop bien cet t e main
Pleine de grace et de caprice,
Qui d’un brin de fil souple et fin
A noué ton pale calice .
C e tte main- la, pe tite fleur,Ni Phidias ui PraxiteleN
’en auraient u trouver la soeur
Qu’en prenant énus pour modele .
E lle est blanche , e lle est douce et be lle,Franche, dit- on, ct plus eucor:A qui saurait s
’emparer d
’e lle
E lle peut ouvrir nu trésor.
Mais elle est sage , e lle est severe ;Quelque mal pourrait m’
arriver.
F leure tte , craignons sa colere .
Ne dis rien, laisse - moi rever.
A DE Mussm .
31 7
L e s C hant s du C repuscule
HYMNIL
C eux qui pieusement sont morts pour la patrieOnt droit n
’aleur cercueil lafoule vienne e t prie .
Entre les us beaux noms leur nom est le plus beau,Toute glorre pres d
’eux passe e t tombe ephemere
E t, comm e ferait une mere
,
La voix d’un peuple entier les berce en leur tombeau.
G loire anotre France éternelleG loire aceux qui sont morts pour e lle !Aux martyrs ! aux vaillants ! auxfortsA ceux
u
t
llu
’enflamme leur exemple ,
Qui ve ent place dans le temple ,E t qui mourront comme ils sont morts
C’es t pour ces morts
,dont l’ombre est ici bienvenue,
Que le haut Pantheon eleve dans la nue ,Au- dessus de Paris, la ville aux mille toursLa reine de nos Tyrs et de nos Babylones,
C ette couronne de colonnesQue le soleil levant redore t ous lesjours !
G loire anotre France éternelle !G loire aceux qui sont morts pour e lle !Aux martyrs l aux vaillants ! auxforts !A eeux qu
’enflamm e leur exem le
,
Qui veulent place dans le temp e ,
E t qui mourront comme ils sont morts !
insi, quand de t els morts sont couches dans la tombe ,E n vain l
’cubli, nuit sombre cuva tout ce qui tombe ,
Passe sur leur sépulcre nous nous inclinons,C haque jour, pour eux seuls se levant plus ndele
La gloire , aube toujours nouvelle ,Fait luire leur m émoire e t redore leurs noms !
G loire anotre France éte rnelle !G loire aceux qui sont m orts pour elle !Aux martyrs ! aux vaillants ! auxfort sA ceux u
’enflamme leur exem
ple ,
Qui ve ent place dans le temp e,
E t qui m ourront comm e ils sont morts !
Vrc'ros Hum) .
318
La. F euille .
De ta tige détachée, D e laforet ala plaine ,Pauvre feuille desséchée , D e lamontagne eu vallon.
vas- tu —“Je n’en sais rien Je vais oule vent me mene ,
L’orage a brisé lo chéne Sansme laindre oum
’efl
'
rayer
Qui seul était mon soutien. Je vais o va toute chose,D e son inconstante hale ine , va 1afeuille de roseLe Z ephyr ou l
’aquilon E t lafeuille de laurier.
”
Depui s ce jourme promene ARNAULT.
Imag e de la vie .
Oh va le volume d’eau Le ven ous- nous revenir 1”
Que roule ainsi ce ruisseau 7 “Nou,‘
mou fils; loin de sasource,Dit nu enfant ase mere . C e rmsseaufuit pour toujoursSur cet te rive si chere E t ce tte onde , dans sa course ,D
’ounous le voyons partir
,E st l’image de nosjours.
”
MAD . Tasru.
LE C H cE U R .
Tout l’univers est plein de sa‘
magnificence
Qu’on l
’adore cc Dieu, qu
’on l
’invoque ajamais !
Son empire a des temps précédé la naissance .
C hantons, publions ses bienfaits.
U NE Vorx.
En vain l’injust e violence
Au peuple qui le loue imposerait silenceSon nom no périrajamais.Le jour annonce aujour sa gloire et sa puissanceTout l
’univers est ple in de sa magnificence.
C hantons, publions se s bienfaits.
Ln C ncaun.
Tout l’univcrs
U NE Vent.
ll donne aux fleurs leur aimable peintureIlfait naitre e t mfirir lesfruitsll leur dispense avec mesure
E t la chaleur desjours e t lafraicheur (les nuits.Le champ qui le s recut les rend ave c usure .
32 0
Pourforcer ta rison tufais de vains effortsLa rage de tes ge ts expire sur tes bords.
Fais sentir ta vengeance aceux dont l’avariceSur ton perfide sein va chercher son supplice .
H élas préts apérir, t’adressent—ils leurs vceux ?
Ils regardent lo cie l,se cours (lesmalheureux.
La nature, qui arle en cc péril extreme
,
Leurfait lever es mains vers l’asile supremeH ommag e que toujours rend nu coeur effrayéAu D ieu que jusqu
’alors il avait oublié
La voix de l’univers acc D ieu m e ra pe lle ;
La terre lapublic .
“E st - cc m oi,”m e it - e lle
,“E st - cc moi qui produis mes riches ornements ?C
’est celui dont la main posa mesfondements .
Sije sers tes besoins, c’e st lui qui me l
’ordonne
L es présents qu’il me fait
,c’est atoi qu
’il les donne .
Jc me pare des fleurs qui tombent de sa main
Il ne fait que l’ouvrir, e t m
’en remplit le sein.
Pour consoler l’e spoir du laboureur avide,
C’est lui qui, daus l
’Egypt e onje suis tro aride
,
Veut qu’au m oment prescrit le Nil
,loin e ses bords
,
ndu sur la laine y porte mes trésors.
moindres o je ts tu eux le
C ontemple seulement l’ar re que je fais croitreMon sue
,dans la racine apeine répandu,
Du tronc ui le recoit ala branche est renduLafeuille
(
le demande , e t la branche fidele ,Prodigue de son bien, le partage ave c e lle .
D e l’éclat de sesfrui tsjustement enchanté.
Ne méprise jamais ces lautes sans beauté,Troupe obscure et timi e
,humble etfaible vul gaire
Si tu sais découvrir leur vertu salutaire ,E lles pourront servira rolonger tesjours.
E t na t’afilige pas si les eurs sont si courts
Toute plante , en naissant,dejarenferme en e lle
D’
enfants qui la suivront une race immortelleC hacun de ce s enfants
,daus mafécondité,
Trouve nu gag e nouveau de sa postérité.
”
Ainsi parle la terre e t charmé de l’entendre ,Quand je vois par ces noeuds
que je ne uis comprendre
Tant d’étres difi
'
érents l’un al autre enc ainés,
Vers une meme fin constamment entrainés,
A l’ordre général conspirer tous ensemble ,
Je re connais partout lamain qui les rassemble ,E t d
’un de ssein si grand j
’admire l ’uni te
,
Non moine que la sagesse e t la simplicité.
RAC INE fils,la Re ligion.
Old spellingforreconnaitre.
831
H ow to writ e a L e tter in F rench with the
assistanc e ofH ossfe ld ’
s E nglish - F rench
C ommercial C orrespondent .
For the direction ofpersons wishing to correspond in French,we give in thefollowing pag es specimens ofletters
,&c .
,in Eng
lish, takenfrom H OSSFE LD ’S English- French C ommercial C orres
pondent these letters, constructed from paragraphs or clauses£rom this work, have injuxtaposition the exact translation, and,
by joining these together, the letter is translated into good
French.
The small figures in these specimens indicate the page ofthebook on which the paragraph or sentence is to be found the
translation ofit is opposite .
The words marked in italics are to befound in the vocabularygiven at the end ofthe C orrespondent , and are variations intro
duced in the text , thus enabling the writer to subdivide the
phrases to .an unlimited extent .
Therefore , the pupil who wishes to learn to correspond in
French by this me thod, has
F irst to select the phrasesfrom the English part ofthe C orrespondent , put them t ogether from the beginning t o
the end, so that they form the le tter he Wishes to
write
Second to copy the translation ofthese phrases.
By doing so he will have the corre ct translation ofhis lett erinto French and, by using the C orre spondent in this way daily
for afew months, he will be able to correspond in Frenchwithout
further assistance .
French G rammar
32 2
London, September 2 9th, 1 83'
Messrs. ROGER SON, Marse illes.36
G entlemen,”8
We have the pleasure ofinforming you that‘1 the H appyis a fine three -masted vessel,"2 constructe d and arranged upon thenewest principles and those most recommended by experienceher sails, chains and rigging are entire ly new,
98 she is a fine
sailer,92and her accommodation -
enables her to carryfowrte en passengers.
”8 She is registered at “Veritas’s and at
Lloyd’s Al .”
The C aptain, Mr. Thompson, is a daring sailor he passesfor an honourable man,96 temperate , active, resolute ,” and speaksseveral languages correct ly.
98
Placing our services at your disposal,” we shallfeel flatte red
should you findfrequent occasion to make use ofthem.“
Believe us to be, gentlemen, your obedient servants]l
W. BR OWN C o.”
Mnemoo'
l, October 5ih,Mr. Jurns G AUDIN, Bordeaux.
“
Sir,“
We regret to have to inform you that“2 your ship “TheLondon” became a total wreck at two o
’clock this morning.
“She stranded last night at e leven o
’clock12 0 on the rocks of
A heavy sea has swept away all that remained on deck,1 2 1
and
already some boxes and casks, belonging to the cargo, have beenpicked up on the beach.
12 2 The representative ofthe underwriters has assumedfrom this day the direction ofthe salvage.“1The first care has been to set about unloading the vesse l” by em
ploying two steam~crancs.
12 5 This work is extremely well conducted.
1 18 A good portion ofthe cargo has not come into contact
with the sea-water,” and it would appear that the cargo has not
suffered the serious damage that had been apprehended.119 The
goods are temporarily at the wharf, under a tent that we havefitted up expressly .
‘2°
D esirous ofserving you in every way possible we shouldfe e l greatly obliged by your replying by re turn ofpost,"and
have the honour, Sir, to offer you our sincere regards."oD e anna Bsornnns.
32 4
Stett'in,October 1 2 th,
Messrs. J. H . MEYE R Bremen.”
G entlemen,R eferring to myformer communications I beg the favour of
your taking the necessary steps in order to efi'
ect the insurance
against all ordinary sea risks oil” the brig C arl H einrich,
”boundfrom Ste ttin for Hamm mh fi” She has only been built threeyears, her register at Lloyd
’s is Al , and that at Veritas
’s
I fix (jefime) upon the round sum of marks as the amount
ofinsurance , to which must be added charges ofevery kind, premiums included?”
The insurance is intended to cover the entire voyage, that isto say, it is to extend to the discharge in the last -mentioned port .
130
H oping that you willfavourme with an early reply,"I am,
gentlemen, with much e ste em,
69
AD OLPH H OSSFELD .
Birmingham , October 6th,Messrs. Wren H ORNSEY, London.
G entlemen,We beg you to effect at once , without the least delay, a policy
ofassurance against all sea risks upon the various goods whichwe are now shipping on board the ship The R oyal G eorge ,
”129
boundfrom ( en pM a/ncc dc) London1 28for (pour) Bombay, and ofwhich you will find annexed a complete inventory, with detailedvaluations :130
1 2 boxes ofvarious £ 1 72
6 table - knives 96
2 pen- knives 40
3 pocke t - knives 36
6 e lectro plate d table - spoons andforks 1 2 0
2 desert spoons andforks 45
2 tea- Spoons, &c. 38
8 miscellaneous electro -plated goods 1 16
60 rifles8 revolvers 478
When shipping these goods you will take care to be insured,regulating yourvaluation according to the amount on the invoice
Forall these words see vocabulary.
32 5
and adding to it and the expenses for freight .mo We hopeyou will do all in your power to arrange mat ters on the most advantageous terms.
182
Trusting that you will reply to us with your usual promptitude ,77 we salute you, gentlemen, most cordially .
70
for R . BENOT NE PHEW,
C . MOR ET.
Brussels, November 5th, 18
Messrs. G ARNE T BR OTH E R S,Paris.
G entlemen,We have the honour ofacquainting you that ,“1 according to
the arrangements concluded be twe en us,148 we have taken the
liberty to draw upon you a draft for frs.6,350, at 2 months’ date
,
to the order ofMr. A. R ASSAE RTS.
1“ We re comm end this arrangement to your good reception,
144requesting you to give us an early
answer,
76 '
and remain with the most sincere regard,70
p.p. JOH N BE C K 00 .
D . S . LAYAR D .
Paris, November 7th,
Messrs. JOHN BE C K C o .,Brusse ls.
G entlemen,We have rece ived your letter ofthe 5th inst
,56 advising that
you have drawn on us at 2 month’
s’ date to the order of
Mr. A. RASSAER TB,for the sum of Your drafts shallalways mee t with prompt protection .
1155
Please to dispose ofour services on every occasion, and“ao
cept the expression ofour respectful andfriendly compliments,71
G ARNE T BR OTH ER S.
32 6
Edinburgh, October 15th,
Messrs. MCPHERSON C O., Dublin.
G entlemen,We hasten to inform you that41 under yesterday ’
s date wehave drawn on you the following drafts
840 at 2 1 days’ date to the order ofJ. FE R R IE R .
450 at 14 A. MAR TIN.
totalwhich we beg you to honour, debiting the same to our account)“We . should feel greatly obliged by your replying by return
ofpost.76A. MCMILLAN SONS.
Dublin October 18th,
Messrs. A. MCMILLAN S038 , Edinburgh,
G entlemen,We much regre t that we are unable to honour the two drafts
drawn upon us to the order ofJ. F E R R IER and A. MAR TIN in ao
cordance with your advice ofthe 1 5th inst . 164The rules ofour house do not pe rmit us to accord our ao
ceptance to your drafts of without holding se curityiftherefore you should be unable to make usremit tance at once ,we shall be compelled to allow your two before -mentioned draftsto be re turned under prote st . 166
In any other circumstances we should not hesitate to provide your drafts with our acceptance .
166
We have the honour to remain, yours re spectfully,70
MCPH ER SON C o.
R ouen, October 3oth,Mr. JOHN ELL IS, D over.
Sir,
We regre t to have to inform you that the bill offrs.3,2 60. 50a
upon Mr. LOUIS R OU VE NAT, which'
accompanied your le tte r ofthe 2 oth inst . was not paid when due .
1 66 We were compelled
32 3
negotiate them at the mostfavourable exchange, carrying the proceeds to my (man) credit.mo
Should you anticipate an improvement in the rates ofex.
change , it would be we ll to waitm
Accept, dear Sir, the assurance ofmy sincere attachment.69G EO. WALD OW.
Bremen, October 3lst,
Messrs. SLU ITEN C od;Amsterdam.
G entlemen,It is ofimportance to us to be informed as to the position
and responsibility ofthe house ofMessrs. VANDEVYER MUR TENofyour place .
102 We have be en informed that it has be en severe lytried by the recent financial disasters, and that it is at presentseriously embarrassed.
193 Your Opinion on this subject would beofgreat value to us,193 a/nd we should be very grateful to you ifyou .would have the kindness to inform us what ground there isfor these reports, which , greatly alarm us !”
Assuring you that your communication will be used w ith
the utmost discretion)” we should fee l greatly obliged by yourreplying by return ofpost.76
NoLTxE MUNZ IG.
Amsterdam, November 3rd,Messrs. NOLTHE MUNZ IG, Bremen.
G entlemen,In reply to yourfavour ofthe 3lst ult. ,53we b eg to inform
you that“the house , concerning which you enquirem4 is awealthhouse , no doubt, but not free from a certain amount ofdiarepute ;194 while, in a legal point ofview
,it has hitherto .me t its
obligations, it has the name ofhaving be en mixed up in various
speculations ofa questionable nature , and its good faith appearsnot to be everything that could be desired .
194
We will write to you more at length on this subject81 in a
few days.81Not having the exact address ofour mutualfriend Mr. JOR
DAN, we rely upon your good office s to transmit the enclosed to
him,“and please accept, with our thanks in anticipation,“the
expression ofour respe ctful andfriendly compliments.71
SLOITEN C o .
32 9
R otterdam ,D ecember 5th,
Mr. ANTON SANDMANN,Lube ck .
SIR ,In spite ofthe alarming news daily put in circulation by
certain speculators, the marke t do es no t lose its firm asPe ct ,”3
Price s are we ll sustained ; the demand fluctuates ; but confidencein the future is so great that prices undergo no
C ertain articles se emed on the point ofgiving way nothing ofthe kind has occurred
,however, and the marke t has a firm
aspe c t . 197
We are inclined to think , considering the firmness ofthemarke t , and the marked increase in the demand, that 199speculatorsare operating for an advance .
2 00
This circumstance , combinedwith the regular increase in theconsumption at this season ofthe year, we regard as a sure
indication ofa rise within a short period .
2 00
C offe es are firmly he ld ;2 08 600 bags ofPort R ico coffe e havebeen disposed ofat
Sugars ke ep up we ll ;2 08 there have be en sold within the lastthre e days 800 chests ofHavannah at 600 boxes ofJavaat 209 and about 350 casks ofvarious growths, the prices ofwhich have not transpired.
2 10
C ocoa is in reque st , but?08 molasses are flat . 2°8— A lot of400
pocke ts ofC eylon cinnamonfound a purchaser atR ice with difliculty ho lds its position.
2 08casks (tierces)
have be en sold at 2 1° —Barley is also in fair demand ;bags ofpe arl -barley have be en purchased in three days forexportation.
2 10
Placing our services at your disposal, we are ,76 sirs, yours veryfaithfully .
82
AMHOR ST C o .
H arm , November 4th,Mr. JOHN E s s Bristol.
D ear Sir,
I should have had the pleasure ofreplying soone r to your
este emed note of had it not been for our desire to furnishonly categorical and precise data.
69
Our marke t has been oflate in such a languid condition that ,notwithstanding the low rates now ruling, there is a general
expectation ofa decline in most articlesfor exportation.
205
350,
In wines, spirits,&c . , only insignificant transactions havebe en
effected. During the lastfortnight there have be en reported no
more than 65 hogsheads ofBordeaux, 34 pipes ofbrandy , and 50cases ofC hampagne .
2 13
The Languedoc, at our marke t , are Offered at frs. the
hecto litre ; buye rs are wanting .
2 M Superior qualitiesfe tch fromto the hectolitre .
2 M
As regards rums, there are no arrivals. Martinique fromse cond - hand might be bought at
C ognacs continue to decline . Many samples are offered, butthe number oftransactions remains very restrict ed, buyers count
ing , right ly or wrongly, upon a stillfurther depre ciation.
2 14
This week 500 barre ls ofEnglish be er have been disposedofbut holders had to make great concessions .
2 13
I have the honour to be , with great re spe ct, sir, your most
obedient servant,70
A. QUENTIN.
F rankfort , November 7th,
Messrs. BOR DE S LANGH OR ST, Bradford.
G entlemen,I have re ce ived the le tt er you did me the honour ofwriting
the 3rd inst . , by which you confirm the transfer that Messrs. H ILLC O. ofBremen have made to my office ofyour circular le tter
ofcredit for marks (twe lve thousand) in favour ofMr.
JOHN MANNER S .
1 78
You also advise m e ofyour circular le tter ofcreditformarks(ten thousand) infavour ofMr. H ENR Y JAC KSON.
1 78
I have taken due note ofthese two le tters ofcredit,in order
that they may be duly attended to, 178 and I shall repaymyse lfbydebiting your a/o, and by sending you the re ceipts.
178
Accept , gentlemen, the assurance ofmy sincere attachment .69H . SOH R OED E R .
L ondon, D ecember 18th,
Messrs. P. MC C AR THY C o . ,Belfast .
G ent lem en,
You will receive enclosed an order, with all ne cessary lnformation, re lative to the purchase of 2 2 7
The utmost price to which we would go for these goods isabove this figure nothing could be done fi’m We are willing to
332
L ondon,October 1 4th,
Mr. R . DAVID , Bordeaux.
Sir,
We have just received by the steame r Ebro,arrived yester
day, your shipment advised by le tter OfSept ember 3oth, and
invoice ofthe same dat e .
27 1 C onformably to your dire ctions, wehave transmitted to Me ssrs. L . PH IL IPS SON2 79 the ( les) 2 0hogsheads ofBordeaux.
2 13 The (les) 16 Pipe s OfBrandy and 90
cases ofC hampagne?“are temporarily at the wharf, under a tent
that we have fitted up expressly ?“
Be assured, sir, that on all occasions we shall be happy tore ceive your orders, and in the m eantime we beg you to accept75
our kindest regards.”
TANN C O .
Brest,D ecember l st
,
MEssns. L . BR ANDE S SON, C ardiff.
G entlemen,
We beg to inform you that40 for several years the iron inwhich you principally deal, had be en confined to our port bymeans ofspecialmarkets.
“5 To - day, the Minister ofMarine , acceding to representationsforfavouring industry and compe tition,has de cided that this supply shall only be made by contract , un
der sealed tenders.
W
As it might be convenient for you to agree to compe te forthis contract, we offer you our services to repre sent you and
make stipulations in your name .
2 46
This business is sufficientlyfamiliar to us to make it certain
that we could we ll serve the interests ofthose who may confidein us.
m
The m inimum for each yearwill be tons, and the maxi
mum for each year tons.
24'l
R equesting you to give us an e arly answer,76 we remain, with
the most sincere regard,"yours veryfaithfully,82
ALLARD Banner.
333
C I R C U L A R S .
Liverpool,November 14th,
D ear Sir (D ear Sirs) ,I beg to inform you that I have e stablished a general com
mission business in this town.
Having ample means and good commercial connections, Iam in a position satisfactorily to attend to any orders that maybe entrusted to me .
I therefore take the liberty to Offeryou my services, assuring
you beforehand that I shall always devote my best attention to
your inte rest .I subjoin my signature , ofwhich please to take note .
I remain, D ear Sir,Your obedient servant,341
W. SANTON.
R eferencesLiverpool: Me ssrs.
London : Messrs.
L ondon, November 306k,
Sir ( G entlemen) ,We beg to inform you that we have commenced business
here underthe firm ofBROWN, JACKSON LOMAN.
We intend to Operate in colonial produce on a large scale ,e specially in coffee and cocoa.
We shall have great pleasure in receiving your business pro
posals or orders to any extent .
In requesting you to enter into business relations with us,
we beg you will rely on the conscientious care which we shallalways give to any transaction confided to us.
Please to take note Ofour signatures atfoot, and be lieve us,Sir ( G entlemen),
Yours respectfully}mBR OWN, JAC KSON LOMAN.
Mr. BR OWN will signJAC KSONLOMAN
334
a corn, D ecember 31st,
Sir ( G entlemen) ,I beg leave to inform you that on the first ofJanuary next
I shall make overmy wholesale business in chemicals and drugsto my nephew,
Mr. LONGWOOD , who has been in my employ forthe last ten years, and to Mr. ALLEN.
The means at the disposal ofthese gentlemen, added to the
capital I shall put into the concern, will enable them to carry on
the business satisfactorily.
I thank youfor the confidence you have had the kindne ss toshow me , and beg ofyou to transfer the same to my successors,
who will do their utm ost to deserve the same .
I am,Sir ( G entlemen),
Yoursfaithfully,m
JAME S SULLIVAN.
(Annexed to the preceding.)
Runcorn, Jan/wary lst,
Sir ( G entlemen),R eferring to the annexed circular, we beg to inform you that
we have this day taken over the wholesale chemical and. drugbusiness OfMr. JAME S SULL IVAN.
The style ofthe new firm will be
LONGWOOD ALLEN.
We entertain the hope that you will continue tofavour uswith the same confidence you accorded to our predecessor, andwhich it shall be our endeavour to prove ourse lves worthy of.We request you to take note ofour signatures atfoot , and
remain, Sir ( G entlemen) ,Your obedient servants
,“
LONGWOOD ALLEN.
OurMr. LONGWOOD will signALLEN
336
C OMME R C IAL BIL L S .
DRAFTS .
32 2 . 32 3
No. 397. £ 443 103. Vera C ruz , 1 5th January,
Three months aft er dat e , pay this first ofexchang e (the second
and third not paid) to the order ofMessrs. MAR SALA C o . ,the sum of
Fourhundred andforty - three Pounds t en shillings, at the exchang e
rat e as per endorsem ent , value re ceived, and which place to the accountofMessrs. J. FE RNAND E Z C o . , as per advice .
To Mr. BANNE R , Manchest er. Signature .)Payable in London .
No . 583. E vn . Marseilles, March 6th,
At sight , please pay this second ofexchange (the first not
having been paid), to Mr. G UE R R E R O, or order, the sum ofRvn . Six te enthousand six hundred, value received, and plac e the same to account
,
with orwithout further advice , ofW . S . H AR R IS C o .
To Mr. J. SER RANO, Madrid. Signa ture .)
No . F . 7503 . Manchester, 2 nd March,
Two months after date , pay this bill ofexchange to our order, the
sum ofNineteen thousand and seventy Francs 75c ., value rece ived,which place to account as per advice .
“To Mr. LE LONG , Lyons . Signa ture .)
PROMISSORY NOTES ?”
R vn . Barcelona, November 3oth,
One year from this date we promise t o
Ipey t o Mr. R OVIG O, or
order,the sum ofEvn . Three thousand five undred, value received
in cash . L . ARMIG O 8; C o .
£ 460 158 . Dublin, D ecember 1 7th,Three months aft er date , I promise t o pay t o Messrs. MAC KE Y
C o . , or order, the sum ofFour hundred and sixty Pounds 15 Shillings,value re ceived in goods, with int erest comput ed upon the said sumfrom this day, at five per cent . per annum .
PATR IC K O'C ONNOR .
REC E IPTS .
32 6
L iverpool, D ecember Sl st, 1 8
R eceived ofMr. MOR E TON the sum ofOne thousand Pounds St erling , on account Ofcredit opened in my name by Messrs. MILLO
'I
BR OTH E R S OfR ouen, as per their le tter ofadvice ofthe 2 7th inst .
H ENR Y PARKE R .
R eceived ofMr. H AYE S the sum ofSix hundred and fifty Pounds,advanced upon deposits oft itle deeds.
L eeds, November l 6th, 1 8 . SALOMON R OSENBE RG .
REG ULAR dz IR REG ULAR .
A . P . H U G U E NE T.
C O N T E N T S .
PAG E PAG E
Definitions 3 C ompound tenses conjugated
Formation ofthe Tenses with etre
The auxiliary verbTransitive verbsusedpassively 2 0
avoir, t o have 8 R eflective verbs
The auxiliary verb C onjugation ofverbs used
etre,t o be negatively
The verb atme r, to love C onjugation ofverbs p sed in~
(l st C onjugation) t errogatively and int er
The verb punir, t o punishrogatively and negatively
( 2 nd C onjugation) Irregular and defe ctive verbs
The verb recevoir, to receive1 st group
(3rd C onjugation)2 nd group
The verb rendre, to renderG overnment ofverbs
(4th C onjugat ion) 1 5 Table ofthe endings OfFrenchC ompound t enses conjugat ed Verbs (R egular and Ir
With avoir regular)
LONDON
H IR SC HFELD BROS ,BR EAMS BU ILD ING S,
FETTER LANE ,E C .
4
4 . R e fl e c t ive , Pronom inal , and R e c ipro ca l V erbs .
R eflective and pronominal verbs are used when the action is
performed by the subject on itse lf.
Il se brt‘
cla, he burnt himself; ils se souviennent, they remember.
R eflective verbs are transitive verbs which are conjugatedwith two personal pronouns ofthe same prrson, the one in the
nominative case , as a subje ct , and the other in the accusative case ,
as an object or complement .
Pronominal ve rbs are verbs which can never be used w ithouttwo pronouns, as se repente
’
r, to repent se souvemr
, to rem ember
se moquer, to mock , &c .
R eciprocal verbs are those which,be ing identical inform to
reflective and pronominal verbs, express that the action has beenexchanged between two ormore persons.
Ils se saluent, they salute each other.
Ils se haissent,they hate o ne another.
Ils s'éertvent, they write to one another.
5 . Im p e rsonal V e rbs .
Impersonal verbs are those which can onl y be used in the
third person singular.
Ilp leut, it rains il neige, it snows; ilfaut, it is necessary.
6 . D efe c t ive V e rb s .
D efective verbs are those which are not used in all tense s
as gesir, to lie ouir, to hear elore, to close sourdre, to spring
tistre, to weave ; &c.
TENS E S and MOOD S .
Te ns e s .
Tenses are the inflexions ofverbs by which they are made tosignify that the action took place , takes place , or will take placeat a certain tim e .
There are in reality only thre e tenses, pas t, present, and
future ; but a past action may have taken place at a more or
fiss remote time
,and afuture action could take place sooner or
ter.
This is why there are diffe rent past and future t enses, whilethe re is only one pre sent tense .
M o ods .
The moods are inflexions ofthe verb which indicate in whatmanne r the assert ion expressed by the verb is made .
The re are five moods, asfollows
1 . The indicative,which simply expre sses an affirmation.
Il parle francais, he speaks French .
2 . The imperative expre sses an order or a prayer.
Parlez,speak. D onnez -moi un morceau de pain, give me a.
pi ece ofbread.
3. The conditional indicates that the action is subject to a con
dition.
Je chanterais si vous le vouliez , I would sing ifyou liked it .4. The subjunctive always depends on another verb which pre
cedes it, and which generally expresses an idea ofdoubt
,tear
,
uncertainty or negation .
Je doute qu ll vienne,I doubt whe ther he may come .
Je crains qu’
il ne soit malade , I fear that he may be ill .
Il n'e st pas sfir qu
’
ilparle , it is not sure that he may speak.
5. The infinitive expresse s the affirmation in an indefinitemanner, without referring to numbers or persons.
11 est utile d’
e’
tudier, it is useful to study. C’
e st en lisant qu’
on
s’
instruit , it is by reading that one becomes learned.
F o rm at ion oft h e T e nse s ofF rench V e rb s .
Besides the division of-the Verb into simple and compound
tenses,which is comm on to languages in general, F rench G ram
mar divides the t enses into two categories—primitive and
derivative tenses.
The primitive tenses are those which serve to form the
others thev are five in number
The present ofthe infinitiveThe present participle
The past participle
The present indicative
The past definite.
The derivative tenses are , as their name indicates, those whichare form edfrom the prim itive tenses.
6
1 . The INF INITIVE PRE SENTforms two tenses
a . Thefuture absolute, by the chang e ofr, air, or re into rat
aim er j'aime - ra z. to love I shall lore .
punir je puni- ro i . to punish 1 shall pun ish .
re revoir je rec e v- rai. to rece ive : I slur/l receive .
l endre je rend- rail. to render I shall render.
b. The present conditional, by the change ofr, air, or re into rais
aimer jaime- rais . to love I shoul d love .
punir: je puni- m is . to punish : I should punish.
recevoir je rece v - ra is. to receive I should rece ive .
rendre je rend- rais . to render I should render.
2 . The Pnnsnxr PAR TIC IPLE forms thre e,or rathe r two and
a. halftense s
The thre e persons plural ofthe present ofthe indicat ive,by the
change ofant int o 0 713,ez
,ent
aimant nous aim - ans,
vous loving we love , you love , they love .aim- es, ils aim - ent .
punisSant : nous puniss- ons
,vous punishing :we punish ,you purush ,
puniss- ez
,ils puniss
- ent. they punish.
rendant nous rend- ans,
vous rendering we render, you rem /er,
rend—oz , ils rend- cut. they render.
Exception— Verbs in air (third conjugation) end in the third person
plural ofthe indicative in airent, and not in event :
recevant : nous re cev - ons, vous receiving we receive, you rece ive
,
recev - ez,ils re c
- o ircnt . . they receive .
b. The imperfect ofthe indicative, by change ofant into ais.
aimant jaim- d is. loving I was loving .
punissant je puniss- ais. punishing I was punishing .
re cevant je re cev- ais . receiving I was rece irz’
ng .
rendant :je rend- d is . rend ering I was rendering .
c. The presen t ofthe subjunctive, by the change ofant into 6
aimant que jaim—e . loving : that I may lore .
pifnissant que je puniss - e . pun ishing that I may puni» h.
rendant que je rend- e . rendering tha t I may render .
8
Th e Aukiliary V erb avo ir,
t o hav e .
Pre sent IND ICATIVE (IndicatifPresent).jai, I have. no us avons
,we have .
tu as, thou hast. vouz ave z, you hav: .
il (elle) a, he ( she, it) has. ils (e lles) out , they have .
Imperfect (Imparfait).javais, I had. nous avions, we had .
tu avais,thou hadst. vous aviez , you had .
il (elle ) avait , he ( she , it) had . ils (elles) avaient , they had
Past D efinite (Passe'defini).
j’eus, I had. nous efnnes, we had .
t n eus, thou hadst. vous efit e s , you had.
ii (elle ) eut , he ( she , it) had . ils (elles) eurent , they had.
1st Future (Futur absolu).
j’
aurai, I shall orwi ll have . nous aurons,we sha ll or w ill have .
tu auras, thou w ill have . vous aurez, you will hare .
il(elle) aura, he ( she , it) w ill have . ils (elles) auront , they will have .
IST C OND ITIONAL (C onditionnel present).3aurais, I should or would have . nous aurions, we should orwould.
tu aurais, thou wouldst have . vous aurie z, youwould have[have .
il (elle) aurait , he would have . theywould have .
IMPE RATIVE (Impératif).aie , have ( thou) . ayons, let us have . ayez , have ( ye) .
Present SUBJUNC TIVE (Subjone tifpresent).que j
’
aie , that I may or should que nous ayons, that wemay have .have
, that I have .
que tu aies, that thou mayest have . que vous ayez , that you may have .
qu'il ait
, that he may have . qu’
ils aient,that they may have .
Imperfect (Imparfait).que j
’
eusse , that Imight or should que nous eussions, that we mighthave
,tha t I had . have .
que tu eusses, that thou mightest que vous eussiez , that you m ighthave . have .
qu'
il edt , that he might have . qu'
ils eussent, that they might
have
Present INFINITIVE (Infi nitifpre’
sent).avoir, to have .
Present Part iciple (Participe present).ayant , having .
Past Part iciple (Participe passe).eu
, had.
9
C OMPOUND TENSES.
Perfe ct (Passe indefini).j'ai eu, I have had. nous avons en
,we have had.
t
l
u as eu
hth
fgu hast had. vous avez eu
, you have had.
i 3. en e as had. ils ont eu,elle a
’
eu,she has had. e lle s out an,
they have had.
Pluperfect (P lus-
gue-
parfait).j
’
avais on,I had had. nous avions eu
,we had had.
tu avais on, than hadst had. vous"
avie z eu, you had had.
il avait eu, he had had. ils avaient eu,they had had.
2 nd Pluperfe ct ( l ’asse
’
antérieur).j
’
eus eu, I had had. nous efimes eu, we had had .
tu eus eu,thou hadst had. vous e li t es eu, you had had.
il eut eu,he had had. ils eurent eu
, they had had .
2 nd Future (F utur ante’
rieur).jaurai eu,
I sha ll ha re had. nous aurons eu,we shall have had.
tu auras eu, thou wilt have had. vous aure z eu, you w ill have had.
il aura eu, he will have had . ils auront eu, they will have had .
2 nd C onditional ( Conditionnel passé).jaurais eu, I should havehad. nousaurions eu
,we shouldha vehad .
tuaurais eu, thouwouldst have had. vous aurie z eu,youwouldha ve had.
il aurait en,he would have had. ils auraient eu
,theywould havehad.
Perfe c t SUBJUNC TIVE (Sabjonctifpasseque j
’
aie eu,that Imay have had. que nous ayons eu, that we may
que tu aies eu,that thou mayest have had.
have had. que vous ayez eu, that you mayqu
’
il ait eu, that he may have had. have had.
qu’
ils aient eu, that theymay have
Pluperfe ct (P lus-
que-
parfait).que j
'eusse eu,
that I m ight have que nous eussigns eu, that wemighthad. have had .
que tu cusses eu, that thoumightest que vous eussie z eu, that you mighthave had. have had.
qu'
il efit eu, that he might have qu’
ils eussent eu, that they mighthave had.
Past Infinitive (Infinitifpasseavoir eu, to have had .
Past Participle (Participe
ayant eu,ha ving had.
The imperfect ofthe subjunct ive is often used inst ead ofthe conditional ofthe auxiliary verb :j
’
ansac en, tu cusses an, it cut en, nous cussions eu,vous eussiu
eu, ils eussent eu.
If)
The Auxiliary V e rb“t re ,
"t o be .
Present IND IC ATIVE (Indicatifpresent).ie Sl fis, I am. nous sommes, we are .
tu es. thou art. vous étes, you are.
il ( e lle) est , he ( she , it) is. ils (elles) sont , they are.
Imperfe ct (Imparfait).J etnis, I was. nous étions, we were .
tu étais, thouwast vous étiez , you were .
i1 (elle) était , he ( she, it) was . ils (elles) éta1ent , they were .
Past D e finite (Passe defiui).
jefus, I was.tufus, thouwast. ousffit es, you were .
il (elle)fut , he ( she , it) was . s (elles)furent , they were.
1 st Future (F utur absolu).
je serai, I shall be . nous serous, we shall be .
tu seras, thouwilt be . vous serez, you w ill be .
il (elle ) sera, he ( she, it) w ill be. ils (elles) seront , they will be .
1 st C OND ITIONAL ( Conditionnelpresent).
je semis, I should be . nous serions, we should be .
tu semis, thou wouldst be . vous seriez , you would be .
( she, it) would be . ils (elles) seraient , they would be .
IMPE R ATIVE (Impératif).sois, be ( thou) . soyons
,let us be. soyez , be ( ye) .
Present SUBJUNC TIVE
que je sois, tha t I may be , that I que nous soyons, that we may be.
be .
que tu sois, tha t tho u. mayest be . Ique vous soyez , tha t you may be .
qu’
iisoit, that he may be .|qu
’
ils soient , t hat they may be
Imperfect (Imparfai t).quejefusse , that Imight or should que nousfussions, thatwemight be .
be, that I were .
que tufusses, that thoumightest be . que vousfussie z , that youmight be .qu
’
ilfut , that he might be . qu’
ilsfussent , that they might be .
Pre sent INF INITIVE (In/mitt] present).(She , to be.
Present Participle (Participe present).étant , being .
Past Participle Participe
été, been.
1 2
Th e F our R e g ular C onjug at ion s .
All French verbs end either in er ( l st C o njugat ion), in ir ( 2 nd C onj. )in air (3rd or in re (4th C onj. ) thence four ways ofC ONJUgat ing regular verbs, orfour regular C onjugat ions.
S im p le Te nse s ofaim - er,t o love . ( F irst C o njugation.
P 4 Pre sent IND ICATIVE (Indicatifpresent).j
’
aim - e,I love , I am loving . nous aim - ons, we love .
tu aim- es, thou lovest . vous aim - e z, you love .
il ( elle) aim - e,he ( she , it) loves . ils (e11es) aim - ent , they love
D 2 Imperfe ct (Imparfait).Jaim
- sis, I was le i- ing . nous aim - ions, we loved .
tu aim - sis, thou lovedst. vous aim - ie z , you loved .
il (e lle ) aim - ait , he ( she , it) loved . ils (e lle s) aim - aient,the-y loved.
P 5 Past definite (Passe ( ll
j’
aim - ai,I love rl. nous aim—fim e s
,w e loved .
tu aim - as, thou lovedst . vous aim - i t e s, you loved.
il (e lle) aim - a,he ( she , it) loved . ils (e lles) aim—erent
,they loved.
D l st F uture (F a tw absolu).
j'aim - erai
,I shall orwill love . nous aim - arons
,we shall love .
tn aim - eras,thou shalt love . vous aim - erez , you sha ll love .
il ( e lle ) aim - era,he ( she , it shall ils (elles) aim - eront
,they shall
love . love .
D 1 l ess C OND ITIONAL (C onditionnelpresent).j'aim- erais, I should orwould love . nous aim - erions , we should love .
tn aim- e rnis, thou w ouldst love . vous aim - erie z , you would lore .
il ( elle ) aim - em it , he ( she , it) ils ( e lles) aim - em ient,they would
would love . lo ve .
D 4 IMPE R ATIVE (Impératif).aim-a, love ( thou) . aim - ons
,let us love . aim - ez
,love ( ye) .
D 2 Pre sent SUBJUNC ‘TIVE (Subjonctifpresent).que 3 im - e , that I m ay love . que nousaim
- ions, thatwemay love
que tn aim - os,that thou mayest que vous aim - iez
,that you may
love . [may love . love . [may love .
qu’
il (elle ) aim - e,that he ( she , i t) qu
'
ils (elle s) aim - ent , that they
D 5 Impe rfe c t[might love .
que j’
aim - asse,that [ might love . que nous aim - assions, that we
que tn aim -asses,that thoumight que vous aim - assiez , that you
est love . lit) might love . might love . [might lore .
qu’
il ( elle ) aim -fit , that he ( she , qu’
ils (e lle s) aim - assent,that they
P 1 Present INF INITIVE (Infinitifpresent). aim - er, to love ,
P 2 Pre sent participle (Part-icipe present). aim - ant,loving .
P 3 Past participle (Participe passe). aim - é,aim ée , loved .
P Primitive t ense s. D D e rivat ive t e nses . D erivat ive tense s are marked w ith
the same number as the Driinit ive t ensesfrom Which they are derived .
S IMPLE TENSES ofpun - ir,to punish (Second Conjugation).
P 4 Present IND IC ATIVE (Indicatifpresent).je pun- i
tu pun- is, thou punis
-hostil (e lle) pun- it
, he ( she, it)punishes
nous pun- issons, we punish.
vous pun- issez , you pun ish. D2
ils e lles) pun- issent , they
p unish.
D 2 Imperfect (Imparfait).je pun~issais, I punished, I was
punishing .
tu pun- isse is, thou punishedst .
il ( e lle ) pun~issait , he ( she, it)punished .
nous pun- issions, we punished.
vous pun- issiez , you punished.
ils (e lles) pun- isse ient , they pun
ished.
P 6 Past definite (Passe‘
deffim) .je pun - is, I punished.
tu pun- is, tho upunishedst Fished.
il (elle ) pun- it, he ( she , it) pun
D 1 l st Future
je pun - irai, I shallp unish .
tu pun - iras, thouwiltpunish.
il (elle ) pun- ire , he ( she, it) will
punish.
D 1 l et C OND ITIONALje pun - irais, I shouldpunish.
tu pun- irais, thouwouldst punish .
il ’
(elle ) pun-irait , he ( she , it )wouldpunish.
nous pun- tines, we punished.
vous pun- ites, you
ils (e lles) pun- ircut , theypunished .
(Futur absolu).nous pun
- irons, we shall punish.
nous pun- ire z ,
'
you will punish.
ils ( e lles) pun- iront , they will
punish.
( C onditionnel present).nous pun
- irions, we should punishvous pun
- iriez, you should punish.
ils (elles) pun- iraient , they should
punish.
D 2 IMPE R ATIVE (Impératif) .pun
- is, punish ( thou) . pun - issons, let uspunish . pun- issez ,punish ( ye)
D 2 Present SUBJUNC TIVE
queje pun- isse , that Imay punish.
[pun ish
que tu pun- isses, that thou mayest
qu’
il ( e lle) pun-isse , that he ( she ,
it) maypunish.
que nous pun- issions, tha t we.
mightp unish. [punish
que vous pun- issiez , that you mayqu
’
ils (elles) nu- issent , tha t theymaypunis
D 4 Imperfe ct (Imparfait).que je pun
-isse , that I m ight
[est punishpunish
que tu nu- isses, that than might
qu’
il (efie) pun- it , that he ( she , it)might punish .
que nous pun- iasions, ha t we
might punish. [punishque vous pun
- issie z , thatyou might
qu’
ila (elles) pun- issant, that theymight pun/lish.
P 1 Present INF INITIVE (Infi/nitifpresent).pun
- ir, to punish.
P 2 Present participle (Pant icipe present).pun
- issant , punishing ,
P 3 Pas t participle (Pm-ticipe passe’
pun- i, pun
- ie, pun ished
1 4
SIMPLE TENSES ofre cev - air, to receive (Thad C onjugation.)
P 4 Present IND IC ATIVE (Indicatifpresent).iarec- ois, Ireceive, Iam receiving . nous re c - evens, we receive. 2tu req
- ois,thou rece ivest. vous rec - evaz, you rece ive.
il (elle ) reg- cit,he ( she , it) receives. ils (elles) rec- oivent , they rece ive .
D 2 Imperfe ct (Imparfait).je rec - evais, I received, I was re nous rec - evions, we rece ived.
tu reo - evais, thou receivedst[ceived. vous re c - eviez, yo ureceived.
il ( elle) re c - evait , he ( she, it) re ils (e lles) rec- evaient , they received .
P 5 Past definite (Passe defi/ni).Je rec
-na, I received. nous rec- tim es, we received.
tu rec-us, thou rec eivedst . vous reg- fit es
, you received .
.il (elle ) rec-ut , he she, it) received. ils (elles) reg -m ent , they received.
D 1 l et Future (F utur absolu).
je re c - evrai,I sha ll receive. nous re c - evrons, we sha ll receive .
tn re c - evre s, thou w ilt receive . vous re c - evre z , you will rece ive .
il (elle ) rec - evra, he ( she , it) will ils (elles) rec - ew ont, they will
receive . rece ive .
D 1 l st C OND ITIONAL ( C onditionnel presen t).ia rec - evrais, I should receive . nous rec - evrions,we should rece ive .
tu rec - evrais, thou wou ldst receive . vous rec - evriez, you would receive .
il (elle ) rec - evrait , he ( she , it) ils (elles) rec - evraient , they wouldwou ld receive. rece ive .
D 4 IMPERATIVErec
- ois,receive ( thou) . rec - avons, let us receive . rec - evez
,receive ( ye) .
D 2 Presen t SUBJUNC TIVE (Subjonctifpresent).que je rec- oive , tha t Imay receive . que nous re c - evions, tha t we mayque tu rec
- oives,that thou mayest receive ( receive .
receive . que vous rec- eviez , tha t you mayqu’
il (e lle) rec- cive , tha t he ( she , qu’ile (elles) reg- oivent , tha t they
it) ma y receive . may receive .
D 5 Imperfect (Imparfait).que je reg
- usse , tha t I might que nous rec-assions, that we
receive . [est rece ive . might receive . [might rece ive .
que tu reg- usees, that thou might que vous reg
-ussiez,tha t you
qu’
il ( elle ) reg- fit , tha t he ( she , it), qu’
ils ( ell es) rec- assent,that they
might receive . might receive .
P 1 Present INF INITIVE (Infinitifpresent).rec - evoir, to receive .
P 2 Presen t participle (Participe present).re c - even t, receiving .
P 3 Past “
participle (Participereg
-u, rec-na
,rece ived.
1 6
D 3 C O M P O U N D T E N S E S
C onjug ated W ith avo ir (t o have).
(To this C ateg ory belong all the transitive and the o rity of theintransitive verbs).
Th e Verb AIME R (t o lo ve ).
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Perfect (Passe'indé/ini) .
j'ai aimé , I have loved.
tu as aime, tho uhast loved.
il a aimé. he has loved.
nous avons we have loved.
vous aye z aimé , you have loved.
ils out aimé , they have loved.
Pluperfect (Plus-
que-
parfait).J avais aimé, I had loved.
tu am is aime, thou hadst loved.
il avait aimé, he had loved.
nous avions aimé , we had loved.
vous avie z aimé , you had loved.
ils avaient aimé, they have loved .
2 nd Pluperfec t (Passe'
ante/rieur) .
j’
eus aimé,I had loved.
tu eus aimé , thou hadst loved.
il eut aimé, he had loved.
nous efunes aime, we had loved.
vous cutes aimé, you had loved.
ils eurent aimé, they had lowd.
. 2 nd Future F utur ante‘
ricur).
j’
aurai uimé, I shall have loved.
tu auras uimé, thou w ilt have loved.
il aura aimé, he will have loved.
nous aurons aimé, we sha ll have loved.
vous aure z aimé, you will have low-
( I.
ils auront aimé,they will have loved .
Aft er nvoirkth e past participle never agrees with the subject , but agre es with theobject W en pre c eded by 1
Ex. Nous avons aimé nos parents , we have loved our parents.
L e s parents que nous avons aimes, the parents whom we have loved.
1 7
C ONDITIONAL MOOD.
2 nd C onditional (Passe).
J aurais aime, I should have loved.
tu aurais aimé, thou wouldst have loved.
il aurait aimé , he would have loved .
nous aurions aimé, we should have loved.
vous aim'ie z aimé , you would have loved .
ils auraient aimé , they would have love d.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Perfect
que j'aie aimé, that Imay have loved.
que tu aies aimé, tha t thou mayest have loved.
qu'il ait'
aimé, that he may have loved.
que nous ayons aimé, tha t we may have loved.
que vous aye z aime, that you may have loved .
qu’
ils aient aimé,tha t they may have loved.
Pluperfect (Plus-
que-
parfaitque Jeusse aim é, that Imight have loved .
que tu eusse s aimé, that thou mightest have loved.
qu’
il eut aimé , that he might have loved.
que nous eussions aimé, that we might have loved.
que vous eussie z aimé, that you might have loved.
qu'ils eussent aimé, that they might have loved.
INFINITlVE MOOD.
Past Passe’
avoir aime, to have loved.
Past Participle (Participe passe) .
ayant aimé, having loved.
The following forms are also.
used —J"eusse aim, to, cusses aime, it out aunt,nous eussions aixme
’
, vous euss wz aime , i ls eussent aimé .
1 8
D 3 C OMPOU ND TE NSE S
C onjugate d with etre (t o be ).
(To this Category belong all the refle ctive and afew intransitive verbs.
expressing movement .)
The V e rb TOMBE R (t o fall)INDICATIVE MOOD.
Perfe ct (Passe’
indefini) .
je suis tombé or I havefallen.
tu es tombe or tombée , thou hastfallen.
il est t ombé, he it hasfallen.
e lle est tombée , she ( it) hasfallen .
nous sommes tombés or tombées, we havefallen.
vous étes tombés or tombées , you havefallen.
ils sont tombéselles sont tombées }they havefallen.
Pluperfe ct (Plus -
que—parfait).
Jétais tombé or tombée , I hadfallen.
tu étais tombé or tombée , thou hadstfallen.
il était tombé , he ( it) hadfallen.
elle était tombée , she ( it) hadfalle n.nous étions tombés or t ombées,
“
we hadfallen.
vous étiez tombés or tombée s, you hadfallen.
ils étuient tombéselles etaient tombées they hadfallen.
2 nd Plupe rfe c t ’(Passe’
je fus tombé or tombée , I hadfallen.
tu l'
us tombé or tombée , thou hadstfallen.
ilfut tombé, he ( it) hadfallen.
elle fut tombée , she it hadfallen.
nous fumes tombés or t ombées, we hadfallen.
vous tute e tombés or tombées, you hadfallen.
il furent tombéselles furent tombées they ha dfallen.
2 ud Future (F utur ante/rieur).
je serai tombé or tombée , I shall havefallen.
tu seras tombé or tombée , thou wilt havefallen.
il sera tombé , he ( it) will ha vefallen.
elle sera. tombée , she ( it) will havefallen.
nous serous tombés or tombées, we sha ll havefallen.
vous sere z tombés or tombées, you sha ll havefallen.
ils seront t ombéselles seront tombées }they"n”havefallen.
After th e, the past participle agrees with the subject.
2 0
C onjug at ion ofTransitive Ve rbs U sed Passiv e ly .
Etre sime’
, to be loved.
Present IND ICATIVE (Indicatifpresent).je suis aimé, I am loved. nous sommes aimée , we are loved.
tu es aimé, thou art loved. vous etes aimes, you are loved.
o I an
més11 est aime , he 18 loi ed. ils sont ai they are lovedelle est aime e , she i s loved. elles sont aimees
Imperfec t (Imparfait).3e tais aimé, I was loved. nous étions aimés, we were lom l
tu étais aimé, thou wast loved. vous étiez aimés, you were loved.
il était aimé , he was loved . ils étaient aimée , they were loved.
Past Definite (Passe’
de’
fini).
je fus aimé , Iwas loved. nous fumes aimés, we were loved .
tufus aimé. thou wast loved. vous lutes aimés, you were loved.
ilfut aimé , he was loved. ils furent aimés, the y were loved.
l st Future (Futur absolu).
je serai aime, I shall be loved. s,we shall be lovedtu seras aimé, thou wilt be loved. youwill be loved.
il sera aime, he will be loved. they will be loved .
1st C OND ITIONAL (C onditionnel present).
je sex-
sis aime, I should be loved . nous serious aimés, we should be
loved. [lovedtu sere is aimé, thou wouldst be loved. vous serie z aimée , you would be
il serait aimé, he would be loved. ils seraient aimée , the y would beloved.
IMPERATIVE (Impératif).sois aime, be loved, soyons aimés, let us be loved, soyez aimés, be ( ye)
loved .
Present SU BJUNCTIVE (Subjonctifque je sois aime
,that I may be que nous soyons aimée , tha t we
loved. [be loved. may be loved rm ay be loved.
que tu sois aimé , that thou mayest que vous soye z im e’
s, that youqu'il soit aimé, that he may be qu’
ile soient ain és, th t t theyloved . may be loved.
Imperfect (Impaifuit).que je fusse aimé, that I might be que nous fussions aimés, that weloved. [est be loved . m ight be loved . [might be loved .
que tu fusses aimé, that thoumight que vous fussie z aimés, that youqu'il fut aimé, that he might be qu
’
ils fussent aimée , that theyloved . might be loved.
Present INF INITIVE etre aimé, to be loved.
Present Participle étant aimé, being loved.
Past Participle été aimé, been loved.
2 1
C onjugat ion ofR efl e ctive Ve rbs .
e flat te r, to fla tter one’s self.Present Indicative (Indicatifpresent).
je m e fiat te , Iflatter myself. nous nous flatt ons, we flatte r o urselves. [sul t an
tu t e fiattes, thou flatterest thyself. vous vous flatt ez , youflatter youril se flat t e , heflut ters himself. ilsse flattent , the yflatterthemselves.
Imperfe ctje me flat tais, Iflattered myse lf. nous nous fiattions. we flatteredtu t e flat tais, thouflatteredst thy ourselves. (yourselves.
vous vous flat tiez , you flatteredil se fiat tait , he flattered himself. ils se fiattaient , they flattered
themselves.
Past Definiteje me flat tai, Iflattered myse lf. nous nous flattames, we flatteredtu te flattas, thou flatteredst ourselves. [yourse lvesthyse lf. vous vous fiattates, you flat ten
-v!
il se flat ta, he flattered himse lf. ils se flat terent , they flatteredthemselves.
l st Future (Futur abs olu).je me flat temi, I shallfl atter my nous nous fiatterons, we willfla
self. [thyself ter ourselves. [yourselvestn te Hatteras, thou wi lt flatter vous vousfiat terez ,you willflatte r1] se flat ters , he will flatter him ils se fiatte vont , they will flatter
themse lves.
lst C onditional ( C onditionuelpresent).Je m e fiat terais, I shouldflatt er nous nous fiatterions, we shouldmyself. [ter thyself. flatter ourselves. [ter yourselves.
t ut e flat t erais, thou wouldstflat vous vous fiat teriezmouwouldflatil se flat t erait , he would flatter ils se fintteraient . they wouldflathimself. ter themselves.
Impe rativeflatte - toi
, flat ter thyself. flat t ons- nous, let usflatterourselves .
fiatt ez -vous, flatter yourselves.Present Subjunctive (Subjonetifpresent).
que je me flatte , that ] mayflatter que nous nous fiatt ions,that we
myself. mayflatter ourselves.
que tu t e flat tes, that thou mayest que vous vous fiat tiez , tha t you
fla tter thyself. mayflatter yourselves.
qu'il se flat te , that he mayflatter jqu’
ils so flat tent , that they mayhimself. 1 flatter themselves.
Imperfe c t (Imparfait).que je m e flat tasse , that I might que nous nous fiattassions, that
flatter myself. we mightflatter ourselves .
que t u t e fiat tasses, that thou que vous vous flat tassie z , that youmightestflatter thyself. mightflatter yourselves .
qu'il se flat tfit , that he might qu'ile se flat tasseut , that theyflatter himself. mightflatter themselves.
Present Infinitive se flatter, toflatter one ’
s self.Present Participle se flattant , flattering o ne
’s self.
Past Participle flatté , fluttered.
2 2
Verbs can be conjugat ed infour ways, viz .
(a) Affirmat ive ly je suis, I am .
(5) N e g at ive ly je ne suis pass, I am not.
(c) Int erro g at ive l SlllS -Je , urn ]
(d) Ne gat ive ly 85 nt e rro g at lv e ly nasure -
Jo pas,am l uot?
F rench Ve rbs C onju g at e d Ne g at ive ly .
Ne pas aim er, not to love.
Present IND ICATIVE (Indicatifprésmt).je n
’
aime pas, I do no t love . nous n'aimons pas, up do not love
.
tu n’
aimas pas, thou dost no t low . vous n'aime z pas, you do not love .
il n'aime pas, he does not love . u ils n
’
aiment pas, they do no t love.
Imperfect (Imparfait).je n
’
aimais pas, I do not love .
tun'aimaispas, thoudidst no t love .
il n'aimait pas, he did not love .
je n'aimai pas , I did not love .
tun’aimaspas, thou didst not love .
il n'aimapas, he did not love .
Future (Futur).
je n almerai pas, I shall, will not nous n’
aimerons pas, we sha ll,love . will not love .
tu n’
airneras pas, thou shalt , w ilt vous n’
aimerwz pas, you shall ,not love . [love wi tl not love . [not love .
il n'aimerapas, he shall, will not ils n
'
aimeront pas , they shall, w ill
l s'r C OND ITIONAL (C ondition'nelpresent).
je n'aimeraispas, I should, would nous n
'
aimerions pas , we should.not low . [wouldst not love . would notW e . [wouldnot love .
tu n’
aimerais pas , thou shouldst, vous n'aimeriez pas, you should,
il n’
aimerait pas, he should, would ils n’
aimeraient pas, they should,not love . would not love .
IMP E RATIVEn'aime pas, do not love, n
'aimons pas , let us not love ,
n’
aim e z pas, do not love .
Present SUBJUNcrN E
que je n armé pas, tha t Imay not que nous n'aimions pas,
[mayest not love . may not love. [may not love .
que tu n’aimas pas, that thou que vous n
’
aimiez pas, that you
qu'il n
’
aime pas, that he may qu’
ila n'aiment pas, that theymay
not love . not love .
Imperfectqueje n almaase pas, that Im ight que nousn
’
aimassionspas, tha twenot love . [mightest no t love . might not love. [might not love .
que tu n’
aimasses pas, that thou que vous n'aimassiez pas, that you
qu'il n
’
aimat pas, that he might qu’
ila n’
aimassent pas, tha t theynot love. m ight not love .
Present INF INITIVE (Infinittfprefisent) ne pas aimer, not to love .Present Part iciple (Pafl icipe present) n
’
aimant pas, not loving .
Past Participle (Partic ipe pas aimé, not loved .
2 4
Irre g ular and D efe ct iv e V erbs .
F IRST G ROU P.
This group consists ofall irregular verbs which.
form their
derivative tenses in accordance with the rules given for theformation oftenses. Ve rbs, com ounds ofothe rs, are only givenwhen they are not conjugate d li { e them .
PR IMITIVE TENS E S .
Pres ent Present Past PAR
Inrrxm vn. Pam-
re ru n rrcrrnn.
bouillir; to boil houillaut bouilli
choir, tofallcouvrir, to cover
dormir, to sleepforfaire , toforfeitfuir, to shun, fleegésir, to lieissir, to issue
mentir, to lie
offrir, to oflerou
‘
ir, to hem
ouvrir, to open ouvrant ouvert
part ir. to d epart partant part i
repentir (se ), to re se repentant repenti
pent
toproject saillant saillisentir, tofeel sentant sent i
servir, to serve servant servi
sortir, to go out sortant sort isoufl
’
rir, to safer soufl'
ert
tressailir, to start tressaillant t l‘essaillivétir, to clothe vétant vetu
pleuvoir, to rain pleuvant plusurseoir, to reprieve sursisabsoudre, to absolve absolvant
bat tre , a beat bat tautbraire , to bray
'
bruire, to rustleclore , to close closconclure, to con concluant conclue lude
Present Past
IND IC ATIVE D s smrra.
e bone 9 bouillis
c th is
a conclus
Saillir in the sense ofto spring out, to stream is regular.
2 5
PR IMITIVE TENS E S .
Past PAR Present Past'riera Inniou rvn D e rrmrn
conduire to conduisant conduit e conduis e conduisiscoa-drwt
confire , to pickle , confisant confit e confis e confis
preserve
to nnaissant connu e connais e connus
coudre , to sew
craindre ( 1), tofearcroire , to believe croyant
croitre , to grow croissant
écrire , to write écrivant
exclure , to exclude excluant
frire , tofrylire
, to read Iisant
luire , to shinemaudire , to curse maudissant
médire , to slandermédisant
me ttre , to put mettant
moudre , to gn‘
nd moulant
naitre , to be born naissant
nuire , to hurt
plaire , to please to plaisant
résoudre , to resolve résolvant
rire , to laugh riant
rompre , to break rompant
sourdre , to springsuffire , to sufi ce suffisantsuivre , tofollow suivant
taire (se), to be se taisant
silent
t istre , to weave
t raire , to milk trayant
vaincre , to conquer vainquant
vivre , to live vivant
All verbs ending in uire , except bru'
t'
re, luire and navire, are
conjugat ed like conduire.
All verbs ending in attre, except M itre, are conjugat ed likeconna'llre .
(I) All verbs ending in c indre, eirzdre and cendre, are irregular,and must be conjugated like craindre .
2 6
IR R E G U L AR AND
S E C O N D
This group consists ofthe irregular verbs which do not form all
Norse. I . All verbs form their Imperfect ofthe Subjunctive regularlyfrom the PastDefinite . Savoir, to know, and avoir, to have , are the only one s in which th eImperfe cts ofthe lndicativeje savais,j'avats are not formed regularlyfrom thePresent Participle .
PR IMITIVE TENS E S .
aller, to go allant je vais
envoyer, to send envoyant envoyé’
envoie’
envoyai
acquérir, to acquire acquérant’
acquiers
courir, to run courant couru e cours e courus
cueillir, to gather cueillant e cueille e cueillis
'
e feux or1 dd J1a. llll‘, tofa faillant
Je faulkse faillis
mourir, to dieourant e meurs e mourns
t enir, to hold enent e tiens e tins
venir, to come enant venu e viens e vins
déchoir, to decay, to
decline
échoir, tofall due
falloir, to be necessary
mouvoir, to move
pouvoir, to be able
pourvoir, toprovide
prévaloir, to prevail
prévoir, toforesee
's'asseoir, to sit
savoir,to know
Em ir, tofi t
échéant
mouvant
pouvant
pourvoyant
prévalan t
prévoyant
s’
asseyant
sachant
2 8
PARTIC IPLE
déchu
pourvu
prevalu
S E C O N D
je déchois
il échoit
ilfaut
je meus
je pourvois
je prévaux
je prévois
je m’
assieds
ii Sied
je déchus
il échut
ilfallut
je mus
je pourvus
je prévalus
je prévis
je m’
assis
Asseo ir ls also conjugat ed more re gularly , its primitive tenses being assoyant , asst-s,)
‘
assois, J‘
ussis
2 9
G R O U P C ontinued.
D E R IVATIVE TENSE S .
PRE SENT IND ICATIVE : Je déchois, tu déchois, il déchoit ; nous déchoyoue ,vous déchoyez , ils déchoient . — FUTURE Je décherrai, tu décherras,
&c .
C OND ITIONAL Je décherrais. tu déchcrrais, &c .—PR EsENT SUBJUNC TIVE :
Que je déchoie , que tu déchoies, qu’
il déchoie , que vous de‘
choyions, q ue
vous déchoyiez , qu’
ils déchoient.
FUTURE : ll échel'ra.—C OND ITIONAL: Il échermit . PRESENT SUBJUNoTW E
Qu’
il echore .
FUTURE : Ilfaudra.—C OND ITIONAL Ilfaud1‘ait .
—PRESENT SU BJUNUTIVEQu
'
ilfaille .
PRE SENT IND ICATIVE :Jemeus, tu mcus, ilmeat , nousmout ons, vousmouvez ,11s meuvent .
—PRE SENT SUBJU NC TW E : Que je meuve , que tnmeuves, qu’
il
m euve , q ue nous mouvions, que vous mouviez , gu’
ils meuvent .
PRE SENT IND ICATIVE : Je peux orje puis, tu p eux, il veut, nous pouvons,vous pouvez , ils peuvent
- FU TU R L : Je pourrai, tu pourras, &c.— C OND I
TIONAL : Je pourrais, tn pourrais, &c .— PR E SENT SUBJUNC TIVE : Que je
puisse , que tu puisses, &c.
FUTURE : Je pourvoirai.— C OND ITIONAL Je pourvoirais.
FUTURE "Je prévaudrai. —C OND ITIONAL Jc prévaudrais. No Imperative .PRE SENT SUBJUNC TIVE : Que je prevale .
FUTURE Jc pl‘éVOll'ai. — C OND ITIONAL Je prévoirais.
PR E S ENT IND IC ATIVE : Je,m
’
assieds, tu t’
assieds, il s’
assied ; nous nous
asseyons, vous vous asseyez , .ils s
’
asseient. — F UTURE : Je m’
assiérai, t n
lt
’
nssiéras, &c . , also, je m’
asse ierai, tu_
t’
asseieras, &c .—C ONDIT10NAL : Je
m'assiérais, tn t
’
assiérais, &c also, je m'
asseierais, tu t'
asseierais, &c.
Pulaa r IND ICA’
l‘
lVE Je suis, tu sais, il suit nous savons, vous savez , ils
savent .—IMPERF E C T : Jc savais, tn savais, &c .—FUTURE : Je saurai
,in
sauras, &c .— C OND ITIONAL : Je saurais, tu saurais, ao. - e snu rv s :
Sache , sachons, sachez .
PRE SENT IND IC ATIVE : Il Sied, ils Sie ent . — IMPE R F E0T: Il seyait , ils seyaient .— F U '
1‘
U R E ll siéra, ils Siéront .- C OND ITIONAL Il siérait , ils siéraient . ~
PR ESENT SUBJUNC TIVE : Qu’i i sle e , qu
’
ils Siech t .
Present
valoir to be“
worth
von‘
, to see
or to wish
bo‘
ire, to drink
30
PresentPAi-m C IPEE .
voulant
PresentIND ICATI'VE .
je prends
Past
D E F ]NLTR.
je valus
32
G ov e rnm ent ofV e rbs .
L IST OF VE RBS WHIC H G OVE RN TH E PRE POS ITION de.
absoudre,to ( tbs/771m.
s’
abst enir,to absta infrom
accuser, to accuse ofachever
, tofin ish toeffect or, to afloat to
S’
alfl ig er, to be grieved at
ambitionner, to be ambit ious to
appartenir, to belong to
appréhender, to apprehend to
avertir, to warn to
S’
aviser, to bot/i iuk one’
s selfofavoir coutume , to be used to
blfim er, to blam eforbrfiler, to long tocesser
,to cease to
se chagriner, to vex one’s self
charg er, to charge to
commander,to command
conjurer, to conjure tocons e iller, to advise to
se cont e nt e r, to be contented with
convuincre , to convince
c onvenir,to ag ree to
re indre,tofra r to
decider,to decide
<lecou1'ag er, to discourage
daig ner, to did t in
te ndre , toforbid toiléfier, to defy tolég outer, to disgustlemander, to ask to
se dépécher, to hasten to
se désaccoutumer, to disaccustom
one'
s selfdésespérer, to despair ofse de
'
shabituer, to lose the habit ofse désist e r, to desist
détourner, to de ter
difi'
érer, to defer todire
, to tell to
discontinuer, to discontinue to
disconvenir, to d isagree to
dispenser, to disp ense w ith
dissuader, to dissuadefromécrire , towrite to
s’
e iforcer, to endeavour tos
’
effrayer, tofrighten at
empécher, to prevent tos'empresser de , to hasten to
enjoindre , to enjoin tos
’
ennuyer, to get tired .
entreprendre , to undertake toessayer, to try to
s'étonner, to wonder at
étre charmé , to be delighted at
etre surpris, to be surp rised toé trc a m t , to be temp ted toévit-er
,to avoid to
excuser, to excuse to
exempt er, to exemp tfromfeimlre , tofeign tofélicit er, to congratulate uponfinir
, tofin ish tose flat t er, toflatter one
’
s selfforfrémir
,to shudder
se g end er, to beware ofgaguer, to ga in
se g lorifier, to glory in
gronder, to scoldforse hater
,to hasten to
s’
imaginer, to imag ine tos'
impatient e r, to grow impatientjurer
, to swear
s'indigner, to grow indignant
se las'
ser, to grow tired
tofa il tomédit er
,to meditate
se méler. to meddle withm enac er
, to th reaten to
mérit er, to deserve to
se moquer, to laugh at
nég lig er, to neg lect tooffrir
, to ojor tooblig er, to oblige toobt enir
,to obtain
s'ofl
‘
enser, to be offended a
Jme t tre . to om it toordonner to order tooublier
,toforg e t to
pardonner, toforgivefor
parier, to bet
parler, to talk ofperm et tre
,to allow
pe l’
suader, to persuade tose piquerdo, topre tend to
plaindre , to pityforprescrire , to prescri be to
presser, to urge to
prier, to request to
priver, to deprive
professer, toprofessproje ter, to projectpromet tre , to pro mise to
proposer, to propose tore comm ender, to recommendredout er
, to drea d
refuser, to refuse to
regret ter, to regret tose rappeler, recollect
se réjouir, to rejoice to
VE R BS WH IC H G OVE RNs
’
abaisser, to stoop to
aboutir, to lead to [selftos
’
accoutumer, to accustom one’
s
admet tre , to admit to
s’adonner, to addict one
's selfto
aider,to he lp to
aimer, to like to
s’
amuser, to amuse one’
s selfwithanimer, to anima te to
s’appliquer, to apply one
’
s selfa prendre , to learn to
s appréter, to prepare one'
s selftos
’
arréter, to stop at
aspirer, to aspire to
s’
at tendre , to expect to
aut oriser, to authorise
avoir,to have to
balancer, to hesitate to
se borner,to limit one
’
s selftochercher, to seek to
comm encer, to begin to
condamner, to cond emn to
consent ir, to consent to
consist er, to consist to
to continue to
contraindre , to compel to
cont l'ibuer, to contribute to
se décidera, tomakeup one’
smind to
demanderfi ), to ask to
reme rc ic l',to thankfor
se repentir, to repentrépriluande r, to reprove
reprendre , to elud e
repl o cher, to reproachforrésoudre . to resolve to
rim,to laugh a
!
risquer, to risk to
rough ,to blush to
sommol'
,to summ on
se soucier, to care or
soufi'
rir,to sufi er
soupconner, to suspect
se souvenir, to to
sugg érer, to suggest to
supplier, to entreat to
tficher, to endeavour to
t ent er, to tempttremble l‘
,to tremble at
se vant er,to boast of
THE PRE POSITION a.
dépenser, to spend at
dest iner,to destine to
se dét erminer, to determine onse dévouer, to devote one
’
s se lftose disposer, to dispose one
's selfto
donner, to give to
employer, to employ toencourager, to encourage toengag er, to induce to
enhardir, -to embolden to
enseigner, to teach
s’
étudier, toprepare one’
s selftoétre , to be
s’
évertuer, to exert one’
s selftoexceller, to excel to
excit er,to excite to
exercer, to exercise to
exhort er, to exhort to
exposer, to expose to
forcer, to oblige to
former, to tra in uphabituer, to accustom to
se hasarder, to venture
hésiter,to hesitate to
induire , to induce
invit er, to invite to
se me t tre , to se t atmontrer, to show to
to oblige to
34
s’
obst iner, to persist in
to occupy one's self
parvenir, to succeed in
penser, to think ofperdre , to lose to
persévérer, to persevere in
persist er, to p ersist in
se plaire , to de light in
port e r, to prompt
pousser, to excite to
préparer, to prepare to
prét endre , to asp ire to
provoquer, to incite to
recomm encer,to brg in aga in to
se refuser, to refuse to
LIST or VE RBS WHIC H RE QU IR E NO PRE POSITION BEF ORE TH E
INF INITIVE WH IcH FOLLOW S THEM.
aimermieux, to like better
to go
avoir bean,to be in vain
avouer, to own
compt er, to intend
confe sser, to confessdaigner, to dcign
déclarer, to declare
déposer, to depose
désirer, to wish
de vo ir, to owe
e nt endre , to hear
envoyer, to send more
espérer, to hope
faillir. tofailfaire
, to cause
fallo ir, to be necessarys'im zxg incr, to l
'
llt t tg t lt e
In exam ining the pre ceding lists, the student w ill notice how
frequently French verbs govern a preposit ion other than the onewhich is the translation ofthe p 1 e position used in English .
The i efore it will be ne ce ssary to study the se lists very care iully,and to refe r to them e ve ry t im e the least doubt arises on thatve ry important subj-eat .
Vc 1bs ma1ked with an ast erisk in these lists some t imes take de,and so 111 t t 1 1 1e s
a,according t o euphony : but do must be used in the passive
Jc suis oblige de faire ce la, I am obliged to do that
( 1) In the meaning ofto be about to do some th ing . Ex. je vais sortir,Iam going out.
( 1) Venir, in the m eaning ofto havejust done
, governs th e proposit ion de .
E x. je viens ( le rentrer, I have just re turned.
renoncer, to renounce to
répugner, to be repugnant at
se résigner, to be resigned to
se résoudre, to resolve to
rester, to rema in to
réussir, to succeed in
servir, to serve to
song er, to think ofse soume t tre , to submit
to
to postpone , to longto be sufficie nt
travailler, to work to
t endre , to tend to
t enir, to wish
viser, to aim at
laisser,to le t
nier,to deny
oser, to dare
paraitre , to appear
penser, to expect
pouvoir, to be able
préférer, to prefi rprét endre , topre tend
savoir, to know
sembler,to seem
souhait er,to w ish
sout enir, to m ainta in
valoirmieux, to be worth
venir(I), to comevoir
,to see
voler,to hasten
vou101r to be willing
HOSSFELD’
S EDUCATIONAL WORKS.
G R AM M A R S .
HOSSFELD ’S FR ENC H G RAMMAR ,368 pag es, C loth
G E RMAN do . 376
SPANISH do . 360
ITALIAN do . 372
Keys to above , 1/ each.
R E A D E R S .
HOSSFELD’
S MANUAL OF FRENCH C ONVERSATIONSSE LEC T G E RMAN STOR IESNEW SPANISH R EADE R, withfoot -notes
G ERMAN SPANISH READER . with copious
foot not esITALIAN READER by Dr C . Scorn “
N. HE INEMANN’
8 NEW G ERMAN READER : ShiningLights ofModern G ermany, with copiousfoot not es
C O R R E S P O N D E N T S .
POLYG LOT C ORRESPONDENT, 840 pag es, C loth , new edition
ENG L ISH -FRENC H COR RESPONDENT, 32 0 pag es, C loth
FRENC H- ENG LISH do . 100
ENG L ISH -G ERMAN do .
ENG LISH -SPANISH do .
G ERMAN - SPANISH do .
H O S S F E L D’
S
FR ENCH DIC TIONARY (Eng lish-French and French- English)Single Vols.
G ERMAN DIC TIONARY (English—G erman and G erman - Eng . )Single Vols.
SPANISH DICTIONARY (English- Spanish and Spanish-Eng . )
ITALIAN do. (English-Italian andItalian-English)
H INTS ON LANG UAG E ,by R . J. ISNAR D
CATALOG UE OF HOSSFELD'S
S panish, jfrencb, G erman StalianWorks on application to any Bookseller, or to
H IR SC HFELD BR OS ,
BREAMS BU ILDING S, FETTE R LANE , LONDON, E .C .
CATALOGUE.
OF HOSSFELO'S EDUCATIONAL PUBLICA
F o r L e arn ing F R E N C H .
THE ENGLISH FRETCH GRAMMAR , by H OSSFE LD’
s NEW MFTH OD , arian
for Schoo ls, C lasses, and f0 1 Private Lessons boKEY TO THE ABOVE
HOSSFELD ’S ADVANCED FR ENCH G RAMMAR
FR ENCH EXE R CISES.
IDIOMS,by Professors LALLEMAND and ANTOINE
THE CONJUGATION OF THE FR ENCH R EGULAR Cc IR REGULAR VERBS
ENGLISH-FRENCH COMMER C IAL CORRESPONDENT : or H ow to C om;any Letter required e ithei in French or English (New Edition) bo
POLYGLOT CORRE SPONDENT (English, French, G erman and Spanish)ENGLISH-FRENCH DICTIONARY o
FRENCH ENGLISH DITTO dTHE TWO DICTIONAR IES IN ONEVOL. dTWENTY-SIX ENGLISH FRENCH EXER C ISE
IBOOKS, for C lasses or Priv
Lessons,for Learning French in 2 6 Lessons
KEYS AND TASKS TO DITTO
xenon
G E R M AN .
SSF ELD'
s NEW METH OD arran
bo
KEY TO THE ABOVE
THE CONJUGATION OF G ERMAN,REGULAR IRR E GULAR VERBS
ENGLISH- GERMAN C OMMER C IAL COR RE SPONDENT : or H ow to C ompany Let t er required e ither in G erman or E ng lish bou
ENGLISH- G ERMAN DICTIONARY . d
GERMAN ENGLISH D ICTIONAR Y dTHE TWO DICTIONAR IES IN ONE VOL. (I
MER G EL’S GERMAN EXER C ISE S AND IDIOMSG EI
‘MAN R EADER : Shining Lights ofModern G ermany , WithC opious NcSELECT GERMAN STORIES , with C hapt er on Pronunciat ion
o r L e arning S PA N IS H .
THE ENGLISH-SPANISH G RAMMAR , by H ose LD's NEW METH OD, arran
for Schopls, C lasse s, and i 1r Privat e Lessons bow.
KEY TO THE ABOVE d(l HE CONJUGATION OF THE S .ANISH RE GULAR 85 IR RE GULAR VERB'eNGLISH - SPANlSH 00111 11112 110 in CORR ESPONDENT . or H ow to comp
any Le t ter required, eithbr in Spanish or . bov
ENGLISH- SPANISH SPANISH-ENG LISH DICTIONAR Y, in one VOL .
Dit to Dit t o D1t t » by VELAZ QI
SPANISH R EADER : A New G raduat ed R eader, with Foot not es
GERMAN- SPANISH READER : AG raduat ed R eaderwith copious Foot not es, _SPANISH DInLOGUE S, withfull vocabularies and C hapter on Pronunciation
F o r L e arn ing IT A L IAN .
THE ENGLISH- ITALIAN GRAMMAR , by HOSSF E LD’
s NEW ME rH oD errangfor Schools, C lasses, andfor Privat e Lessons bou
KEY TO THE ABOVE d
ITALIAN RE GULAR IRRE GULAR VERBi
N-ENG LISH DICTIONARY, in one vol.rONARY (New Edition), two vols.
